GE Fanuc Automationstar-circuit.com/article/pdf/F15_OPERATION_Manual.pdf · GE Fanuc Automation ......

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 – Model Bfor Machining Center

Operator's Manual (Operation)

GFZ-62564E-1/02 December 1996

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this Publication

Warning

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, aWarning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

NoteNotes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described hereinwhich are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumesno obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

s–1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautionsbe observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in thissection assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thusmay not be applicable to certain CNC units.Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual sup-plied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control theoperation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevantmanual supplied by the machine tool builder.

Contents

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–62564E–1/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s–2

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Notethoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

� Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

B–62564E–1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s–3

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING

1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performinga trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function orby operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm thecorrect operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possiblycausing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behavingunexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to theuser.

3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for eachmachine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with theintended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximumallowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behaveunexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to theuser.

4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount ofcompensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behavingunexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to theuser.

5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory–set. Usually, there is not need to changethem. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure thatyou fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change.Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possiblycausing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel untilthe position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations.Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting themachine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.

7. The operator’s manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overalldescription of the machine’s functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optionalfunctions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions describedin the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specificationof the machine if in doubt.


s–4

WARNING

8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. Whenusing such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details oftheir use and any related cautions.

NOTE

Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently,however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of errorrecovery.To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backupall vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.


s–5

3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TOPROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting toperform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefullysuch that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING

1. Coordinate system setting

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as aresult of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command.Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causeinjury to the user.

2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation

When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movementbetween the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performingprogramming.Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage thetool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

3. Function involving a rotation axis

When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal–direction (perpendicular)control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming mayresult in the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causesthe chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely.Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury tothe user.

4. Inch/metric conversion

Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data suchas the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine,therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform anoperation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,or cause injury to the user.

5. Constant surface speed control

When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiececoordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessaryto specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectlymay damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.


s–6

WARNING

6. Stroke check

After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Strokecheck is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that whenstroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possiblydamaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

7. Tool post interference check

A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automaticoperation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interferencecheck cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causinginjury to the user.After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automaticoperation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.

8. Absolute/incremental mode

If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machinemay behave unexpectedly.

9. Plane selection

If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a cannedcycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respectivefunctions for details.

10. Torque limit skip

Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specifiedwithout the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed withoutperforming a skip.

11. Programmable mirror image

Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image isenabled.

12. Compensation function

If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return commandis issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting inthe unexpected behavior of the machine.Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation functionmode.


s–7

4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Beforeattempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manualcarefully, such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING

1. Manual operation

When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool andworkpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specifiedcorrectly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, theworkpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

2. Manual reference position return

After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If themachine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behaveunexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return isperformed.An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, theworkpiece, or cause injury to the user.

3. Manual numeric command

When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool andworkpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specifiedcorrectly, and that the entered values are valid.Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool,the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

4. Manual handle feed

In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causesthe tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, orcause injury to the user.

5. Disabled override

If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigidtapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, themachine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

6. Origin/preset operation

Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under thecontrol of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damagingthe tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.


s–8

WARNING

7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinatesystem. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm thecoordinate system carefully.If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for anyshift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possiblydamaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

8. Software operator’s panel and menu switches

Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel,it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator’s panel, such as modechange, override value change, and jog feed commands.Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behaveunexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injuryto the user.

9. Manual intervention

If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool pathmay vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manualintervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, andabsolute/incremental command mode.

10. Feed hold, override, and single block

The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macrosystem variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.

11. Dry run

Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machineoperates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Notethat the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.

12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode

Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or toolnose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interruptin automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attentionto the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptionsof the corresponding functions for details.

13. Program editing

If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion,or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the controlof that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machiningprogram while it is in use.


s–9

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING

1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the poweron and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety andmaintenance training may perform this work.When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked andfitted with an insulating cover).Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shockhazard.

NOTE

The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data suchas programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’spanel or CRT screen.When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, thecontents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details ofthe battery replacement procedure.


s–10

WARNING

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the poweron and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety andmaintenance training may perform this work.When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked andfitted with an insulating cover).Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shockhazard.

NOTE

The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’spanel or CRT screen.When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, theabsolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details ofthe battery replacement procedure.


s–11

WARNING

3. Fuse replacement

For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operator’s manual orprogramming manual describes the fuse replacement procedure.Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of theblown fuse.For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenancetraining may perform this work.When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shockhazard.

B–62564E–1/02 PREFACE

p–1

PREFACE

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB

S i 1FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB

Series 15FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*) 15MEK

Series 15

FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*) 15MEL

FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB Series 150

(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MEL–MODEL B–4 is a software–fixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axesswitchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers.Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL.

� Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)

� Helical interpolation B

� Plane switching

� Designation direction tool length compensation

� 2 axes electric gear box

� Manual interruption of 3–dimensional coordinate system conversion

� 3–dimensional cutter compensation

� Trouble diagnosis guidance

� OSI/ETHERNET function

� High–precision contour control using RISC

� Macro compiler (self compile function)

� MMC–III, MMC–IV

� Smooth interpolation

� Connecting for personal computer by high–speed serial–bus

B–62564E–1/02PREFACE

p–2

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).

Table Related Manuals

Manual Name SpecificationNumber

FANUC Series 15–TB/TFBTTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

FANUC Series 15/150–MB DESCRIPTIONS B–62082E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B–62073E

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B–62073E–1

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming)

B–62554E

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation)

B–62554E–1

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming)

B–62564E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation)

B–62564E–1 *

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–62560E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62075E

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Suppelement for Remote Buffer) B–62072E–1

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler /Macro Executer)

B–62073E–2

FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Multi–Teaching Function) B–62083E–1

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61013E

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863E

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61013E–2

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863E–1

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language – Tool Management Library)

B–61013E–4

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FORMACHINING CENTER (Series 15–MFMFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B–61263E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FORMACHINING CENTER (Series 15–MF/MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61264E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE(Series 15–TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61234E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE(Series 15–TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61804E–2

c–1

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE p–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. OPERATION1. INTRODUCTION 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Setting and Display Unit 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 MDI keyboard 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed 29. . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.3 Key input and input buffer 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.5 Warning message 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.6 Soft key display 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.8 Changing soft keys 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.9 Outline of operations 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.10 Function selection keys 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.11 Chapter selection keys 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.12 Operation selection keys 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.13 Operation guidance keys 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.14 Changing language of the display 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key) 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Machine Operator’s Panel 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Tape Reader 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 Tape reader without reels 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2 Tape reader with reels 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.3 Portable tape reader 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 FANUC PPR 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. POWER ON/OFF 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. MANUAL OPERATION 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Manual Reference Position Return 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Manual Continuous Feed 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Incremental Feed 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Manual Handle Feed 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 Manual Numeric Command 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9 Three–Dimensional Handle Feed 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–2

4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool 86. . . . . . . .

4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.6 Notes on three–dimensional handle feed 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance 89. . . .

4.10 Manual Interruption Function for Three–Dimensional Coordinate Conversion 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Interruption 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Operation Mode 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.3 MDI operation 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2 Searching for a program by name 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.3 Rewinding a program 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Starting Automatic Operation 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Executing Automatic Operation 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1 Program stop (M00) 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.2 Optional stop (M01) 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30) 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.4 Feed hold 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.5 Reset 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.6 Single–block stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers 100. . . . . .

5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.1 Program re–start 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.3 Block restart 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.5 Retrace 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8 Override Playback 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. TEST OPERATION 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 All Axes Machine Lock 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Auxiliary Function Lock 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Dry Run 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Single Block 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.1 Modes 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.2 Operation 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–3

6.6.3 Display 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.4 Note 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 Emergency Stop 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Overtravel 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Pre–Travel Stroke Limit Check Function 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 Registering Part Programs 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2.1 Registering a part program from the tape 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2.2 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.3 Deleting Part Programs 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4 Editing Part Programs 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.1 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.2 Repeat search 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.3 Editing part programs 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5 MULTI–EDIT FUNCTION 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5.1 Operation and Display Transition 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5.2 Remarks 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6 Collating Programs 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.7 Part Program Output 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.8 Background Editing 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.9 Number of Programs that can be Registered 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.10 Length of Part Program Storage 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.11 Extended Part Program Editing 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.11.1 Copying and moving a program 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.11.2 Merging programs (MERGE) 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.11.3 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE) 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.11.4 Automatically inserting sequence numbers 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.12 Playback 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.13 Format Guidance 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.13.1 NC format guidance 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.13.2 Format guidance with figure 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.14 Program Encryption 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.15 Time Stamp Function 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.16 Simple Conversational Programming 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 Offset Values 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1.1 Display and setting 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Settings 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 Custom Macro Variables 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–4

10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6 Parameters 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.8 Data Protection Key 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.9 Measuring the Tool Length 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.11 Menu Switch 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12 Tool Life Management Data 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.4 Clearing execution data 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.5 Display format of tool life data 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.6 Tool change signal 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.8 New tool selection signal 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.9 Tool skip signal 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.12.10 Expanded tool life management 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.13 Software Operator’s Panel 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.14.2 Setting tool data 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen 263. . . . . . . . . . .

10.16.1 Servo screens 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.16.2 Spindle screens 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.16.3 Operations 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.17.1 Subscreen states 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.17.2 Subscreen operations 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.17.4 Subscreen operations 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.18.2 Details of Screens 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.18.3 Notes 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.18.4 Help Message 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19 Screen for Specifying High–Speed and High–Precision Machining 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19.1 Screen configuration 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19.2 Setting screen 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19.3 Tuning screen 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.20 M Code Group Function 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–5

10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been Executed 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.21.1 Screen Selection 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.21.2 Operation method 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. DISPLAY 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 Program Display 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1.1 Execution program and program directory 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1.2 Program check screens 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1.3 Group–by–group program directory display and punch–out 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2 Status Display 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3 Current Position Display 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3.1 Current–position screens 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3.2 Presetting the current position display 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3.3 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.4 Operator Message Display 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.5 Alarm Message Display 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6 Graphic Display 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6.1 Selecting the graphic screen 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6.2 Setting the graphic parameters 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6.3 Drawing a tool path 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.7 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.8 Directory of Floppy Disk Files 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.9 Load Meter Display 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.11 Clock 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12 Background Graphic Display 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.1 Overview 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.2 Setting of graphic parameters 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.3 Procedure for setting graphic parameters 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.4 Drawing procedure 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.5 Figure to be drawn 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.6 Start coordinates and position 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.7 Drawing position after the start of drawing 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.8 Graphic shift 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.9 Graphic enlargement 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.1 Screens 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.2 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.3 Starting or terminating data sampling 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.4 Waveform display 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–6

11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveform 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13.7 Waveform data input/output 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.14 Help Function 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.14.1 Operation 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.14.2 Help window states 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15 Operation History 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15.1 Operation history 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15.2 Selecting signals 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15.3 Alarm history 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15.4 Restrictions 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1 Small CRT/MDI Panel 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3 Screen Saver Function 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. DATA OUTPUT 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.1 Tool Offsets 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2 Parameters 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.4 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.1 What is a File 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.2 File Search–Out 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3 Data Output Operation 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3.1 CNC program output 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3.2 Offset data output 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3.3 CNC parameter output 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4 Data Input Operation 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4.1 CNC program input 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4.2 Offset data input 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4.3 CNC parameter input 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.5 File Deletion 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.6 Precautions 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.6.1 Request for cassette replacement 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.6.2 Adaptor lamp conditions 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.7 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.8 Expanded File Control Function 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name 402. . .

14.8.2 Two–drive floppy cassette control 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.8.3 Soft key operations 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.8.4 Notes 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.1 Initial Setting at Power–On 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–7

15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3 Alarm 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. AXIS CONTROL 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1 Axis Control by the PMC 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2 Mirror Image Function 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

II. MAINTENANCE1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 Adjusting the Photo–Amplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the Self–Standing Cabinet Only) 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. REPLACING A FUSE 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Fuse Specifications 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Fuse Mounting Position 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1 Power unit 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2 Connection unit 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. REPLACING BATTERIES 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. TROUBLESHOOTING 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Symptom and Investigation 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and Interface 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 CNC Status Indication 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.2 Description of internal selection 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX

APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET 439. . .

APPENDIX B. RS–232–C AND RS–422 INTERFACES 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. GENERAL 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. RS–232–C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Names of RS–232–C Interface Signals 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Signal Description of RS–232–C Interface 446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 RS–232–C Interface Transmission Methods 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Connection between RS–232–C Interface and I/O Device 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. RS–422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS 454. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Names of RS–422 Interface Signals 454. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–8

4.2 Explanation of RS–422 Interface Signals 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 RS–422 Interface Transmission Methods 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Connection between RS–422–C Interface and Input/Output Unit 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15) 462. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. OPERATION

B–62564E–1/02 1. INTRODUCTION

– 3 –

1. INTRODUCTION

1) Manual operation

a) Manual reference position return (See Section 4.1)

The memory in the CNC machine tool holds the positional data for setting the machine.

This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordi-narily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position.

Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and push-buttons located on the operator’s panel.

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (a) Manual Reference Position Return

The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.

This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Section 7.1)

b) The tool movement by manual operation

Using operator’s panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved alongeach axis.

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (b) Tool Movement by Manual Operation

B–62564E–1/021. INTRODUCTION

– 4 –

The tool can be moved in the following ways:

i) Manual continuous feed (See Section 4.2)

The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.

ii) Step feed (See Section 4.3)

The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a pushbutton is pressed.

iii) Manual handle feed (See Section 4.4)

By rotating the manual handle,the tool moves by the distance corresponding to the degree of han-dle rotation.

iv) Manual feed at any angle(See Section 4.5)

The tool is moved in any direction on the plane.

v) Manual numeric command(See Section 4.6)

When numeric data is entered from the MDI keyboard, the tool is moved by the distance corre-sponding to the data.

2) Tool movement by programing – Automatic operation (See Section 5)

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (c) Tool Movement by programing

Operating the machine according to a coded program is called automatic operation. Automatic operationsare classified into operations according to tape, memory, and the MDI.

(i) Operation according to tape

� � ��

�� !��

�� !�� !�� !��

The machine can be operated based on a program, while the program is being loaded from the tapereader. This is called the operation according to tape.


– 5 –

(ii) Memory operation

After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the pro-gram instructions. This operation is called memory operation.

� ��

��

Fig. 1 (d) Memory operation

(iii) MDI operation

After the program is entered, as an command group, from the MDI keyboard, the machine can be runaccording to the program. This operation is called MDI operation.

� ��

��

Fig. 1 (e) MDI Operation


– 6 –

3) Automatic operation

(i) Program selection

Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece.If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program num-ber (See 5.2.1).

��

��

� �� #��

��

� �� #��

��

� �� #��

#"��"�� "��

� �� #�� !��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (f) Program Selection for Automatic Operation

(ii) Start and stop (See Section 5.3 to 5.5)

Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed holdor reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or programtermination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. When one pro-cess machining is completed, automatic operation stops.

$�� !"� " ��#�� !"� "

#"��"�� "��

��#�� !"�� !�"

� �� !"�� "�� #!��

�$� � ��

Fig. 1 (g) Start and Stop for Automatic Operation


– 7 –

(iii) Restarting machining

Machining a workpiece can be stopped midway and restarted after several days’ holiday. Also, if thetool is broken during machining, machining can be restarted after the tool is replaced.

��

��

��

��

��

��

(iv) Handle interruption (See Section 5.8)

While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotat-ing the manual handle.

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (h) Handle Interruption for Automatic Operation


– 8 –

4) Program test (See Chapter 6)

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the createdprogram can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machineactually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine).

a) Check by running

i) Dry run (See Section 6.4)

��

��

��#�� !�� $�� %� ��#��!�� !�� !�� !� !�� !�� #��!� ��!�� " ��!�� !�� !��

Fig. 1 (i) Dry Run

ii) Feedrate override

��

�� !�� %��

�� !�� !�� !��#��

�� !�� %� ��!�� !�� !��

Fig. 1 (j) Feedrate Override


– 9 –

iii) Single block (See Section 6.5)

�!��

��

��

�%�� !��!

�%�� !��!

�%�� !��!

�%�� !��!

�� !�� %�� !��!� �" ��"!!�� !�� !�� $��"!� � �� !�� !�� !�� %� �� !�� %�� !��!� �� !�� !��$��"!� � !�� $!� ��!�� !�� !�� !��

�!�� !��

Fig. 1 (k) Single Block

b) How to view the position display change without running the machine

i) Machine lock (See Sections 6.1 and 6.2)

��

��

��

��

�� " �� %� �� #��!

�� !�� !�� %� !�� !�� % � �� !�� $� � ��

Fig. 1 (l) Machine Lock

ii) Auxiliary function lock (See Section 6.3)

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lockmode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc.) are disabled.


– 10 –

5) Part program editing (See Section 9)

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the CRT/MDIpanel.

This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit function.

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (m) Part Program Editing

6) Data display/setting (See Section 10.10 and 10.2)

Data stored in NC memory can be displayed and corrected via the CRT/MDI screen.

��

��

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (n) Data Display/Setting


– 11 –

i) Offset value (See Section 10.1)

The tool has the tool dimension (length, diameter). When a workpiece is machined, the tool movementroute depends on the tool dimensions.

By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes thatpermit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offsetvalue.

��&&�!�

��%#��)

��$��!� ��)%

�� "$)

��

�""�� %�&� !' ��$� �

�""�� %�&� !' ��$� �

�""�� %�&� !' ��$� �

��" �&$��" #�!%�&�"!

��$�" #�!%�&�"!

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 (o) Offset Value Display/Setting

��!��%��#� �%&� &""�

�!�� &""�

��%�&� (��'�� "�&�� %&� &""�

��%�&� (��'�� "�&�� !�� &""�

Fig. 1 (p) Offset Value


– 12 –

ii) Displaying and setting parameters (10.6)

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines. Forexample, CNC can specify the following:

a) Rapid traverse rate of each axis

b) Whether the position is detected with digital or analog data

Whether reference position return is based on the grid or analog system

The data determining these items are called parameters (see Section 10.5).

The parameters are specific to the machine.

��

�� $

��!!��

�� $

��"!��!��!��

�� !��

��!��!�� !��

�� $

��!��

�� !��#�� !� � �!�� !��

�� !�� !��

�

Fig. 1 (q) Parameter Display/Setting

iii) Displaying and specifying data (see Section 10.3).

��

�� $

��!!��

�� $

��"!��!��!��

�� $

�� #��!

��!�� !��

��!��

�� !��#�� !�

� �!�� !�� $ !��

�� !�� !"�� $ !��

�� !�� !�

�!�� !�� !�⋅⋅⋅

In addition to the parameters, settings for changing the attributes of the machine are provided. Theoperator can set these items if necessary while the machine is operating.

For example, the following settings are provided:

(1) Settings for the area the tool must not approach (stroke check)

(2) Settings for I/O devices

(3) Amount of return and minimum depth of cut in the canned cycle


– 13 –

iv) Data protection key (See Section 10.8).

��%��"� �)&

��

�$��)�"�� '��"�� #$�%�'#%�&� $�"�

��'�� $%#'��'�#"� ��)

�%#'��'�#"��)

��"� &

��$�� %��%

�"$(''�"�� $%#�%�!&

�� !�!#%)

�%#�%�!&��&�'&

��%�!�'�%&��''�"�&

�"��'�"�� '�� %#!� ��"�� %��&'�%��"�� &$��

Fig. 1 (r) Data Protection key

The protection key prevents the programs, offsets, parameters, and settings from being regis-tered, changed, or deleted by mistake.

(v) Menu switches and software operator’s panel (See Section 10.13).

��

��

��

�� &�%��" ��"�� #$�%�'#%�&� $�"�

Turn on and off some of the switches provided for the machine operator’s panel such as <MA-CHINE LOCK>and <SINGLE BLOCK> switches on the CRT screen.


– 14 –

7) Display

�#/%%+� �%50

��

�/,&/!*0 �-%/!1,/�*%00!&%0

�!1!

�!#'(+%� ,-%/!1,/�0� -!+%)

�,,)

�,,)� -,0(1(,+

�-%/!1(+&� #,+$(1(,+

The contents of memory are displayed on the CRT/MDI screen.

The memory contains information on programs, tool position, and suchlike.

(i) Program display (See Section 11.1)

The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled nextand the program list are displayed.

��

�� ⋅� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ⋅

��

� �� ⋅� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ⋅

��

�2//%+1)5� %4%#21%$� -/,&/!*

�/,&/!*0

�'%� #2/0,/� (+$(#!1%0� 1'%�#2//%+1)5� %4%#21%$

),#!1(,+�

�#1(3%� -/,&/!*� +2*"%/

�/,&/!*#,+1%+1

�#1(3%� 0%.2%+#%� +2*"%/

(ii) Displaying the state of the system (See Section 11.2).


– 15 –

⋅⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

�� !� ��

��!��&!� "�� # ��"� !"�"�� "�� !&!"�� "�"�� !!��"��

&�� #"��"�� "��

&�� #�� "��

"�"�� #"��"�� "��

�� "�� !� �!�"�� !"�� !#!�� $�� !�� !��#�� #��

�# �� "��

�# �� "�� #!�� &�� "��

(iii) Current position display (See Section 11.3)

� �

�

&

%

�� !� �� "�!&!"��

�

�

�

The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. The distance from the currentposition to the target position can also be displayed.


– 16 –

(iv) Displaying operator messages (See Section 11.4).

��

�� + *""'

�"&(*/

�"++�#"�

�"++�#"�

�"++�#"� �

�"++�#"� !$+)%�/� +$#'�%

When the system must notify the operator of necessary information during machining, the system dis-plays the message preset in memory.

(v) Displaying alarms (See Section 11.5).

•

•

•

•

•

•

�� 0��

��

⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅

�� ⋅ ⋅ ⋅�� ⋅ ⋅

�� + *""'

�**(*� (!"+

�(!" �"�'$'#

�)"*�,(*�+� &�'-�%

�%�*&� �(��)*(#*�&�+",,$'#��%�*&

�"*.(� �%�*&

�"&(*/� �%�*&

If a failure occurs while the machine is operating, the system displays the corresponding error codeand alarm message on the CRT screen.

For details of the error codes, see Appendix G in the Operator’s Manual (Programming).


– 17 –

(vi) Displaying the operating times

The system displays the following three operating times on the CRT:

⋅ Value obtained by adding the automatic operating time

The system displays as follows the value obtained by adding the automatic operating time:

Example 10 hours 43 minutes 8 seconds

⋅ Value obtained by adding the cutting time

The system displays the value obtained by adding the time required for the machine to move bycutting feed (linear or circular interpolation).

⋅ General–purpose time display

The system adds and displays the elapsed time while the operating time count signal (an inputsignal) is on. For the type of time displayed, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

These three types of operating times are displayed on the setting screen. For how to display dataon the setting screen, see Section 10.3 in Part III.

(vii) Graphic display (See Section 11.6)

��

Z

X

Z

Z

X

Y

Y

Y

X

��

��

��

��

��

��

The programmed movement of the tool is displayed using three–dimensional data.

Programmed tool movement can be displayed on the following planes:

(1) XY plane

(2) YZ plane

(3) XZ plane

(4) Three dimensional display


– 18 –

8) Data output (See Section 13)

Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette,or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.

��

�

��

��"

��

��

��

��

��!��

��"� ��

��

��

��

��

��"��

�! �� "� ��

Fig. 1 (s) Data Output

B–62564E–1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

– 19 –

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

2.1 Setting and Display Unit

Setting and display units are classified into the following types.:

Type Remarks

9” monochrome CRT/MDI (Small) Fig. 2.1 (a)

9” color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard) Fig. 2.1 (b)

10” PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (c)

10” PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (d)

14” color CRT/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (e)

14” color CRT/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (f)

(a) 9” monochrome CRT/MDI (Small)

↑

OA B C

N G7

XU V W

Y Z 4

FE L @

D H 1SP

PI J

Q

2 3

0–K

5 6

8 9

+ # ,.

?

INPUTCAN

SHIFTPMC

HELP

R

M]

S =EOB( ) &

T[

CNC

AUX → ↓

←

Fig. 2.1 (a) 9” monochrome CRT/MDI (Small)

B–62564E–1/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

– 20 –

(b) 9” color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)

C

↑

! ”A B

/

’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9 POS PROG

D E

I J K

4 5 6

< >O P Q

1 2 3

CAN

[ ]U V W

PAGE

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGEAUX

↑

↓

ON

OFF

POWER

F% &

G H

L; SP

M N

R¥

S T X( )

Y Z

Fig. 2.1 (b) 9” color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)


– 21 –

(c) 10” PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)

↑

! ”A B

/

F% &

H’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9C D E

I J K 4 5 6

L; SP

M N< >

O P Q 1 2 3 CAN MMC

R¥

S T[ ]

U V WPAGE

X( ) @

Y Z

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGE

AUX

↑

↓

ON

OFF

POWER

POS PROG

G

Fig. 2.1 (c) 10” PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)


– 22 –

(d) 10”PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)

C

↑

! ”A B

/

’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9

POS PROG

D E

I J K

4 5 6

< >O P Q

1 2 3

CAN

MMC

[ ]U V W

PAGE

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGE

AUX

↑

↓

ON

OFF

POWER

F% &

H

L; SP

M N

R¥

S T

X( )

Y Z

G

Fig. 2.1(d) 10”PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)


– 23 –

(e) 14”color CRT/MDI (Vertical)

↑

! ”A B

/

F% &

H’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9 POS PROGC D E

I J K 4 5 6

L; SP

M N< >

O P Q 1 2 3 CAN MMC

R¥

S T[ ]

U V WPAGE

X( ) @

Y Z

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGE

AUX

↑

↓

ON

OFF

POWER

G

Fig. 2.1(e) 14”color CRT/MDI (Vertical)


– 24 –

(f) 14”color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)

↑

! ”A B

/

F%

&H

’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9

POS PROG

C

D E

I J K

4 5 6

L; SP

M N

< >

O

P Q

1 2 3

CAN

MMC

R¥

S

T[ ]

U V W

PAGE

X( ) @

Y Z

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGE

AUX

↑

↓

ONOFF

G

Fig. 2.1(f) 14”color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)


– 25 –

2.1.1 MDI keyboard

C

↑

! ”A B

/

’ :

# $

SHIFT

→↓

←

7 8 9 POS PROG

D E

I J K

4 5 6

< >O P Q

1 2 3

CAN

[ ]U V W

PAGE

?

_

EOB

HELP

= ’– 0 ⋅+

PAGEAUX

↑

↓

ON

OFF

POWER

F% &

H

L; SP

M N

R¥

S T X( )

Y Z

�� !;/*:

��;/*:

��;/*:

��85635� 139*<� ;/*:

��&,*� (-&2,*� /*:6

� � -.+7� /*:

�� /*:

�� /*:

��"%<;� /*:

��"!�<� �� !� /*:

��81*5.(&0� /*:6

��*0*7*� /*:

��07*5� /*:�� /*:

��4*5&7.32� 1*28� /*:�� 3+7� /*:6��82(7.32� 1*28� /*:

��$�� 32�3++� '877326

��))5*66� /*:

��!�� ;/*:

�� /*:

�� /*:

�� !;/*:

�� /*:�� #�� /*:

�� !!�� /*:

G


– 26 –

Table 2.1.1 MDI Keyboard functions (1/3)

No. Name Functions

(1) <Power> ON/OFF button Press this button to turn CNC power ON and OFF.

(2) <RESET> key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.

(3) Soft key The soft key has various functions, according to the Ap-plications. The soft key functions are displayed at thebottom of the CRT screen.

(4) Function menu key Pressing this key when the soft keys are not functionselection keys (see Subsection 2.1.9) returns the softkeys to the states of the function selection keys. Press-ing the key when the soft keys are function selectionkeys changes the soft keys to the function selection keysthat do not fit on the screen. (The 9” CRT/MDI panel hasfive soft keys. The 14” CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys.However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some ap-plications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed at theextreme right of the bottom line on the CRT. The plussign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on thescreen.)

(5) Operation menu key The functions of the soft keys vary according to the ap-plications. Pressing this key when the soft keys are notoperation selection keys changes the soft keys to theoperation selection keys that are effective on the se-lected CRT screen (see Subsection 2.1.11). Pressingthis key when the soft keys are operation selection keyschanges the soft keys to the operation selection keysthat do not fit on the screen. (The 9” CRT/MDI panel hasfive soft keys. The 14” CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys.However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some ap-plications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed in therightmost frame of the bottom line on the CRT. The plussign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on thescreen.)

(6) Address/numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and othercharacters.

(7) <SHIFT> key Some address keys are marked with two characters. Toenter the lower right character, press the shift key first.When the shift key is pressed, ^ is displayed in the keyinput buffer. This indicates that pressing the address keyenters the lower right character.!, ”, $, \, –, <, >, :, ;, %, ’These characters can be used on the MMC screen.

(8) <INPUT/INSERT> key When an address or numeric key is pressed, the data isentered in the key input buffer, then displayed on theCRT. Press the input key to store the data entered in thekey input buffer in the offset register.The input key is equivalent to an <INPUT> soft key. Ei-ther may be used.Pressing this key on the program editing screen insertsthe contents of the key input buffer after the positionwhere the cursor is located. The INSERT soft key hasthe equivalent function. Either key can be used.

(9) ALTER key Pressing this key on the program editing screen replacesthe word where the cursor is located with the contents ofthe key input buffer. The ALTER soft key has the equiva-lent function. Either key can be used.


– 27 –


No. Name Functions

(10) DELETE key Pressing this key on the program editing screen deletesthe word where the cursor is located. The DELETEWORD soft key has the equivalent function. Either keycan be used.

(11) Cancel <CAN> key Pressing this key deletes a character or symbol input tothe key input buffer.The contents of the buffer are displayed on the CRT. Theposition where a new entry is to be input is displayed withan underscore (_). Pressing the CAN (cancel) key de-letes the character immediately before the underscore.Example) When the contents of the key input buffer aredisplayed as shown below,>N001X100Z_pressing the CAN key deletes Z and the displayed con-tents change as follows:>N001Z100_

(12) Cursor move keys The following four cursor keys are provided:→ : This key moves the cursor forward in small incre-ments.The cursor is moved in the direction of order.← : This key moves the cursor backward in small incre-ments.The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.↓ : This key moves the cursor for the key input bufferforward when a character is entered in the key input buff-er. The position of the cursor for the key input buffer isindicated by an underscore. Pressing an address or nu-meric key enters an address or number at the cursorposition. Pressing the cancel <CAN> key deletes thecharacter before the cursor position.This key moves the cursor on the CRT screen forward inlarge increments when no data is entered in the key inputbuffer.The cursor is moved in the direction of order.↑ : This cursor key moves the cursor for the key inputbuffer backward. This key moves the cursor on the CRTscreen backward in large increments when no data isentered in the key input buffer.The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.

(13) Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.< ↓ >: This key is used to changeover the page on theCRT screen in the forward direction.< ↑ >: This key is used to changeover the page on theCRT screen in the reverse direction.The small 9” monochrome CRT/MDI panel is not pro-vided with page keys. Pressing the → and ↓ cursor keyssimultaneously is equivalent to pressing the ↓ page key.Pressing the ← and ↑ cursor keys simultaneously isequivalent to pressing the ↑ page key.

(14) PMC/CNC switch key This key is used to determine whether the CRT/MDI pan-el is used for the CNC or PMC.

(15) MMC key Pressing this key enables the CRT/MDI to be used in theMMC. This key is valid only when a CNC having theMMC is used.

(16) POS key Pressing this key selects the current position displayscreen. The POSITION soft key has the equivalent func-tion. Either key can be used.

(17) PROG key Pressing this key selects the part program displayscreen. The PROGRAM soft key has the equivalentfunction. Either key can be used.


– 28 –


No. Name Functions

(18) OFFSET key Pressing this key selects the tool offset display screen orthe screen displaying offset from the workpiece referenceposition. The OFFSET soft key has the equivalent func-tion. Either key can be used.

(19) P–CHECK key Pressing this key selects the program check screen. TheP CHECK soft key has the equivalent function. Eitherkey can be used.

(20) SETTING key Pressing this key selects the setting screen. The SET-TING soft key has the equivalent function. Either keycan be used.

(21) SERVICE key Pressing this key selects the parameter and diagnosisscreen. The MAINTENANCE soft key has the equivalentfunction. Either key can be used.

(22) MESSAGE key Pressing this key selects the screen for alarm messagesand operator messages. The MESSAGE soft key hasthe equivalent function. Either key can be used.

(23) OTHERS key Pressing this key selects and displays the screen speci-fied with parameter No. 2215.

(24) HELP key(SHIFT/EOB)

Pressing this key displays the help window on a screen.Alarm help, soft key help, and G code guide can be dis-played. For details, see Help Functions.

(25) Arithmetic <CALC> key

<SHIFT>+<ATER>

Press this key to execute operation commands in the keyinput buffer.Example) When the data in the key input buffer is [10 +20 x 30 + 400/8], the arithmetic key is pressed. Then,the data in the key input buffer is changed to 660.The arithmetic key is standard.

(26) <AUX> key Auxiliary key


– 29 –

2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installedThe data to be displayed and key input operations vary entirely according to whether the MMC screen or CNC/PMC screen is displayed on the CRT/MDI panel.The MMC switch key and CNC/PMC switch key are used to determine whether the MMC screen or the CNC/PMC screen is displayed.When the CNC/PMC screen is selected, the contents displayed on the CRT/MDI and the operations are identi-cal to those for the Series 15–MB.This manual describes the contents displayed and the operations when the CNC screen is selected. Referto the machine tool builder’s manual for the contents displayed and the operations when the MMC screen isselected.(1) Selecting the MMC screen

Press the MMC switch key to select the MMC screen.(2) Selecting the CNC/PMC screen

Press the CNC/PMC key to display the CNC/PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the CNCscreen is displayed displays the PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the PMC screen is dis-played displays the CNC screen.Press the CNC/PMC key while the MMC screen is displayed to change the display mode (to display theCNC or PMC screen) before pressing the MMC switch key.

2.1.3 Key input and input bufferWhen an address or a numerical key is pressed, the character corresponding to that key is input once into thekey input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. In orderto indicate that it is key input data, a “>” symbol is displayed immediately in front of it. A “_” is displayed at theend of the key input data indicating the input position of the next character. To input the lower character of thekeys that have two characters inscribed on them, first press the <SHIFT> key and then the key in question.When the <SHIFT> key is pressed the “_” that indicates the input position of the next character changes to “^”and indicates that the lower character can be input (shift status). When a character is input in shift status theshift status is canceled.To enter the lower characters on the address or numeric keys continuously, the shift key must be pressed firsteach time an address or numeric key is pressed.Pressing the shift key in the shift state releases the shift state.

Up to 78 characters can be entered at a time in the key input buffer.

2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer(1) Inserting characters

The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT. When the next address or numeric key ispressed, the corresponding character is inserted at the cursor position indicated by an underscore. Pressthe ↑ or ↓ cursor key to move the cursor.Move the cursor to the desired position, then enter the desired characters.Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_

To enter G90 after N001 in this case, perform the following:1 Press the ↓ cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position:

>N001_X100.0Y200.0F100.0;2 Enter G90 by pressing the corresponding address and numeric keys.

>N001G90_X100.0Y200.0F100.0;3 Press the ↑ cursor key to move the cursor to the following position:

>N001G90X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_(2) Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the position after the characters to be deleted, then press the <CAN> key. If the <CAN>key is pressed in the shift state, all data in the key input buffer is deleted.Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_

To delete Y200.0, perform the following:1 Press the ↓ cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position:

>N001X100.0Y200.0_F100.0;2 Press the <CAN> key five times.

>N001X100.0_F100.0;3 Press the ↑ cursor key to move the cursor to the following position:

>N001X100.0F100.0;_


– 30 –

2.1.5 Warning message

Data must be input in the specified format. If an attempt is made to input data that violates the specified formatin the key input buffer in order to execute some operations, a warning message is displayed.

The warning message is displayed in highlighted characters in the line above the key input buffer field. Thecharacters are displayed at higher intensity on the 9” monochrome CRT or in purple on the 14” color CRT.

When a warning message is displayed, the soft keys function as cancel keys. When the cancel key (soft key)is pressed, the warning message is canceled. Change the format of the data in the key input buffer to the speci-fied format. Then, the operations specified by the data can be executed again.

2.1.6 Soft key display

The 9” CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14” CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. This manual describesthe five soft keys on the 9” CRT/MDI panel. The soft keys are displayed as follows:

��

The plus sign in the rightmost frame indicates that there are other soft keys that do not fit on the CRT.

The same basic method for operating soft keys applies to both the 14” CRT/MDI panel with ten soft keys andthe 9” CRT/MDI panel with five soft keys. Obviously, it is not necessary to scroll the soft keys on the 14” CRT/MDI panel.

When some soft keys for setting operations or operation guidance are pressed, processing is executed im-mediately. These keys are underlined on the screen.

��

Underlined soft keys are displayed at higher intensity on the 9” monochrome CRT. They are displayed in greenon the 14” color CRT.

Some soft keys are displayed in parentheses on the screen.

When these soft keys are pressed, a message prompting the operator to enter the corresponding data is dis-played.

��

2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient

As mentioned above, the 9” CRT/MDI panel is equipped with five soft keys and the 14” CRT/MDI panel isequipped with ten. These soft keys may be insufficient for some applications. When the soft keys are usedas function selection keys, for example, up to seven functions can be selected. In this case, the plus sign (+)is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line on the 9” CRT/MDI CRT.

(1) When the soft keys are used as function selection keys

When the function menu key (leftmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost frameof the bottom line, the soft keys change to the function selection keys that do not fit on the screen.

(2) When the soft keys are used as operation selection keys

When the operation menu key (rightmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmostframe of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the operation selection keys that do not fit on the screen.

(3) When the soft keys are used as chapter selection keys

When the chapter selection menu key (soft key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmostframe of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the chapter selection keys that do not fit on the screen.


– 31 –

2.1.8 Changing soft keys

The soft keys are used as either function selection keys, chapter selection keys, operation selection keys, oroperation guidance keys.

The procedure for changing the function of the soft keys is as follows:

(1) Changing the soft keys to the function selection keys

Pressing the leftmost function menu key changes the soft keys to the function selection keys.

(2) Changing the soft keys to the chapter selection keys

(a) Selecting chapters in the function selection key state

The currently selected function key is displayed at higher intensity on the 9” CRT/MDI panel or in greenon the 14” CRT/MDI panel. Whenever the function key is pressed, new chapters can be selected insequence.

(b) Changing the soft keys from the function selection keys to the chapter selection keys

Pressing the <CHAPTER> soft key (rightmost soft key) changes the soft keys from the function selec-tion keys to the chapter selection keys. Select the desired chapter by pressing the soft keys. To returnthe soft keys to the function selection keys, press the function menu key. To return the soft keys tothe operation selection keys, press the operation menu key.

(c) Selecting chapters in the operation selection key state

To enable chapter selection when the soft keys are used as operation selection keys, use the soft keysas both the operation selection keys and the chapter selection keys. To switch between these modes,press the operation menu key. Pressing the chapter selection keys selects new chapters. To returnthe soft keys to the operation selection keys, press the operation menu key.

(3) Changing the soft keys to the operation selection keys

(a) Pressing the rightmost operation menu key changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys inwhichever state the soft keys may be.

(b) Entering data in the key input buffer when the soft keys are used as the function selection keys is as-sumed to be an attempt by the operator to execute an operation. The soft keys then automaticallychange to the operation selection keys.

(4) Changing the soft keys to the operation guidance keys

(a) Changing the soft keys from the operation selection keys to the operation guide keys

Press the operation selection key.

The following block diagram shows how to change the soft keys through their various modes.


– 32 –

�� #�!"

�� #�!� ��$� ��& �$��#�� $� ��&

�$��#�� $� ��&

� �$��#�� "��#��

�"��#� ��&��%#� �$��#��

"��#�� &

��%#� � �!�#�� "��#�� &

��#� �� #&

� �!�#�� $��

�"��#� ��&�

�� &

�"��#� ��&�

%��$#��

��#�!� �%��$#��

� �!�#�� &

��"� #�� &� �� $#� �$��!� �� #&��

� #&

�&� �� $#

� �!�#�� $� ��& �&� �� $#

�� #�!� "��#�� &

�$��#�� "��#�� &

��

��!��#

��#�!� �� #�!"

�!��

� � �!�#�� "��#��

�"��#� ��&�

� �!�#�� $� ��&

�� $��#��"

�� #�!"

�"��#� ��&�

�� #�!� "��#��

��#�!� �� #�!"

�!��


– 33 –

2.1.9 Outline of operations

1 Select the data to be displayed and the major item to be entered on the CRT/MDI panel with the functionselection key (soft key).

2 Each major item is divided into minor items (called chapters). Select a chapter with the chapter selectionsoft key.

3 To perform a certain operation such as data input, select the operation with the operation selection soft key.

4 Pressing the operation selection key changes the soft key to the operation guide key. The executable op-erations can be checked with the operation guidance key.

5 Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately executes the corresponding operation. However,pressing other operation guidance keys displays a prompt for the operator to enter the data required forstarting the corresponding operation.

Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the9” monochrome CRT or in green on the 14” color CRT. Operation guidance keys that display a prompt aredisplayed in blue–green.

6 When operation guidance keys that displays a prompt for the operator to enter the required data is pressed,if the address that corresponds to the data has been determined, the system automatically enters the ad-dress into the key–input buffer. Otherwise, the operator determines the address and inputs the data.

7 When the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer, the soft key changes to the EXEC key whichstarts execution.

8 Press the EXEC key after the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer. The corresponding opera-tion is then performed. Set the functions to be displayed to parameter 2215.

2.1.10 Function selection keys

Function selection keys are classified into soft keys and the hard keys on the MDI panel. To select a functionwith the soft key, press the function selection menu key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys,then press the desired function selection key. To select a function with the hard key, press the desired functionselection key.

Functions can be selected in any mode.

Detailed function selection is performed with the chapter selection keys.

The following function selection keys are provided:

(Soft keys)

��

��

(Hard keys)

��

(1) [POSITION] soft key or <POS> hard key

Press this key to select the current–position screen.

(2) [PROGRAM] soft key or <PROG> hard key

Press this key to select the part–program screen.


– 34 –

(3) [OFFSET] soft key or <OFFSET> hard key

Press this key to select the tool offset screen or the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point.

(4) [PRG–CHK] soft key or <P–CHECK> hard key

Press this key to select the program check screen.

(5) [SETTING] soft key or <SETTING> hard key

Press this key to select the setting screen.

(6) [SERVICE] soft key or <SERVICE> hard key

Press this key to select the parameter or diagnosis screen.

(7) [MESSAGE] soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key

Press this key to select the alarm or operator message screen.

(8) [OTHERS] hard key

Press this key to select the function screen other than the function screens described in items (1) to (7),such as a graphic screen.

2.1.11 Chapter selection keys

The function selection keys are used to select major items. Each major item is divided into minor items calledchapters. The chapter selection keys are used to select the chapters.

To select a chapter, change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the desired chapter selectionkey. Pressing the function selection hard key also enables chapter selection.

(1) Chapter selection keys on the position screen (function keys to select position chapters)

The chapter selection keys on the position screen are as follows:

��

(a) [OVERALL] key

Press this key to select the overall–position screen on the position screen.

(b) [RELATIV] key

Press this key to select the relative–position screen on the position screen.

(c) [ABSOLUT] key

Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the workpiece coordinate system on the positionscreen.

(d) [MACHINE] key

Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the machine coordinate system on the positionscreen.

(2) Program chapter selection keys (function keys to select program chapters)

The program chapter selection keys are as follows:

��

(a) [TEXT] key

Press this key to select the program text screen.

(b) [DIR.MEM] key

Press this key to select the screen for the programs stored in the program memory (directory). Thisscreen displays the program numbers, program names, and other information.


– 35 –

(3) Offset chapter selection keys (function keys to select offset chapters)

The offset chapter selection keys are as follows:

��

(a) [WEAR] key

Press this key to select the tool offset screen.

(b) [WRK.ZER] key

Press this key to select the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point.

(4) Command–value chapter selection keys (function keys to select PRG–CHK chapters)

The command–value chapter selection keys are as follows:

��

(a) [CHECK] key

Press this key to select the screen that simultaneously displays programs, relative or absolute posi-tions, continuous–state information, and PMC data.

(b) [LAST] key

Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the block preceding the currentlyexecuted block and the continuous–state values of the issued G code, F code, and so on.

(c) [NEXT] key

Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the currently executed block and the con-tinuous–state values of the issued G code, F code, and so on.

(5) Setting chapter selection keys (function keys to select setting chapters)

The setting chapter selection keys are as follows:

��

(a) [HANDY] key

Press this key to select the input–output setting screen.

(b) [GENERAL] key

Press this key to select the screen for the parameters that can be set.

(c) [OP.PANEL] key

Press this key to select the menu switch or software operator panel screen.

(d) [MACRO] key

Press this key to select the custom macro variable screen.


– 36 –

(6) Service chapter selection keys (function keys to select service chapters)

��

(a) [PARAM] key

Press this key to select the parameter screen.

(b) [PITCH] key

Press this key to select the pitch error compensation data screen.

(c) [DIAGNOS] key

Press this key to select the diagnosis screen.

(d) [DSP.MEM] key

Press this key to select the screen displaying the contents of the memory for CNC control software.

(7) Message chapter selection keys (function keys to select message chapters)

The message chapter selection keys are as follows:

��

(a) [ALARM] key

Press this key to select the alarm message screen.

(b) [OPERATOR] key

Press this key to select the operator message screen.

2.1.12 Operation selection keys

The possible operations vary according to the screens selected with function selection keys or chapter selec-tion keys. To improve operability, only the names of the operations enabled on the displayed screen are dis-played in the field for the operation selection (soft) keys.

To select an operation, change the soft keys to the operation selection keys, then press the desired operationselection key.

For the operations of the operation selection keys, refer to the individual descriptions.

NOTE When the operation selection key is pressed while no data is entered in the key input buffer,the soft keys change to the operation guidance keys. The operation guidance keys are usedto display information about the current operation or the possible operations.Enter the necessary data in the key input buffer. When the desired operation selection key ispressed, the corresponding operation is performed. This procedure reduces the number oftimes keys are pressed when the operator understands the operation without using theoperation guidance keys.Some operations cannot be performed unless the operation guidance keys are used.This section describes how to use the operation guidance keys.

Example Setting offsets

Operation selection keys:

��


– 37 –

(1) When no data is entered in the key input buffer

(a) Pressing the INPUT key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.

��

(b) Pressing the (VALUE) key displays the message prompting the operator to enter the offset data.

(c) Entering the offset data changes the soft keys as follows:

��

(d) Pressing the EXEC key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the off-set number at the cursor.

(2) When the offset data is entered in the key input buffer

(a) Pressing the INPUT key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to theoffset number at the cursor.

2.1.13 Operation guidance keys

The possible operations vary according to the which operation selection keys are pressed. To improve oper-ability, only the possible operations corresponding to the pressed operation selection key are displayed usingthe corresponding operation guidance keys (soft keys).

Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately starts the corresponding operation while pressing othersdisplays a prompt for the operator to enter the necessary data.

Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the 9”monochrome CRT or in green on the 14” color CRT.

In this manual, these soft keys are underlined.

Entering data using the keys changes the soft keys as follows, irrespective of whether the operation guidancekeys are pressed:

��

Pressing the EXEC key executes the operation specified for the data in the key input buffer.

For the use of the operation guidance keys, refer to the individual descriptions.


– 38 –

2.1.14 Changing language of the displayThe language of the CRT display is specified with a parameter. The following languages are available:Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, and Swedish.

Japanese English

German French

Italian Swedish

Spanish


– 39 –

2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key)

The arithmetic key is a standard key and is used to evaluate the arithmetic expressions in the key input bufferwhose data is entered from the MDI panel.

(1) Operation

1 Enter data from the MDI panel. 100.0 + 10.0__

2 Press the SHIFT and ALTER key. [SHIFT] ; [ALTER CALC]

3 The expression is evaluated, and 110.0__the result is stored in the key input buffer.

(2) Arithmetic expressions

Enter the arithmetic expression in the same way as a general one.

1 An alphabetic or special character string other than a function name in the key input buffer is regardedas the end code of an arithmetic expression. The use of some end codes enables multiple expres-sions to be entered in the key input buffer. The CALC key evaluates of each expression.

Example 1100.0/2;200.0/2;300.0/2__

↓50.0;100.0;150.0__

Example 2X350.0*Y120.0/5;X20.0*3.5__

↓

X1050.0Y24.0;X70.0__

(3) Types of numeric values

This function uses integers and real numeric values.

(a) Input format

Integers : Strings of numbers from 0 to 9

Example 10735

Real values : Strings of numbers containing a decimal point

Example 10.23

(b) Internal data format

Integers : One–bit sign and 31–bit binary data

Real values : M*2E

M: One–bit sign and 31–bit binary data

E : One–bit sign and seven–bit binary data

(c) Types of values obtained by calculation

i) A calculation involving integers and real values produces a real value.

ii) The result of a calculation is converted into a character string in the following range, then storedin the key input buffer:

Integer : –99999999 to 99999999

Real value : –99999999.0 to –.0000001

,.0

,.00000001 to 99999999.0


– 40 –

(4) Functions

The following functions are available:

No. Function Type Description

1 SIN Integer Sine (degrees)

2 COS 7 Cosine (degrees)

3 TAN 7 Tangent (degrees)

4 ATAN 7 Inverse tangent

5 SQRT 7 Square root

6 ABS 7 Absolute value

7 ACOS 7 Inverse cosine

8 ASIN 7 Inverse sine

9 LN 7 Natural logarithm

10 EXP 7 Exponent of e (= 2.718...)

NOTE The arguments of the ATAN function are specified as follows:ATAN[<expression 1>][<expression 2>]

�

�

� ��

Example 1 ATAN[0] / [0] __ → 0

Example 2 ATAN[1] / [0] __ → 90.0

Example 3 ATAN[1] / [1] __ → 45.0

Example 4 ATAN[-1]/ [-1] __ → -135.0

(5) Priority of operations

(a) Function > multiplication/division > addition/subtraction

(b) The priority of operations can be changed with square brackets [ ].

��

Example SIN [ [ –10 + 15 ] * 0.1+0.5] * 10

The argument of SIN is obtained as the result of operation (4).

(6) Operational accuracy

The accuracy of real type data operation with this arithmetic function conforms to the operational accuracyfor custom macro operation commands.

(7) Syntax rules of the expressions

<numeric character>: The following characters are used:

0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , and 9

<sign> : The following signs are used to indicate whether numbers are positive or negative:

+ or –

<addition or subtraction operator> : <sign> is used to indicate addition and subtraction.

<sign>


– 41 –

<multiplication or division operator>: The following characters are used to indicate multiplication and division, respectively:

* and (blank)

<unsigned integer>: <numeric character> string

<numeric character> ...

Example) 4567

<fraction part>: <numeric character> string

<numeric character> ...

Example) ...

<unsigned integer>: A decimal point is inserted between <unsigned integer> and <fractional part>.

{<unsigned integer>}.{<fractional part>}

Example) 101.02

<function name 1>: The following character strings are used to represent the functions of sine, cosine,tangent, square root, absolute value, inverse cosine, inverse sine, natural logarithm, and exponent of e:

SIN, CON, TAN, SQRT, ABC, ACOS, ASIN, LN, and EXP

<function name 2>: The following character string is used to represent the inverse tangent function:

ATAN

<enclosed expression>: <expression> enclosed in square brackets [ ]

[<expression>]

<simple factor>: <unsigned number> and <enclosed expression>

Example) <unsigned number>: 12.34

Example) <enclosed expression>: [10.1 + 3.3]

<function call>: The following two types can be used:

i) Calling <function name 1>

The format is <function name 1> followed by <enclosed expression> to executethe function of <function name 1> for <enclosed expression>.

ii) Calling <function name 2>

The format is <function name 2> followed by two <enclosed expression> units toexecute the function of <function name 2> for two divisional <enclosed expression> units.

<function name 1><enclosed expression> and <function name 2><enclosed expression><enclosed expression>

Example) SIN[30.0]

Example) ATAN[2.5] [5.0]

<factor>: <simple factor> and <function call>

Example) <simple factor>: [1.0 + 2.5 * 3.333]

Example) <function call>: SQRT[3.0 * 2.0]

<item>: <factor> and multiplication or division between <item> and <factor>

<factor> and <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>

Example) <factor>: ATAN[2.5] [5.0]

Example) <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>: 12.3 SIN[1.1 * 3.0]

<expression>: <item> with <sign> and addition or subtraction between <expression> and <item>

{<sign>}<item> and <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>

Example) {<sign><item>: –2.2 * 5.1

Example) <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>: –1.2 3.0 + EXP[2.0]


– 42 –

2.2 Machine Operator’s Panel

The operator’s panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations ofa typical operator’s panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bythe machine tool builder.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

OFF ON

OFF ON

+X +Y +Z

�X �Y �Z

XY

Z x10 x1

100

20000

25 50

100

X Y Z

2000

OFF ONOFF ONLOW

OFF ON

OFF

x1

x10 x100x1000

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

Fig. 2.2 An illustration for Operator’s panel


– 43 –

Table 2.2 Functions on the Operator Panel

Function Description

CYCLE START button To start automatic operation, select an executable programand press this button. The lamp indicating automaticoperation is on during automatic operation.

FEED HOLD button To decelerate and stop the tool, press this button duringautomatic operation.

Mode selector To select the mode according to the type of job, use thisselector.

RAPID button To move the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate, press thisbutton.

JOG & INCREMENTALbuttons

To carry out continuous manual feed or incremental feed,press these buttons.

Handle To move the tool in the desired direction, rotate the handle.

SINGLE BLOCK switch To perform automatic operation in units of blocks, turnthis switch on.

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIPswitch

To skip optional blocks, turn this switch on.

DRY RUN switch To perform a dry run, turn this switch on.

REFERENCE RETURNswitch

To return the machine to the reference position, turn thisswitch on.

RAPID TRAVERSEOVERRIDE selector

To apply rapid traverse override to the machine, select thedesired override.

INCREMENTALselector

To select the distance to be traveled per step duringincremental feed, use this selector.

EMERGENCY STOPbutton

Press this button when the machine must be stoppedimmediately.

LOCK MODE selector To select the display lock or machine lock mode, use thisselector.

MANUAL/ABSOLUTEswitch

This switch specifies whether the distance to be traveledduring manual operation is stored in the abusolute registerwhen the operator manually intervenes in the automaticmode.

FEEDRATE OVERRIDEdial

This dial specifies the override when the feedrate isoverridden during automatic or manual operation.

JOG FEEDRATE dial This dial specifies the continuous manual feedrate.

HANDLE AXIS selector This selector is used to select the axis along which themachine is moved manually with the handle.

HANDLE MULTIPLIERselector

This selector is used to select the multiplying factor of thedistance traveled per graduation during manual handle feed.


– 44 –

2.3 Tape ReaderThe tape readers are classified into three types:(1) Tape reader without reels(2) Tape reader with reels(3) Portable tape reader

2.3.1 Tape reader without reels1) Names and descriptions of each section

AUTORELEASE

MANUAL��

��

2. Optical reader

��

��

��

Fig. 2.3.1 (a) Names of Each SectionTable 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part

No. Name Functions(1) Light Sources An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted for

each channel and for the feed hole (9diodesin total). A built–in Stop Shoe functions todecelerate the tape. The light source is at-tracted to the optical reader by a magnet sothat the tape will be held in the correct posi-tion. This unit can be opened upward, byturning the tape reader control switch to theRELEASE position (this turns off the mag-net).

(2) Optical Reader Reads data punched on the tape, through aglass window. Dust or scratches on theglass window can result in reading errors.Keep this window clean.

(3) Capstan Roller Controls the feeding of tape as specifyed bythe control unit.

(4) Tape Reader Control Switch A 3–position switch used to control the TapeReader.RELEASE … The tape is allowed to be

free, or used to open the light source.When loading or unloading the tape, this position is selected.

AUTO … The tape is set to fixed position by theStop Shoe. The feed andstop of the tape is controlled operation or data input from tape, the Light Source must be closed and this position must be selected.

MANUAL … The tape can be fed in the forward reading direction. if another position is selected, the tape feed is stopped.

(5) Tape Box A Tape Box is located below the TapeReader. A belt used to draw out a papertape is located inside the box. The papertape can easily be pulled out using this belt.


– 45 –

2) Tape reader handling

a) Tape loading

1 Open the front door of the tape reader.

2 Set the Tape Reader switch to the RELEASE position.

3 Lift the Light Source Unit, and insert an NC tape between the gap. The tape must be posi-tioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.

��

��

4 Pull the tape until the top of the tape goes past the Capstan roller.

5 Check that the NC tape is correctly positioned by the Tape Guide.

6 Lower the Light Source.

7 Turn the switch to the AUTO position.

8 Suspend the top and rear–end of the tape in the Tape Box.

b) Unloading the NC tape


2 Turn the switch to the RELEASE position.

3 Lift the Light Source and remove the tape.

4 Lower the Light Source.

5 Close the front door of the tape reader.


– 46 –

2.3.2 Tape reader with reels

(1) Names and description of each section

�� +-.�)�� &$%.� -*/, "

�� +.& �'� ,"�!",

�� ""'

�� ""'� �*--

�� '�(+��

� � � � '�(+ �� /..*)

�� ")-&*)� �,(

�� ""'

�� ""'� �*-"

�� *).,*'� -0&. %�� /..*)

�� /..*)

�� .�+"

��+"� *(+�,.(").

�%"� �"'.� &-� +/''"!� /+� .*� !,�0*/.� .%"� �� .�+"�

�"'.� #*,� !,�0&)$� */..%"� +�+",� .�+"

Fig. 2.3.2 (a) Names of Each Section


– 47 –

Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section

No. Section Description

1 Light source Nine LEDs for channels and feed holes are installed in this sec-tion. A built–in stop shoe stops the tape. The section is at-tached to the optical reader with a magnet so that it also servesas a tape retainer. The light source can be opened upwardwhen the control switch is turned to the RELEASE positiondeactivate the magnet.

2 Optical reader This section reads the tape and has a glass window. If the win-dow is dirty or is damaged, a reading error may occur. Thewindow must always be kept clean and free from defects.

3 Capstan This roller serves as a tape feeder and operates according tothe command from the control unit.

4 Reel This reel is used for fast–forwarding and rewinding the tape. A150 m tape can be used.

5 Reel boss This boss is used to accept the reel. The boss rotates the reeland is driven by the reel motor according to the command fromthe control unit.

6 Tension arm This arm adjusts the tension of the tape fed from the reel. Thearm absorbs the time delay in the tape transport when the reelmotor starts and stops.

7 Control switch This switch changes the operating modes of the tape reader.The switch can be turn to one of the following positions:

RELEASE: Releases the tape so that it is free to move. Thelight source can be opened upward. Before loading or unload-ing the tape, turn the switch to this position.

REEL ON: Secures the tape with the stop shoe and activatesthe reel motor. Before operating the tape reader with the tapeon the reel, turn the switch to this position.

REEL OFF: Secures the tape with the stop shoe, but does notactivate the reel motor. Before operating the tape reader withthe tape not on the reel, turn the switch to this position. Howev-er, the reels must be used to rewind the tape.

When entering data from the tape by running it, be sure to closethe light source and turn the switch to the REEL ON or OFFposition.

8 AUTO lamp This lamp comes on while the tape reader is automatically op-erated by the control unit. When the lamp is on, the manualoperation buttons of the tape reader such as FORWARD (10),STOP (11), and REWIND (12) are ineffective.


– 48 –

Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (contitnued)


9 ALARM lamp

Lights Flashes Cause

Reel operation error1. When the control

switch is at the REELON position, the tapehas reached the endor has become loose.

2. When the operationswitch is at the REELOFF position, the re-els are being used.

Tape reading error

Tape end

2. Holes are punched in-correctly.

No.

1. The brightness ratio isnot adjusted correctly.

The tape has reached theend.

1

2

3

4

The tape does not stopat the EOR when itis rewound.

1. Defective stop magnet

2. Tape reading error

This lamp comes on when an alarm occurs in the tape reader.When the lamp lights, eliminate the cause of the alarm andturn the operation switch to the RELEASE position or pressthe RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel. The lamp thengoes off.

The following table lists the causes of alarms and the correspond-ing lamp states.

ALARM

ALARM

FORWARD

STOP

REWIND


– 49 –

Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued)


Lights Flashes Cause

Serial data error

1. The baud rate is notcorrect.

2. The stop bit is not cor-rect.

3. The host does notstop transmitting datawhen CS is either off orin the DC3 recep-tion state. (The PTRbuffer is full.)

Data is read in the reverse direc-tion when the control switchis at the REEL OFF position.

1. During automatic opera-tionThe rewind command orthe command for read-ing in the reverse direc-tion is issued.

2. During manual operation

1. Watchdog

2. Abnormal power

No.

5

6

7

The REWIND switch ispressed.

AUTOALARMFORWARDSTOPREWIND

ALARMFORWARD STOP REWIND

ALARM REWIND

10 FORWARD button This button is used to feed the tape in the tape reading direc-tion, i.e., forward. To feed the tape forward, press the FOR-WARD button when the AUTO lamp is off and when the controlswitch is at the REEL ON or REEL OFF position. When thebutton is pressed, the tape continues to be fed until it stopsunder one of the following conditions:

(i) When the STOP button is pressed

(ii) When ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is read

(iii) When the RESET button is pressed on theCRT/MDI panel

11 STOP button This button stops the tape that is currently being fed with theFORWARD (10) or REWIND (12) button.


– 50 –

Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued)


12 REWIND button This button feeds the tape at high speed in the opposite direc-tion to the reading direction. Press this button when the AUTOlamp is off and when the operation switch is at the REEL ONposition. When the button is pressed, the tape continues to befed until it stops under one of the following conditions:

(i) When the STOP button (11) is pressed

(ii) When an ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) isread

(iii) When the RESET button is pressed on theCRT/MDI panel

If the REWIND button is pressed when the control switch is at theREEL ON position, an alarm occurs. This is because the tapecannot be rewound without reels.

13 Tape compartment The tape compartment is installed at the bottom of the tapereader. The belt for drawing out the paper tape is installed inthe tape compartment. Pulling up the belt enables the tape tobe easily drawn out of the tape box.


– 51 –

(2) Operation

(a) When no reels are used

The procedure for operating a tape reader with the reels removed is the same as that for operatingthe tape reader with no reels. However, turn the control switch to the REEL OFF position in step (7).

(b) When reels are used

(i) Setting the tape

1 Set the tape in the reel.

��

��

��

��

��

�

��


– 52 –

2 Open the front door of the tape reader

3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.

4 Mount the reel containing the tape on the right reel boss and an empty reel on the left reel bosswhen facing the front of the tape reader.

The right reel must be positioned so that the tape is fed in the counterclockwise direction asshown below:

5 Draw the tape out of the reel.

6 Feed the tape around tape guide A.

��

7 Feed the tape over the tension arm.


– 53 –

8 Insert the tape under tape guides B. The tape is easy to insert if it is held taut.

��

9 Check that the tape passes under rear tape guide C as shown below:

��

��

��

10 Feed the tape at the left side in the same way as for the right side.

11 Wind the drawn tape leader onto the left reel and firmly roll the tape onto the reel several turnsso that the tape is secured to the reel.


– 54 –

12 Check that the tape is set as shown below when it is viewed from the top.

��

��

If the tape is not set as shown in the figure above, the orientation of the reel on the boss isreversed.

13 Make sure that the tape is correctly set along the tape guides.

14 Close the light source to hold the tape.

15 Turn the control switch to the REEL ON position. The reel then rotates a little, and the tensionarm moves to tension the tape. If the reel continues to rotate, the tape is not secured to thereel. If the left–hand reel is loose, repeat the procedure from step 11. If the right–hand reelis loose, repeat the procedure from step 5. If the reel boss continues to turn when the reelis stopped, the reel is not firmly secured to the reel boss. In this case, repeat the procedurefrom step 4.


(ii) Removing the tape


2 Press the REWIND button to rewind the tape. If ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is encoun-tered, the tape stops. In this case, press the REWIND button again to rewind the whole tape.When rewinding the tape is completed, press the STOP button to stop rewinding.

3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.

4 Remove the reel from the boss.



– 55 –

2.3.3 Portable tape reader

(1) Names and descriptions of each section

�� *-$��&� � � � � + �� +

�� #)-)�'*&$!$ +

�� +�*.(�#

� � � � � � $(- +!�� *- +

�� & � ,-)+�" �� #�(�&

�� *,-�(

�� )(-+)&,0$-�#�� $"#-� � � � � ,).+�

�� * � �)1

�� )0 +$("

� � � � � � �)�%

� � � � � � & / +

�� )/ +� &)�%

�� $(� +

�� -�&� �

Fig. 2.3.3 (a) Names of Each Section

Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section


1 Light source

2 Optical reader

3 Capstan See the corresponding descriptions of the tape reader without reels.

4 Control switch

5 Tape compartment Can contain a 15 m tape.

6 Metal A

�.,#

��* +� -�* ��* +� -�*

�(, +-

��,- ( +�.,.�&&2� % *-� )* (�

�# (� + ')/$("� -# � +)&& �� -�* �� + �.� � -# $(- +(�&� �$�' - +� �2� *.,#$("� -# � !�,- ( +�


– 56 –

Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section (Continued)


7 Handle Used to carry the tape reader.

8 Winder Used to advance or rewind the tape.

9 Cover lock Be sure to use the lock for fastening the cover before carrying the tapereader.

10 Lowering lock lever

When the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism is activated to fixthe tape reader. Thus, the tape reader is not lowered. The latch islocked with the lowering lock lever. The latch is therefore not unlockedeven when the tape reader is raised with the handle.

When the latch is locked, the lever is horizontal. To store the tape readerin the box, push the lever to release the lock, then raise the tape readerwith the handle to unlock the latch.

When the latch is unlocked, the tape reader can be stored in the box.

When storing the tape reader, secure it with the cover lock.

11 Cable storage Used to store rolled power and signal cables. The cable length is 1.5 m.

12 Photoamplifier For the tape reader

13 Reader/punch in-terface adapter

200 VAC input and 5 VDC output power and reader/punch interfaceadapter PCB

(2) Operation

The operating procedure is the same as that for the tape reader without reels. See Subsection 2.3.1.

Preparations for using the tape reader and how to store the tape reader are described below.

(a) Preparations

1 Unlock the cover locks (9). Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) until it clicks, then lower thetape reader. The tape reader then appears and is secured.

Check that the lowering lock levers (10) are horizontal.

2 Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage (11) and connect the signal cablewith the CNC reader/punch interface port and the power cable with the CNC power supply.

(b) Storage

1 Store the cables in the cable storage (11).

2 Push the lowering lock levers (10) at both sides down.

3 Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) to unlock the latch, then gently lower it.

4 Lock the cover locks (9) and carry the tape reader with the handle (6).


– 57 –

2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader

1) Precautions on tape loading

When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until firstEnd of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location withinthe tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape shouldbe set as shown in the figure below.

Actually, the end of block code(;) is CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.

� �

��"� "�� "�� !�� "��"� "��!� !��"�� !� #�� "�� !!� $��$�

� �� $�� !��#��

��"#��%�� "�� !�� !� ��

2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable

Don’t disconnect or connect CNC tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNCand tape reader power supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape readerand master PCB of CNC controller may be broken.

Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before disconnecting or connecting the connection cable,accordingly.


– 58 –

2.4 FANUC PPR

FANUC PPR is an I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and printer in one system. Interface is reader/puncher interface.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Fig. 2.4 FANUC PPR

See the FANUC PPR Operator’s Manual (B–54584E) for the FANUC PPR Operation.

B–62564E–1/02 3. POWER ON/OFF

– 59 –

3. POWER ON/OFF

1) Turning on the power

1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front doorand rear door are closed.)

2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

3 Check that some data is being displayed on the CRT screen.

4 Check that the fan motor is rotating.

CAUTION When pressing the <POWER ON> key, do not touch any other CRT/MDI panel keys.Untilthe positional or alarm screen is displayed, do not touch them. Some keys are used for themaintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operationmay be caused.

2) Turning off the power

1 Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operator’s panel.

2 Check that all movable blocks of the CNC machine tool is stopping.

3 Turn the tape reader operation switch to the RELEASE position.

4 If an I/O unit such as a tape punch unit is connected to the CNC unit , turn off the power to the I/O unit.

5 Continue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds.

6 Refer to the machine tool builder’s manual for turning off the power to the machine.

CAUTION Before connecting or disconnecting the RS–232–C interface cable of the I/O unit, be sureto turn off the power to the I/O unit.

B–62564E–1/024. MANUAL OPERATION

– 60 –

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4.1 Manual Reference Position Return

1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position.

EDIT

MEMORY

MDIHANDLE

INC

JOG

MODE SELECT Switch

2 Turn on the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN switch.

OFF ON

REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Switch

3 Jog Feed to reference position direction by each axis Keep this switch on until the reference position isreached.

–X –Y –Z

+X +Y +Z

Continue to press switch ON until arrive at reference position.The tool moves along the selected axis to the decelerated point at the rapid traverse rate,then moves to the reference position at the FL speed .A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse motion.

B–62564E–1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION

– 61 –

4 The machine stops at the reference position lighting the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLE-TION LED.

X Y Z

REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED

CAUTION For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to reference position,refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

NOTE 1 Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED lights at the completion ofreference position return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POSITIONRETURN switch is turned off.

NOTE 2 The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED is extinguished by either of thefollowing operations:

(i) Moving from the reference position.

(ii) Entering an emergency stop state.


– 62 –

4.2 Manual Continuous Feed

The machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows.

1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

MODE SELECT Switch

2 Select an axis to be moved.

–X –Y –Z

+X +Y +Z

The selected axis moves in its direction.

NOTE 1 In manual operation, up to two axes can be simultaneously operated. If three axes aresimultaneously selected by switches, only the first two of them are operated.

NOTE 2 When the mode is switched to the JOG mode while power is on, axis will not move even if ithas already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.

3 Select JOG feedrate

0 2000

JOGFEEDRATEmm/min


– 63 –

4 Rapid traverse

To execute the rapid traverse by manual mode, push RAPID TRAVERSE button, too.

RAPID TRAVERSE

It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed.

NOTE 1 Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapidtraverse are the same as G00 in programmed command.

NOTE 2 When the stored stroke limit function is provided, rapid traverse is not executed along the axishaving the reference position return function if the [rapid] button is pressed under the followingcondition: When the power has already been turned on, but the reference position returnfunction has not been executed. In this case, the tool is moved at the jog feedrate. Thisprevents the tool from reaching the stroke end while traveling at the rapid traverse feedrate andit necessary because the stored stroke limit function is validated only after the tool is manuallyreturned to the reference position.


– 64 –

4.3 Incremental Feed

1 Set MODE SELECT switch to INC position.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

2 Select the desired amount of movement.

X1

X10

X100 X1000

X10000

X100000

Input system X1 X10 X100 X1000 X10000 X100000

Metric input 0.001mm 0.01mm 0.1mm 1mm 10mm 100mm

Inch input 0.0001inch 0.001inch 0.01inch 0.1inch 1inch 10inch

3 Select an axis

–X –Y –Z

+X +Y +Z

When the JOG switch is pressed once, the axis moves by the amount specified in its direction.

Then when the switch is pressed after releasing it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.

NOTE 1 The feedrate is the same as the jog feedrate.

NOTE 2 The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse override is effective during rapidtraverse.

NOTE 3 Multiplier X1 to X100000 depends on an individual machine tool.


– 65 –

4.4 Manual Handle Feed

The feedrate can be adjusted precisely by using the manual pulse generator.

1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the HANDLE position.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

2 Select an axis.

XY

Z

Axis select switch

3 Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.

Manual pulse generator

Clockwise rotation ............... + direction

Counterclockwise rotation ... – direction

(The direction varies with the machine tool builder.)


– 66 –

4 Select the movement amount

Some operator’s panels are provided with the following selector switch. X10 multiplies the movementamount by 10; X100 by 100.

(CAUTION 1)X1

X10X100

Handle Multiplier

Input System

Input system X1 X10 X100(Note)

Metric input 0,001 m 0.01 mm 0.1 mm

Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.001 inch 0.01 inch

CAUTION 1 If the handle is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there is a difference between the handlerotation amount and the machine movement distance.

CAUTION 2 Rotating the handle too fast when such as X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rateas fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.When provided, the automatic acceleration/deceleration function is executed also formovement when using manual handle feed so that the mechanical impact is reduced.

NOTE Other amount may be used depending on machine tool.


– 67 –

4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction

The tool can be manually moved in a specified direction on a specified plane. The feedrate and the directionand plane of feed can be changed at any time. Simple cutting can be manually executed on a plane.

(1) Selecting a plane

Specify external signals that indicate the first and second axes of the plane on which the tool is manual-ly moved in a specified direction.

(2) Specifying the direction of feed

Enter an external input signal that indicates the direction in which the tool is to be manually moved.

The direction of feed can be specified in the range of 0 to 360 degrees in 1/16 degrees.

The angle is specified as shown below.

If an angle greater than 360 degrees is specified, the CNC unit repeatedly subtracts 360 from the angleuntil it falls within the range of 0 to 360 degrees.

While the tool is being manually moved in the specified direction, the direction of feed can be changedas required. When the direction is changed, the position check is not executed, but the move com-mand in the new direction is immediately executed.

��

��

270�

90�

�� 0�

(3) Specifying a feedrate

Using the dial for specifying the jog feedrate, specify the feedrate (as a tangential velocity) at whichthe tool is manually moved in the specified direction.

Parameter No. 1411 determines the feedrate when the dial is set to the 100% position.

(4) Starting and stopping manual feed in the specified direction

Manual feed in the specified direction is executed while the corresponding signals are on.

The signal that moves the tool in the specified direction and the signal that moves it in the oppositedirection are used in manual feed.

NOTE 1 When the mode of manual feed in the specified direction is selected, the tool can be movedonly on the selected plane determined by the selected axes.

NOTE 2 Automatic or manual operation cannot be switched when manual feed in the specified directionis executed.


– 68 –

4.6 Manual Numeric Command

The data entered by MDI devices in the program format can be executed in the jog mode.

The manual numeric command can be executed whenever jog feed is allowed.

The following commands can be specified:

⋅ Positioning (G00)

⋅ Linear interpolation (G01)

⋅ Automatic reference position return (G28)

⋅ Second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30)

⋅ M, S, T, B (second miscellaneous functions)

Execute the command as described below:

(1) Select the mode of manual continuous feed (jog). The [reference return] switch must be set off.

(2) Press the [function menu] key.

(3) Press the [PROGRAM] key. The program screen is displayed.

(4) When the displayed program screen is not a program text screen, do either of the following:

(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to [selection] keys, then press the [TEXT] key.

(ii) Repeatedly press the [PROGRAM] key until the program text screen is displayed.

(5) Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys into [OPERATION SELECTION] keys.

(6) Using the address keys and numeric keys, enter the command. The following commands can be en-tered:

(i) G00 (Positioning)

Specify the traveling distance with numeric values following addresses such as X, Y, and Z.

Always specify the command with an incremental value, irrespective of whether G90 or G91 isselected. The rapid traverse selector (RT) determines whether the tool is moved at the rapid tra-verse feedrate or jog feedrate.

(ii) G01 (Linear interpolation)

Specify the traveling distance as described for G00 above. The tool is always moved at the dryrun feedrate. The feedrate cannot be specified with F. This does not depend on whether the dryrun switch is on or off.

(iii) G28 (Reference position return)

The G28 command automatically returns the tool to the reference position. Unlike automatic op-eration, the specified traveling distance does not affect the operation. The tool is directly returnedto the reference position without passing through the intermediate point. The tool is returned tothe reference position only along the axis for which the move command is specified.

(iv) G30 (Second, third, or fourth reference position return)

Like G28, the G30 command returns the tool to the second, third, or fourth reference position.Specify the number of the reference position with address P, as in automatic operation.

(v) M, S, T, and B

Enter as many addresses as required or as the system accepts. The addresses can be enteredone after another.

(7) Press the [input] key.

(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) until all necessary commands are entered.

(9) After the all necessary commands are entered, the screen can be switched. Display the positionscreen or another screen as required.

(10)Press the [cycle start] button once on the operator’s panel or the [start] key on the CRT/MDI panel.The program is executed and the status display indicates STRM. In some machines, the cycle startlamp goes on. (A parameter specifies whether the cycle start lamp goes on.)


– 69 –

(11)When the program terminates, the status display indicates STOP or HOLD again. The cycle start lampgoes off. If one of the following occurs while the program is being executed, the program is stopped:

(i) Feed hold

(ii) Switching to a mode other than the manual continuous feed mode

(iii) Alarm

(iv) Reset or emergency stop

The remaining distance is canceled. The M, S, T, and B codes are retained unless the programis stopped due to (iv).

NOTE 1 A manual numeric command can be executed whenever manual continuous feed is allowed.It can be executed even if the feed hold function or another function stops the program(automatic operation stop state) in the middle of a block. In this case, however, the commandis subjected to the following restrictions:

(i) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, the manual numeric command includingthe M, S, T, or B code cannot be executed.

(ii) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, no manual numeric commands can bespecified in the following case: When the M, S, T, or B code was independently specified.Alternatively, another function (move command, dwell command, etc.) specified in theblock containing the M, S, T, or B code has already been executed.

NOTE 2 The M, S, T, or B code cannot be used to call a subprogram or custom macro.

NOTE 3 The S code cannot be specified in the constant surface speed control mode.


– 70 –

4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF

This switch specifies whether the amout of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value.

1) When the he switch is ON.

�

��

��

�� !��

��

�� !��

The coordinate values change by the amount of manual operation.

2) When the he switch is OFF.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

The coordinate values do not change.

Example 1When the following tape commands are specified :

⋅

⋅⋅

G01G90X100.0Z100.0F010 ; (1)

X200.0Y150.0 ; (2)

X300.0Y200.0 ; (3)

a) When block (2) has been executed after manual operation (X–axis +20.0, Z–axis +100.0) at the endof movement of block (1)

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��


– 71 –

b) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Y–axis +75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released

��

��

��

��

��

��

��#�� "��

�� "�� !��#"�� !$�"�� !� ��

�� "�� !��#"�� !$�"�� !� ��

c) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (X–axis+75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block (2) is read again

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� "�� !��#"�� !$�"�� !� ��

�� "�� !��#"�� !$�"�� !� ��

��#�� "��

d) When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns.

��

��

�

�� "�� !$�"�� !� ��

��#�� "��

�� "�� !$�"�� !� ��

��


– 72 –

e) When the tape commands are followed by an incremental command, they are executed in the samemanner as when the absolute switch is off.

CAUTION When the operator manually intervenes during cutter compensation, the tool moves asdescribed below:

1) Coordinates when the switch off and cutter compensation is being performed

��

��

After manual operation is performed in the status of manual absolute switch is off, during cutter com-pensation, automatic operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that wouldhave been performed if manual movement had not been performed. The amount of separation equalsto the amount that was performed manually.

2) When the switch is on during cutter compensation

Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention in the statusof manual absolute switch is on, during execution with an absolute command program in the cuttercompensation mode will be described. The center of the tool is directly moved to the top of the vectorat the beginning of the next block. After that point, the distance of manual movement is taken into con-sideration when the vector is calculated. The same occurs when manual intervention is executedwhile turning a corner.

If the INC bit in parameter No. 2402 is set to 1 when the program does not contain absolute commandsbut incremental commands, the tool is moved in the same manner as when the switch is off. If the INCbit is set to 0, even the incremental command is processed like the absolute command as describedbelow.

(a) When the operator manually intervenes while a block is being executed

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�� #��!�� !�� !�� "�� !��

�� #� ��

�� !��

��

��

��


– 73 –

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��$�� !" �"�� )� $��# �%$��

��%�� !�"�$� �

��

�$�"� $�� !�"�$ "� ��%��)� ��$�"&��#'��$�� $%"�� "��"� �� %$$�"� � �!��#�$� ��$�� $ �� &�#� �� !�$�� # � $��$� $��$�"� �� $�� $ �� &�#� #$"��$� $ � $��$ !� �� $�� ($� &��$ "� �� $�� !" �"�� #��#�"�� (��!�� &��

(b) When the operator manually intervanes affer a block is terminated by the signal block function.

��

��

��

��

PA

��

PH

��$�� !" �"�� )� $��# �%$��

��$�� $ �� $�"

��%�� !�"�$� �

#� ��#�"�� &�� $�� $ �� &�#�� !�$�� # � $��$� $�� $�"� �� $�� $ �� &�#� #$"��$� $ � $�� $ !� �� $�� ($&��$ "� �� $�� !" �"�� '�� $�� !�"�$� ��#� #$ !!�� )� $�� #�� %��$� ��$�"&��$� �� " �� $�� !�� #� �� $��#� ��#�� $�� $ �� &�#� �#� '�� $�� !�"�$ "� ��%��)� ��$�"&��#�


– 74 –

4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention

Section 4.7, “Manual Absolute On and Off,” describes the effect of manual intervention on the execution of theremaining part of the program. This section describes in detail the relationship between manual interventionand the INC bit (bit 1) in parameter No. 2402, the manual/absolute switch, and the G90 and G91 modes.

��

��

(1)

��

(1) When the manual/absolute switch is off: (1)

(2) When the manual/absolute switch is on:

(a) When the G90 mode is selected: (2)

(b) When the G91 mode is selected:

(i) When the INC bit in parameter No. 2402, is set to 1: (1)

(ii) When the INC bit is set to 0: (2)


– 75 –

4.9 Three–Dimensional Handle Feed

Three–dimensional handle feed includes three special handle feed modes, a function for changing the toollength compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, and two screen display functions. The three–di-mensional handle feed function is used to execute special handle feed for a five–axis diesinking machine.These handle feed modes function even during manual handle interrupt.

⋅ Special handle feed modes

1 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool

2 Mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool

3 Mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip

*These three modes are called as special handle feed modes.

⋅ Function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool

⋅ Function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool

⋅ Screen display functions

1 Function that displays the coordinate of the tool tip

2 Function that displays the number of pulses in a manual interrupt and the traveled distance

The following variables are used in expressions described in the subsequent sections:

Xp, Yp, Zp: Number of handle feed pulses for the axes (integrated value)

Hp : Number of specified handle feed pulses (integrated value)

A, B, C : Machine coordinate of the A–, B–, and C–axes

L : Distance from the center of rotation of the tool to the tool tip

4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool

Select the mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulsegenerator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the longitudinal directionof the tool by the specified distance.

If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the longitudinal movementby the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.

��

When the handle interrupt is made in the longitudinal direction of the tool, the pulses are distributed to the axesas described below:


– 76 –

(1) B– and C–axes

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

Xp = Hp × SIN( B ) × COS( C )Yp = Hp × SIN( B ) × SIN( C )Zp = Hp × COS( B )

If C is set to 0° (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:

Yp = Hp × SIN( B ) Zp = Hp × COS( B )

(2) A– and C–axes

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

Xp = –Hp × SIN( A ) × SIN( C )Yp = –Hp × SIN( A ) × COS( C )Zp = –Hp × COS( A )

If C is set to 0° (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:

Yp = –Hp × SIN( A ) Zp =– Hp × COS( A )


– 77 –

(3) A– and B–axes

�

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

Xp = –Hp × SIN( B )Yp = –Hp × COS( B ) × SIN( A )Zp = –Hp × COS( B ) × COS( A )

The pulses are distributed as described above.

�

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

Xp = –Hp × COS( A ) × SIN( B )Yp = –Hp × SIN( A )Zp = –Hp × COS( A ) × COS( B )



– 78 –

(4) A– and B–axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)

�

�

��

��

��

�

��

�

Xp = –Hp × COS( B )Yp =– Hp × SIN( B ) × SIN( A )Zp = –Hp × SIN( B ) × COS( A )



– 79 –

4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool

Select the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulsegenerator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the specified directionperpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the tool by the specified distance.

If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the transverse movementby the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.

��

�

�

��

�� "�� "��

��

��

��!�� "��

��

��

��!�� "��

When handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is executed, the pulses are distributed as describedbelow:


– 80 –


�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�%&

��

��

�

�

��

�� !��

�� !��

Xp = –Hp × COS( B ) × COS( C )Yp =– Hp × COS( B ) × SIN( C )Zp = –Hp × SIN( B )


�

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

�

�� !��

�� !��

�� $�� " �� %� � �� " �� !�!��"!� !�� %� �� $�� !�� %� �� !� ��" �� !�� !�� !�� !�!�� "!� !��%� � �!� !�� !�� !�� "�� !��!� !��%� � �� !�� !�� !�#��

Xp = –Hp × SIN( C )Yp =– Hp × COS( C )Zp =– 0



– 81 –


�

�

�

��

�

��

��

�

��

�

�� !��

�� !��

�� $�� " �� %� � �� " �� !�!��"!� !�� %� �� $�� !�� %� �� !� ��" �� !�� !�� !�� !�!�� "!�!�� %� � �!� !�� !�� !�� "�� !��!!�� %� � �� !�� !�� !�#��

Xp = Hp × COS( C )Yp = Hp × SIN( C )Zp = 0


�%&

�

� �

�

��

��

��

�

�

�� !��

�� !��

Xp = –Hp × COS( A ) × SIN( C )Yp =– Hp × COS( A ) × COS( C )Zp =– Hp × SIN( A )



– 82 –

(3) A– and B–axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

When the tool is moved in the Y direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:

Xy =– 0Yy =– Hp × COS( A )Zy =– Hp × SIN( A )

When the tool is moved in the Z direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:

Xz =– Hp × SIN( B )Yz = –Hp × COS( B ) × SIN( A )Zz =– Hp × COS( B ) × COS( A )


– 83 –

4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip

Select the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip and rotate the handle of the manualpulse generator. When the rotation axis (A–, B–, or C–axis) is moved, the X–, Y–, and Z–axes are adjustedso that the movement of the rotation axis does not shift the tool tip.

If this mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, rotation around the centerof the tool tip by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.

When the tool is rotated around the center of its tip, the traveled distance along linear axes (Xp, Yp, Zp) obtainedby the following expressions are output at the time the movement about the rotation axes is output. The tooltip hardly moves. When rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed, the pulses are dis-tributed to the axes as described below:

CAUTION If the tool rotates about the rotation axes at high speed, the tool tip may move.


�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

��

Traveled distance along the linear axes

Xp = L × [ SIN(B+Bp) × COS(C+Cp) – SIN(B) × COS(C) ]Yp = L × [ SIN(B+Bp) × SIN(C+Cp) – SIN(B) × SIN(C) ]Zp = L × [ COS(B+Bp) – COS(B) ]

Angular displacement of the rotation axis

Bp = Hp or Cp = Hp


– 84 –


�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

��


Xp = –L × [ SIN(A+Ap) × SIN(C+Cp) – SIN(A) × SIN(C) ]Yp = – L × [ SIN(A+Ap) × COS(C+Cp) – SIN(A) × COS(C) ]Zp = –L × [ COS(A+Ap) – COS(A) ]


Ap = Hp or Cp = Hp


– 85 –

(3) A– and B–axes (when the longitudinal axis of the tool is in the X direction)

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !��

��


Xp = L× [ COS(B+Bp) – COS(B) ]Yp = L× [ SIN(B+Bp) × SIN(A+Ap) – SIN(B) × SIN(A) ]Zp = – L× [ SIN(B+Bp) × COS(A+Ap) – SIN(B) × COS(A) ]


Ap = Hp or Bp = Hp


– 86 –

4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool

Select the mode of changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of tool when both thefollowing modes are selected: Mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool (G43.1)and mode of manual handle interrupt (MOVL and H are on). Then rotate the handle of the manual pulse genera-tor. The tool length compensation is changed in the longitudinal direction of the tool.

The change is cleared to zero when a reset or the G49 command is executed or when the offset number ischanged.

4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool

When this function is specified to perform tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, aparameter–set offset is added to the conventional tool compensation value and the sum is assumed as the toollength to be used for compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.

This function enables the user to separately specify the actual tool length and the machine–specific length be-tween the center of rotation of the rotation axis and the position at which the tool is attached. The user neednot add the two lengths to specify a compensation value.

Do not change the value of the offset parameter (No. 7548) in the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-tudinal direction of the tool. To change the value, first cancel the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-tudinal direction of the tool.

Setting parameters DTHO and ETHO (No. 7540) to 1 enables the following:

1 With the function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal directionof the tool, the tool tip coordinates are displayed according to the machine specific length, set with parame-ter No. 7548.

2 The tool holder offset function can also be used for the tool length compensation function (G43), as wellas for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.


– 87 –

4.9.6 Notes on three–dimensional handle feed

1) The three–dimensional handle feed function is invalidated when the parallel axis control function is en-abled.

2) A manual handle interrupt can be executed for three–dimensional handle feed only when the manual han-dle interrupt function is enabled.

3) Handle interrupt cannot be executed when a command related to the rotation axis is specified.

4) The axes of the machine are configured as shown below:

��

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�� "�� "��

�� "�� !��

��

��

��

��

5) Manual handle interrupt in three–dimensional handle feed

When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the following state, handle interrupt isexecuted:

a. Mode

Automatic operation mode (tape, MDI, memory)

b. Operation status

Cutting feed mode (G01, G02, G03)

c. Handle interrupt is invalidated:

During an alarm or interlock state or when an operation for positioning is in progress.


– 88 –

6) If the HLB bit does not specify the A– and C– axes when the A– and C–axes are selected, PLS alarm No.011 occurs. The alarm occurs if the same applies to the B– and C–axes or the A– and B–axes.

7) The pulses of the first manual pulse generator are used.

The mode of three–dimensional handle feed is validated when the following two conditions are satisfied:The axis selected for the corresponding three–dimensional handle feed mode is input in the manual handlefeed axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator. The corresponding handle mode signal(G156.0 to G156.3) is input.

8) The machine coordinates of rotation axes A, B, and C are read when the mode of handle feed in the longitu-dinal direction of the tool or the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is selected. Ifthe rotation axis is moved after either handle feed mode is selected, the new machine coordinates are ig-nored.

9) When the function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool isexecuted, the new tool length compensation becomes valid for the blocks read into the buffer.

4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip

The absolute coordinates of the tool tip and the actual speed are displayed when handle feed in the longitudinalor transverse direction of the tool or rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Evenin the manual handle interrupt mode, the coordinate and the speed are displayed in the same manner.

When tool length L is specified, the absolute coordinates of the tool tip is calculated on the basis of the current

position along the axes and the calculated coordinates are displayed.

The screen displaying the tool tip coordinates can be selected in the following two ways:

(a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key

Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Pressthe [POSITION] key in the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the tooltip coordinates.

(b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key

Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATIONSELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys.Then select the tool tip position display.

(1) Expressions for calculating the tool tip position

When tool length L is specified, the tool tip position is calculated on the basis of the current position alongthe axes as describe below and the calculated position is displayed:

(a) B– and C–axes

Xd = X – L × SIN( B ) × COS( C )Xd = Y – L × SIN( B ) × SIN( C )Zd = Z – L × COS( B )

When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows:

Xd = X – L × SIN( B )Xd = YZd = Z – L × COS( B )

(b) A– and C–axes

Xd = X – L × SIN( A ) × SIN( C )Xd = Y + L × SIN( A ) × COS( C )Zd = Z – L × COS( A )

When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows:

Xd = XXd = Y + L × SIN( A )Zd = Z – L × COS( A )

(c) A– and B–axes (Only for handle feed or handle interrupt in the longitudinal direction of the tool)

A–axis master

Xd = X – L × SIN( B )Xd = Y + L × COS( B ) × SIN( A )Zd = Z – L × COS( B ) × COS( A )


– 89 –

B–axis master

Xd = X – L × COS( A ) × SIN( B )Xd = Y + L × SIN( A )Zd = Z – L × COS( A ) × COS( B )

The tool tip position is calculated as shown above.

A– and B–axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)

Xd = X – L × COS( B )Xd = Y – L × SIN( B ) × SIN( A )Zd = Z + L × SIN( B ) × COS( A )

where

Xd, Yd, Zd : Tool tip position

X, Y, Z : Current position along the axes (workpiece coordinate)

A, B, C : Current position from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system of the A–, B–, andC–axes

L : Specified tool length

(2) Display formats

(a) On the 9–inch CRT (b) On the 14–inch CRT

TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001

(ABSOLUTE)X 123.456 (MM)Y 234.567 (MM)Z 56.789 (MM)B 78.898 (DEG.)C 21.893 (DEG.)

ACT, F : 15 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (PRM)

TL_HEAD HDL_PLS

TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001

(ABSOLUTE)X 123.456 (MM)Y 234.567 (MM)Z 56.789 (MM)B 78.901 (DEG.)C 21.893 (DEG.)

(ACTUAL SPEED)

F 15 S 0 (MM/MIN) (PRM)

TOOL HANDLEHEAD PULSE

4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance

The total number of pulses in handle interrupt and the total traveled distances along individual axes can bedisplayed when the handle feed in the longitudinal or transverse direction of the tool, or the rotational handlefeed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even in the manual handle interrupt mode, the number ofpulses and the distances are displayed in the same manner.

When bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1, the pulses generated by a three–dimensional handle interruptare not counted to update the displayed number of manual interrupt pulses.

The number of manual interrupt pulses (No. 4101) displayed on the diagnosis screen (coordinate system shift)is, however, updated even if bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1.

The screen displaying the number of pulses in the handle interrupt and traveled distances along individual axescan be selected in the following two ways:

(a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key

Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Pressthe [POSITION] key of the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the num-ber of pulses and the traveled distances along individual axes.

(b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key

Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATIONSELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys.Select the display of the number of pulses and traveled distances along individual axes.


– 90 –

(1) Display formats

(a) On the 9–inch CRT (b) On the 14–inch CRT

TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001(PULSE) (DISTANCE)

X 0.000 X 1.234Y 0.000 Y 2.098Z 1.215 Z 3.789B 0.000 B 4.123C 0.000 C 0.000

TOOL : 0.789ACT.F : 15 (MM/MIN) S 0 (PRM)

TL_HEAD HDL_PLS

TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001(PULSE) (DISTANCE)X 0.000 X 1.234Y 0.000 Y 2.098Z 1.215 Z 3.789B 0.000 B 4.123C 0.000 C 0.000

(TOOL)L 0.789

(ACTUAL SPEED)F 15 S 0

(MM/MIN) (PRM)

TOOL HANDLEHEAD PULSE

NOTE In the column of the number of pulses, the value next to axis X, Y, Z, B (or A), or C (or B) doesnot indicate the number of pulses in the handle interrupt for each axis.

The indicated value depends on the special handle function as described below.

The axis in square brackets indicates the feed direction when the longitudinal direction of thetool is in the X direction and the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes.

1 Handle feed in the X [Y] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the first axis.

2 Handle feed in the Y [Z] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the second axis.

3 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handleinterrupt is indicated next to the third axis.

4 Handle feed around the A– and B–axes [B–axis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around thecenter of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fourthaxis.

5 Handle feed around the C–axis [A–axis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the centerof the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fifth axis.

6 Changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number ofpulses in the handle interrupt (tool length compensation) is indicated next to L or T00L. (This isindicated at the time the compensation is validated.)


– 91 –

4.10 Manual Interruption Function for Three–Dimensional Coordinate Conversion

When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the three–dimensional coordinate conversionmode, this function adds the travel distance specified by the manual pulse generator to the travel distance dur-ing automatic operation. This addition is performed for the new (converted) three–dimensional coordinatecomponent (programmed coordinate system) in the direction of the axis selected for manual feed using themanual pulse generator.

�

�

�

�

��

��

�� !�� !��

��

Fig. 4.10 For the three basic axes

4.10.1 Interruption

This function performs interruption only when all the conditions in 1 to 8 are met.

1 During simultaneous manual and automatic operation mode (including manual interruption using themanual pulse generator)

2 During three–dimensional coordinate conversion (i.e. while blocks G68 to G69 are being executed.)

3 During cutting mode (i.e. while blocks from a G code for cutting, such as G01, G02, or G03, to G00 are beingexecuted.)

4 When parking along the feed axis is not enabled (i.e. when PKn for the feed axis is low.)

5 When the machine moves along the three axes selected for three–dimensional coordinate conversion

6 When the axis for which the function performs interruption is a master axis under parallel axis control (inthis case, no slave axes are converted).

7 When feed in the tool axis direction or the direction perpendicular to the tool axis or rotation around the tooltip center is not selected for the manual operation or the manual interruption using the manual pulse gener-ator when the ALNGH, RGHTH, and RNDH input signals are all low.

8 While the playback function is not being executed

The result of adding the feedrate in the three–dimensional coordinate conversion mode is not permitted to ex-ceed the maximum cutting speed for each axis.


– 92 –

4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system

When this function is effective, the current position in the workpiece coordinate system does not depend onthe travel distance specified during manual interruption using the manual pulse generator. The current positionis therefore not updated even when the manual pulse generator is rotated. Each current position in the machinecoordinate system and in the relative coordinate system depends on the travel distance specified during manu-al interruption. As shown in Fig. 1, the travel distance is added along the Z’–axis. The travel distance is dis-played using the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the coordinate system to be converted. The travel distance speci-fied by this function can be monitored on the manual overlap screen. The DMK bit of parameter 2208 specifieswhether the travel distance is displayed on the manual overlap screen using the coordinate system before orafter three–dimensional coordinate conversion.

B–62564E–1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

– 93 –

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.1 Operation Mode

5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode

1 Load the program tape in the tape reader.

2 Set the mode selector to the TAPE position.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

3 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

��

� � ��

When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.

5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode

1 Preload programs in memory. See Chapter 9 in Part III.

2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2 in Part III.

3 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.

EDIT

MEMORY

TAPEMDI

HANDLE

INC

JOG

4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

� � ��

��

When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.

B–62564E–1/025. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

– 94 –

5.1.3 MDI operation

(1) Entering programs in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode

Multiple blocks of commands can be entered from the CRT/MDI panel to the buffer memory for operationin the MDI mode. The capacity of the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode is 200 characters.

POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE

ON M CHECK G E E R

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY

WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY

⋅9” CRT unit

�'!�&�"! �!'� ��(

�"�&� ��(% �#�$�&�"! �!'� ��(

9” CRT function selection keys

9” CRT operation selection keys

�� PROGRAM �� CHAPTER �

��

⋅14” CRT unit

�'!�&�"! �!'� ��(

�"�&� ��(% �#�$�&�"! �!'� ��(

�� "#�$�&�"!� %��&�"!� ��(%

�� '!�&�"!� %��&�"!� ��(%

1 Set the mode selector to the MDI mode.

2 Press the function menu key to changethe soft keys to the function selectionkeys.

3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard keyto display the program screen.

4 When the program screen is not a pro-gram text screen

(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key toswitch the soft keys to the chapterselection keys. Then, press thedesired chapter selection key.

or

(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hardkey repeatedly until the programtext screen appears.

5 Press the operation menu key toswitch the soft keys to the operationselection keys.

6 Enter the number of the desired pro-gram with the address keys and nu-meric keys. The program is tempo-rarily stored in the key input buffer.Press the [INSERT] key to transmitthe program in the key input buffer tothe buffer memory for operation inthe MDI mode. The contents of thebuffer memory are then displayed onthe CRT.

7 To enter more programs, repeatstep 6.

(2) Editing the program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode

The program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode can be edited in the same way as for theprogram stored in CNC memory.

The following editing is possible:

(a) Forward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)

(b) Backward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)

(c) Word change (See Subsection 9.4.2.)

(d) Word insertion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)

(e) Word deletion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)

(f) Program rewinding (See Subsection 5.2.2.)


– 95 –

5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed

5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number

1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY mode, set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.

To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE position.

Only searching for a sequence number is possible during the operation in the TAPE mode. Searchingfor a program number is impossible.

2 Press the function menu key.

3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.

4 When the program screen is not a program text screen

(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the[TEXT] key.

or

(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.

5 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

6 Press the [FORE SEARCH] key.

7 (i) To search for a program number,press the [(PROG#)]key to enter 0in the key inputbuffer. Then, thesystem prompts the operator toenter the number of the program tobe searched for.

(ii) To search for a sequence num-ber, press the [(SEQ#)] key to en-ter N in the input buffer. Then, thesystem prompts the operator toenter the number of the sequenceto be searched for.

8 Enter the number of the program or se-quence to be searched for.

9 Press the [EXEC] key to search for theprogram or sequence number.

��




ON M CHECK G E E R

�� ("�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

�� #$�%�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

�� ("�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

�� #$�%�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

��

��

�

�


– 96 –

5.2.2 Searching for a program by name

This operation is possible in the EDIT or MEM mode.

The procedure is as follows. The following figures are examples of the soft keys on the 9” CRT.

1 Press the function menu key and [PROGRAM] key to display the program screen.

2 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key a few times or press the [CHAPTER] key and the desired chapterselection key to display the text screen.


* The above steps are the same as those in the procedure for searching for a program by number.

4 Press the [ID_SRCH] key.

��

5 Press the [(NAME)] key.

��

6 Enter the name of the program to be searched for.

The first 48 characters of the program name are used in the search.

There are two search methods: Entering the whole program name and entering part of the program nameand specifying a special character to represent an arbitrary character string (generally called a wild card).

The following characters can be used as wild cards:

*: Represents any character string including a null character.

?: Represents any character.

7 Pressing the [EXEC] key selects the program whose name matches the entered program name.

� ��

The following example describes the use of a wild card.

Assume that the following programs are already registered:

O0001(GEAR–1000.MAIN)

O0002(SHAFT–1000.MAIN)

O1000(GEAR–1000.SUS)

Entering SHAFT* or SHAFT–????.MAIN searches for program O0002. Either of the wild cards, aster-isks or question marks may be entered anywhere.

Be sure to enter the partial program name and wild cards that uniquely identify the desired program.If *1000* is entered, for example, all the programs are searched for, and the desired program is notselected.

Remarks) To enter SP (null character) on the small CRT/MDI panel, press numeric key 1 while press-ing the [SHIFT] key. To enter ? on the same panel, press numeric key 2 while pressing the [SHIFT]key. These marks are not indicated on either of the numeric keys.


– 97 –

5.2.3 Rewinding a program

�� ("�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

�� #$�%�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

��

��




ON M CHECK G E E R

�� ("�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

�� #$�%�'�#"� &�!��'�#"� �)&

1 To perform the operation in the MEMORYmode, set the mode selector to theMEMORY position.

To perform the operation in the TAPEmode, set the mode selector to the TAPEposition.


3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key todisplay the program screen.

4 When the displayed program screen isnot a program text screen

(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to changethe soft keys to the chapter selectionkeys, then press the [TEXT] key.

(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.

5 Press the operation menu key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

6 Press the [REWIND] key. The program is rewound, and the beginning of the program issearched for.

The operation selection keys remain displayed in the soft key display field.

or

This subsection describes the procedurefor searching for the beginning of the pro-gram to be executed. �

��


– 98 –

5.3 Starting Automatic Operation

(1) Operation in the MEMORY mode


2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2.

3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operator’s panel.

(2) Operation in the TAPE mode

1 Load the tape and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.

2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2.

3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operator’s panel.

5.4 Executing Automatic Operation

While executing a block, the CNC usually calculates the next block to convert it into data in the executable form.This is called buffering.

The number of blocks to be buffered has been extended to 2, and the two blocks are preread so far as timepermits. This prevents an interruption in the pulse distribution between two successive small blocks.

The XBUF bit in parameter No. 7616 determines whether the number of blocks to be buffered is extended to2.

NOTE 1 To maintain the operational compatibility between Series 15–B and conventional CNCs orsuchlike if there is no need to execute small blocks at high speed, specify 1 as the number ofblocks to be buffered by setting XBUF to 0.

NOTE 2 After changing the setting of XBUF in parameter No. 7616, be sure to turn the power off, thenon.

NOTE 3 When the multi–buffer option is provided, the multi–buffer function overrides this bufferingfunction, rendering this function ineffective.

NOTE 4 The block of a canned cycle, cutter compensation C, or suchlike is also regarded as a singleblock.

After automatic operation is started, the following are executed:

1 A one–block command is read from the specified program.

2 The block command is decoded.

3 The command execution is started.

4 The command in the next block is read.

5 Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate execution.

6 Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block can be started. This is be-cause buffering has been executed.

7 Hereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to (6).


– 99 –

5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation

There are two means to stop the automatic operation. One is to command a stop command in a program wherethe execution is to be stopped (See 5.5.1 – 5.5.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushingan appropriate button on the operator’s panel (See 5.5.4 and 5.5.5).

5.5.1 Program stop (M00)

Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existingmodal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted byspecifying an CNC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)

5.5.2 Optional stop (M01)

Similarly to M00, cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is only effectivewhen the Optional Stop switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to ON.

5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30)

1) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory.

2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)

3) Only M30

Rewinding is used in both the MEMORY and TAPE modes to search for the beginning of the program. Thetape is not rewound in the reelless tape reader in the TAPE mode. When using the tape reader with reelsin the TAPE mode and when many programs are recorded on the tape, the tape is always rewound to thebeginning of the tape, indicated by the ER or % code. When the tape is rewound may vary according tothe machine tool builder. Some machines instruct tape rewinding with M02.

5.5.4 Feed hold

When Feed Hold button on the operator’s panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool deceleratesto a stop at a time.

1 Press the feed hold button.

��

��

When pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cycle start lamp turns off.

��

��

At this time,

i) Feeding stops if the tool is moving.

ii) Dwell execution stops, if executing.

iii) M, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.


– 100 –

5.5.5 Reset

Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using reset button onthe CRT/MDI panel or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool movingstatus, the motion is slowed down then stops.

5.5.6 Single–block stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers

When the program contains a block having the same sequence number as the preset sequence number whilethe program is being executed, the block is executed, then the system enters the single–block stop state.

(1) Specifying the desired sequence number

Set the mode selector to the MDI position and specify the sequence number for the single–block stop.

Setting: 1 to 9999

Initial setting: 0 (immediately after the power is turned on)

When a sequence number agrees with the specified one or when the system is reset, the sequence num-ber is changed to 0.

(2) Conditions for single–lock stop

1 When the specified sequence number agrees with the sequence number assigned to the clock con-taining an instruction processed only in the CNC control unit, the system does not enter the single–block stop state.

ExampleN1 #1 = 1 ;N2 IF[ #1 EQ 1 ] GOTO8 ;N3 GOTO9 ;N4 M98P1000L3 ;N5 M99 ;

⋅⋅

If the sequence numbers match in case of the block shown in the example above, the system doesnot enter the single–block stop state. In addition, the preset sequence number is not changed.

2 When the program contains multiple blocks whose sequence numbers are the same, the block whosesequence number agrees with the specified one first in the execution order is executed, then the sys-tem enters the single–block stop state.

3 Stopping at the block for which the number of times the block is executed is specified

When the sequence number of this block agrees with the preset sequence number, the block isexecuted the specified number of times, then the system enters the single–block stop state.

ExampleN1 G91 ;N2 G81X1000Y1000R–5000Z–2000F100 ;N3 Z1000Y1000L3 ;

⋅⋅G80 ;

In this example, the cycle of block N3 is executed three times, then the system enters the single–blockstop state.


– 101 –

5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation

This function is used to restart machining at the specified block when the tool is damaged or after suspendingmachining over a holiday.

A sequence number or block number is used to specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.

(1) Specifying the sequence number to restart machining at the desired block

Specify the sequence number of the block at which machining is to be restarted, the number of the programcontaining the sequence number, and the number of times the block with the sequence number is to beexecuted.

The following data can be specified:

(a) Sequence number only

(b) Sequence number and the number of times the block is to be executed

(c) Sequence number and program number

(d) Sequence number, the number of times the block is to be executed, and the program number

(2) Specifying the block number to restart machining at the desired block

Machining can be restarted at a block that is not assigned a sequence number.

When the CNC is stopped, the number of blocks that have been executed is displayed on the programscreen or program restart screen. The operator references the block number displayed on the CRT tospecify the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted.

The displayed number indicates the number of the blocks that have been completed when the CNC isstopped. To restart machining at the block in which the CNC stopped, therefore, specify the displayedblock number plus one.

The block number is not lost when the power is turned off.

The number of the blocks is counted from the block at which machining starts. One block refers to a clusterof commands at which a single–block stop is allowed among blocks in executable form converted fromthe CNC program.

Example 1

CNC program Number of blocks

O0001;G90G92X0Y0Z0;G01X100.F100;G03X0I–50.F50;M30;

12345

Example 2

CNC program Number of blocks

O0002;G90G92X0Y0Z0;G90G00Z100.;G81X100.Y0.Z–120.R–80.F50;#1=#1+1;#2=#2+1;#3=#3+1;G00X0Z0;M30;

123

4, 5, 666678

The canned cycle is counted as three blocks. Macro statements are not counted as blocks.


– 102 –

5.6.1 Program re–start

This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be re–started when a tool is broken down or when it is desiredto re–start machining operation after a day off, and re–starts the machining operation from that block. It canalso be used as a high–speed tape check function.

(1) Restarting machining when a tool is damaged (P type)

Use the following procedure:

(a) Press the Feed Hold button to escape the tool, and replace it with a new one. Modify the offset amountif it varies.

(b) Turn on the program re–start switch on the machine operator’s panel.

(c) Searching for the beginning of the program

(i) In the MEMORY mode


2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. Then,press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.

3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys. Then,press the [REWIND] soft key.

(ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the beginningand set the mode selector to the TAPE position.

(d) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then press the [RESTART P] operation selection key.

(e) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.

(i) Specifying the block by its sequence number

1 Press the [P–SQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which machiningis to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to be executedwith numeric keys.

2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block with the specified sequence number.

When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search for theblock with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the sequencenumber in the following way. To search for a subprogram that is called several times for theblock with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of times the subpro-gram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter another comma, thenspecify the desired program number beginning with O. To search for the block with sequencenumber 999 when the subprogram is called five times from program 1000, for example, enterP5,999,O1000, then press the [EXEC] soft key.

P5,999,O1000[EXEC]

The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be omittedwhen the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program number.

(i) Sequence number only

P999[EXEC]

(ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called

P5,999[EXEC]

(iii) Sequence number and program number

P999,O1000[EXEC]

(iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number

P5,999,O1000[EXEC]


– 103 –

(ii) Specifying the block by the block number

1 Press the [P–BK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be restartedwith numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100.

PB100[EXEC]

2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched for.

(f) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a pro-gram.

(START POSITION): Displays the position where machining is restarted.

(REMAINING DISTANCE): Displays the distance from the current tool position to the position wheremachining is restarted.

M :…… If the M codes consist of two digits, displays the last 35 M codes issued. If the M codes consist of more than two digits, displays the number of M codes that fit on the screen.

No negative M codes are displayed.

T :…… Displays the last two T codes issued.

S :…… Displays the last S code issued.

B :…… Displays the last B code issued.

BC :…… Displays the block number.

(g) Turn off the program restart switch.

(h) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selectorto the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed onthe program restart screen.

(i) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position.

When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is movedto the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bumping into theworkpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe position then pressthe [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position in the dry run modealong each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110, then restarts machining.

(2) When machining is restarted after the following events (applicable to programs of type Q)

(i) The power is turned off then on.

(ii) The automatic operation is suspended to change the coordinate systems.

For example,

(a) The G92 command is issued from the MDI panel.

(b) The coordinate system is shifted.

(c) The coordinate system is automatically determined by reference position return.

(d) The [ORIGIN] key is pressed.

(e) The coordinate systems are changed by resetting the system.


– 104 –

(a) When the power is turned on, all the necessary operations including reference position return are performed.

(b) Manually move the tool to the program start point, that is, the machining start point. This operationsets the same continuous–state data and coordinate system as those when machining started.

(c) Specify or change the offset if necessary.

(d) Set the program restart switch on the machine operator’s panel to the on position.

(e) Search for the beginning of the program.

(i) In the MEMORY mode


2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.Then, press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.

3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys.Then, press the [REWIND] soft key.

(ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the begin-ning and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.

(f) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then, press the [RESTART P] operation selection key.

(g) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.

(i) Specifying the block by its sequence number

1 Press the [Q–SQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which machining is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is tobe executed with numeric keys.

2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block having the specified sequence number.

When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to searchfor the block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with thesequence number in the following way. To search for a subprogram to be called severaltimes for the block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number oftimes the subprogram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enteranother comma, then specify the desired program number beginning with O. To searchfor the block with sequence number 999 when the subprogram is called five times fromprogram 1000, for example, enter Q5,999,O1000, then press the EXEC soft key.

Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]

The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can beomitted when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program num-ber.

(i) Sequence number only

Q999[EXEC]

(ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called

Q5,999[EXEC]

(iii) Sequence number and program number

Q999,O1000[EXEC]

(iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number

Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]

(ii) Specifying the block by the block number

1 Press the [Q–BK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be re-started with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100.

QB100[EXEC]

2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searchedfor.

(h) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting aprogram.

(i) Turn off the program restart switch.


– 105 –

(j) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selec-tor to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayedon the program restart screen.

(k) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position.When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool ismoved to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bump-ing into the workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe posi-tion then press the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart positionin the dry run mode along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110 then re-starts machining.

CAUTION In general, the tool cannot be returned to the correct position if one of the conditions occurs:

(i) The tool is manually moved when the manual absolute mode is ineffective.(ii) The tool is moved in the machine lock state without considering the movement along the

Z–axis.(iii) The mirror image function is used.(iv) No coordinate system is specified at the beginning of the program during incremental

programming.(v) The tool is manually moved while it is being automatically returned along the axes.(vi) The machine lock state is released after the command for restarting the program is

issued in that state.(vii) Restarting the program is specified in a block between the block for skip cutting and the

subsequent absolute command block.(viii)The coordinate system is set, changed, or shifted after the block is searched for.

In the case of (iii), the tool can be returned by a block in the program of type P if the blockfollows the last block for specifying whether the mirror image function is effective. In thiscase, the mirror image signal must be kept in the same state as when the interruptionoccurred.Care must be taken because no alarm occurs under any of the above conditions.

NOTE 1 A program of type P cannot be restarted under the following conditions:(i) When automatic operation is not performed after the power is turned on(ii) When automatic operation is not performed after the coordinate system is set, changed,

or shifted (Shifting the coordinate system refers to changing the offset from the externalworkpiece reference point.)If there are blocks that follow the block in which the coordinate system is set or changedlast while machining is suspended, the blocks can be restarted normally by restarting theprogram of type P.

NOTE 2 Whenever the tool is moved along each axis to the machining restart position in both programsof types P and Q, a single–block stop is valid after the tool has moved along one axis. In thiscase, however, manual intervention from the MDI panel is not possible.The tool can be manually moved. When the tool is already returned along an axis, however,it is not moved manually along the axis.

NOTE 3 When searching for a block, unless the conditions such as the input signals and offsets are thesame as those when machining was performed last, the tool does not return to the correctrestart position. Searching for the block is not stopped even when the [SINGLE BLOCK] switchis turned on or when the mode selector is switched between the MEMORY and TAPE positions.

NOTE 4 If one of the following conditions occurs, retry the operations for restarting the program fromthe beginning:– The [FEED HOLD] switch is turned on while the block is searched for.– The system is reset while or after the block is searched for.

NOTE 5 If the [CYCLE START] button is pressed when the program restart switch is turned on, theoperation is ignored, and a warning message is displayed.

NOTE 6 Manual operation must be performed in the manual absolute mode irrespective of whether itis performed before or after machining.

NOTE 7 After the block is searched for, the move command cannot be issued from the MDI to move thetool along the axes.


– 106 –

NOTE 8 After the command for restarting the program is issued, the character string PRSR is displayedat the bottom of the CRT screen while the tool is being returned along the last axis.

NOTE 9 Notes on restarting the program for which macro variables are used:

(i) Common variables

The previously specified values are used as the common variables when restarting theprogram. The variables are not automatically preset. The necessary common variablesare therefore initialized to the values used for the previous automatic operationimmediately before the program is restarted.

(ii) DI/DO

While the program is restarted, DI data can be read from the corresponding systemvariables, but DO data cannot be output.

(iii) Clock

While the program is restarted, the clock time can be checked with the system variable,but the time cannot be preset.

(iv) Tool offset and offset from the workpiece reference point

While the program is being restarted, offsets can be read from the corresponding systemvariables, but offsets cannot be changed except for programs of type Q.

NOTE 10 When the program specifies machining at high speed

When a program contains a block for high–speed machining, the program cannot be restartedfrom the block. However, the program can be restarted from any block other than one forhigh–speed machining.

NOTE 11 The number of blocks is not lost when the power is turned off.

The recorded number of blocks is cleared when the [CYCLE START] button is pressed afterthe system is reset. The number of blocks is recorded every 60 seconds during automaticoperation.

NOTE 12 The number related to blocks displayed on the program screen indicates the number of blockcurrently being executed. However, in the following cases, the number of blocks which havebeen executed is displayed:

– When all of the blocks have been executed

– When the system is reset

– When the single–block stop button is pressed

In other words, the number related to the blocks is displayed as follows when the CNC programis stopped or suspended under to the conditions below:

– When the [FEED HOLD] button is pressed, the number of block currently being executedis displayed.

– When the system is reset, the number of executed blocks is displayed.

– When the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch is turned on, the number of executed blocks isdisplayed.

When the system is reset while block 10 is being executed, for example, the currently displayednumber of blocks are changed from 10 to 9.

NOTE 13 Suppose the operator manually intervenes in system operation from the MDI panel afterturning on the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch during program execution. The number of issued CNCcommand blocks is added to the number of blocks.

5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes

The program restart function enables the following operations after searching for the block to be restarted:

(1) Before moving the tool to the machining restart position

1 The program restart function automatically outputs the last M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC.

If the last S code is the S code (maximum spindle speed) specified in the block containing G92, theprogram restart function outputs this S code as the maximum spindle speed signal (MR0 to MR15).If the S code is the other S code (specified spindle speed), it is output as the specified spindle speedsignal (R0 to R15).


– 107 –

Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart screen regardless of whether it isin the same block as a G92.

2 While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart function automatically outputs all thesampled M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35 Mcodes. When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the function outputs the latest 35 M codesto the PMC.

Specify whether the function performs operation 1 or 2 with the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620).

(2) Before the machining restart position is reached.

On the program restart screen, M, S, and B codes can be specified from the MDI for output to the PMCwhile the system is still in the MEM or TAPE mode.

⋅ Outputting the last M, S, T, and B codesWhen the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block tobe restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs the lastM, S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.

In the single block stop state, press the cycle start button again after the program restart function outputs thelast M, S, T, and B codes. The tool then starts moving to the machining restart position.

⋅ Outputting all the M codes and the last S, T, and B codesWhen the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block tobe restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs all theM codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.

Example When M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, T0101, S1000, and B10 are already sampled: The pro-gram restart function outputs these codes in the following program format before moving thetool to the machining restart position:

M10 T0101 S1000 B10 ; M11 ; M12 ; M13 ; M14 ;

⋅ Outputting the M, S, B codes on the program restart screenWhen the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, enter M, S, and B codes from the MDI in the MEM or TAPEmode until the tool completes moving to the machining restart position after searching for the block to be re-started with the program restart function. The program restart function then outputs these codes to the PMC.

[Operation]

1 Search for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart screen is dis-played. On this screen, the operation soft keys OVRSTR and CLEAR are displayed for the 9–inch CRT,and OVERSTORE and CLEAR are displayed for the 14–inch CRT.

PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** **Z 30. 000

T 0101 0202S 2000B 13

ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM)MEN *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** *** INPUR CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

Displays for the 9–inch CRT

2 The program restart function enters the overstore mode to display the overstore field on the screen whenthe OVRSTR soft key is pressed before the machining restart position is reached.


– 108 –

To set the overstore mode while the tool is moving to the machining restart position, temporarily stop therestart operation with the feed hold function, then press the OVRSTR soft key.

Enter the M, S, and B codes to be output in the overstore field from the MDI. On this screen, plus (+) andminus (–) signs are not displayed if they are entered.

Example To enter M10, S1000, and B20 in the overstore field

⋅Enter M10 from the MDI.

⋅Press the INPUT key.

⋅Enter S1000 from the MDI.


⋅Enter B20 from the MDI.


PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** **Z 30. 000

(OVER STORE)M 10S 1000 B 20

ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM)MEM *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** *** INPUT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

Displays for the 9–inch CRT

3 After the codes have been entered in the overstore field, press the cycle start button. The codes in theoverstore field are output to the PMC, then they are cleared from the field.

4 To clear the M, S, B codes entered in the overstore field, press the CLEAR soft key. All the entered codesare cleared.

5 To cancel the overstore mode, press the OVRSTR soft key or reset key in the overstore mode.

After the OVRSTR soft key or reset key is pressed, the program restart screen is restored to the initial stateshown in item (1).

6 To continue the restart operation, cancel the overstore mode and press the cycle start button.

NOTE 1 When M, S, B codes are entered and output to the PMC in the overstore mode, these codesare not displayed on the program restart screen.

NOTE 2 When the operation mode is changed to a mode other than the MEM or TAPE mode in theoverstore mode, the overstore mode is not canceled, but no code can be entered in theoverstore field.

5.6.3 Block restart

The block restart function is used to restart an automatic operation that was interrupted because of a damagedtool or some other problem. Automatic operation can be resumed at the start point of the interrupted block orat an intermediate point in it.

(1) Block restart operation sequence

The block restart operations must always be performed in the sequence shown below. The block returnswitch is provided on the machine operator’s panel for use with this function.


– 109 –

��

�$� ��$%'#�" )-� %��*''��

�)%&� �*)%#�) �� %&�'�) %$� �-�&*(� $�� )�� %"�� *))%$�%'� (, )�� $�� )�� #%��

�� "%�!� '�()�')� �*$�) %$� ��$$%)� �� *(�� )�� '�(�)� %'�#�'��$�-� �*))%$� ��(� ��$� &'�((�� $�� )�� (-()�#� ��(�$)�'�� )�� '�(�)� ()�)��

��)'��)� )�� )%%"� #�$*�""-��$�

)�!�� )�� $��((�'-� ��) %$(�

��)� )�� %��(�)� +�"*�� $ �� $��((�'-�

�*'$� %$� )�� "%�!� '�)*'$� (, )�� $� )�� %$) $*%*(� #�$*�"� #%��

�� #�((�� " $!(� �))�� %))%#� %�� )�� (�'��$�

�%+�� )�� )%%"� #�$*�""-� �(�"%(�� )%� )�� &% $)� ,��'�� )��*)%#�) �� %&�'�) %$� ,�( $)�''*&)�� (� &%(( �"�,� "�� %�(�'+ $�� )�� )%%"#%+�#�$)� ��'��*""-�

�%+�� )�� )%%"� )%,�'�� )��()�') $�� &% $)� #�$*�""-�� )%%"� �*)%#�) ��""-()%&(� ,��$� )� '��(� )��()�')� &% $)�

�$� )�� *))�'� �%#&�$(�) %$#%�� +��)%'� (� �%'#��&�'&�$� �*"�'� )%� )�� &'%�'�##��&�)�� $� )�� $)�''*&)��"%�!� �)� )�� ()�')� &% $)�� $�)�� )%%"� (� '�)*'$�� )%� )�� ) &%�� )�� +��)%'�

��)*'$� )%� )�� #%�� (�"��)��&' %'� )%� )�� $)�''*&) %$� %�)�� *)%#�) �� %&�'�) %$�� $�)*'$� %$� )�� "%�!� '�)*'$�(, )�� )� (� %��

�� #�((�� #�-� �� (&"�-�� %$()�$)"-� %'()�')� �" $! $�� )� )�� %))%#%�� )�� (�'��$� ��&�$� $�� %$)�� %$� ) %$� (�)� *&�

�*(�� )�� -�"�� ()�')� �*))%$,� "�� )�� "%�!� '�)*'$(, )�� (� %$�

��$� )�� -�"�� ()�')� "�#&" ��)(� )�� *)%#�) �� %&�'�) %$� (� '�()�')��)*'$� %�� )�� "%�!� '�)*'$(, )��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

Of the above operations, the following operations apply only to the restart function:

(6)–2 Manual operation with the block return switch turned on

(8) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on


– 110 –

(a) Manual operation with the block return switch turned on

Move the tool in the continuous manual feed mode toward the start point of the interrupted block whilethe block return switch is on. The tool automatically stops at the start point. When the start point isreached for all axes, the message RSTR disappears from the bottom of the screen.

If the block return switch is turned on in the continuous manual feed (JOG) mode, the distancebetween the current position of the tool and the start point of the interrupted block is calculated.The start point of the interrupted block refers to the point calculated as follows:

Absolute coordinate of the programmed start point

+

Previously compensated tool value

+

Newly calculated tool length compensation value

=

Newly calculated cutter compensation value perpendicular to the interrupted block at the startpoint

If the tool offset value is changed, the new compensation value (vector) is calculated based onthe new offset value for the tool length compensation (G43 and G44) of the fixed compensationaxis (parameter 6000L x Y = 0) and the cutter diameter compensation (G41 and G42). However,the compensation value for the tool length compensation of an arbitrary compensation axis (pa-rameter 6000L x Y = 1) and the tool offset (G45 to G48) remain unchanged. The calculated dis-tance to the start point is displayed on the CRT screen using the [POSITION] function selectionkey and the [RESTART (B)] chapter selection key. In general, when the block return switch isturned on in the continuous manual feed mode, the screen for restarting operation (referred to asthe restart screen) appears automatically.

The restart screen contains the following displays:

BLOCK RESTART O1234 N5678

(DESTINATION) (ABSOLUTE)X 100.000 X 0.000Y 200.000 Y 100.000Z –100.000 Z 200.000A –200.000 A –100.000B 0.000 B –200.000

(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)X 0.000 X 100.000Y 100.000 Y 100.000Z 200.000 Z –300.000A –100.000 A –100.000B –200.000 B 200.000

**** JOG RSTR**** *** *** *** *** ***

(i) (DESTINATION): Absolute coordinates of the tool center at the start point of the interrupted block

(ii) (DISTANCE TO GO): Distance from the current position (ABSOLUTE) of the tool to the start point(DESTINATION) of the interrupted block


– 111 –

(iii) Status of RSTR display

Various conditions (mode, cutter compensation, etc.) RSTR is displayed continuously.

Continuous manual feed (JOG) mode RSTR blinks.

Automatic operation(MEMORY, TAPE, or MDI)

When the outer corner is beingcompensated in the cutter compensation mode.

RSTR blinks.

( , , )Other than the above RSTR is displayed continuously.

Reset stateRSTR does not appear regard-lessof what the current mode is.

CAUTION When returning the tool to the start point of the block by a manual operation using the blockrestart function, the tool is returned to the tip of the vector vertical to the block at its start point.Therefore, if the start point of the interrupted block is inside the corner, the workpiece maybe cut when the tool returns to the start point.

In this case, return the the tool to an appropriate position while watching it, rather than to thestart point.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


– 112 –

NOTE If the tool movement is interrupted during a canned drilling cycle and is restarted, the toolalways returns to the positioning point, regardless of whether the current mode is the initial levelreturn (G98) mode or point–R level return (G99) mode.

�� #� #�� &�� #�� #�� "� !�#$!�� '� #�� !�"#�!#� �$��#�� !��!��""� �� &��#��!� #��$!!��#� �� "� #�� #�� %�� !�#$!�� !� ��#�� %�� !�#$!�� #�� #

��#� �

��#� �� #�!!$�#��

��#� �

�� #�� "�� !� "$�"� $��#� �!�� '�� #�� #�� !�#$!�"� #�� #��!� �� #�� &�� #&��"�#��"� ��!�� #�� #�� !� ��

��#� �

��#�� #

��#� �� #�!!$�#��

��#� �

��#� �

��#� �

��#� �� #�!!$�#��

�!� ��#�� %�� !�#$!��

�!� � ��#�� %�� !�#$!��

��#� !�#$!�� #�� '� #�� !�"#�!#� �$��#��

��#� !�#$!�� #�� '� #�� !�"#�!#� �$��#��


– 113 –

(b) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on

If the cycle start button is pressed while the block return switch is on, the tool length compensationvalue and the cutter compensation value are recalculated, and automatic operation is restarted towardthe compensated end point from the current position.

��

��

� ��

��

��

The tool moves toward the recalculated end point from its current position regardless of whether it has beenreturned to the start point of or an arbitrary point in the interrupted block prior to pushing the cycle start button.

CAUTION The tool may cut the workpiece when it is being moved toward the end point of theinterrupted block. In this case, an alarm is displayed and the the tool is inhibited from movingto the end point. This function is referred to as the block restart interference check.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

��

��

��

��

��

��

If the tool will cut the workpiece when automatic operation is restarted, press the cancel key to reset the alarm.Then move the tool to a proper position manually while watching it, and perform the restart operation again.The block restart interference check is performed based on the value that is set in parameter No. 7651 (d: errorlimit at the start of block restart). If the distance between the normal path and the point where the block is re-started is d or longer, an interference check alarm is issued.


– 114 –

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

The block restart interference check function can be enabled and disabled using bit 7 of parameter No. 7605.However, the interference check is not performed in the following cases even if it has been enabled:

– When the tool is moved manually to the start point of the interrupted block while the block return switchis on.

– When the interrupted automatic operation is restarted with the cutter compensation mode canceled.

– When no vector is available for cutter compensation at the start point of the block in which the tool move-ment was interrupted. (Start up of cutter compensation)

(2) Notes on the block restart function

(a) The command for automatic reference point return (G28 and G30) in the cutter compensation modedoes not return the tool to the correct position even when the restart operation is performed within theblock.

(b) The restart operation cannot be performed in the block for which a dwell (G04) has been specified.

(c) The compensation value must be set prior to turning on the block return switch.

(d) In the three–dimensional cutter compensation mode with zero value, suppose the tool movement isinterrupted, the compensation value is changed, and the operation is restarted. In this case, the vectorfor the cutter compensation is not recalculated.

Note that if the compensation values are changed excessively, the accuracy for vector calculation maydeteriorate.

(e) When the block return switch is on, if the message RSTR does not appear on the CRT screen, thecycle start command is ignored.

(f) Operating the block return switch during continuous manual feed stops the tool.

(g) Operation must not be restarted in a block without a move command.

(h) After a single–block is stopped, operation is restarted at the block after the block that has already beenexecuted by the single–block function.


– 115 –

5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery

The tool retraction and recovery function retracts a broken tool from a workpiece so that the tool can be replacedor the machining checked. The function also returns the replaced tool efficiently to the correct location to restartmachining.

The tool retraction and recovery function is divided into the following four basic operations:

(1) Retraction

When the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operator’s panel is pressed while automatic operationis started, stopped, or held, the tool is retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position towhich the tool retracts is called the retraction position. When retraction is completed, the RETRACT POSI-TION lamp on the machine operator’s panel comes on. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned onwhile automatic operation is started, if a block is being executed, the tool is retracted after the block is sus-pended. When retraction ends, the machine enters the automatic operation hold state. The clearance anddirection can be specified by the program. If these values are not specified by the program, the tool is notretracted. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on while automatic operation is stopped or heldthe tool is retracted, and the machine is placed again in the automatic operation stop or hold state.

When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on, the machine enters the tool retraction mode, and the TOOLRETRACTING lamp on the machine operator’s panel comes on.

(2) Manual retraction

In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be movedmanually, such as by continuous manual feed, manual incremental feed, or manual handle feed. This op-eration is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is automatically stored in thecontrol unit.

(3) Recovery

After the control unit has reentered the automatic mode, when the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machineoperator’s panel is turned on, the control unit returns the tool automatically to the retraction position alongthe same path that the tool was moved by manual operation. This operation is called recovery. When thetool has been returned to the retraction position, the RETRACT POSITION lamp comes on.

(4) Repositioning

When the cycle is started at the retraction position, the tool is first returned to the position where the TOOLRETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is called repositioning. When repositioning is complete,the TOOL RETRACTING lamp comes on to indicate the end of the tool retraction mode. The operationsperformed differs according to the status of automatic operation when the machine entered the tool retrac-tion mode.

(i) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is started, the automaticoperation that has been held is resumed after the tool is repositioned.

(ii) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is stopped or held, themachine returns to the same mode after the tool is repositioned. If the cycle is restarted, automaticoperation is resumed.


– 116 –

�

�

�

:+�%#�%�!!�� %�'%��'�#"� $#&�'�#"

:+�#&�'�#"� '#� )�� '�� '## � �&� %�'%��'�� *� !�"(� � #$�%�'�#"

:+��'�� #"�� )�� '�� '## � �&� %�'%��'��

:+��"(� � #$�%�'�#"� +�$�'�� #"�� )�� '�� '## � �&� %�'%��'�� !�"(� *�

:+��'(%"� $�'�

:+��$#&�'�#"�"�

:+�#&�'�#"� )��%�� '�� '## � %�'%��'�#"� &)�'�� &� '(%"�� #"

(a) General operating procedure

1 Specify the axis along which the tool is to be retracted and distance beforehand using command G10.6IP__.

489The following sample program specifies that in block N20, the retraction axis is the X–axis and thedistance is –50 mm.

��

��

��!$ �� $%#�%�!��


– 117 –

2 When block N30 is being executed, turn on the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operation’spanel at point A, for example.

��

�

��

� � ��

�

��

�

��

��

� ��

3 When the machine enters the tool retraction mode, the TOOL RETRACTING lamp on the machineoperator’s panel comes on. At the same time, automatic operation is held and the tool is retracted bythe distance specified by program. If point A is the end of the block, the tool is retracted after automaticoperation is stopped.

The retraction operation is interpolated linearly and executed at the dry run speed.

When the tool has been retracted, the RETRACT POSITION lamp on the machine operator’s panelcomes.

��

�

��

��

� � ��

�

��

�

��

��

� ��


– 118 –

During retraction, the following displays appear:

(i)

ACTUAL POSITION(RELATIVE COORDINATES)

X 207.438MMY 402.083MMZ 133.561MM

PTRR* * *STRT

(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise theautomatic mode is indicated.

(ii) *** is displayed at the location where otherwise themanual mode is indicated.

(iii) STRT is displayed at the location where otherwisethe automatic operation state is indicated.(ii) (iii)

If retraction is not specified by G10.6, the tool is not retracted, execution of the block in the automaticmode is suspended, and automatic operation is held or stopped.

��

If the single block switch is turned on during the start of automatic operation or if the TOOL RETRACTswitch is turned on after a feed hold to hold or stop automatic operation, the tool is retracted and themachine returns to the automatic operation hold or stop state after the completion of retraction.

During retraction, feed hold is disabled. The RESET switch is effective, and retraction is stopped im-mediately when the RESET switch is pressed. If an alarm occurs during the retraction, retraction isstopped immediately.

It is possible to shift from the retract end state to step 6 (repositioning) without retracting or recoveringthe tool.

4 Enter the manual mode. Either jog feed, incremental feed, handle feed, and manual numeric valuecommand is possible in this mode. (Manual arbitrary–angle feed is impossible.)

5 Manually move the tool along an axis. This operation is called “manual retraction.” Be sure to selectonly one axis for this operation. Do not issue a signal for two or more axes at one time.

NOTE Simultaneous automatic/manual operations are impossible in the tool retraction mode. If theyare selected, manual operation such as jog feed, incremental feed, or handle feed is notperformed in the tool retraction mode.

In the tool retraction mode, if an attempt is made to move the tool along two or more axes atone time using a manual numeric value command, P/S alarm No. 183 is issued.


– 119 –

6 If each axis is specified by manual operation, the control unit stores up to ten positions on the tracedroute.

When another axis is specified after one axis is specified, the position where the axes are switchedis stored. Up to ten such positions are stored. Subsequent positions are discarded.

Resetting the machine deletes the stored position data and cancels the retraction mode.

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� �

��

��

��

��

��

7 When the retraction ends and the tool is replaced, it is necessary to return the tool to the original re-tracted position.

First return to the automatic mode. Then, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine opera-tor’s panel, and turn it off again. The tool then returns to the original retracted position at the dry runspeed, irrespective of whether the dry run switch is on or off.

During recovery, the following displays appear:

ACTUAL POSITION(RELATIVE COORDINATES)

X 207.438MMY 402.083MMZ 133.561MM

PTRR* * *MSTR

(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwisethe automatic mode is indicated.

(ii) ***is displayed at the location where other-wise the manual mode is indicated.

(iii) MSTR is displayed at the location whereotherwise the automatic operation state is in-dicated.

(i) (ii) (iii)

If the path along which the tool is retracted exceeds 10 positions, the tool first moves to the 10th posi-tion, then sequentially to the 9th and 8th and so on, and finally returns to the original position.


– 120 –

�

�

�

�

�

��

� �

��

��

��

��

During recovery, the single block switch is effective. Keeping the switch in the off position enables therecovery operation to continue. Keeping it in the on position causes the tool to stop at each storedposition. To resume recovery, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch, then turn it off.

If an alarm condition occurs during recovery, the tool stops. During recovery, feed hold is ineffective.

When the tool has returned to the original retracted position, the RETRACT LAMP is lit.

8 When cycle is started while the tool remains in the retracted position (point E in the following figure),that is while the RETRACT POSITION lamp is on, the tool returns to the position from which it wasretracted, that is, the position where the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation iscalled repositioning. During repositioning, feed hold is effective.

��


– 121 –

The operation to be performed after repositioning depends on the automatic operation state when theTOOL RETRACT switch was turned on.

(i) During the start of automatic operation

After repositioning, execution of the interrupted block is resumed. Namely, the remaining part ofblock N30 is executed.

NOTE Bit 1 (TRS) of parameter No. 7614 can be set so that if the single block switch is on, the toolstops immediately when repositioning is completed and the remaining part of block N30 isexecuted when the cycle is started once again.

(ii) When automatic operation is held or stopped

When repositioning is completed, the tool stops, and the machine returns to the automatic opera-tion hold or stop state. Then, restarting the cycle resumes the automatic operation. When reposi-tioning is completed, the tool retraction mode is canceled, and the TOOL RETRACTING lamp isturned off. This is the end of the general procedure of tool retraction and recovery.

(b) Procedure for retraction and recovery in thread cutting

1 The tool retraction and recovery function is also effective for thread cutting.

The following is a sample program for thread cutting.

��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

2 Let us assume that while thread cutting programmed in block N2 is being executed, the TOOL RE-TRACT switch is turned on.

�

��

��

��

�

�

�!"$%'#� ()#*!,(*�+� )!'#&

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


– 122 –

3 The tool is retracted at 45 to the thread cutting block.

In this example, the thread is cut along the 2–axis, and the tool is retracted 40 mm each along the X–axis and Z–axis. The X–axis is called the retraction axis. However, if the tool is retracted 40 mm alongthe Z–axis, the tool may overrun thread cutting end point depending on when the TOOL RETRACTswitch was turned on. After the thread cutting end point on the Z–axis is reached, the tool will be movedonly along the retraction axis (the X–axis) to the specified position. If the tool does not reach the endpoint on the Z–axis when it has reached the retraction position on the retraction axis, the tool is movedto the thread cutting end point.

�

�

�

��

If the program specifies the axis along which the thread is cut as the retraction axis, the tool is not re-tracted irrespective of whether the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on. In addition, P/S alarm No.215, ESCAPE ERROR (PTRR), is issued after the tool stops at the position where a block other thanthe thread cutting block terminates.

4 After retraction is completed, the tool stops after the next block, not the thread cutting block, isexecuted.

�

�

�

�


– 123 –

5 The tool is repositioned so that it comes back to the thread cutting end position (point D in the followingfigure) specified by the program.

�

�

��

(c) Procedure for retraction and recovery in a canned drilling cycle

1 When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on in a canned drilling cycle, how the tool is retracted de-pends on the operation being performed at that time.

�!%�! � �� ……�!$�%�! � �� ! �� %�� (�$

�!%�! � �� ……��"�� %#�'�#$�� %!� "!� %� �

�!%�! � �� ……�"�#�%�! � �%� %�� !%%!�� !�� !��

�!%�! � �� ……��"�� %#�'�#$�� %!� � �%�� "!� %

�!%�! � �� ……�%&�� #��

�!%�! � �� ……��%#��%�! � %!� "!� %� �

�%�� "!� %�!%�! � �

�!%�! � � �!%�! � ��!� %� �

�!%�! � � �!%�! � �

�!%�! � �

(i) If the switch is turned on during motion 1, the tool is moved retracted by the distance specified byG10.6, as in ordinary retraction.

(ii) If the switch is turned on during motion 2, the motion is suspended and the tool moves to the initialpoint and stops there.

(iii) If the switch is turned on during motion 3, the motion is suspended, cycle motions 4, 5, and 6 areexecuted from that position. After motion 6, the tool stops at the initial point.


– 124 –

(iv) If the switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6, the motion is continued until the tool reachesthe initial point.

During motions 2 to 6, turning on the TOOL RETRACT switch does not retract the tool as specifiedby G10.6. However, when the switch is turned on and the tool reaches the initial point, the ma-chine enters the tool retraction mode.

When the canned cycle is in its second or subsequent operation, if the switch is turned on duringmotions 2 to 6, the retraction position differs according to G98 or G99.

– G98 (initial level return): The tool moves to the initial level.

– G99 (point–R level return): The tool moves to point R.

2 A canned repositioning cycle is performed by starting the cycle at the retraction position.

(i) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 1

As in ordinary repositioning, automatic operation is resumed after completion of repositioning.

(ii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 2

Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.

(iii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 3

Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.

(iv) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6

Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2 with the same hole position.


– 125 –

(d) Combining the block restart function and the retraction and recovery function

The procedure for combining the tool retraction and recovery and block restart functions is shown follow-ing. See Item 5.6.2 for the block restart function.

If the tool breaks, for example, after automatic operation is suspended, the tool is replaced, and the offsetvalue is changed, the operation is resumed from the start point of or an intermediate point in the interruptedblock.

�+�)+� '�� ,+'%�+"�� '(�)�+"'&

�!�&� �� ()'�$�%� '��,)*� �&�� +!�� *."+�!� "*+,)&�� '&�� +!�� +''$� "*� )�+)��+�� &�� +!�� ,+'%�+"�� '(�)�+"'&"*� !�$�� !�� %��!"&�� &+�)*� +!�� +''$� )�+)��+"'&� %'��

�'-�� +!�� +''$� %�&,�$$0� �&�� )�($�� +!�� +''$� ')� +�#�� &� �(()'()"1�+�� +"'&�

�!�& �� +!�� +''$� '��*�+� -�$,�� "�� &��**�)0�

��+,)&� +'� +!�� ,+'%�+"��%'�� &�� )�+,)&� +!�� +''$�+'� +!�� )�+)��+"'&� ('*"+"'&�0� +,)&"& � '&� +!�� *."+�!� +!�&+,)&"& � "+� '�� "&�

�,)&� '&� �$'�#� )�+,)&� *."+�!��&�� %'-�� +!�� +''$� +'� +!�*+�)+� ('"&+� �0� �'&+"&,',*%�&,�$� �� !�� +''$�,+'%�+"��$$0� *+'(*� �+� +!�*+�)+� ('"&+�

��+,)&� +'� +!�� ,+'%�+"�� %'�� &�� +,)&� '&� +!�� $'�#� )�+,)&� *."+�!��!�&� +!�� $'�#� )�+,)&� *."+�!� "*� '&�� /��,+"& � +!�� $'�#� ��&� ��)�*,%�� 0� )�*+�)+"& � "+� �+� �&� �)�"+)�)0� ('*"+"'&�� !�� ('*"+"'&� %�0&'+� �$.�0*� �� +!�� )�+)��+"'&� ('*"+"'&�

�+�)+� +!�� 0�$�� ."+!� +!�� $'�#� )�+,)&� *."+�!� +,)&�� '&�

�!�&� �,+'%�+"�� '(�)�+"'&� "*� )�*,%�� +!�� +''$� )�+)��+"'&� %'�� "*��&��$�� ,)&� '�� +!�� $'�#� )�+,)&� )�*+�)+� *."+�!�

��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��


– 126 –

Cautions and Note on use of the tool retraction and recovery function

CAUTION 1 The retraction axis specified by G10.6 and the distance the tool is retracted need to bechanged in the necessary block according to the figure to be machined. If correct retractionis not specified, the tool or the workpiece may be damaged.

CAUTION 2 If the origin, preset, and work offset are changed after the retraction position is specified byan absolute G10.6 command, the retraction position does not change. After the operationor the work offset is changed, specify the retraction position again using G10.6.

CAUTION 3 When retracting the tool by manual operation in the tool retraction mode, do not use themachine lock or mirror image function.

NOTE The manual numeric value command option is necessary for tool retraction.

5.6.5 Retrace

The retrace function enables the tool to retrace the path of movement so far. It also returns the tool along thesame path once again. When the tool returns to the point where it started retracing its path, it continues machin-ing as directed by program.

The retrace function can be triggered by the trace switch on the machine operator’s panel. It can also be auto-matically triggered (without the operator’s intervention) when a damaged tool is detected. Refer to the appropri-ate manual issued by the machine builder to check what conditions cause the tool to retrace its path and toreturn to the machining position. The control switch directs the tool to retrace or trace its path according to aretrace on/off signal received from the machine.

��

��

��

When the trace signal is turned on, the tool retraces the path covered so far. When the trace signal is subse-quently turned off, the tool returns along the retraced path to the machining position.

RVRS blinks on the CRT screen during retracing, and RTRY blinks when returning along the retraced path.RTRY continues blinking until normal operation is resumed after the tool returns to the block where retracingwas started. When there are no more blocks to retrace, message RVED blinks to indicate the end of the currentretrace.

The maximum number of blocks that can be retraced is between 40 and 80 blocks executed in an automaticmode such as memory, tape, or MDI operation.

The retraction speed is set by a parameter (No.1494).


– 127 –

NOTE 1 Starting retracing or returning at the end of a blockRetracing or returning can be started at a block such as rapid traverse (G00) in the automaticmode (memory, tape, or MDI operation), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02or G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31), or an auxiliary function block. However, it does notbegin as soon as the retrace signal changes, but only after the completion of the movement,dwell, or auxiliary function block.

NOTE 2 Starting retracting and returning after feed hold stopDuring rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02 or G03), orskip cutting (G31), if the retrace signal is switched for restart after a feed hold stop, the tool startsretracing or returning immediately from that position. However, this does not apply during dwell(G04) or when executing an auxiliary function. If retracing starts after a feed hold stop in acertain block, the space between the beginning of that block and the point where the hold stophas been specified is considered as one block. Therefore, if returning starts with the singleblock switch on, it will be canceled as soon as the program has returned to the point where thecurrent retrace was initiated.

NOTE 3 Starting retracing and returning after a single block stopAt the end of a single block, switching the trace signal for restart immediately triggers retracingor returning.

NOTE 4 o activate retracing after a feed hold stop or single block stop, if a manual intervention has beenmade after the stop, it is necessary to first return to the original position and then turn on theretrace signal.

NOTE 5 Tool path for retracing or returning in rapid traverse (G00)The path the tool retraces depends on the rapid traverse path selected by the LRP bit ofparameter No. 1400. The retrace and return paths are the same in linear interpolationrepositioning. However, they are different in nonlinear interpolation repositioning.

NOTE 6 During retrace and return, a dwell command is executed just as in ordinary operation.NOTE 7 Tool path for retracing and returning in skip cutting (G31)

The distance the tool retraces and returns is not the programmed one but the distance actuallytraveled during the first execution of the block before the skip signal is turned on. The skipsignal is ignored in skip cutting during retrace and return.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


– 128 –

NOTE 8 Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder for the operations of theM, S, T, and second auxiliary function (B function) performed during retrace.

NOTE 9 The blocks created internally in the control unit are included in the retrace path.In the following figure, four blocks of move commands are created instead of the twoprogrammed blocks. In this case, the single–block stop positions may differ between retraceand return.

NOTE 10 The blocks executed are stored as long as memory is available. Eighty or more blocks canbe retraced in some cases.

NOTE 11 A programmed entry (G10) of a tool compensation value is ignored during retrace and return.NOTE 12 If a coordinate system setting command (G92) appears during retrace, the display of the

current position during return may differ from the actual position. However, the machineposition is not changed.

NOTE 13 The tool retraces its path through blocks in the programmable mirror image mode (G50.1 orG51.1) in mirror image. Blocks that have been mirror–imaged by a data setting command ora machine signal are memorized without mirror image. The mirror image set by the data settingcommand or machining signal is valid in both retrace and return.

NOTE 14 If the cutter compensation or tool length offset data is changed during retrace or return, theoriginal data stays valid until ordinary operation is resumed after the machine has returned tothe machining position.

NOTE 15 Retracing in a block containing any of the following commands is invalid. If any of them appearduring retrace, the retrace is immediately terminated, and the message RVED appears on theCRT screen.– Inch/millimeter conversion (G20, G21)– Reference point return function (G28, G29, G30)– Thread cutting (G33)– Remote buffer (G05)

NOTE 16 When any of the following functions is being executed, retrace is invalid. If any of them appearduring retrace, the message RVED appears on the CRT screen.– Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1)– Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)– Cylindrical interpolation (G7.1)– High–speed machining (G10.3, G11.3)– Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)

NOTE 17 The following function disables this function.– Multi–buffer

NOTE 18 Use of the two–block read–ahead function (set when bit 1 (XBUF) of parameter No. 7616 is1) disables the this function.

3

1

2 4

1

2

��

��

��


– 129 –

5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation

For details of this operation, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt

In automatic operation, this function allows a move command generated by the manual pulse generator to besuperimposed on a programmed move command. As a result, the actual tool path deviates from the pro-grammed path by the amount by which the operator turns the manual pulse generator. Therefore, this functioncan give the operator an additional margin in machining.

[Interrupt operation]

(1) A manual handle interrupt can be accepted in modes other than the rapid traverse mode (such as G00).

Even in a block that does not move the tool or when automatic operation is in the stopped state, a manualhandle interrupt can be accepted unless the rapid traverse mode is effective.

NOTE Even if the feedrate override signal is set to 0%, a manual handle interrupt is accepted.

(2) The axis subject to a manual handle interrupt is determined by the manual handle selection signal. Onlyone axis is selected for each manual pulse generator.

(3) The feedrate for manual handle interrupt must be determined so that when it is added algebraically to thefeedrate observed on the axis in the uninterrupted state, the result of addition must not exceed the upperlimit of the cutting feedrate for that axis.

Example Suppose that the upper limit of the cutting feedrate on a given axis is 5 m/min. If the tool ismoving along that axis in the positive direction at 2 m/min, the manual pulse generator canbe turned to set up to 3 m/min. When the same movement is interrupted by turning the gener-ator in the negative direction, up to 7 m/min is possible.

If the manual pulse generator is turned in beyond the limit, the excess pulses generated fromthe generator are discarded. Consequently, the reading of the pulse generator disagrees withthe actual traveled distance made by the interrupt.

(4) The magnification used in the manual handle interrupt depends on the states of signals MP1, MP2, andMP4.

(5) If the direction of movement is reversed as a result of a manual handle interrupt, backlash compensationis applied. In this case, pitch error compensation is applied to the position set after the interrupt.

For a manual handle interrupt, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time constantfor cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed acceleration/deceleration(parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, however, the time constant for jog feedacceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the application of acceleration/deceleration for a manual handleinterrupt is based only on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration.


– 130 –

[Manual handle interrupt and coordinate systems]

(1) The workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the magnitude of a manual handle interrupt.Therefore, when an absolute command is specified in a workpiece or local coordinate system, the endpoint is shifted by the magnitude of the interrupt.

All workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount at the same time regardlessof which coordinate system has been selected when the interrupt is performed.

(2) A manual handle interrupt does not change the basic machine coordinate system. Therefore, the endpoints of an absolute command (G53) and automatic reference position return (G28) issued in the machinecoordinate system are not affected by the manual handle interrupt.

��•••• �

��•••• �

��

�� !�

��!�� !�

�� "� ��!�� !�

�� "� �� !� �

�� "� �� !� �

�� "� ��

(3) Current position display in a workpiece coordinate system

The displayed position does not include the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt.

Current position display in the machine coordinate system and relative coordinate system

The displayed position includes the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt.

(4) It is possible to display only the amount of movement caused by a manual handle interrupt on the manualinterrupt screen indicating the current position.


– 131 –

5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation

When the simultaneous automatic and manual selection signal is set to on and an automatic mode (tape opera-tion, MDI operation, or memory operation or part program editing) and a manual mode (manual continuous feedor incremental feed) are selected, automatic operation and manual operation can be performed simultaneous-ly. In the simultaneous automatic and manual mode, for example, cutting along an axis can be interrupted tochange the depth of cut on that axis, or the next workpiece can be set up during automatic operation.

(1) Operation

(a) Selecting a mode

The following table shows how to select a simultaneous automatic and manual operation mode:

Mode selection input signal

T D MEM EDT MOVL H S J AJG

Simultaneous automaticand manual operation One of these signals set to 1 1

One of these signals isset to 1, J and H are setto 1, or S and H are setto 1.

0

(0: Signal low, 1: Signal high)

(b) Manual operation during simultaneous automatic and manual operation

There are two types of simultaneous automatic and manual operation.

(i) Interrupt type

An interrupt can be made for an axis whose park signal is low.

A move command for manual continuous feed or incremental feed can be superimposed on amove command being executed in automatic operation. Thus, this function becomes equivalentto the manual handle interrupt.

The interrupt type is enabled or disabled by the setting of the EMI bit (bit 6) of parameter No. 1000.

(ii) Setup type

For an axis whose park signal is high, movement by manual continuous feed or incremental feedcan be performed during automatic operation.

In this way it is possible to set up the next workpiece or perform a similar operation during automat-ic operation.

For an axis whose park signal is high, automatic operation cannot be performed. If automatic op-eration is attempted for such an axis, an alarm occurs.

1 When the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected (strictly speaking, when themanual mode of the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected)

Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately the manual mode isselected.

2 When the park signal is changed

Even in automatic operation, the time when the interrupt type is switched differs slightly be-tween single–block operation and continuous operation.

[For single–block operation]

Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block following the current block.

[For continuous operation]

Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block two blocks ahead of the currentblock.

[When the system is reset]

Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately after the system is reset.


– 132 –

(2) Performance

Automatic operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is the same as normal automaticoperation. Therefore, the following explains manual operation only.

(a) Simultaneous automatic and manual operation (in relation to automatic operation)

Interrupt type Setup type

In the positioning mode (*1) Not possible Possible

In the cutting mode(G01, G02, G03, etc.)

Possible Possible

In the threading mode Possible Possible

As indicated in the above table, the setup type is not affected by automatic operation. For the interrupttype, interrupts are possible in modes other than the positioning mode.

NOTE In the positioning mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse feedrate. Therefore, blockscontaining G28 and G29 are also included.

(b) Feedrate and acceleration/deceleration time constant

The following lists the traveled distance, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration time constant:

Interrupt type Setup typ

Traveled distance Same as normal manualoperation

Same as normal manualoperation

Feedrate (*1) Same as normal manualoperation

Time constant (*2) Same as normal manualoperation

NOTE 1 (*1) The feedrate along the axis subject to an interrupt is the result of superimposition of thefeedrate by the manual interrupt on the feedrate in automatic operation. If the resultantfeedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate for that axis, it is clamped at the maximumcutting feedrate.

NOTE 2 (*2) For interrupt type, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the timeconstant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feedacceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to1, however, the time constant for jog feed acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that theapplication of acceleration/deceleration is based only on the time constant for cutting feedacceleration/deceleration.

(c) Relationship with signals

The operation is related to signals as listed below:


Absolute on/off Not affected(always off)

Affected

Interlock Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out.

Machine lock Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out.

Mirror image Not affected. Even if the signal is on, a positivecommand moves the machine in the positive direction.

(d) Indication

The indication is as follows:


Absolute coordinates Not updated Updated

Relative coordinates Updated Updated

Machine coordinates Updated Updated


– 133 –

5.8 Override Playback

It is possible to store the cutting feedrate override and spindle speed override set at program execution. Whenthat program is executed again, the stored override values can be used.

Storing overrides is called override teaching. Using the taught overrides is called override playback.

Teaching is possible only when the memory is operating. When override teaching is performed during memoryoperation, an override value having the following format is inserted immediately after the current block inmemory. The override value is then stored.

(Current block)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––,L1F––R––S––;

,L1: Indicates that the following F, R, and S are commands of override values.

F––: Cutting feedrate override (0 to 254, unit: 1%)

R––: For linear machining, the distance along the axis to the end point. (Unit: Least input increment ofthe basic axis. For circular machining, the center angle up to the end point. If the basic axis is IS–A, theunit is 0.01 degree. If it is IS–B, the unit is 0.001 degrees.)

In playback, if the remaining distance of the axis has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value,or if the remaining center angle of an arc has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value, the speci-fied feedrate override value becomes valid.

S––: Spindle speed override (15 to 120, unit: 1%)

In playback, the specified spindle speed override value becomes valid from the start of the target block.

In general override playback, set the feedrate and spindle override switches on the operator’s panel of the ma-chine to 100%. If an override switch on the operator’s panel of the machine is set to other than 100%, the pro-grammed override value is multiplied by the override value set by that switch.

(1) Teaching procedure

Teaching can be performed by using the MDI keys or by using the switches and buttons on the operator’spanel of the machine.

(a) Using the MDI keys

1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.

2 Press the <SETTING> key.

3 Press the <SETTING> key several times or press the <TEACH> key to select the override play-back screen.

4 The override playback screen has five function selection keys, <TCH–ON>, <TCH–OFF>,<FED–MEM>, <SPN–MEM>, and <F/S–MEM>.

To enable teaching, press the <TCH–ON> key. When teaching is enabled, TEACHING MODE= ON is displayed.

To disable teaching, press the <TCH–OFF> key. When teaching is disabled, TEACHING MODE= OFF is displayed.

5 Select the memory operation mode to activate the memory.


– 134 –

6 (i) To store a feedrate override value, press <FED–MEM> with a desired override position set.

(ii) To store a spindle speed override, press <SPN–MEM> with a desired override position set.

(iii) To store both a feedrate override and spindle speed override, press <F/S–MEM>.

(b) Using the switches on the operator’s panel of the machine

1 Turn on the override teaching mode switch.


3 Press the feedrate override teaching switch with the desired feedrate override position set. Alter-natively, press the spindle override teaching switch with the desired spindle speed override posi-tion set.

When only a feedrate override is taught, L1F––R–– is inserted at the end of the block being executed.

When only a spindle override is taught, L1S–– is inserted to the end of the block.

When both feedrate and spindle speed overrides are stored, ,L1F––R––S–– is inserted.

If override teaching is performed more than once while a block is being executed, the last overridevalue is inserted in the command program.

Teaching is enabled in memory operation but not in part program or MDI operation.

(2) Playback procedure

When a program is executed after override teaching has been performed, the taught feedrate override andspindle speed override can be used for operation (playback).

1 Set the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch on the operator’s panel of the ma-chine to 100%.

2 To cancel the override teaching mode, press the <TCH–OFF> key if the MDI keys are used, or turnoff the override teaching mode switch if the switches on the operator’s panel of the machine are used.


4 If –––––––.L1F––R––; is specified in the command program, the following takes place:

For linear machining, when the distance along the axis to the end point of the block has reached thevalue specified by R, the override value specified by F becomes valid. For circular machining, whenthe center angle to the end point has reached the value specified by R, the override value specifiedby F becomes valid. If ––––––––,L1S––; is specified in the program, the spindle speed overridespecified by S becomes valid from the start point of the block.

The specified override value remains valid until a new override value is specified.

5 If M02 or M30 is specified, the override values effective at that time are canceled and assumed to be100%.


– 135 –

NOTE 1 An override value added to the end of a block can be edited together with the other commandsin the part program storage and edit mode. This means that override values can be inserted,changed, and deleted.

NOTE 2 In override playback, the override switches on the operator’s panel can also be used. If theoverride switch on the operator’s panel is set to 70% when a feedrate override of 80% isspecified by –––––––,L1F80R––;, for example, an override of 56% is applied to the specifiedfeedrate.

NOTE 3 Override playback is enabled in every automatic operation (memory operation, part programoperation, and MDI operation).

NOTE 4 If M02 or M30 is specified during override playback, the override values effective at that timeare canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a program number is searched for, the effectiveoverride values are also canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a reset operation is performed,whether to cancel the override values to 100% can be selected by the NCM bit of parameterNo. 2401.

NOTE 5 If the override value specified by F exceeds 254%, 254% is assumed. If the override valuespecified by S is less than 50%, 50% is assumed, and if it is more than 120%, 120% isassumed.

NOTE 6 If teaching is performed when the cutting feedrate override cancel switch is set on, 100% isstored as the feedrate override value.

NOTE 7 If teaching is performed twice for the same program, an override value is stored as follows:When teaching is specified again, the override value currently played back is multiplied by theoverride value set by the override switch, and the result is inserted in the program. In addition,the override value set by the override switch at that time is recorded by the control unit. Whenan override is specified later in the program, it is multiplied by the recorded override value, andthe result is inserted as a new override value.

NOTE 8 Whether teaching is enabled for programs O8000 to O9999 is determined depending on bythe NE8 and ND8 bits of parameter No. 0011 and the NE9 and ND9 bits of parameter No. 2201.If teaching is attempted during execution of these programs when these parameters indicateNO EDITING (NE8 = 1 or NE9 = 1) or NO DISPLAY (ND8 = 1 or ND9 = 1), a warning is issued.(WRITE PROTECT in the former case and INVISIBLE PROGRAM in the latter.) Teaching isnot performed for the block, and operation continues.

NOTE 9 When one of the following functions is being executed, override teaching is disabledregardless of the parameter settings. If teaching is attempted, it is performed at the first blockimmediately after the function terminates. In blocks in which teaching is disabled, never insertoverride values in the part program storage and edit mode.⋅Only teaching of a feedrate override is disabled.

–Blocks other than cutting feed blocks–Dry run operation

⋅Teaching of both feedrate and spindle speed overrides is disabled.–Canned cycle–Multiple repetitive canned cycle–High–speed machining–Blocks internally generated for corners in cutter compensation C

NOTE 10 When one of the following functions is being executed, override playback R is invalidregardless of the parameter settings. In this case, the specified feedrate override becomesvalid when the block starts to be executed:– Drilling canned cycle– Skip function– Chamfering/corner rounding– Direct drawing dimension programming

NOTE 11 If feed hold or reset is specified for the same block after teaching, the taught values arecanceled.

NOTE 12 Teaching is not valid unless movement along the target axis is in progress.NOTE 13 For a block executed repeatedly, do not specify override values through teaching or in the part

program storage and edit mode.The following blocks may be executed repeatedly:(1) Blocks in a subprogram called repeatedly by M98 or G65.

(2) Blocks in a main program executed repeatedly by M99.

(3) Blocks repeated in a WHILE statement and GOTO statement

B–62564E–1/026. TEST OPERATION

– 136 –

6. TEST OPERATION

6.1 All Axes Machine Lock

This function is used to check a program. Although the tool does not move, it is displayed as if it were actuallyoperating.

��

��

Display lock/machine lock switch

NOTE 1 When a G27, G28 or G30 command is specified, the tool does not go to the reference positionand the reference position return completion led does not go on.

NOTE 2 The M, S, T, and second miscellaneous functions (B) are executed.

6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis

When this machine lock switch is set to an axis in advance, movement along the axis is suppressed duringmanual or automatic operation. The position display is updated as if the tool were actually moving along theaxis.

��

�

�

�

NOTE During manual/automatic simultaneous operation, manual operation is executed without thetool being locked.

6.3 Auxiliary Function Lock

When the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operator’s panel, M, S, T, and B functionoperations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch.

NOTE M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed as usual.

B–62564E–1/02 6. TEST OPERATION

– 137 –

6.4 Dry Run

If this switch is set to ON in the Cycle Operation, the feedrate specified by the program is ignored and becomesas follows:

��

Dry run

Rapid traverse button(RT i l)

Positioning type Programmed commandp(RT signal)

g yp(#LRP of parameter No.1400) For rapid traverse For cutting feed(*2)

RT=ON LRP=0/1 Rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420)

The dry run feedrate (parameterNo. 1410) is overridden by themaximum manual feedrate over-ride value (parameter No. 2016).

RT=OFFLRP=0 Jog feedrate (parameter

No. 1423)(*1)The dry run feedrate (parameterNo. 1410) is overridden by themanual feedrate override value

LRP=1 Same as for cutting feed (*1)manual feedrate override value(*JV0 to *JV15 signals).

NOTE 1 For rapid traverse, the indicated feedrates are valid only when RDR of parameter No.1400 is 1. IfRDR is 0, the rapid traverse rate is used in the same way as when the rapid traverse button is setto ON.

NOTE 2 The dry run feedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.1422).(The feedrate is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate.)

6.5 Single Block

The single block function stops the tool after one block of a program has been executed.

(1) Turn on the single block switch.

��

Single block

One block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button ispressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again.

NOTE 1 If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at an intermediate point.

NOTE 2 In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of (1) , (2) , and (6) shown below.When the single block function is effective at points (1) or (2) , the feed hold lamp lights.


– 138 –

��

��

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

NOTE 3 Single block stop is not performed in blocks containing M98P_;. M99;and G65, G66, G67.However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if theblock contains an address other than O, N or P.


– 139 –

6.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION

This function checks a machining program while executing it in the test mode. If it finds an error in the program,the error can be corrected the error at that time and the corrected program can be executed immediately. Itcan be used to check and correct a machining program without stopping operation.

To make this function effective, set parameter (REV, 2005) to 1 and turn on power again.

1 While the tool was moving according to the N03 block, an error was found in the tool path.

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ;N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;N03 G02 X–20. Y0. R20. ;N04 G01 X–20. Y–10. ;

��

2 The tool is stopped and reverse operation is started immediately.

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

PROGRAM(MEMORY)


��

3 After the N03 block to be corrected is executed in reverse, the tool is stopped and the program is edited.

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

PROGRAM(MEMORY)


4 When operation is restarted, the corrected program is executed.

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

PROGRAM(MEMORY)


��


– 140 –

6.6.1 Modes

This function can be executed only in the test mode.

The test mode is enabled when both the memory mode signal and test mode signal (G02.2) are high.

When the TSKY bit (bit 2 of parameter 2004) is set to 1, the test mode can be selected by pressing the [TESTON] soft key. This is an operation selection key for the program text screen and program check screen inmemory mode.

After the test mode is selected, the mode status indication changes to TEST.

6.6.2 Operation

(1) Basic Procedure for Retrace Editing

1 Select the test mode.

MEMORY+TEST MEMORY

��

��

��

��

��

2 Start the operation.

��

3 Perform a single–block stop or feed–hold stop in the block in which a program error is detected.

� ��

��

��

��

4 Set the reverse signal high.

��

� � ��

��

��

��


– 141 –

5 Start reverse operation.

��

6 After required blocks are executed in reverse, perform a single–block stop or feed–hold stop and terminatereverse operation.

��

��

��

��

7 After reverse operation is terminated, correct subsequent parts of the program.

G01X0. Y20. ;G02 X10. Y0.::>G03

NOTE The program cannot be edited when the STL signal is high.

8 Set the reverse signal low.

��

��

��

��

��


– 142 –

9 Restart forward operation. Operation is started from the last block executed in reverse operation.

"��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !��

Number of blocks that can be executed in reverse operation

This function can execute up to 15 blocks in reverse. In reverse operation, one block is counted as onemovement. If a canned cycle or other single command specifying two or more movements is included,the number of blocks that can be executed in reverse will not agree with the number of programmed blocks.

Status indication during reverse operation

During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can beexecuted in reverse, the RVED indication blinks to indicate that reverse operation is terminated.

Blocks that can be edited

When operation is stopped or halted (STL signal is low) in the test mode, the system can edit blocks whichhave not yet been executed and blocks which have been executed during reverse operation.

Block from which forward operation is restarted and the position of the cursor

Only after the program is edited (modification, insertion, deletion) after reverse operation, forward opera-tion is restarted from the block in which reverse operation is terminated. The block from which operationis restarted does not depend on the position of the cursor in the program.

If the program is not edited after reverse operation, or if the cursor is moved during forward operation, op-eration is restarted from the block where the cursor is located.


– 143 –

(2) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after the Reverse Signal is Switched Dur-ing Execution

Reverse operation and subsequent forward operation can be started in rapid traverse (G00), linear inter-polation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31) or in a miscellaneous func-tion in test mode. However, reverse operation and subsequent forward operation are not started immedi-ately after the reverse signal is switched. They are started after the block is completed, that is, after themove, dwell, or miscellaneous function is completed.

(3) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after a Feed–Hold Stop

If the reverse signal is switched after a feed–hold stop is made in rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation(G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03) or skip cutting (G31), the reverse operation or subsequent forwardoperation can be started at that point.

This operation cannot be executed when a dwell (G04) or miscellaneous function is executed.

When reverse operation is started after a feed–hold stop, the movement from the start point of the blockto the position at which the feed–hold stop is made is stored as a block.

�� ! ��

�� ! ��

��

��

��

(4) Starting Reverse Operation and Normal Operation after a Single–Block Stop

If the reverse signal is switched after a single–block stop, reverse operation or forward operation can bestarted at that point.

�� ! ��

�� ! ��

��


– 144 –

6.6.3 Display

(1) The program screen in the test mode is different than in other modes with regard to the following points:

1 During operation in the test mode, the cursor is moved over text to indicate the current block. (See Fig. 6.6.3(a))

<Current block>

14–inch CRT: Light–blue cursor

9–inch CRT: Dim cursor

<Block in the preread state>

Same as the conventional system

14–inch CRT: Yellow cursor

9–inch CRT: Highlighted cursor

2 Executed and preread blocks can be discriminated from blocks to be executed.

<Executed or preread blocks>

14–inch CRT: Green characters

9–inch CRT: Highlighted characters

<Blocks to be executed>

14–inch CRT: White characters

9–inch CRT: Normal characters

3 When a program that contains blocks that do not fit on one page is executed, the screen can be scrolled.A new page contains the last three lines on the previous page. (On a 9–inch CRT screen, a new pagecontains the last two lines on the previous page.) (See Fig. 6.6.3(b))

4 When the screen is scrolled by pressing the → , ↓ , ← , or ↑ key, a new page contains the last three lineson the previous page. (On a 9–inch CRT screen, a new page contains the last two lines on the previouspage.)

(2) During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can beexecuted in reverse, the RVED indication blinks.

BACKEDIT

DELETEWORD

DELETEINSERTALTER REWINDREVERSOFF

BKWRDSEARCH

FRWRDSEARCH

+TESTOFF

��

TEST*** REVS****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK

BACKEDIT

DELETEWORD

DELETEINSERTALTER REWINDREVERSOFF

BKWRDSEARCH

FRWRDSEARCH

+TESTOFF

��

TEST*** RVED**** *** *** 09:28:06 LSK


– 145 –

(3) When a figure is drawn on graphic display A during machining, a parameter can be used to specify the colorin which reverse movement is indicated.

TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK

BACKEDIT

DELETEWORD

DELETEINSERTALTER +REWINDTESTOFF

REVERSON

BKWRDSEARCH

FRWRDSEARCH

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O0001 N00015

O0001 N01 G91 G28 X0. Y0. ;

N02 G90 G00 X100. Y50. ;

N03 T0101 ;

N04 G42 G01 X50. F2000 D17 ;

N05 G91 X–10. ;N06 X–2. Y–3.5 ;

N07 X1.343 Y–2.45 ;

N08 X2.34 Y–1.898 ;N09 X0.786 Y–0.432 ;N10 X0.214 YO.339 ;N11 X0.123 Y0.278 ;N12 X0.356 Y0.232 ;N13 X2.384 Y7.623 ;N14 X3.545 Y9.903 ;

N19 X0.676 Y0.009 ;

N20 X–0.697 Y0.003 ;

N21 X–3.789 Y0.123

N22 X–5.787 Y0.312 ;

N23 X–8.892 Y0.434 ;N24 X–9.787 Y0.232 ;

N25 X–10.934 Y0.145 ;

N26 X–7.898 Y20.901 ;N27 X–6.768 Y22.234 ;N28 X–3.789 Y17.890 ;N29 X–2.894 Y13.645 ;N30 X–1.896 Y7.768 ;N31 X–0.899 Y5.656 ;N32 X0.076 Y–0.878 ;

N15 X4.544 Y5.984 ;N16 X3.789 Y3.567 ;

N18 X1.89 Y0.899 ;

N33 X0.892 Y–3.376 ;N34 X2.983 Y–14.092 ;N35 X3.443 Y–23.898 ;N36 X5.892 Y–32.937 ;

N17 X2.567 Y2.789 ;

Fig. 6.6.3(a) Program Screen Display During Operation in Test Mode

TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:34:45

DELETEWORD

DELETEINSERTALTERREWINDTESTOFF

REVERSON

BKWRDSEARCH

FRWRDSEARCH

N31 X–0.899 Y5.656 ;

N32 X0.076 Y–0.878 ;

N33 X0.892 Y–3.376 ;

N34 X2.983 Y–14.092 ;

N35 X3.443 Y–23.898 ;

N37 X6.343 Y–17.653 ;

N38 X5.892 Y–13.788 ;N39 X3.732 Y–8.783 ;N40 X2.902 Y–3.892 ;N41 X0.334 Y–1.434 ;N42 X0.233 Y–0.876 ;N43 X0.097 Y–0.074 ;N44 X0.345 Y–0.782 ;

N19 X0.676 Y0.009 ;

N20 X–0.697 Y0.003 ;

N21 X–3.789 Y0.123 ;

N22 X–5.787 Y0.312 ;

N23 X–8.892 Y0.434 ;N24 X–9.787 Y0.232 ;

N25 X–10.934 Y0.145 ;

N26 X–7.898 Y20.901 ;N27 X–6.768 Y22.324 ;N28 X–3.789 Y17.890 ;N29 X–2.894 Y13.645 ;N30 X–1.896 Y7.768 ;N31 X–0.899 Y5.656 ;N32 X0.076 Y–0.878 ;

N45 X0.123 Y–0.234 ;N46 X0.344 Y–0.782 ;

N48 X0.213 Y0.349 ;

N33 X0.892 Y–3.376 ;N34 X2.983 Y–14.092 ;

N36 X5.829 Y–32.937 ;N47 X0.399 Y0.789 ;N35 X3.443 Y–23.898 ;

N36 X5.829 Y–32.937 ;

��

��

Fig. 6.6.3(b) Scrolling the Screen

6.6.4 Note

1) Manual intervention

When manual intervention is made after a feed–hold stop or single–block stop, cancel the manual interven-tion before starting reverse operation. Then set the reverse signal to high.

2) Tool paths when the rapid traverse command (G00) is executed in reverse operation and subsequent for-ward operation

The tool path in reverse operation depends on the path of rapid traverse selected by the LRP bit (parameter1400). When the tool is positioned using linear interpolation, the path in reverse operation is the same asin subsequent forward operation. When the tool is positioned using non–linear type positioning, the toolpaths do not agree with each other.

3) Dwell command

The dwell command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation, just as in the nor-mal operation.

4) Tool paths when the skip cutting (G31) command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forwardoperation

The distance traveled in reverse operation or subsequent forward operation does not agree with the pro-


– 146 –

grammed distance. It is equal to the distance by which the tool actually travels until the skip signal goeshigh when the block is first executed. When the skip cutting command is executed in reverse operationor subsequent forward operation, the skip signal is ignored.

5) Operation using miscellaneous functions

Miscellaneous functions specified by the M and S codes may cause different movements during reverseand forward operation. To prevent this, these miscellaneous functions must be nested or machine opera-tion must be reversed when the reverse signal is high.

�� ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ � � � � � �

⋅⋅ �� ⋅

� � � � � � � � � � � � � �

⋅⋅ �� ⋅

� � � � � � �

6) The block created by the control unit is treated as a reverse–operation block.

3

1

24

�� !�� !�� "!!�� !��

��!�� !�

�� !�� !�� !��

��

��

Although two blocks are programmed for the example shown above, four move–command blocks arecreated for actual machining.

7) Tool compensation entered by the program is ignored during reverse operation.

8) Command for specifying the coordinate system (G92) during reverse operation

If the command for specifying a coordinate system (G92) is executed during reverse operation, the currentposition displayed may be different from the corresponding position displayed during forward operation.However, the actual tool positions are the same.

9) Mirror image

When a block created using mirror–image programming (G50.1, G51.1) is executed in reverse operation,the tool follows the actual mirrored path.

A block created for mirror images using settings or machine signals is stored in its original state (not mir-rored). The mirror image created using settings or machine signals is valid during both reverse and subse-quent forward operation.

10)Changing an offset value

If the cutter compensation or tool length offset is changed during reverse operation or subsequent forwardoperation, the tool is moved according to the original offset value specified when the block was firstexecuted. The new offset value becomes valid when normal operation is started after subsequent forwardoperation is completed.

11)Commands that cannot be executed during reverse operation.

Blocks containing the following commands cannot be executed during reverse operation. When the sys-tem encounters one of these commands during reverse operation, the system stops reverse operation atthat point and indicates RVED.


– 147 –

⋅Inch/metric conversion command (G20, G21)

⋅Reference position return command (G28, G29, G30)

⋅Threading command (G33)

⋅Binary command (G05)

12)Optional functions that cannot be executed during reverse operation

When any of the following optional functions are executed, reverse operation cannot be started. Whenthe system encounters a block containing one of these functions, the system stops reverse operation atthat point and indicates RVED.

⋅Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1)

⋅Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)

⋅Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1)

⋅High–speed machining (G10.3, G11.3)

⋅Exponential interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)

⋅Figure copy (G72.1, G72.2)

⋅Spline interpolation (G06.1)

⋅Involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2)

13)The following functions are invalid in test mode:

⋅Multi–buffer

⋅Macro compiler

⋅Five–block preread function

14)Switching modes

If the mode is switched to the test mode before all preread blocks in the former mode are processed, astart–reject warning is made when operation is started. Perform a reset before starting operation in thetest mode. Otherwise, execute all preread blocks in single–block mode before switching to test mode.Do the same when switching from the test mode to another mode.

15)Subprogram

Subprogram calls (M98, including subprogram calls with M, S, T, or B codes) and returns to the main pro-gram (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, subprogram calls andreturns the subprograms can be executed up to four times.

16)Custom macros

Macro calls (G65, G66, G66.1, G67, including macro calls with G or M codes) and returns to the main pro-gram (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, macro calls and returnsfrom macros can be executed up to four times, including subprogram calls and returns from subprograms.

Operation commands executed during reverse operation are not subjected to inverse operation. Supposethe initial value of local variable #1 in the following block is 1.0 and the value is changed to 3.0 after forwardoperation. After the block is executed in reverse operation, the value of variable #1 remains 3.0. After theblock is executed in subsequent forward operation, the value is changed to 5.0.

#1 = #1 + 2.0;

If a program including a macro operation command is executed in subsequent forward operation after re-verse operation, the initial forward operation may not be reproduced. This may occur with the followingblocks:

⋅Block of control command (IF, WHILE, etc.)

⋅Block of move command including a macro variable (Y [#1 – #5], X [#1 + #2], etc.)

If local variables are used only as arguments to macro calls in a program, subsequent forward operationafter reverse operation of the program including macro calling and return from the macro reproduces theinitial forward operation. An example is shown below:

Main program MacroG66 P9082 R70.Z30.X2. ; 09082 ; X100. ; G00 Z#18 ;M06 ; G01 Z#26 ;Y50. ; G04 X#24 ;⋅ G00 Z– [ROUND [#18] +ROUND [#26] ]⋅ M99 ; ⋅

B–62564E–1/027. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

– 148 –

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

7.1 Emergency Stop

If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a mo-ment.

��

�

This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can usuallybe unlocked by twisting it.

CAUTION Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.

NOTE 1 EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.

NOTE 2 The CNC enters the reset or alarm status. (Whether the CNC enters the reset or alarm statusis specified by the ENR bit in parameter No. 2001.)

7.2 Overtravel

When the tool moves beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, an error code (0T001 to 0T008)is displayed and the tool slows down and stops. This also happens when the tool enters the prohibited areadefined by the stored stroke limit specified by the program or setting data. If the tool stops (Refer to II–19), pressthe reset button to release the alarm and manually move the tool in the opposite direction. For the exact opera-tion of overtravel, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

B–62564E–1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

– 149 –

7.3 Pre–Travel Stroke Limit Check Function

When a block which moves the tool starts to be executed, the pre–travel stroke limit check function checks theend–point coordinate according to the current position of the tool and the traveled distance. This function alsochecks whether the tool enters the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2. If the block causes thetool to enter the prohibited area, the function stops the tool immediately after the tool has started moving anddisplays the alarm.

CAUTION Manual numeric commands are checked.

NOTE 1 This function checks whether the end–point coordinate of the move command in each blockis in the prohibited area but does not check the halfway path of the command. In addition, analarm occurs when the tool passes the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

��

�

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/027. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

– 150 –

NOTE 2 If the machine lock switch is on when movement in the block starts, the pre–travel stroke limitcheck function is not executed.

NOTE 3 If stored stroke limit 2 is invalid (in the G23 mode), the prohibited area defined by stored strokelimit 2 is not checked.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

– 151 –

7.4 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation

When an attempt is made to move the tool such that stored stroke limit 1 is exceeded during manual operation(manual rapid traverse, manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or manual incremental feed), a warning messageis displayed instead of an alarm. Also, the tool does not move such that stored stroke limit 1 will be exceeded.A warning message is displayed if the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1.The warning message is automatically cleared when the tool is backed out in the reverse direction.

This function can be enabled or disabled according to the setting of parameter No. 5201 (SSLWRN). Whenthis function is disabled, the specifications of stored stroke limit 1 are the same as those set conventionally.

CAUTION This function is disabled when the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by storedstroke limit 1 as a result of a manual interrupt operation such as an interrupt–typemanual–automatic simultaneous operation or manual handle interrupt. In such a case, analarm is output. This function is enabled for setup–type manual–automatic simultaneousoperation.

NOTE 1 This function is enabled from the point when reference position return is completed, in the sameway as for the conventional specifications.

NOTE 2 If another warning message is already being displayed when the tool attempts to enter aninhibited area, the original message remains as is and the warning message for this functionis not displayed.

NOTE 3 Warning messages for this function can be cleared by changing the screen, resetting, orpressing the CANCEL soft key, in exactly the same way as for all other warning messages.

– WARNING

The warning messages as following is displayed, and machine is stopped.

Messages Explanation

+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by storedstroke limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction.Backing out the tool in the negative direction automatically clears thiswarning message.

–OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by storedstroke limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction.Backing out the tool in the positive direction automatically clears thiswarning message.

B–62564E–1/028. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS

– 152 –

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS

Check the following items when operation is not normal:

(1) When an error code is displayed on the CRT

If an error code is displayed, check the cause of the error according to Appendix 11 “List of Error Codes.”In particular, PS��indicates a program or data setting error. Correct the program or setting.

(2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT

The tool appears to stop when the system is operating. Refer to Section 4.4 “CNC Status Display” in theMaintenance Manual.

(3) Refer to Chapter 4 “Troubleshotting” in the Maintenance Manual.

B–62564E–1/029. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS

(INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

– 153 –

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAMREGISTRATION)

9.1 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs

To store or edit part programs as described below, it is necessary to establish the status in which a part programcan be edited according to the following preparations.


ON M CHECK G E E R

⋅�� '%��$

�%��$� ��%'��&

� �$'��&# �!�"�$� �#��$� �'��&

�� '�%��$� �'#��$� �'��&#

�� '�%��$� �'#��$� �'��&#

⋅�� '%��$

�%��$� ��%'��&

� �$'��&# �!�"�$� �#��$� �'��&

��

(1) Set the I/O devices.

(2) Set data on the I/O devices. (SeeSection 10.3.)

(3) Turn on the data protection key(KEY3). Some systems may nothave this key.

(4) Set the operation mode to the EDITmode.

(5) Press the function menu key toswitch the soft keys to operationselection keys.

(6) Press the PROGRAM soft or hardkey to display the program screen.

If the text of programs is not dis-played on the screen, perform one ofthe following:

(i) Press the CHAPTER key toswitch the soft keys to chapterselection keys and press the de-sired chapter selection key.

(ii) Press the PROGRAM soft orhard key repeatedly until theprogram text is displayed.

B–62564E–1/029. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

– 154 –

9.2 Registering Part Programs

9.2.1 Registering a part program from the tape

This section explains the following operations:

1 Registering all part programs

2 Registering one part program

3 Registering a part program when the current program number is changed or a new program number is as-signed

(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.)

(2) To add a new part program to the programs that are already registered, search for the last programnumber. (See Section 5.2.1.)

CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

SE FILE

� ��

��

�� 3+,#-�/&+*3.#(#!/&+*3'#2.

�� 3+,#-�/&+*3$0&"�*!#3'#2.

�� 3+,#-�/&+*3.#(#!/&+*3'#2.

�� 3+,#-�/&+*3$0&"�*!#3'#2.

�#�-!%3/%&.33,-+$-�)3*0) #-�

�""3�3*#13,-+$-�)3/+3/%&.3,+.&/&+*�

��

�� O�� ∆∆∆

(3) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.

(4) When the READ key is pressed, the soft keys function as operation guidance keys.

(5)

When all part programs areregistered

When one part program isregistered

When one part program is registeredwhen the current program number ischanged or a new program number isassigned.)

(5)–1Press the ALL key.

(5)–1Press the 1–PROG key.(5)–2(i) For new registration,

press NEW.(ii) For addition, press

ADD.

(5)–1Press the (PROG#) key.(5)–2Enter a program number from theCRT/MDI panel and press the EXECkey.

(6) To stop part program registration, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, however, registrationof the remaining part programs cannot be restarted.

(7) When part program registration terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selectionkeys.



– 155 –

9.2.2 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel

��



�� #��!��# ��!��#��"

�� #��!��# ��!��#��"

(1) Establish the status in which part pro-grams can be edited. (See Section9.1.)

(2) Press the operation menu key.

(3) Use address and numeric keys toenter the program to be registered.The enter program is temporarilystored in the key input buffer.

When the INSERT key or INPUT/IN-SERT hard key is pressed, the pro-gram is loaded into memory.

(4) To enter additional programs, repeatstep (3).


– 156 –

9.3 Deleting Part Programs

Part programs that are protected from being edited are not

deleted.

When the NE8 bit in parameter No. 0011 is 1, part programs O8000 to O8999 are not deleted.

When the NE9 bit in parameter No. 2201 is 1, part programs O9000 to O9999 are not deleted.

��

�� .. �� /�

�� ~EOB ~(�� ) ��

� � �� (PROG#)

� � ��

�� ~�� ~��

� � �� (PROG#)

�� '( )�+#'&� * % �+#'&� $ -*

9” CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed

�� *'!+� $ -*� �#*(%�- �� ," &� �� #*� () ** �

�� *'!+� $ -*� �#*(%�- �� ," &� �� #*� () ** �

�� *'!+� $ -*� �#*(%�- �� ," &� �� #*� () ** �

�� '( )�+#'&� * % �+#'&� $ -*

�� *'!+� $ -*� �#*(%�- �� ," &� �� #*� () ** �

�� *'!+� $ -*� �#*(%�- �� ," &� �� #*� () ** �

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY CHAPTE

WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY R


(2) Press the operation menu key to switchthe soft keys to operation selectionkeys.

(3) Press the DELETE key.

(4) Press the PROGRAM key.

(5)

– When deleting all part programs

(5)–1 Press the ALL key.

All the registered part programs are deleted except those protected frombeing edited. The softkeys are switched to the operation selection keys.

(5)–2 Press the EXEC soft key. Allpart programs are deleted.

When the CANCEL soft keyis pressed, deletion of all thepart programs is cancelledand the system is restoredto the status in 1 in whichpart programs can beedited.

– When deleting the currently se-lected program

(5)–1 Press the THIS key.

The currently selected program is deleted and thesoft keys return to operatingas the operation selectionkeys.

– When deleting the specified partprogram

(5)–1 Press the (PROG#) key.

(5)–2 Enter the program numberand press the EXEC key.

(5)–2’ To delete multiple programsat a time, delimit the upperand lower program numberswith commas (, ).

Example When 0100,0200 is en-tered and the EXEC key ispressed, programs 0100to 0200 are deleted.



– 157 –

9.4 Editing Part Programs

Editing part programs means inserting or deleting data in part programs or otherwise altering them. Part pro-grams in memory can be edited as follows:

(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be stored and edited. (See Section 9.1.)

(2) Search for the part program to be edited. (See Section 5.3.) This step is not necessary if the part programto be edited has already been selected.

(3) Move the cursor to the position to be edited.

(4) Edit the part program.

Steps (3) and (4) are described in detail below.

9.4.1 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited

REPEAT BOTTOM (WORD) (PROG#) NEXT

PRGRAM

REPEART ��

��

TOP REPEAT (WORD) (PROG#) PRVIOS

PRGRAM

�� .'(!)�+#'&.*!%!�+#'&.$!-*

�� .'(!)�+#'&.*!%!�+#'&.$!-*

��

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI

WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH MEMORY EDIT


(2)

– When the position to be edited isafter the cursor

(2)–1 Press SEARCH.

– When the position to be edited isbefore the cursor

(2)–1 Press BW_SRCH. Backward search doesnot apply to words in thesame block.

– When returning the cursor to thebeginning of the part program

(3) (2)–1 Press REWIND.

– When searching for a word oraddress

(3)–1 Press (WORD).

(3)–2 Enter the address (suchas N) or word (such asN100) to be searched forand press the EXEC key.

The address or word issearched for in the specified direction, starting at the current cursor position. When thesearch is completed, thecursor moves to the located address or word.

�� .'(!)�+#'&.",# �&�!.$!-*� #*(%�-!

�� .'(!)�+#'&.",# �&�!.$!-*� #*(%�-!

– When moving the cursor to the end in forward search or beginning of the part program in backwardsearch

(3)–1 To move the cursor to the end of the part program in forward search, press the BOTTOM softkey.

(3)–1’ To move the cursor to the beginning of the part program in backward search, press the TOPsoft key.


– 158 –

9.4.2 Repeat search

Once a search function is used, the repeat search function enables the search function to be triggered simplyby pressing the REPEAT key.

(1) EXAMPLE OF USE

O1000 ;

*1

1 This example searches for G01 several timeswhen the program at the left is being edited, as-suming that the cursor is initially set at position *1.

N01 G00 G90 Z100. C0 ;

N02 G04 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ;2 At the first search, press: F_SRCH “G01” EXEC

The cursor will move to position *2.

N03 G07. 1 C57299 ; *2

3 At the second and subsequent searches, press: F_SRCH and REPEAT.

N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120. D01 F250 ;

N05 C30. ;The cursor will move to position *3, then to posi-tion *4. The search condition is displayed duringthe search.

N06 G02 Z90. C60. R30. ; *3N07 G01 Z70. ;

4 To change the search condition, use the sameoperation as with the previous version: F_SRCH(condition) EXEC

N08 G03 Z60. C70. R10. *4

To repeat the search with the new condition, press:F_SRCH and REPEAT.

N09 G01 C150. ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅

(2) Search conditions and CNC states for which the repeat search function can be used

(a) The repeat search function can be used with the forward and backward search functions for theCNC states (modes and screens) listed below.

Mode Screen Remarks

Edit Program, Directory

Memory Program

Tape Program

MDI Program

Test Program FS15- B only

BACK GROUND Program, Directory

(b) Once a forward or backward search is performed under a certain condition with a certain modeand screen, the search can be repeated under the same search condition even with other modesand screens provided that the new modes and screens are those to which the repeat function isapplicable (Example 1). If the search condition is one not displayed with the operation guide key,however, the warning message “FORMAT ERROR” or “CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIF-FERENT)” will be issued (Examples 2 and 3) .

(c) For words, sequence numbers, and program numbers, the forward and backward search func-tions are not distinguished from each other (Example 4) .

Example 1 After a word is searched for on the edit mode program screen, the same word can besearched for on the MDI mode program screen.

Example 2 A word search is not available on the tape mode program screen. If the repeat search functionis used on the tape mode program screen even for the same word that was searched for onthe edit mode program screen, the warning message “FORMAT ERROR” will be issued.

Example 3 After executing _SRCH BOTTOM, if you try to execute B_SRCH REPEAT, the warning mes-sage “CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT)” will be issued.

Example 4 After making a forward search using F_SRCH “G01” EXEC, you can perform a backwardsearch by pressing B_SRCH REPEAT.

(3) Caution

If you try to use the repeat search function before using the forward and backward search functions,the warning message “CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS EMPTY) will be issued.



– 159 –

9.4.3 Editing part programs

Part programs can be edited as follows:

(i) Alteration

– Changing one word to another word

– Changing one word to two or more words

– hanging one word to two or more blocks

(ii) Insertion

– Inserting one word

– Inserting two or more words

– Inserting two or more blocks

(iii) Deletion

– Deleting one word

– Deleting the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB)

– Deleting the words from the cursor position to the specified word (entered from the keyboard)

�� (�� (�� (� �� )�� (� �

��

�� ~�� ~��

�� (�� #)

�� ~EOB ~��

�� "#�$�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��'%

�� ("#�$�&�"!(%� ��&�"!(��'%

9�� CRT� operation� guidance� keys� displayed� when� the� ALTER/INSERT� key is� pressed

9�� CRT� soft� keys� displayed� when� the� DELETE� key� is� pressed

14�� CRT � operation� guidance� keys� displayed� � � � � � � when� the� ALTER/INSERT� key is� pressed

14�� CRT� soft� keys� displayed� � � when� the� DELETE� key� is� pressed

(1) Establish the status in which part pro-grams can be edited. (See Section 9.1.)

(2) Move the cursor to the position to beedited.


(4)

– To change data

(4)–1 Press the ALTER soft orhard key.

(4)–2 Press the (WORD) key.

(4)–3

i) To change one word to anoth-er, enter the new word.

ii) To change one word to two ormore words, enter the newwords.

iii) To change one word to two ormore blocks, enter the blocks.

(4)–4 Press the EXEC key.

The word indicated by thecursor is replaced with thenew data, and the cursormoves to the last word entered. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.




– 160 –

– To insert data

– (4)–1 Press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key.

– (4)–2 Press the (WORD) key.

– (4)–3

i) To insert one word, enter the new word.

ii) To insert two or more words, enter the new words.

iii) To insert two or more blocks, enter the blocks.

– (4)–4 Press EXEC key.

The entered word(s) are inserted immediately after the word containing the cursor.

The cursor is moved to the last inserted word.

Each soft key returns to an operation selection key.

– To delete data

(4)–1

i) To delete only one word, press the DLT–WRD soft key or the DELETE hard key.

ii) To delete two or more words, press the DELETE soft key and perform the following:

(4)–2

i) When the (WORD) key is pressed, the word indicated by the cursor is deleted. The soft keys re-turn to operating as operation selection keys.

ii) When the ~EOB key is pressed, the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) aredeleted. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.

iii) To delete the words from the cursor position to the specified word, 1) press the (WORD) key, 2) enter the word, and 3) press the EXEC key.

The words from the cursor position to the specified word are deleted. The soft keys return to theoperating as the operation selection keys.



– 161 –

9.5 MULTI–EDIT FUNCTION

The multi–edit function allows two programs to be edited at the same time by displaying them in the left andright halves of the program text screen.

9.5.1 Operation and Display Transition

PROGRAM 01234 N12345

01234 ;

.................... ;

........... ;

................ ;

........ ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

................ ;

........... ;

.................... ;

........ ;

............... ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

⋅ ⋅


ON M CHECK G E E R

��

��

��


01234 ;

.................... ;

........... ;

................ ;

........ ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

05678 ;

........... ;

.................... ;

........ ;

............... ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

⋅ ⋅

MULTI RIGHTEND /LEFT

��

��

� ��

��

��

⋅ ⋅

⋅ ⋅

⋅The screen can be divided into left and right areas for multi–editing only when the program text screen is displayed.⋅The screen can be divided into left and right areas regardless of whether it is also divided into upper and lower areas. The screen can be divided into left and right and upper and lower areas at the same time.

⋅Press the MULTI EDIT key. Enter Oxxxx from the MDI panel, then press the EXEC key. (This is the same operation as for starting background editing.) In this example, O5678 is entered.⋅When the multi–edit mode starts, the screen is divided into left and right areas for displaying two programs at the same time.⋅The program to be edited is displayed in green. (Initially, the program on the right is indicated as the target program). A rogram on the left can be made the target program by pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key.⋅Each program can be edited as usually, except that it is displayed on only half the screen.

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI

WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY EDIT


– 162 –

TO KEY TO PROBUFFER GRAM

CUR ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHTSOR~ SOR TOM /LEFT


01234 ;

.................... ;

........... ;

................ ;

........ ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

05678 ;

........... ;

.................... ;

........ ;

............... ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

⋅ ⋅

COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

��"&� ��%#��)��(��!� �� %#$�%%��

CUR~ ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHTSOR SOR TOM /LEFT

��

��

��#�$�&�"!� �!'� ��)��

��

��+��

��

��

��

�� *��

⋅ ⋅

⋅Press the operation menu key a few times. Until the soft keys for extended part program editing appear.⋅Copy and move operations can now be performed between both the left and right programs.⋅Merge and replacement operations conform to the standard extended part program editing specifications.⋅ When the COPY or MOVE key is pressed, the soft key indications change (same as standard indications).⋅When the <TO PROGRAM> key is pressed, the soft key indications change (same as standard indications).⋅Copying into the key–in buffer (TO KEY BUFFER) conform to standard extended part program editing specifications.

⋅Pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key switches the program to be edited (the source of copy and move operation).⋅The program to be edited is displayed in green and the other program is displayed in white.

⋅Move the cursor to the start point, then press the CURSOR ~ key. The soft key indications change.

��

��#�$�&�"!� �!'� ��)��

��"&� ��%#��)�� (��!�� %� #$�%%��



– 163 –


01234 ;

.................... ;

........... ;

⋅⋅⋅

05678 ;

........... ;

.................... ;

........ ;

............... ;⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

⋅ ⋅

CUR~ ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHTSOR SOR TOM /LEFT

�A � �� A � ��

COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

�

EXEC (PROG RIGHT#) /LEFT


01234 ;

.................... ;

........... ;

⋅⋅⋅⋅

05678 ;

........... ;

.................... ;

........ ;

............... ;⋅

⋅⋅ ⋅

��

��

⋅ ⋅

�

�

⋅Move the cursor to the end point, then press the ~ CURSOR key. To specify the end point as the end of the program, press the ~ BOTTOM key. To copy the entire program, do not specify the start point. Simply press the ALL key.⋅As shown in this example, when the target program to be edited is changed to the other program after the COPY or MOVE key was pressed, the other program automatically becomes the target program (the destination program for copy or move operation).⋅To change the destination program for copy and move operations to the other program, press the RIGHT/LEFT key.

⋅Each time the CONFIRM key is pressed, the cursor moves alternately to the start point and end point of the copy or movement source range. This is done so that the user can check the range before starting a copy or move operation.⋅Move the cursor to the target destination position, then press the EXEC key.⋅To create a separate program from the specified copy or movement source range and register it, press the PROG# key, enter a program number, then press the EXEC key.⋅The screen to the left shows that area A of program 01234 has been copied or moved toprogram 05678.

9.5.2 Remarks

(1) The <RIGHT/LEFT> key enables the user to select the target program from the two programs displayedduring multi–editing. When the target program is switched after the <COPY> or <MOVE> key is pressed,the target program is switched automatically after the range is specified i.e., the target program is switchedto the program selected as the target program when a copy or move was specified.

(2) When multi–editing is terminated, and the normal screen mode is restored, the program on the left is dis-played regardless of which program was been selected as the target program.

To execute a program created and selected in the right area in the memory mode, it must be selected anddisplayed in the left area of the screen.

(3) The program directory screen is automatically switched to the program text screen after a program searchterminates on the program directory screen.


– 164 –

9.6 Collating Programs

�� 000� �� 000� � � � �� 0000�

� � �� / �� #�

CONDENDELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

SE FILE

ALL I_PROG CURSOR HERE (FILE

RAM #)

�� '( )�+#'&� * % �+#'&� $ .*

�� '( )�+#'&� !,#��&� � $ .*� �#*(%�. �11� � � � � -" &� +" � � �� $ .� #*� () ** �

�� '( )�+#'&� * % �+#'&� $ .*

�� '( )�+#'&� !,#��&� � $ .*� �#*(%�. �11000� -" &� +" � � �� $ .� #*� () ** �


(2) Press the operation menu key toswitch the soft keys to the operationselection keys.

(3) Press the VERIFY key.

(4)

i) To collate all the part programson the tape with the programs inmemory, press the ALL key.

ii) To collate one part program onthe tape with the programs inmemory, press the 1–PRGRMkey.

iii) To start collation from the charac-ter indicated by the cursor in thecurrently selected memory pro-gram, press the CURSOR~ key.

The CURSOR~ key, however,can only be used when collatingprograms a second time becausethe previous collation failed.

(5) To cancel program collation, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, collating the remaining partprograms with the programs in memory cannot be restarted.

(6) When program collation terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.

(7) If program collation is unsuccessful, the message and the CANCEL soft key are displayed. Pressing theCANCEL key releases the alarm.

(8) To restart program collation using the CURSOR~ key, perform the following:

i) Select the program screen without cancelling the alarm. The contents of the tape buffer are displayed.

The block where a collation mismatch occurred is displayed on the first line.

ii) Cancel the alarm and re–select the program screen. The memory contents are displayed, starting atthe block where the collation mismatch occurred.

iii) The cursor is positioned at the word where the collation mismatch occurred.

iv) Move the cursor to the beginning of the next block. (If a collation mismatch occurs in the word immedi-ately before EOB, move the cursor to the next block but one.)

v) Press the CURSOR~ key.

vi) For the data buffer, program collation is automatically restarted at the beginning of the next block.


9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

– 165 –

9.7 Part Program Output

This section explains the following operations:

1 Outputting all the part programs

2 Outputting the currently selected part program

3 Outputting the specified part program

�� 0� 0�� 0� 00�� 00� 0�� 00� 0�

�� #�

ALL THIS (PROG CUSSOR (FILE

#) ~ #)

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

�� ,)#-� &"/,� !%,*'�/"!� .$"(� -$"� �� &"/� %,�� *+",,"!01

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

�� ,)#-� &"/,� !%,*'�/"!� .$"(� -$"� �� &"/� %,� *+",,"!

(1) Establish the status in which partprograms can be edited. (SeeSection 9.1.)

(2) Set whether to use the EIA orISO code as the punch code.(See Section 10.3.)

(3) Press the operation menu key toswitch the soft keys to the opera-tion selection keys.

(4) Press the PUNCH key.

(5)

i) When outputting all the partprograms

Press the ALL key.

Outputting all the part pro-grams is started.

ii) When outputting the cur-rently selected part program

Press the THIS key.

Outputting the currently se-lected part program isstarted.

CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIF COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

SE FILE

iii) When outputting the specified part program

Press the (PROG#) key, enter the program number, then press the EXEC key.

Outputting the specified part program is started.

iv) Press the CURSOR ~ key to output the specified part program from the position where the cursoris located.

(6) To cancel part program output, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, outputting the remain-ing part programs cannot be restarted.

When the PAUSE key is pressed, the end of block (EOB) code is output, part program output tempo-rarily stops, and the following soft keys are displayed:

��

– When the %–FEED key is pressed, the end of record (EOR) code and feed codes are output andpart program output is terminated.

– When the EX–SNGL key is pressed, part program output is continued until the EOB code is en-countered.

– When the EXEC key is pressed, part program output is restarted.

Feed code output can be terminated by pressing the NO–FEED key when an unpunched feedcode is being output to the beginning or end of the tape.

When part program output terminates, the soft keys return to the operating as operation selectionkeys.

B–62564E–1/029. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

– 166 –

9.8 Background Editing

If the operation mode is other than the EDIT mode, part programs can be stored and edited in the backgroundat any time.

Alarms or warnings that occur when part programs are being stored or edited in the background do not affectthe foreground operations at all. Conversely, alarms that occur in the foreground do not affect part programstorage and editing in the background.

��

��

(PROG PRVIOS

#) PRGRAM

�� $%�&�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

�� $%�&�( $#� �) ��#�� !�*'� �$%�&�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'�

�� $%�&�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

�� $%�&�( $#� �) �� !�*'

1 Starting background editing

(1) Establish the status in whichpart programs can be storedand edited. (See Section 9.1.)

An operating mode other thanthe EDIT mode, however,must be selected.

Also set the I/O inter-face for back-ground. (See Section 10.3.)

(2) Press the operation menu keyto switch the soft keys to op-eration selection keys.

(3) Press the BG–EDIT key orBACK EDIT soft key to switchthe soft keys to the operationguidance keys.

(4) To select the part programpreviously edited in the back-ground, press the PRV–PRGkey. The program previouslyedited in the background isdisplayed and the soft keysreturn to operating as the op-eration selection keys. Step(5) is not necessary.



(5) To select a part program, press the (PROG#) key, enter its program number, then press the EXEC key.The selected program is displayed and the soft keys return to operating as the operation selectionkeys.

PROGRAM (BG–EDIT), indicating that part programs can be stored and edited in background, is dis-played at the top right corner of the CRT.

(6) For the exact operations of part program storage and editing, see each item.

2 Terminating background editing

(1) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

(2) Press the BG–END key to terminate background editing.



– 167 –

9.9 Number of Programs that can be Registered

The maximum number of programs that can be registered is either 100, 400, or 1000, depending on the lengthof part program storage.

9.10 Length of Part Program Storage

Any of the following part program storage lengths can be selected:

80 m, 160 m, 320 m, 640 m, 1280 m, 2560 m, and 5120 m

NOTE Depending on what option is specified, the part program storage length may decrease.

(1) Custom macro common variables

Table 9.10 (a) Custom Macro Common Variables and Part Program Storage Length that Decrease

Common variable Part program storagelength that decreases

Remarks

Common variable A 0m #100 to #149, #500 to #540

Common variable B 0m #100 to #199, #500 to #599

Common variable C 2.2m #100 to #199, #500 to #699

Common variable D 7.4m #100 to #199, #500 to #999

(2) Number of offset pairs

Table 9.10 (b) Offset Pairs and Part Program Storage Length that Decreases

Offset memory Number of offset pairs Part program storagelength that decreases

Remarks

A

32 0m

G dA

99 0mGeometry and wear areA 200 1.5m Geometry and wear arenot distinguished.

499 4.4mnot distinguished.

999 10.3m

B

32 0m

G dB

99 1.5mGeometry and wear areB 200 3.7m Geometry and wear aredistinguished.

499 10.3mdistinguished.

999 22.0m

C

32 0m

G d

C

99 3.7m Geometry and wear aredistinguishedC 200 8.1m distinguished.Cutter diameter and tool

499 22.0mCutter diameter and toollength are distinguished.

999 44.7m

(3) Tool life management

The part program storage length is reduced by 5.9 m. When the number of tool life management pairs is512, the part program storage length is reduced by 45 m.

(4) Tool offsets using tool numbers

The part program storage length is reduced by 14 m.

(5) Addition of the number of work coordinate system pairs

The part program storage length is reduced by 4.4 m.


– 168 –

9.11 Extended Part Program Editing

The extended part program editing function performs the following operations on the programs in memorythrough the MDI panel:

(1) Copying or moving all or part of a program into the program buffer or key–in buffer

(2) Merging two programs into one

(3) Changing the word or address specified in the program

The extended part program editing function simplifies creation of a new identical program with the original pro-gram being left as is, and hence is useful when creating a program containing similar parts. This function canalso be used to change the program command sequence, command values, addresses, and other items.

Extended part programs can be edited only on the program screen or program list display screen in the EDIT,MDI, or background editing mode. Note, however, that the program list display screen cannot be used in theMDI mode.

(PROG#)

�� ~��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

� �� ~� �

* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the key–in buffer.* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.



– 169 –

9.11.1 Copying and moving a program

(1) Changing the 9” CRT soft keys during operation

The 9” CRT soft keys change as shown in the figure below. The arrow (↓ ) indicates the sequence in whichthe soft keys change. (The arrows in the figures on the next and subsequent pages have the same mean-ing.)

1 Coping a program (COPY)

(PROG#)

�� ~CURSOR

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

~EOB

* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the key–in buffer.

* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.


– 170 –

2 Moving a program

(PROG#)

�� ~CURSOR

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

~EOB

* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the key–in buffer.

* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.



– 171 –

(2) Copying or moving one program into another

1 Copying the whole program

Press the soft keys [COPY], [TO–PROG], [ALL], and [(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the programnumber and press the soft key [EXEC].

A

�XXXX

A

��

� ��

Program XXXX is copied into new program ****. The copied program is the same as the original pro-gram but with a different program number.

2 Copying or moving part of a program

Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TO–PROG], [CURSOR~], [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM], and[(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program number and press the soft key EXEC.

�XXXX ��

A

B

C

�XXXX

A

B

C

B��

��

� ��

Program part B of program XXXX is copied into new program ****.

That is, the portion from the start point to the end point of program XXXX is copied into O****.

The program in which an editing range is specified does not change before or after it is copied.

�XXXX ��

A

B

C

�XXXX

A

C

B��

��

� �

�

Program part B of program XXXX is deleted and moved to new program ****.

That is, the portion from the start point to the end point in program OXXXX is moved to O****.

The moved portion of the program in which an editing range is specified disappear after movement.


– 172 –

Press the soft key (PROG#) or numeric key 0, then enter the number of the new program to be createdusing copying and movement. When numeric key 0 is pressed or when program number 0 already exists,however, a warning is issued.

When the soft key [CURSOR~] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the start point of the editing range.When [~CURSOR] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the end point of the editing range. When [~BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the end point of the editing range.

NOTE 1 [CURSOR~] can be used to set the start point of the editing range any number of times beforethe end point of the editing range is set by [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM].

NOTE 2 If the end point of the editing range is set without the start point being set, a warning is issued.

NOTE 3 If the program number position is specified although the start point of the editing range is afterthe end point, a warning issued during execution.

NOTE 4 The set start and end points of the editing range are effective until they are cancelled.

The start and end points are cancelled in the following cases:

– When editing (except for word search, rewind and search bottom) is performed duringinsertion, deletion, or alteration after the start or end point has been set. Or when aprogram merge position is specified after the start or end point has been set

– When the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys after the start andend points have been set. However, if the soft keys return to operating as the operationselection keys after only the start point has been set, the start point is not cancelled.

NOTE 5 If the area becomes insufficient when a program is being copied, a warning occurs, andcopying is suspended.

NOTE 6 In background editing, it is only possible to copy a whole program provided the program isselected in foreground editing and it is not in the reset or rewind status. Otherwise, a warningis issued.

NOTE 7 In the MDI mode, a program can be copied and moved into the key–in buffer only.

NOTE 8 Copying or moving part of a program is possible only when there are three or more remainingregistered programs.

NOTE 9 If the power is turned off while copying or moving part of a program, the source program maybe divided into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case,change the number 0 to another number and merge the programs.

(3) Copying or moving a program into the key–in buffer

1 Copying or moving the word indicated by the cursor

Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TO–BUFF], and [WORD] in that order.

2 Copying or moving the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB)

Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TO–BUFF], and [EOB] in that order.

NOTE 1 The program is always copied or moved into the key–in buffer in units of words. Words longerthan the key–in buffer length cannot be copied and moved.

NOTE 2 The program is always copied or moved into the key–in buffer in the addition format. If wordsare already set in the key–in buffer, the program must be copied or moved one word at a time.

NOTE 3 The program list screen cannot be used to copy or move a program into the key–in buffer.



– 173 –

9.11.2 Merging programs (MERGE)


(PROG#)

��

��

��

��

��

(2) Merging programs by copying the source program

Press the soft keys [CHANGE] and [(PROG#)] and enter the program number. Then press the soft keys[CURSOR~], [BOTTOM], and [CPY–ORG] in that order.

��XXXX

A

B

C

B

��XXXX

A

C

B

� �

��

Program XXXX and program **** are merged. O**** does not change before or after the programs aremerged.


– 174 –

(3) Merging programs by deleting the source program

Press the soft keys [MERGE], [(PROG#)], [CURSOR>] or [BOTTOM], and [DLT–ORG] in that order.

�XXXX

A

B

C

��XXXX

A

C

B��

��

Program XXXX and program **** are merged.

O**** disappears after the programs have been merged.

When [CURSOR>] is pressed in (2) or (3) above, the position immediately after the cursor is set as themerge position. When [BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the merge position.

NOTE 1 If the soft key [MERGE] is pressed after the source program number has been set in the key–inbuffer, programs must always be merged according to (2) “Merging programs by copying thesource program.”

NOTE 2 If program number 0 already exists, a warning is issued.

NOTE 3 If the area becomes insufficient when programs are being merged, a warning is issued, andmerging the programs is suspended.

NOTE 4 For merging programs by copying the merge source program, at least four remainingregistered programs are needed. For merging programs by deleting the source program, atleast three remaining registered programs are needed.

NOTE 5 If the power is turned off when programs are being merged, the source program may be dividedinto two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case, change thenumber 0 to another number and merge programs.

NOTE 6 Programs cannot be merged in the MDI mode.



– 175 –

9.11.3 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE)


��

��

��

��

��

��

�� $!)� .$!� -*".� &!0� �� %-� +,!--! �� .$!� -*".� &!0-�11�/.*(�.%��''0� � �$�)#!� �".!,� .$!� -!�,�$�

��

(2) Changing words

1 Changing one word to either another word or multiple continuous words

2 Changing multiple continuous words to either one word or multiple continuous words

Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(WORD)], [(WORD)], and [EXEC] or [EX–SNGL] in that order.

Enter the word or words to be changed at the first (WORD) and enter the new word or words at thesecond (WORD).


– 176 –

(3) Changing addresses

Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(ADRES)], [(ADRES)], and [EXEC] or [EX–SNGL] in that order.

Enter the address or addresses to be changed at the first (ADRES) and enter the new address or address-es at the second (ADRES).

In (2) and (3), the first comma encountered after the first character is regarded as the delimiter betweenthe word or address to be changed and the new word or address. Examples are given below.

– X100, Y100 : X100 is changed to Y100.

– X1Y0, C10 : X1Y0 is changed to ,C10.

– , C10,Y100 : ,C10 is changed to Y100.

– ,,, C10 : , is changed to ,C10.

When [EXEC] is pressed, all the specified words or addresses after the cursor are replaced. When [EX–SNGL] (single block change) is pressed, the first specified word or address after the cursor is searchedfor and the tool stops. After the tool has stopped, change or no change can be selected.

NOTE 1 If two or more words to be changed include the end of block (EOB) and are followed by otherwords, they cannot be changed. (E.g.: X100;N10,X200;N20 caused a warning to be issued.)

NOTE 2 If [CHANGE] is pressed after the word or words to be changed have been set in the key–inbuffer, single–block change is applied.

NOTE 3 When changing words or addresses terminates normally, the total number of changed wordsor addresses is displayed at the beginning of the key–in buffer display line.

NOTE 4 The program list display screen cannot be used to change words or addresses.



– 177 –

9.11.4 Automatically inserting sequence numbers

In the part program storage and edit mode (including the background edit mode), a sequence number can beautomatically inserted in each block in a fixed increment when a program is created using the MDI panel. Whenthe INSERT key is pressed after the end of block (EOB) has been entered, the sequence number obtained byadding a fixed increment to the current sequence number is automatically inserted into memory with addressN. The sequence number, however, is automatically inserted following EOB only when EOB is inserted at theend of the program (i.e., when the cursor is positioned before %).

If EOB is inserted at the middle of the program, a sequence number is not automatically inserted.

1 To automatically insert a sequence number when a program is created using the MDI panel, first set theSEQ bit (bit 1) of parameter No. 0010 to 1. Next set the initial value of the sequence number in parameterNo. 0031 and then the increment in parameter No. 0032.

2 Select the part program storage and edit (EDIT) mode or set the status in which a part program can beedited in the background.

3 Enter the program number and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key.

4 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory.If 10 is set as the initial value, N10 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.

5 Insert data of either one block or two or more blocks in the format in which the data is delimited by EOB.

6 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory.If 2 is set as the increment, N12 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.

7 To not insert N12 into the next block in step 6, press the DELETE key to delete N12.


– 178 –

NOTE 1 When data of two or more blocks is inserted, the sequence number is inserted only next to theEOB code of the last block.

NOTE 2 If the sequence number to be automatically inserted exceeds 99999, it returns to the initialvalue.

NOTE 3 Even if an EOB code (M30, etc.) is inserted at the end of the program, a sequence number isautomatically inserted. Use the DELETE key to delete the sequence number.

NOTE 4 To change a sequence number, move the cursor to the last sequence number of the program(immediately before %), enter the sequence number to be changed, and press the ALTER key.Subsequently, this sequence number plus an increment is automatically inserted. When N120is entered and the ALTER key is pressed, for example, the sequence number is changed toN120 and subsequently updated, such as 122, 124, 126, ...



– 179 –

The values in the following examples are valid for part program editing but cannot be used as the first digitsof the subsequent sequence numbers to be automatically inserted:

Example 1 N123456 ALTER: Digit overflow (more than five digits)

Example 2 N1234X100 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.

Example 3 N100 N1234 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.

Example 4 N–100 ALTER: There is data other than numeric characters after the N command.

NOTE 5 As shown in the figure below, the first digit of the sequence number to be automatically insertedcan also be changed by deleting the last sequence number and inserting a new sequencenumber.

NOTE 6 Leave an allowance of at least six characters at the end of the key–in buffer.


– 180 –

9.12 Playback

When the playback option is selected, teaching in the job mode and teaching in the handle mode become avail-able. In these modes, the tool position obtained through manual operation can be loaded into memory as theprogram position and a program can be created.

To load words (O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T, P, Q, and EOB, etc.) other than axis names into memory, execute the sameload operations as in the EDIT mode.

The tool position can be loaded into memory as follows:

1 Select teaching in the jog mode or teaching in the handle mode.

2 Move the tool to the desired position.

3 Press a soft key to select the program.

4 Enter address X.

5 Press the soft key INSERT to load the tool position of the X–axis into memory.

Example X10.521 (when the absolute position is entered in mm)

X10.521 (contents loaded into memory)

6 Likewise, enter Z and press INSERT. The tool position of the Z–axis is loaded into memory.

NOTE 1 When a value is entered and INSERT is pressed after an axis address (X, Y, or Z, etc.) has beenentered, the tool position plus the entered value is loaded into memory. This operation is usedto compensate the tool position using keys.

– If the entered value exceeds the maximum value, the tool position cannot be loaded intomemory.

– If the entered value includes a decimal point and is less than the least input increment,it is rounded to the least input increment.

Example The tool position is assumed to be 0. (Least input increment: 1/1000)

Entered value Value loaded

Z123456.78 Cannot be loaded

Z1.2345678 Z1.235

NOTE 2 All the coordinates loaded into memory in this operation are treated as absolute coordinates.A value with a decimal point is loaded as a coordinate. If the coordinate to be loaded is 0,however, no decimal point is assigned to it.

Example Coordinate Value loaded

X000.000 X0

X000.987 X0.987

X12345678 X12345.678

NOTE 3 To load the commands inserted before and after the tool position into memory, execute thesame load operations as in the EDIT mode.

NOTE 4 Numeric keys cannot be used to load values consisting of more than eight digits into memory.

NOTE 5 On the 9” CRT, up to 79 characters can be edited at a time. On the 14” CRT, up to 74 characterscan be edited at a time. If the number of characters exceeds these limits, clear all the keyedin data once.

NOTE 6 Do not edit macro statements in the playback mode. For example, in the macro statement#1=#1XOR #2, the exclusive–OR (XOR) instruction is processed as address X.

NOTE 7 Playback cannot be applied to the pararell axes.



– 181 –

Example of Operation

X

Z

P0

P2P2

(Example ) 01234 N1 G92X___Z___ ; …………P0

N2 G00G90X___Z___ ;………P1

N3 G01Z___F300 ;

N4 M02 ;

The program in the above example can be loaded into memory as follows:

1 Select teaching in the handle mode.

2 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P0.

3 Select the program to be loaded.

4 Load the program number into memory.

5 Enter address N and the value 1, then press INSERT.

6 Enter address G and the value 29, then press INSERT. G92 is loaded into memory.

7 Enter in address X and press INSERT. Likewise, enter address Z and press INSERT. Then press EOB.The P0 tool position is loaded into memory.

8 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P1.

9 Enter address G and the value 00, the press INSERT. Then enter address G90, press INSERT, enter ad-dress X, press INSERT, and enter address Z and EOB in that order. The P1 tool position is loaded intomemory.

10 Position the tool at P2.

11 Enter address G and the value 01, then press INSERT. Then enter address Z, press INSERT, and enteraddress F, the value 300, and EOB in that order. Block 3 is loaded into memory.

12 Load N4 into memory. Enter address M, the value 02 and EOB to load the last block of N4M02; intomemory. This completes loading the entire program into memory.

The program in memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode in the same way as in the EDIT mode.

Also as in the EDIT mode, pressing INSERT for each word is not always needed. For example, the key-strokes N, 1, G, 9, 2, X, Z, EOB, INSERT can be substituted for steps 5 to 7.


– 182 –

9.13 Format Guidance

9.13.1 NC format guidance

As a part programming guide using the NC format, the following two types of guidance are available:

1) Guidance to list of G codes

2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code

1) Guidance to list of G codes

To use the programming guide by displaying the guidance to the list of G codes on the CRT, the operationis as follows.

1 Select the program display screen.

2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) modeor assuming the background edit state.

3 Key–input G, and then depress the<HELP> key.In the program display screen, the<HELP> key has a role to display theguidance too.

4 The guidance to the list of G codes is dis-played in the lower half of the programdisplay pattern.Five G codes and the meaning of each ofthem are displayed at once.

5 It is a possible to turn the page of theguidance to the list of G codes by de-pressing the <↑> key or the <↓> key.The screen shown at the right is dis-played when the <↓> key is depressedonce from the state 4.

O1234 N10 ;N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;N30 X150. Z182. ;

>GEDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +


O1234 N10 ;N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;N30 X150. Z182. ;

%

(G CODE GUIDANCE) G00 : POSITIONING G01 : LINEAR IPL. G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW G03 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CCW G04 : DWELL



O1234 N10 ;N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;N30 X150. Z182. ;

%

(G CODE GUIDANCE) G09 : EXACT STOP G10 : DATA SETTING G10.1: DATA SETTING(PC) G17 : XY PLANE G18 : ZX PLANE





– 183 –

2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code

To use the programming guide by displaying on the CRT the standard format guidance to one block fora certain G code, the operation is as follows.


2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) modeor assuming the background edit state.

3 Key–input the G code, and then depressthe <HELP> key.To display the standard format guidanceto one block for G02, for example, key–input <G>, <0>, <2>, and then depressthe <HELP> key.

4 The standard format guidance to oneblock for the input G code is displayed inthe lower half of the program displayscreen.Shown at the right is the standard formatguidance to one block for G02 being dis-played.

O1234 N10 ;N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;N30 X150. Z182. ;

>G02_EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +


O1234 N10 ;N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;N30 X150. Z182. ;

%

(G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW) G02 X–– Y–– I–– J–– F–– ; (XY PLANE) G02 X–– Z–– I–– K–– F–– ; (ZX PLANE) G02 Y–– Z–– J–– K–– F–– ; (YZ PLANE) IF HERICAL IPL.,SPECIFY ONE MORE AXIS RADIUS CAN BE SPECIFIED BY R––




– 184 –

3) Example of NC format guidance operation

Described below is an example of part programming using the NC format guidance function.

1 Suppose that you have inserted up toG40 by the part program edit operation(see the illustration at the right), and thatyou became aware at the very moment toprogram the drilling cycle that you haveforget the G code. In such a case, key–in-put <G>, and depress the <HELP> key.

2 The guidance to the list of G codes is dis-played in the lower half of the programdisplay screen.

3 Search for the G code of the drilling cycleby depressing the <↑> key or the <↓> keya number of times.It is known from the guidance to the list ofG codes shown at the right that the Gcode of the drilling cycle is G81.

4 Key–input <8>,<1>.Depress the <HELP> key to display thestandard format guidance to the G81block.If you know that the G code of the drillingcycle is G81 and have forgot the G81 for-mat, omit steps (1)–(3), and just depressthe <HELP> key after inputting <G>,<8>,<1>.

O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;

%

>G_EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +


O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 %

(G CODE GUIDANCE) G09 : EXACT STOP G10 : DATA SETTING G10.1: DATA SETTING(PC) G17 : XY PLANE G18 : ZX PLANE



O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 %

(G CODE GUIDANCE) G73 : DRILLING(DEEP HOLE) G74 : TAPPING(COUNTER) G76 : BORING(FINE) G80 : CANNED CYCLE CANCEL G81 : DRILLING



O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 %

(G CODE GUIDANCE) G73 : DRILLING(DEEP HOLE) G74 : TAPPING(COUNTER) G76 : BORING(FINE) G80 : CANNED CYCLE CANCEL G81 : DRILLING





– 185 –

5 The standard format guidance to the G81block is displayed in the lower half of thescreen.

6 Key–input while referring to the guid-ance.

7 Key–input the data of one block, andthen depress the soft key <INSERT>,and it will be inserted into the program. Atthe same time the guidance display willdisappear.

NOTE 1 The guidance to the list of G codes does not include some G codes which are generally lessfrequently used, for example G31.2 (multi–step skip).

NOTE 2 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, an absolutely standard formatis displayed. In some cases, therefore, it may not be necessary to program according to theguidance.

NOTE 3 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, some word addresses havecomments to explain the meaning. However, those the function of each of which is clear, suchas the dimension word addresses X, Y, Z, etc., the feed rate F, the auxiliary function M, thespindle function S or the tool function T, etc., do not have comment.

O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 %

(G81 : DRILLING) G81 X–– Y–– Z–– R–– F–– L–– ;

Z:Z POINT R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)



O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 %

(G81 : DRILLING) G81 X–– Y–– Z–– R–– F–– L–– ;

Z:Z POINT R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)

>G99G81X150.Y250.Z–173.R–100.F100;_EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +


O1234 N10 ;N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;N30 S3000 M03 ;N40 G99 G81 X150. Y250. Z–173. R100. F100%

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +



– 186 –

9.13.2 Format guidance with figure

The guidance to the standard format of each G code can be displayed with a figure on the CRT screen andused as a guide to the preparation of part program.

The operation procedure is the same as that for the NC format guidance.

Proceed in the sequence below.

1 Set the mode selector switch on the operator’s panel to the tape memory/edit (EDIT) mode or the back-ground edit mode.(Refer to III, 9.8)


i) Press the function menu key to change the soft key to the function selection key.

ii) Press the PROGRAM key to display the program.

If the screen is not the one for displaying the program text, press the CHAPTER key to change the softkey to the chapter selection key, and press the TEXT key.

Otherwise, press the PROGRAM key repeatedly until the text is displayed.

3 Press the operation menu key to change the soft key to operation selection key.

4 To use the format guidance with a figure for G87, for example, press the HELP key after input the G87.

The description for the input G code is displayed in the upper right half of the program display screen, andthe standard format guidance is displayed in the lower right half of the screen.

The following drawing shows the state with the description for G87 displayed.

R�

Z

⇐ R

O1111 ;N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6 ;N003 G43 Z0 H11 ;N004 S30 M3 ;N005 %


(G87 : BORING(MANUAL)) G87 X–– Y–– Z–– R–– Q–– F–– L–– ;

Z:Z POINT Q:SHIFT(TIPE 2) R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES(L0:DATA SET ONRY)

>G87_EDIT***STOP**** *** 03:16:16 LSK

BACKEDIT

DELETEINSERTALTER DRCTRYMEMORY

REWINDBKWRDSEARCH

BKWRDSEARCH

DELETEWORD

(I, J)

G87(G98) G87(G99)

R�

Z

�Z

⇒⇒⇐

(5) While observing the format guidance, key in the data in one block and then, press the INSERT key. Thedata is inserted into the program, and the guidance display disappears.

When the CAN key is pressed, the formyat guidance display disappears and the display is returned to thetape memory/edit or the background edit program screen.

NOTE 1 The function of format guidance with figure can be added when a 14” CRT is used.

NOTE 2 Nothing is drawn for some G codes.

When nothing is drawn for the G code, the message ”THIS G CODE HAS NO PICTURE” isdisplayed.



– 187 –

9.14 Program Encryption

The types of program protection described below are enabled by setting a code specific to each machine toolbuilder in the system parameters.

(1) Encryption

After the parameters for encryption are set, the operations listed below cannot be performed for the pro-grams in the specified protection range.

(1) Program input (read)

(2) Program output (punch–out)

(3) Program display

(4) Program editing

Encryption enables a custom macro program developed by a machine tool builder to be protected againstinadvertent editing or alteration by end users.

In addition, complete security is provided because the contents of such a program are never displayed.

(2) I/O of encrypted programs

A program stored in memory can be encrypted before it is punched out. A program encrypted and punchedout can also be loaded into memory.

An encrypted program is indecipherable when it is punched out. Therefore, the programs that require se-curity, such as custom macro programs of a machine tool builder, can be encrypted and punched out, andthe punched out data can be shipped with the machine to the end user as maintenance data. Such apunched out custom macro program enables FANUC service staff or end users rather than the service staffof the machine tool builder to restore the contents of the Bubble Memory if destroyed for some reason.

(a) Parameters

Data No. Data

2210 ��%��

Set a code.When a value other than 0 is set here, the programs arelocked and the display goes blank.

Setting: 0 to 99999999

Data No. Data

2211 ��$%��

When the same value as the code is set here, the� programsare unlocked. The data set here is not displayed.

Setting: 0 to 99999999

2213 �� "��!��

Programs whose numbers lie within the range of values sethere are locked. Set a desired upper and lower programnumbers.

Setting: 0 to 9999[Example]

When parameter No. 2212=7000 and� parameter No. 2213=8499, programs whose numbers are from O7000 to O8499 are locked.

Data No. Data

2212 �#�� "��!��


– 188 –

(i) Code (PSW) setting

This parameter can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY).

For security, no code set is displayed. To unlock the programs, set KEY to the same value as theset code. Be careful not to forget the value set as a code, otherwise the programs cannot be un-locked.

If you forget the set code, it becomes necessary to clear all the programs whose numbers lie withinthe protection range, as described later.

This operation sets PSW to 0 to release the locked state. In this case, all programs in the protec-tion range are cleared, thus providing security.

(ii) Key (KEY) setting

This parameter can be set at any time. The value set is not displayed.

This parameter is internally set to 0 when the power is turned on.

(iii) Setting the lower value (PMIN) and upper value (PMAX) of the program protection range

These parameters can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY).

When PMIN = 0 is specified, PMIN = 9000 is assumed.

When PMAX = 0 is specified, PMAX = 9999 is assumed.

Set values so that PMAX > PMIN.

NOTE 1 Punching out and reading parameters

The four parameters described above cannot be punched out or read.

NOTE 2 Clearing parameters

The four parameters described above are not cleared even when the parameter file is clearedduring IPL state.

NOTE 3 Display

The contents of PSW and KEY are not displayed. However, note that when PSW = 0, the value0 is displayed to indicate that the programs are unlocked state.

NOTE 4 Setting PSW and KEY

When setting PSW or KEY, pressing <+INPUT> does not add the value to the previous value,but overwrites the previous value.

Example When KEY = 99, pressing 1 together with <+INPUT> sets KEY to 1, not 100(= 99 + 1).

(b) The locked and unlocked states

(i) The unlocked state

Setting PSW to 0 or KEY releases the programs from the locked state.

(ii) The locked state

Setting PSW to other than 0 or KEY sets the program in the locked state.



– 189 –

(c) Relationships between program I/O and parameters

(i) Punching out programs

Type of operation Parameter state Results

P h ( ll)PSW � 0

PSW � KEYAll programs outside the specified protec-tion range are punched out in the normalway.

Punch–out (all) PSW = KEY All programs in the specified protectionrange are encrypted and punched out.

PSW = 0 All programs are punched out in the normal way.

Punch–out PSW � 0

PSW � KEY

All programs outside the specified protec-tion range are punched out in the normalway. For the programs in the specifiedprotection range, only percent signs (%)are punched out, and a warning messageis output.

Punch out (by program number)

PSW = KEY

All programs outside the specified protec-tion range are punched out in the normalway. The programs in the specified protec-tion range are encrypted and punched out.

PSW = 0 The specified programs are punched out inthe normal way.

(ii) Reading from tape containing encrypted programs

Operation Parameter state Password on tape Results

N l i

PSW� 0PSW = password on tape The tape is read normally.

N l i

PSW � 0PSW � password on tape P/S alarm No. 580 occurs.

Normal operation

PSW 0

The password on tape is set inPSW d th t i dNormal operation

PSW = 0

p pPSW and the tape is read.When the tape has been readPSW = 0 When the tape has been reador reading the tape is canceled,h l k d

g p ,the programs are locked.

NOTE 1 Password on punched–out tape

Encrypted programs punched out onto tape include the encrypted code set for PSW. Thisencrypted code is called the password.

NOTE 2 When punching out the programs on tape after encryption, set the EIA bit in parameter No. 0to 0 to specify ISO for the punching code. If the programs are punched out with the EIA bit setto 1, P/S alarm No. 581 occurs.

NOTE 3 Tape containing encrypted programs cannot be read by specifying 1 PROGRAM ADD forregistering additional programs.

NOTE 4 Programs outside the protection range cannot be read.

NOTE 5 Tape containing encrypted programs can be read normally even in the locked state. At thistime, the REP bit in parameter No. 2200 is referenced.

If an attempt is made to register a program that has a program number already registered, theREP bit specifies the following operations:

REP = 0: An alarm occurs.REP = 1: The existing program is deleted and the new program with the same number

is registered.

(d) Verification of tape containing encrypted programs

In normal tape verification, the programs in memory are checked against the encrypted programs ontape. However,

note that the contents of the tape being verified are not displayed when PSW � KEY.


– 190 –

(e) Program display

Locked programs are not displayed. Only unlocked programs are displayed.

NOTE Locking and unlocking programs do not change the display immediately. The displayconforms to the program protection only after another operation, such as program search, isperformed.

(f) Program editing and deletion

Locked programs cannot be edited or deleted, except according to the following special procedurefor deleting locked programs.

[Deleting locked programs]

1 Turn on power while holding down both the <0> and <CAN> keys.

2 The message ALL LOCKED PROGRAMS DELETE OK? appears.

Enter Y. All locked programs are deleted and PSW is set to 0, producing the unlocked state.

When N is entered, the locked programs are not deleted.



– 191 –

9.15 Time Stamp Function

When a program is executed, the time the machining specified by the main program is executed is displayedon the program time display screen. The machining times of up to 10 main programs are displayed in hours,minutes, and seconds. When more than 10 programs are executed, the machining times are discarded in theorder of execution.

The time from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode until another reset is monitored. Ifno reset occurs during operation, the time from the start until M02 or M30 is monitored. The time does not in-clude the time during which operation is suspended, but does include the time spent waiting for the M/S/T/Bfunction to complete.

The displayed machining time data can be ”stamped,” i.e. inserted, as a comment in a program stored inmemory after the program number.

Instead of the program tape length data (amount of memory used), it is possible to display the machining timeinserted after a program number on the program directory screen. Whether to display the machining time ortape length is specified by a parameter. The machining time of each program can therefore be used as refer-ence information when planning processes in the factory.

Machining time calculation and display

1 Select the memory operation mode, and press the <reset> key.

2 Select the program screen, and select the program for which machining time is to be calculated.

3 Execute the program and perform the actual machining.

4 If the graphic drawing screen is available, select it. The machining time is then displayed, continually beingupdated, together with a machining path.

5 When the <reset> key is pressed or M02 or M30 is executed, monitoring the machining time terminates.When the machining time display screen is selected, the elapsed machining time is displayed together withthe number of the main program executed. The machining time displayed on the graphic drawing screenis reset to 0 when the operation is terminated.


– 192 –

6 If the machining time needs to be calculated for additional programs, repeat steps (1) to (5). Then the ma-chining time display screen sequentially displays the program numbers and machining times of the mainprograms executed.

Note, however, that the machining time cannot be displayed for more than 10 main programs. If this num-ber is exceeded, the machining times of earlier programs are discarded.

The screens below show the change in the display of the machining time. The left–hand screen displaysthe machining times for 10 main programs (O0020, O0040, ..., 00200). When the machining time is calcu-lated for an additional program (O0220), the display changes to the right–hand screen.

Stamping the machining time (inserting the machining time in a program as a comment)

1 Before the elapsed machining time can be inserted as a comment in the program, the machining time ofthe program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. The machining time display screenmust first be checked to see if the program number for which the machining time is to be stamped is dis-played.

2 After setting the part program storage and edit mode or the background editing mode, select the programscreen, then select the program in which machining time is to be inserted.

Suppose that the machining time of program number O0100 is displayed on the machining time displayscreen.

3 Press the <operation menu> key, and switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. Then, pressthe <INS–TIM> key. The program is rewound, and the machining time of the program is inserted after theprogram number.



– 193 –

4 The machining time is inserted into a program after an existing comment, if any, in the block containing theprogram number.

5 When bit TIM of parameter 0011 is set to 1, the machining time inserted as a comment in a program canbe displayed instead of the amount of memory used. The data is displayed on the program directoryscreen listing the program numbers and program names.

NOTE 1 When a program is stopped due to an alarm, the machining time continues to be monitored untilthe alarm is reset.

NOTE 2 If the bit for M30 in parameter No. 2400 is set to 1, the FIN completion signal is returned withoutresetting the control unit with M30. This enables a program to be executed repeatedly fromthe beginning. In this case, the machining time stops to be monitored when the FIN signal isreturned.

NOTE 3 The machining time of a program cannot be inserted in a program with the <INS–TIM> keyunless the machining time is displayed on the machining time display screen.

NOTE 4 When the machining time inserted in a program is displayed on the program directory screen,if the comment after the program number consists only of the machining time, the machiningtime is displayed in the program name field as well as the machining time display field.

NOTE 5 If machining times are inserted in programs as shown in the examples below, the programdirectory screen does not display the machining times.


– 194 –

Example 1 When the program name exceeds 16 characters

Example 2 When more than one machining time is inserted

��



– 195 –

Example 3 When the format of the inserted machining time is changed from the valid formathhhHmmMssS (a three–digit number followed by H, a two–digit number followed by M, anda two–digit number followed by S)

NOTE 6 If the machining time is calculated erroneously, for example, by pressing the <reset> key duringprogram execution, calculate the correct machining time by reexecuting the program. Whentwo or more machining times are displayed for a program on the machining time display screen,the latest machining time is inserted in the program.


– 196 –

9.16 Simple Conversational Programming

This function helps the user to develop an NC machining program by selecting menu items displayed on theCRT screen and entering data according to menu screens, instead of by programming in the NC format. Forexample, the screen displays menu items such as the position and depth of drilling. The user can create aprogram simply by entering desired values in response to the menu items.

For detailed information about this function, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.

NOTE This function can only be used with the 9” CRT/MDI, not with the 14” CRT/MDI.

This section first explains the procedure by which users create a program using this function. This section thenexplains the procedure for machine tool builders to create a machining menu incorporating their proprietarymachining expertise by using tools such as custom macros, and thus to implement their own conversationalfunctions.

(1) Outline of simple conversational programming

1 Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT).

2 Select the simple conversational schedule screen.

Schedule machining by selecting machining menuitems in the order of machining.

3 Select the simple conversational data input screen.

Enter data for each machining menu item.

4 Select the memory command mode. � →� Execute the machining program.



– 197 –

(2) Configuration of simple conversational programming

Programs that can be developed by simple conversational programming, (hereafter referred to as simpleconversational programs,) are configured as follows.

(a) Number of programs

Up to four simple conversational programs can be held in memory.

(b) Number of blocks

Each simple conversational program can contain 16 blocks.

Each machining menu item prepared by a machine tool builder constitutes one block. This block canbe considered as being equivalent to an NC–format program block starting and ending with EOBcodes.

(c) Number of words

Each block can contain up to 16 words.

Each machining menu item requires several data input items for machining. Suppose that data itemssuch as hole depth and spindle speed are provided for the menu item, tapping. In this case, each dataitem constitutes one word. This word can be considered as being equivalent to an NC–format programword such as X–– or Y––.

MENU PROGRAM

N01 INITIAL SETN02 DRILLINGN03 BOLT HOLE CIRCLEN04 TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

N015END PROGRAMN016

N04 TAPPING

01 DEPTH = 02 SPINDLE RPM = . . . .

15 = 16 =

01

02

03

04

��

��

��

��


– 198 –

(3) Simple conversational schedule screen

Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT) and press the soft key <MNU_PRG>. Then, thesimple conversational schedule screen shown below appears. The right–hand side of the screen displaysa menu listing drilling, tapping, and so forth. To schedule the machining, select from the menu those itemsthat are required for machining in the order of machining.

�� #�� "!(�$%�&�"!�� #$"�$� � !' ��$

��"�� !' ��$% ��!�!�� !'

(a) Program selection

Enter a number from 1 to 4 to select the desired simple conversational program, then press the softkey <SRC_PRG>.

Example When the simple conversational program having number 01 is currently selected, and theprogram having number 02 is to be selected

(Operation 1)

1 Enter 2, then press the soft key <SRC_PRG>.

��

(Operation 2)

1 Press the soft key SRC_PRG.

2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <NXT_PRG>.

��

(Operation 3)

1 Press the soft key <SRC_PRG>.

2 Enter 2.

3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <EXEC>.

��



– 199 –

(b) Block selection

Each simple conversational program can contain up to 16 blocks. The blocks are numbered N01,N02, ..., N16 in the order of machining. A block is currently selected when the cursor is placed overthe block. The desired block is selected by pressing the cursor keys <→> or <←>.

One screen displays the first eight blocks (block numbers N01 to N08) and the other screen displaysthe last eight blocks (block numbers N09 to N16). To change screens, position the cursor at the lastblock on the screen (N08 or N16) and press the cursor key <→>. The other screen appears with thecursor positioned at the first block (N09 or N01). Alternatively, position the cursor at the first block onthe screen (N01 or N09) and press the cursor key <←>. The other screen appears with the cursorpositioned at the last block (N08 or N16).

The screen can also be switched using the page keys <↓> or <↑>. (On the compact 9” CRT/MDI, pressthe cursor keys <→> and <↑> at the same time, or press <←> and <↑> at the same time.)

(c) Positioning the cursor at the first block

When the <reset> key is pressed, the cursor moves to the first block (N01) regardless of on whichblock number the cursor is positioned.

(d) Machining menu display

Up to 16 machining menu items can be set. The number of prepared menu items depends on the ma-chine tool builder. Each menu item is numbered. Menu item numbers 01 to 08 are displayed on onescreen and menu item numbers 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. The screens are switchedusing the <↑> and <↓> keys.

(e) Block editing

(i) Deletion of all blocks

1 Press the soft key <DELETE>.

��

2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <ALL>.

��

3 The contents of all blocks from numbers 01 to 16 are deleted, and the blocks become empty.

(ii) Deletion of one block

1 Move the cursor to the block to be deleted.

2 Press the soft key <DELETE>.

��

3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <THIS>.

��

4 The contents of the block where the cursor is positioned are deleted. Subsequent blocks areshifted upward by one block.


– 200 –

(iii) Insertion of one block

1 Move the cursor to a block where the new block is to be inserted.

2 Enter the machining menu item number to be inserted using the numeric keys.

3 Press the soft key <INSERT>.

��

4 When the block where the cursor is positioned contains no data, the machining menu itementered in step (2) is set in the block.

When the block where the cursor is placed already has a machining menu item set, that blockand subsequent blocks are shifted backward by one block. The machining menu item en-tered in step (2) is then set in the block.

When a machining menu item number is entered in step (2), the cursor position remains un-changed if the machining menu item is not followed by an EOB code. If an EOB code is en-tered after the machining menu item number, the cursor moves to the next block after blockinsertion.



– 201 –

(iv) Insertion of two or more blocks

1 Move the cursor to the block where new blocks are to be inserted.

2 Enter the machining menu item numbers to be inserted in the desired order.

Separate each machining menu item number with an EOB code. To insert machining menuitem numbers 01, 03, and 07 successively in that order, for example, enter 01 EOB 03 EOB07. When the last number is not followed by an EOB code, the cursor is positioned over thelast block inserted. When the last number is followed by an EOB code, the cursor is posi-tioned over the block immediately after the last block inserted.

3 Press the soft key <INSERT>.

��

4 If no machining menu item is set in the block at which the cursor is positioned or in any subse-quent blocks, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set successively starting atthe first empty block.

When a machining menu item is already set in the block where the cursor is positioned or inany subsequent blocks, that block and the subsequent blocks are shifted backward by thenumber of inserted blocks. Then, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are setsuccessively starting at the block where the cursor is positioned.


– 202 –

(v) Block replacement

When a block already containing a machining menu item is to be replaced with another machiningmenu item, use the procedure below.

1 Move the cursor to the block that is to be replaced.

2 First, delete the block according to the procedure in item (ii) above.

3 Then, enter a new machining menu item number, and insert the menu item at the block ac-cording to the procedure in item (iii) above.

Example Change the machining menu item in block number N03 from 06:BOLT HOLE CIRCLE to07:LINE AT ANGLE.

(1) Position the cursor over block number N03.

Press the soft key <DELETE>, then pressthe soft key <THIS>.

(2) Enter 07, then press the soft key <INSERT>.

(3) The machining menu item of block numberN03 has been changed.



– 203 –

(4) Simple conversational data input screen

The simple conversational data input screen is used to enter data for each machining menu item set onthe simple conversational schedule screen.

(a) Switch to the simple conversational data input screen

One of two methods can be used. One method sets all required machining menu items at a time inthe order of machining on the simple conversational schedule screen, then enters data for the machin-ing menu items. The other method sets one machining menu item at a time on the simple conversa-tional schedule screen, then enters data for that machining menu item. This step is repeated for allmachining menu items.

In both methods, the procedure below is used to switch from the simple conversational schedulescreen to the simple conversational data input screen.

1 On the simple conversational schedule screen, place the cursor over the block containing the ma-chining menu item for which data is to be entered. Then, press the soft key <BLK–DAT>.

2 The simple conversational data input screen for the machining menu item of the block appears.

Simple Conversational Data Input Screen

(b) Data menu item selection

Each machining menu item allows up to 16 data menu items to be set. The number of data menu itemsdepends on the machining menu item and the specifications laid down by each machine tool builder.

The cursor is positioned over the data field of the currently selected data menu item, indicating thatdata can be entered in that field. The desired data menu item can then be selected using the cursorkeys <→> or <←>.

One screen can display eight data menu items, numbered from 01 to 08. Data menu items numberedfrom 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. When a data menu item on the next screen is selectedwith the cursor keys, the screen display is automatically changed. The screen display can also beswitched using the page keys.


– 204 –

(c) Data input

1 Move the cursor to the data menuitem for which data is to be entered.

Enter a numeric value, then press thesoft key <INPUT>.

2 Data is entered.

If the entered numeric value is notfollowed by an EOB code, the cursorposition is not changed.

If the entered numeric value is followedby an EOB code, the cursor movesto the next data menu item.

Multiple data items can be entered at a time. In this case, separate the data items with EOB codes.

When the soft key <EMPTY> is pressed for a data menu item for which data has been entered,the data input field is cleared.

(d) Return to the simple conversational schedule screen

After entering all data required for a machining menu item, press the soft key <END> to return to thesimple conversational schedule screen.

Simple Conversational Data Input Screen Simple Conversational Schedule Screen



– 205 –

(5) Simple conversational program execution

1 Select the simple conversational program to be executed according to the procedure in item (3)(a) inthis section.

2 Select the memory command mode.

3 Turn on the switch for menu program operation on the machine operator’s panel.

4 Turn on the <start> button on the machine operator’s panel to start operation.

NOTE Steps 3 and 4 may vary according to the machine. Refer to the relevant manual of eachmachine tool builder.

(6) Menu registration

The function of simple conversational programming is basically implemented with custom macros and soforth prepared by the machine tool builder. The machine tool builder determines required machining menuitems and the required data menu items. The procedure for the machine tool builder to perform simpleconversational programming is described below.

First, the procedure of registering machining menu items and data menu items is explained.

The G10 function (programmable data input function) is used to register machining menu items and datamenu items. A program for registering menu item names must be created as indicated below. By execut-ing this program, the menu item names are stored in the memory of the control unit. In subsequent opera-tion, the machining menu items and data menu items are displayed according to this program.

O9859 ;G10L60P01 ( INITIAL SET ) ; Registration of the machining menu item INITIAL SET, and its data

menu itemsG10L61P01Q01 ( Z SAFETY LIMIT ) ;G10L61P01Q02 ( X START POINT ) ;G10L61P01Q03 ( Y START POINT ) ;G10L61P01Q04 ( Z START POINT ) ;G10L60P02 ( DRILLING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item DRILLING, and its data

menu itemsG10L61P02Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ;G10L61P02Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ;…………………………………………………………………………G10L61P02Q–– ( ––––––––––– ) ;

G10L60P03 ( TAPPING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item TAPPING, and its data menu items

G10L61P03Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ;G10L61P03Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ;…………………………………………………………………………G10L61P03Q–– ( ––––––––––– ) ;……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………M30 ;


– 206 –

(a) Machining menu item registration

A machining menu item is registered using the following command:

G10L60P02 (DRILLING)

Machining menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters)

Machining menu item number (01 to 16)

(b) Data menu item registration

A data menu item is registered using the following command:

G10L61P02 Q01 (WORK SURFACE)

Data menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters)

Data menu item number (01 to 16)

Machining menu item number (01 to 16)

(c) Specification of menu item names

There are several ways to specify the character strings defining machining menu item names and datamenu item names.

(i) Alphanumeric characters, hyphens (–), periods (.), and spaces

Uppercase letters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), hyphens, periods, and spaces can be di-rectly entered.

Example G10L60P–– (FANUC)

(ii) Katakana and special symbols

Katakana characters and the special symbols that cannot be directly entered can be specifiedusing internal codes. The characters included in the internal code list below can be specified.Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of two hexadecimal characters, betweentwo at marks (@).

Example G10L60P–– (@ CC A7 C5 AF B8 @);

is displayed.

(iii) Kanji and hiragana

Kanji and hiragana characters that cannot be directly entered can be specified using internalcodes.

The characters included in the internal code list for kanji and hiragana characters in Appendix 8can be specified. Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of four hexadecimalcharacters, between two at marks (@).

Example G10L60P–– (@8177 646A 822E 8559@);

is displayed.

An internal code starting with a character from 6 to 8 is assumed to be an internal code fora hiragana character.

When counting the number of kanji or hiragana characters, treat one character as two alpha-numeric characters.



– 207 –

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 @ P

0 0 0 1 1 ! 1 A Q

0 0 1 0 2 “ 2 B R

0 0 1 1 3 # 3 C S

0 1 0 0 4 $ 4 D T

0 1 0 1 5 % 5 E U

0 1 1 0 6 & 6 F V

1 1 1 1 7 ” 7 G W

1 0 0 0 8 ( 8 H X

1 0 0 1 9 ) 9 I Y

1 0 1 0 A * : J Z

1 0 1 1 B + ; K [

1 1 0 0 C , < L ¥

1 1 0 1 D – = M ]

1 1 1 0 E . > N ^

1 1 1 1 F / ? O _

Internal code list


– 208 –

(7) Procedure for executing simple conversational programs

To develop programs for machining workpieces, the programmer selects the required items from a pre-pared machining menu in the order of machining. The programmer then enters data for each item, andstarts operation. The workpiece needs to be machined in the programmed sequence and according tothe entered data. For this purpose, a program such as that indicated below is developed and stored inmemory. This program serves as a main program for simple conversational program execution.

O9240 ;N1 #6091 = 01 ;N2 1F[#6000 EQ 0] GOTO 7 ;N3 M98 P[#6000 +9500] ;N4 #6091 = #6091 +1 ;N5 1F[#6091 GT 16] GOTO 7 ;N6 GOTO 2 ;N7 M30 ;

The main program above includes two new custom macro system variables. These system variables areexplained below together with the specification of each block.

(a) Block N1

System variable #6091 is used to specify the block number of a simple conversational program. BlockN1 specifies 01 as the current block number of the simple conversational program. In addition, whena numeric value is assigned to #6091 by specifying #6091 = n, the number of the machining menuitem set with the specified block number of the menu program is substituted into system variable#6000. Furthermore, the 16 data menu items entered for the machining menu item of that block num-ber are substituted into system variables #6001 to #6016.

In other words, system variable #6000 identifies the machining menu item of the block number speci-fied by #6091, and #6001 to #6016 identify the contents of the data menu items. If a block numberspecified by #6091 has no machining menu item set, 0 is set in #6000 and null characters are set in#6001 to #6016 for the data menu items that have no values set.

(b) Block N2

If the specified block number has no machining menu item set, this block branches control to blockN7 to terminate execution.

(c) Block N3

This block calls a subprogram with the M98 command. The called program equals 9500 plus the ma-chining menu item number. Suppose that the following machining menu has been created.

01: INITIAL SET 02: DRILLING03: TAPPING 04: BORING………………………

……… …………Machining menu item name

Machining menu item number



– 209 –

If the specified block number has the machining menu item (tapping) set, the value of #6000 is 03.Therefore, program number O9503 is called. This means that a program for the machining menu item(tapping) must already have been created having program number O9503. In other words, when theexample of the machining menu above is used, the machine tool builder needs to create programshaving the following program numbers for the machining menu items in advance:

O9501 : Program for INITIAL SETTINGO9502 : Program for DRILLINGO9503 : Program for TAPPINGO9504 : Program for BORING……………………………………………………………………………………………………When a program for a machining menu item is called, the contents of the data menu items are as-signed to system variables #9001 to #9016. Therefore, the created program needs to be able to per-form the desired machining by referencing #6001 to #6016. A program for a machining menu itemcan include conventional custom macro common variables. In general, a program for a machiningmenu item ends with M99 to return to the main program.

(d) Block N4

When the machining menu item of the specified block number has been executed, operation needsto proceed to the machining menu item of the next block number. For this purpose, block N4 incre-ments system variable #6001 by 1 to proceed to the next block number.

(e) Block N5

If the specified block number exceeds 16, this block branches control to block N7 to terminate execu-tion.

(f) Block N6

This block returns control to block N2 to repeat execution for the next block number.

(g) Block N7

This block marks the end of the program.

When the operator executes a simple conversational program, the main program (09420 in the exam-ple above) for executing the simple conversational program is first executed, then the programs devel-oped by the machine tool builder for machining menu items are called for machining.

To execute a simple conversational program, the program for executing it must be selected as themain program in memory operation. If another program is selected as the main program in memoryoperation, only the selected program is executed. The simple conversational program is notexecuted.

For this reason, it is necessary to provide a switch on the machine operator’s panel for simple con-versational program operation. When the switch is turned on, the system starts memory operationafter searching for the program number of the main program for executing a desired simple conversa-tional program by using the function of workpiece number search or external data input.

(8) Additional custom macro system variables

As mentioned in Item (7) above, some custom macro system variables have been added for simple con-versational programs. The table below summarizes the system variables.

System variable Function

#6000 Holds the number of the machining menu item set withthe block number held in #6091.

#6001A#6016

Hold values set for the 16 data menu items for the machining menu item of the block number held in#6091. (The data menu item number matches thelower two digits of the corresponding system variable.)

#6091 Specifies a block number.

B–62564E–1/0210. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

– 210 –

10.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.1 Offset Values

10.1.1 Display and setting

Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values.

1 Press the <function menu> key.

2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key.

Either of the following screens is displayed:

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

– 211 –

�� .($-

�.( -$)(� '!(.� %!/

�)"-� %!/,

�*!+�-$)(� '!(.� %!/

�.( -$)(� '!(.� %!/

�)"-� %!/,�*!+�-$)(� '!(.� %!/

�� .($-

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF-SET> soft key to switch between thescreens.

Switching between the screens canalso be performed in the followingway:

Press the <CHAPTER> key tochange the soft keys to the chapterselection keys.

Pressing the <TOOL> key displaysthe tool offset screen.

3 Position the cursor on the desired off-set number in either of the followingways:

(1) Move the cursor to the desiredoffset number using the pagekeys ( [↓ ] [↑ ] ) or cursor keys ( [→] [←] [↑ ] [↓ ] ).

(2) 1. Press the <operation menu>key to change the soft keys tothe operation selection keys.

2. Press <INP–NO.>, type theoffset number to be displayed orset, and press the <EXEC> key.

��000�� 000�� 00�� 00 �� 0000�

��

��

INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INOUT ALL

��

�� ".( -$)(� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

�� #�*-!+� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

�� )*!+�-$)(� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

�� #�*-!+� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

�� )*!+�-$)(� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

�� ".( -$)(� ,!&! -$)(� %!/,

��

4 Press the <operation menu> key tochange the soft keys to the operationselection keys.

5

⋅To set the entered value as the offsetvalue (absolute input)

Press <INPUT>.

⋅To add the entered value to the off-set value already set (incremental in-put)

Press <+INPUT>.

6 Type the offset value.

To enter offset values for severalconsecutive items at once, delimitthe values with the <EOB> key.

EOB (end of block) is represented by; on the CRT.

Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0

The cursor automatically proceedsto the next item when ; is found.(Same as when the cursor key [→] ispressed)

7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets theentered offset value in the offsetmemory location pointed to by thecursor. The soft keys are changed tothe operation selection keys.

POSI PROG OFF CHAPTE SETT ID CHAP

TION RAM SET R ING SERRCH TER


– 212 –

��.-�� ---�� --�� ---�� ----

�

��

��

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

�� &'�(�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

�� &'�(�*"&%� !+"�� #�,)

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

�� &'�(�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

�� &'�(�*"&%� !+"�� #�,)

10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values

1 Press the <function menu> key tochange the soft keys to the functionselection keys.

2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF-SET> soft key.

3 Press the <operation menu> key tochange the soft keys to the operationselection keys.

4 Press the <ALL–CLR> key tochange the soft keys to the operationguidance keys.

5 To clear all tool offset values to 0,press the <ALL> key. To clear all ge-ometry offset values to 0, press the<GEOM> key. To clear all tool wearoffset values to 0, press the<WEAR> key.

6 Pressing the <ALL>, <GEOM>, or<WEAR> key clears the correspond-ing tool offset values to 0. The softkeys are changed to the operationselection keys.

INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAP

��

POSI PROG OFF PROGRAM SETT SERV MESSAG CHAP

TION RAM SET CHECK ING ICE E TER

ALL GEOMET WEAR

��


– 213 –

10.2 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values.

1 Press the <function menu> key.


One of the following screens is displayed:

��

��

��

��

��

↑ ↓


– 214 –

��

��

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

��

��

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF-SET> soft key to switch between thescreens.

Switching between the screens canalso be performed in the followingway:

Press the <CHAPTER> key tochange the soft keys to the chapterselection keys.

Pressing the <WRK.ZER> key dis-plays the screen for the offset fromthe workpiece reference point.

3 Position the cursor on the desired off-set number in either of the followingways:

(1) Move the cursor to the desiredoffset number using the pagekeys ( [↓ ] [↑ ] ) or cursor keys ( [→] [←] [↓ ] [↑ ] ).

(2) 1. Press the <operation menu>key to change the soft keys tothe operation selection keys.

2. Press <INP–NO.>, type thenumber of the workpiece coordi-nate system to be displayed orset (0: Workpiece coordinatesystem to be specified external-ly, 1 to 6: Workpiece coordinatesystems corresponding to G54to G59), and press the <EXEC>key.

��

POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE

ON M CHECK G E E R

INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INPUT PUNCH CHAPTE

NUMBER R

4 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

5

⋅To set the entered value as the offsetvalue (absolute input) Press <IN-PUT>.

⋅To add the entered value to the off-set value already set (incremental in-put) Press <+INPUT>.

6 Type the offset value.

To enter offset values for several consecutive items at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key.

The EOB (end of block) is represented by ; on the CRT.

Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0

The cursor automatically proceeds to the next item when ; is found. (Same as when the cursor key [→]is pressed)

7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the entered offset value in the offset memory location pointed to by the cur-sor. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys.

(1) Select the displayed axis in workpiece zero point offset setting menu screen

On the workpiece zero point offset setting menu, axes can be specified separately for a display of the offsetto be specified, using a parameter. The offset can be specified only for these axes on the workpiece coordi-nate setting menu.

The same parameter is also used to select axes for a display on the workpiece zero point offset settingmenu of the multi-submenus.


– 215 –

Example In a configuration with the X-, Y-, A-, and B-axes, to omit the A-and B-axis displays, specifywith bit 4 of parameter No. 1009 as follows: X=0, Y=0, A=1, B=1, Z=0With this setting, the A-and B-axes will not be displayed on the workpiece offset setting menu.(Shown below is an example of displays on the 9-inch CRT.)

WORK ZERO OFFSET O1234 N00000

NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000

NO. 01 (G54) NO. 03 (G56)X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000

(MM)MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 12:40:15 LSK

POSITION PROGRAMOFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

Example of displays on the 9-inch CRT


– 216 –

10.3 Settings

There are two types of data to be set here. Turn on the data protection key (KEY2) when setting data.

(1) Data related to input/output

(2) Parameters set by the user

1 Enter the MDI mode.

2 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys.

3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times.

� � � ��

��

�� '!�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��(%

�� #&�$� %� ��&�"!)��(%

�� '!�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��(%

�� #&�$� %� ��&�"!� ��(%

��

��

�� POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE

ON M CHECK G E E R

HANDY GENE OPERAT MACRO TOOL CHAPTE

REL PANEL VAR. LIFE R

There are two ways to display the setting screen.

(i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the setting screen is dis-played.

(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

a) To display data related to input/output

Press the <HANDY> key.

b) To display the parameters that can be set by the user

Press the <GENERAL> key.


– 217 –

For data related to input/output

4 Move the cursor to the item to beset using the cursor keys ( [←][→] ).

For parameters that can be set by the user

Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in eitherof the following ways:

a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using thepage keys ( [↑ ] [↓ ] ) or cursor keys ( [→] [←] [↓ ] [↑ ] ).

b)

i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the softkeys to the operation selection keys.

ii) Press <INP–NO.>, type the parameter number to bedisplayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.

��

�� 0��

INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT CHAPTE

PUT NUMBER R

�� )*#+ -%)(� ,#'#!-%)(� &#/,�00�.$#(� -$#� ��&#/� %,� *+#,,#"�

�� )*#+ -%)(� ,#'#!-%)(� &#/,�00�.$#(� -$#� �� &#/� %,� *+#,,#"�

�� )*#+ -%)(� ,#'#!-%)(� &#/,�000�.$#(� -$#� �� &#/� %,� *+#,,#"�

�� )*#+ -%)(� ,#'#!-%)(� &#/,�000�.$#(� -$#� �� &#/� %,� *+#,,#"�

�

5 Press the <operation menu> key.

6 Set data in either of the followingways:

a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key.To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key.

b) To set data other than 1 or 0:

i) Press the <INPUT> key.

ii) Type the data to be set. Toenter values for several con-secutive parameters atonce, delimit the values withthe <EOB> key.

Example 100 ;200 ;300

The cursor automaticallyproceeds to the next param-eter when ; is found.

iii) Press the <EXEC> key.

INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT CHAPTE

PUT NUMBER R


– 218 –

10.4 Custom Macro Variables

Local variables, group 1 common variables, and group 2 common variables can be displayed.

Group 1 common variables and group 2 common variables can be set.

#1 to #33: Local variables

#100 to #199: Group 1 common variables (Common variables whose values are not retained when thepower is turned off)

#500 to #699: Group 2 common variables (Common variables whose values are retained when the poweris turned off)

1 Enter the MDI mode.


3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times.

,� � ��

��

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

� ��

� ��

� ��


ON M CHECK G E E R

HANDY GENERA OPERAT MACRO TOO CHAPTE

L PANEL VAR. LIFE R

There are two ways to display the macro variables screen.

(i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the macro variables screen isdisplayed.

(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press the MAC-RO key.

4 Position the cursor on the macro variable number to be set in either of the following ways:

a) Move the cursor to the desired macro variable number using the page keys ( [↓ ] [↑ ] ) or cursor keys( [↓ ] [↑ ] ).

b)

i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

ii) Press <INP–NO.>, type the macro variable number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC>key.


�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

��

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

��-��

��-��

��

��

��

��

�


– 219 –

6 To set the entered val-ue as the variable value(absolute input)

(6) –1 Press <INPUT>and type the variable val-ue.(To enter values for sev-eral consecutive variablesat once, delimit the valueswith the <EOB> key

Example 100.0 ;200.0;300.0;400.0The cursor au-tomaticallyproceeds tothe next vari-able when ; isfound.)

(6) –2 Press the<EXEC> key.

To add the entered value tothe variable value already set(incremental input)

(6) –1 Press <+INPUT>.

(6) –2 Type the incre-ment and press the <EXEC>key.

To set a null value inthe variable

Press the<EMPTY> key.

To clear the variable values

Press the <ALL–CLR> keyto change the soft keys tothe operation guidancekeys.

To clear all group 1 andgroup 2 common variablesto 0, press the <ALL> key.

⋅To clear only the group 1common variables, pressthe <COMMON 1> key.

⋅To clear only the group 2common variables, pressthe <COMMON 2> key.

The soft keys are changedto the operation selectionkeys.

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

NOTE UNDER FLOW is displayed when the value of a custom macro is in either of the followingranges:

0 < Macro variable value < +0.0000001: +UNDER FLOW

0 > Macro variable value > –0.0000001: –UNDER FLOW


– 220 –

10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables

The values and names of the common variables (#200 to #999) retained after the power is disconnected canbe output to an output device in custom macro statement form.

As shown in the following example, output is in program format. Variable data can be set by executing this pro-gram.

Example %

; #500=25600*65536/16777216; For a normal value. . . . . . #501=#0; When the value is empty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #502=0; When the value is 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #503= .....................;.............................;SETVN500[ABC,DEF,,,...] ; For variable names. . . . . . . . . M2; %

When this custom macro statement program is executed, values and names are set for the common variables.

As shown in #500 in the above example, the values of variables are generally expressed as mathematical ex-pressions. Since macro variables are handled in floating–point form in the control unit, such mathematical ex-pressions are used to accurately express the values stored internally. The user need not by concerned withthis format.

(1) Outputting the values and names of common variables

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys as soft keys.

2 Press the <SETTING> key several times until the screen for outputting the values of custom macrovariables appears.

An alternate method is to press the <CHAPTER> key to display chapter selection soft keys, then pressthe <MACRO> key.

3 Press the operation menu key several times until the <PUNCH> soft key appears.

4 Press the <PUNCH> key to display operation guidance soft keys.

5 Press the <COMMON NONVOL> key. (For 9–inch CRT display, press the <COMMON2> key.)

6 The values and names of common variables are output to the output unit selected in the foreground,and the <STOP> soft key is displayed.

7 To stop outputting common variable values and their names, press the <STOP. key. Once the<STOP> key is pressed, output of the remaining common variable values and names cannot be re-sumed. To perform output again, return to step 3.

8 When all the values and names of common variables have been output, the operation selection softkeys are displayed again.

�& �%�! � $��%�! � ��'$� ! � �� $"��'

��

��"%�#� $��%�! � ��'$� ��$"��'�� '� "#�$$� ��

�� ! � �� $"��'

��

�"�#�%�! � $��%�! � ��'$� ��$"��'�� '� "#�$$� ��

�� ! � �� $"��'

��

1, 2

2

3, 4


– 221 –

�-%.!0(,+� &1($!+#%� )%2/� �� ,+� !� ��(+#'� �� $(/-*!2

��

��

�1+#0(,+� /%*%#0(,+� )%2/� ,+� 0'%� ��(+#'� �� $(/-*!2

��3��

��3��

��3��

��3��

��3��

��3��

��3��

��3��

�'!-0%.� /%*%#0(,+� )%2/� $(/-*!2%$� "2� -.%//(+&�

�� ,+� 0'%� ��(+#'� �� $(/-*!2

��

��3��

��

��3��

�-%.!0(,+� /%*%#0(,+� )%2/� $(/-*!2%$� "2� -.%//(+&�

�� ,+� 0'%� ��(+#'� �� $(/-*!2

��3��

��3��

��

��

��3 ��

��

��3��

�-%.!0(,+� &1($!+#%� )%2/� �� ,+� 0'%� ��(+#'� �� $(/-*!2

��3��

��

��

��

The values and names of the common variables can be output in any mode as long as automatic operationis in the stopped state.

When the values and names of the common variables are output to a FANUC floppy disk, the file name in thefile list is COMMON.NONVOL.

(2) Inputting the values and names of common variables

Input the values and names of the common variables using one of the following methods:

(i) The output of the values and names of common variables is read as a program in the edit mode, thenthe program is executed in the memory mode.

1 Before registering the program in memory, perform steps (1) to (6).

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Display the program screen using the soft keys.

(3) Press the operation menu key to display the READ soft key.

(4) Press the READ soft key.

(5) Press (FILE#), and enter the file number. (Search for the file storing the program was outputto the FANUC disk.)

(6) Press (PROG#), enter a program number, then press EXEC.

The program number can be any number that is not currently being used.

5

6, 7

1, 2

2

3, 4

5

6, 7


– 222 –

2 After the above input operation is completed, the program created by outputting the values andnames of the common variables is displayed on the screen.

3 Change the mode to memory mode. Press the cycle start button to execute the program. Thevalues and names of the common variables are then input to the custom macro memory area inthe CNC.

4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure thatthe values and names of the common variables are set properly.

(ii) The program created by outputting the values and names of the common variables is executed in tapemode to directly input the values and names.

1 Set the program tape in the tape reader.

2 Select the TAPE mode.

3 Press the cycle start button. The common variables and names are input to the custom macromemory area in the CNC.

4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure thatthe values and names of the common variables are set properly.

NOTE 1 If the write protect function (parameters 7031 and 7032) is enabled for common variables,release the protection before inputting the values and names of the common variables.

NOTE 2 Variable names are output in the following format:

SETVN 500 [ , , , , ] ;. . .

Variable Variable Variable Variablename name name name for #500 for #501 for #502 for #519

For macro variables which have no names, nothing is output.

Example Variable No. Variable name Variable No. Variable name

#500 ABC #510 TOOL–PT #501 COUNTER #511 (Not assigned)#502 (Not assigned) #512 (Not assigned)#503 POINTER #513 (Not assigned)#504 (Not assigned) #514 (Not assigned)#505 (Not assigned) #515 (Not assigned)#506 (Not assigned) #516 (Not assigned)#507 (Not assigned) #517 (Not assigned)#508 START #518 (Not assigned)#509 (Not assigned) #519 (Not assigned)

When variables are named as shown above, these names are output in the following programform:

SETVN 500 [ABC,COUNTER,,POINTER,,,,,START,,TOOL–PT,,,,,,,,,, ] ;


– 223 –

10.6 Parameters

Parameters are used for adjusting the CNC according to the characteristics and functions of motors or ma-chines connected to the CNC. The settings of the parameters depend on the machine. Setting parametersincorrectly may cause the machine to malfunction. Generally, the user must not change the parameters.


2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key.

� ,��

,� ��

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(


ON M CHECK G E E R

PARA– PITCH DIAG DISPLAY CHAPTE

MATER ERROR NOSIS MEMORY R

When the parameter screen is not displayed, there are two ways to display the parameter screen.

(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the parameter screen is dis-played.

(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PA-RAM>.

3 Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either of the following ways:

a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the page keys ( [↓ ] [↑ ] ) or cursor keys ( [↓ ][↑ ] ).

b)

i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

ii) Press <INP–NO.>, type the parameter number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.

This completes the operation for displaying a parameter. To set a parameter, follow the steps be-low.

4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.

5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for howto set the parameters.

��

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

6 Set data in either of the followingways:

a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key.To set 0, press the <OFF: 0>key.

b) To set data other than 1 and 0,press the <operation menu> keyto change the soft keys to the op-eration selection keys.

INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH CHAPTE

PUT NUMBER R


– 224 –

To set the entered value as the parameter value(absolute input)

6 –1 Press <INPUT> and type the parametervalue.(To enter values for several consecutiveparameters at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key.

Example 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0

The cursor automatically proceeds to the next parameter when ; is found.)

6 –2 Press the <EXEC> key.

To add the entered value to the parameter valuealready set (incremental input)

6 –1 Press <+INPUT>.

6 –2 Type the increment and press the <EXEC> key.

7 When the setting of parameters is completed, set 0 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000, to disable settingof parameters.


– 225 –

10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data

Pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machines connected to the CNC.The compensation data settings depend on the machine. Changing the settings reduces the precision of themachine.

Generally, the user must not change pitch error compensation data.


2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key.

,��

,��

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� *$�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� &)�'� (�#��)!%$� "�+(


ON M CHECK G E E R

PARA– PITCH DIAG DISPLAY

MATER ERROR NOSIS MEMORY

When the screen for the pitch error compensation data is not displayed, there are two ways to display thescreen.

(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the screen for the pitch errorcompensation data is displayed.

(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PITCH>.

3 Position the cursor on the number of the pitch error compensation data to be set in either of the followingways:

a) Move the cursor to the number of the desired pitch error compensation data using the page keys ( [↑ ][↓ ] ) or cursor keys ( [↑ ] [↓ ] ).

b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

ii) Press <INP–NO.>, type the number of the pitch error compensation data to be displayed or set,and press the <EXEC> key.

This completes the operation for displaying pitch error compensation data. To set pitch error com-pensation data, follow the steps below.

4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.

5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how toset the parameters.


7 Press the <INPUT> key and type the compensation data.

(To enter values for several consecutive compensation data items at once, delimit the values with the<EOB> key.

�� ,�� ,�� ,��

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

�� %&�'�)!%$� (�#��)!%$� "�+(

Example 1 ; 2 ; –3 ; –4

The cursor automatically proceedsto the next compensation data itemwhen ; is found.)

8 Press the EXEC key.

9 When the setting of pitch error com-pensation data is completed, set 0 inbit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to en-able the setting of parameters.

INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH

PUT NUMBER


– 226 –

For bidirectional pitch error compensation, another 1280 points (10000 to 11279) can be used for pitcherror compensation data, in addition to the conventional 1280 points. The data for the additional pointscan be exchanged with an external device, modified using G10, and input/output using the PMC window,in the same way as conventional data.


– 227 –

10.8 Data Protection Key

Data protection keys can be installed on the machine to protect data in the CNC. The following three keys areavailable according to the type of the data to be protected:

(1) KEY1

Enables and disables entering tool offset values and offset values from the workpiece reference point.

(2) KEY2

Enables and disables entering data on the setting screen and presetting the absolute coordinates.

(3) KEY3

Enables and disables entering and editing part programs.

See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the installed keys and their locations on the machine.


– 228 –

10.9 Measuring the Tool Length

(1) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is not provided



Either of the following screens is displayed:

��111�� 11� � �� 11��11� � �� 111�

��

��

�� #/) .&*)� -"(" .&*)� '"0-

�� #/) .&*)� -"(" .&*)� '"0-


ON M CHECK G E E R

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens.

Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way:

Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool offset screen.

��

�� 11��

�� %�+.",� -"(" .&*)� '"0-

�� *+",�.&*)� -"(" .&*)� '"0-

�� *+",�.&*)� $/&!"� '"0-

�� %�+.",� -"(" .&*)� '"0-

�� *+",�.&*)� -"(" .&*)� '"0-

�� *+",�.&*)� $/&!"� '"0-

� ��

��

��

��

3 Position the cursor on the desired off-set number in either of the followingtwo ways:

(a) Move the cursor to the desired off-set number using the page keys( [↓ ] [↑ ] ) or cursor keys ([→] [←] [↓ ][↑ ] ).

(b)

(i) Press the <operation menu>key to change the soft keys tothe operation selection keys.

(ii) Press <INP–NO.>, type theoffset number to be displayedor set, and press the<EXEC> key.

4 Press the <MEASURE> key and typethe name of the axis along which thetool length is to be measured.

5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axisspecified in 4 is effective until a newaxis is specified.

INPU +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAPTE

T PUT NUMBER CLEAR R

6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuringthe tool length.

7 Press the <MEASURE> key.

8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guid-ance keys.

9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-suring the tool length.

The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-sured) is displayed as the relative position.

10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.


– 229 –

11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory locationpointed to by the cursor.

12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.

CAUTION Bit LXY in parameter No. 6000, specifies that tool length compensation is always performedalong the Z axis. If this bit is set to 0, the Z axis is set as the axis along which the tool lengthis measured when the power is turned on.

(2) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is provided


2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed:

��

��

�� "��!�� !�� #

��

�� "��!�� !�� #

��$��

��$��

��$��

��

��$��

��$��

��$��

��$��

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between screens.

Switching between screens can also be performed in the following way:

Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

Pressing the <TL.DATA> key displays the screen for the tool offset function using tool numbers.


– 230 –

3 Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [↑ ] [↓ ] ) or cursor keys ( [→] [←][↓ ] [↑ ] ).

4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type the name of the axis along which the tool length is to be mea-sured.

5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis specified in 4 is effective until a new axis is specified.

�� $�*-"+� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

��

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

��

�� )*"+�-%)(� #.%!"� &"/,

��

�� $�*-"+� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

��

��

��

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

�� 0

��

��0��

��0��

�� )*"+�-%)(� #.%!"� &"/,

��

6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuringthe tool length.

7 Press the <MEASURE> key.

8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guidekeys.

9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-suring the tool length.

The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-sured) is displayed as the relative position.

10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.

11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory locationpointed to by the cursor.

12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.


– 231 –

10.10Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position

10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length

The procedures for class B measurement of the tool length are simplified, enabling the tool length to be mea-sured easier and in a shorter time than using the general measurement procedure.

The tool length compensation value is generally defined using the two methods described below. The basicidea, however, is the same: The difference between the coordinate at the tip of a tool and that at the tip of thereference tool is defined as the tool length compensation value.

(1) Method 1

Method 1 uses the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value. The reference tool in this meth-od is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the machine zero point when the machine isat the machine zero point. The tool length compensation value is the difference between the Z coordinateof the tip of each tool and that of the tip of the reference tool, that is, the distance measured along the Zaxis from the machine zero point to the tip of each tool when the machine is at the machine zero point.

��

��

��

��

��

�� #��

��

�� "��!�� "��!�� "��!��


– 232 –

In class B measurement of the tool length, a tool is moved by manual feed until the tip of the tool touchesthe top of the workpiece or reference block. This surface is called the measurement surface. The top ofthe table on the machine cannot be actually used as the measurement surface because the table will bedamaged. Assume, however, that the top of the table is used. Distance L from the machine zero pointto the top of the table is a value specific to the machine. Set L in a parameter. If the Z coordinate of thetool tip when it touches the top of the table (Zt) is known, the tool length compensation value OFSL canbe easily calculated from L and Zt. However, because the top of the table cannot be used as the measure-ment surface, tool length compensation value OFSL is actually obtained in the following way: Define thetop of the table as the reference measurement surface and set the distance from the reference measure-ment surface to the actual measurement surface, that is, the height of the workpiece or reference block(Hm). OFSL is calculated using the formula shown below.

��

��

��

��

��

��%�

��

�� )�#!� "!� %�� !!#�� %�� !�� %��%�"� !�� %�� #��#� �� %!!�� !!� �!!�

��$&#�� %�$&#��

��$&#�� %�$&#��

��#� ��$&#�� %�$&#��

��#� ��!��

�!#�"��

�� ! � %�� ! � %��

� � �$%� �� #!�� %�� %�� "!$�%�! � !�� %�� %�"� !�� %�� #��#� �� %!!�� %!� %�� #��#� �� $&#�� %�

$&#�� !!#�� %�� !�� %�� #��#� �� $&#�� %� $&#�� %�� !!#�� %�� $($%��

�� $%� �� #!�� %�� #��#� �� $&#�� %� $&#�� %!� %�� %&�� $&#�� %� $&#��

�� $%� �� #!�� %�� %�� "!$�%�! � !�� %�� %�"� !�� %�� %!!�� %!� ��$&#�� %!� %��$&#�� %� $&#��

��% � �$%� �� #!�� %�� %�� "!$�%�! � !�� %�� %�"� !�� %�� %!!�� %!� �� $&#�� %!� %�� #��#� ��

��$&#�� %� $&#��

�� !!�� %�� !�"� $�%�! � '��&��

This method of setting the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value has the advantage thatsubsequent remeasurement is not necessary when the workpiece is changed, provided there is no wear.Another advantage is as follows. When machining several workpieces at once, it is only necessary to as-sign workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 to the workpieces and set the offset from each workpiecereference position. Resetting the tool length compensation value is not necessary.


– 233 –

(2) Method 2

Method 2 uses the distance from the position of the tool tip when the machine is at the machine zero pointto the workpiece reference position as the tool length compensation value. The basic idea is the sameas in method 1: The difference between the length of a tool and that of the reference tool is defined as thetool length compensation value. The reference tool in method 2, however, is a virtual tool whose tip hasthe same Z coordinate as the workpiece reference position when the machine is at the machine zero point.

��

��

��

��

��

��!��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

In this method, the reference measurement surface is a surface containing the workpiece reference posi-tion. Because the tip of the reference tool is on the same surface, distance L from the tip of the referencetool to the reference measurement surface is 0. Set 0 in the parameter for L. Generally, the actual mea-surement surface is the same as the reference measurement surface containing the workpiece referenceposition. When the top of the reference block is used as the measurement surface or the workpiece refer-ence position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted from the top by the cutting allowance),set the distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface in Hm. Toollength compensation value OFSL is calculated using the same formula as in method 1.


– 234 –

��

��

��

��

��

��

Hm

� �� $%� �� #!�� %�� %�� "!$�%�! � !�� %�� %�"� !�� %�� #��#� �� %!!�� %!� %��

***� #��#� �� $&#�� %� $&#��

�� $%� �� #!�� %�� #��#� �� $&#�� %� $&#�� %!� %��

***� ��%&�� $&#�� %� $&#��

�� $%� �� #!�� %�� %�� "!$�%�! � !�� %�� %�"� !�� %�� #��#� �� %!!�� %!� %��

***� %!!�� %!� �� $&#�� %!)%�� $&#�� %� $&#��

�� !!�� %�� !�"� $�%�! � '��&��

�� (�#!� "!� %

�!!� �!!�

�!#�"�� #��#� �� "!$�%�! �� #��#� �� $&#�� %� $&#��

��$&#�� %�$&#��

��#� ��!��

�!#�"��

�� ! � %�� ! � %��

In method 2, the reference tool is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the workpiece refer-ence position when the machine is at the machine zero point. Therefore, it is generally necessary to mea-sure the tool length compensation value again when the workpiece is changed. The same compensationvalue, however, can be used by setting one of G54 to G59 to the distance along the Z axis between thereference position for the new workpiece and that for the workpiece used when the compensation valuewas measured as an offset value.

Thought of in another way, this method sets the offset from the workpiece reference position as the toollength compensation value of each tool.


– 235 –

Procedures for measuring the tool length compensation value

1 Move the machine to the tool change position by manually returning to the reference position.

2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.

3 Turn on the “TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT” switch on the operator’s panel on the machine. The con-trol unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that for measuring the tool length compensationvalue, shown on the next page. The OFST status display blinks at the bottom of the screen to indicate thatthe preparation for measuring the tool length compensation is completed.

The screen for measuring the tool length compensation value differs depending on the type of the tool com-pensation memory. The screen for tool compensation memory A is shown on the next page. See Note1 for tool compensation memory B and tool compensation memory C. In memory B, geometry compensa-tion values and wear compensation values are stored separately. In memory C, geometry compensationvalues and wear compensation values are stored separately, as are cutter compensation values and toollength compensation values.

4 Set the distance between the reference measurement surface and actual measurement surface by enter-ing the value with numeric keys and pressing the <HM_INP> soft key.

5 Select the tool whose length compensation value to be measured. When the screen for measuring thetool length compensation value is selected and the OFST status display is blinking at the bottom of thescreen, T commands or M commands can be specified on this screen even in the manual handle feed orcontinuous manual mode. Entering Ttttt and pressing the cycle start button on the machine operator’s pan-el or CRT MDI panel executes the Ttttt program command and selects the tool to be measured. Generally,enter M06 to move the tool to the position of the spindle. The tool whose length compensation value tobe measured is set at the position of the spindle. Position the cursor at the tool length compensation num-ber assigned to the compensation value for the tool.

6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the measurement surfaceof the workpiece or reference block.

7 Press the <MEASURE> soft key. The tool length compensation value is set in tool compensation memoryaccording to the abovementioned formula. For tool compensation memory B or C, the tool length com-pensation value is set as the tool geometry compensation value and 0 is set in the tool wear compensationvalue. The cursor remains on the same tool compensation number. Pressing the <MEASUR+> soft keyautomatically moves the cursor to the next number after setting is completed.

When the tool length compensation value is set, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position.

8 The procedure for measuring the tool length compensation value for a tool is now completed. Repeat theoperations from step 5 for each subsequent tool.

When the tool length compensation values for all the tools are measured, turn off the TOOL LENGTH COM-PENSATION switch on the operator’s panel on the machine. When the switch is turned off, the OFST sta-tus display at the bottom of the screen goes off.


– 236 –

NOTE 1i. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory B

ii. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory C

NOTE 2 Generally, a tool is moved along the Z axis because a tool is mounted in parallel with the Z axis.Some machines, however, has the W axis which is parallel with the Z axis. It may be convenientfor such machines to move a tool along the W axis for measuring the tool length compensationvalue. There are also machines which have an attachment for mounting a tool in parallel withan axis other than the Z axis. On such machines, the tool length compensation value can bemeasured along an arbitrary axis. When the tool length compensation value can be measuredalong an axis other than the Z axis, note the following:Set the distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the referencemeasurement surface (L) in a parameter for each axis along which it is possible to measurethe tool length compensation value, not only for the Z axis. The distance from the referencemeasurement surface to the actual measurement surface (Hm) must be measured along eachaxis. After moving the tool along an axis until it touches the workpiece or reference block, enterthe name of the axis before pressing the <MEASURE> or <MEASUR+> soft key. Whenmeasuring along the W axis, for example, enter W before pressing the <MEASURE> or<MEASUR+> soft key.

NOTE 3 The operator selects the tool length compensation number assigned to the compensationvalue for the tool to be measured by positioning the cursor on the number. Some machines,however, automatically position the cursor when the tool is selected. Refer to the manualissued by the machine tool builder for details.


– 237 –

10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position

The offset from the workpiece reference position can be easily measured using the methods described in thissection. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the longitudinal tool axis (the Z axis) can alsobe easily measured. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis can also beeasily measured whether the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center ofa machined hole.

(1) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis

(a) Method 1

In method 1, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is the distancefrom the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis.

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !�� !�� #��"�� $�� !�� !� �� !�� $��

�� !�� "��

�� !�� !��#�� !�� %�� !� !�� !�� $�� !��

�� $�� "�� $�!�� !�� $�� !��

�� !�� !��#�� !�� %�� !� !�� !�� $�� !��

�� $�� "�� $�!�� !�� $�� !��

�� !� �� !�� $�� !��

�� !� �� !�� $�� !��

��%�� !

��

�� !��

�� !��

The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Zaxis is calculated using the following formula:

OFSW = Zm – OFSL

where

OFSW: Offset from the workpiece reference position

OFSL: Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference positionis measured

Zm: Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position whenmeasured with a tool whose length is OFSL


– 238 –

(b) Method 2

As mentioned previously, the tool length compensation value measured in method 2 equals the offsetfrom the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis. The setting of the offset from theworkpiece reference position is therefore not necessary. The setting of the offset from the workpiecereference position, however, can substitute for subsequently measuring the tool length compensationvalue in the following case: When the workpiece is changed after the tool length compensation valueis measured for a workpiece or when workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 are assigned for ma-chining several workpieces at once.

��

��

��

��

��!� ��

�� #�� "�#�� %��$�� "$!�� &�#�� &�!� ��

�� "#�� #!�%�� !�� #�� '�!�� #� #�� #�� &�!� �� !��!�� "�#��

�� &�� "$!�� &�#�� #�� &��"�� #�� "� ��

�� "�#� �!�� #�� &�!� �� !��!�� "�#�� "�#� �!�� #�� &�!� ��

!��!�� "�#�� "� ��

��!� ��

��'�!�� #

��

��!� ��!��!�� "�#��

��!� ��!��!�� "�#��

In method 2, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is calculatedusing the same formula as in method 1.

OFSW = Zm – OFSL

where

OFSW : Offset from the workpiece reference position

OFSL : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference positionis measured

Zm : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL


– 239 –

(2) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X or Y axis

The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis can be easily measured whetherthe workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a machined hole.

(a) When the workpiece reference position is on a surface

+Y

+X��

��$��

�� "��

�� #��

�� "�� #��

The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is on a side of the workpiece.The basic idea for measuring the offset along the X or Y axis with the workpiece reference positionon a surface of the workpiece is the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece referenceposition along the Z axis described in item (1). What is different is that the offset from the workpiecereference position along the X or Y axis is measured considering the cutter diameter, whereas the off-set along the Z axis is measured considering the tool length.

��

��

��

��

��

�� !�� "�� "��

��

�� !�� $�� "��

�� "�� "�� "��

�� "��

��

��

�� $��

The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured is calcu-lated with the following formula:

OFSW = Xm – OFSR

Be careful of the sign of cutter compensation value OFSR.

The sign of OFSR is negative when the measurement surface is located in the positive direc-tion from the center of the tool.


– 240 –

(b) When the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined hole

��

��

��

��

��

��

The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machinedhole in the workpiece. In this case, measure the positions of three points on the inside wall of the holeusing a measuring probe with a sensor on the tip. The three points uniquely define the circle on whichthey lie, enabling the workpiece reference position for the X and Y axes to be determined as the centerof the circle.

��

��

��

��

� ��


– 241 –

(3) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position

(a) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis

1 Set a tool at the position of the spindle. Select the tool with an MDI instruction. The tool lengthcompensation value of the selected tool must be already measured.


3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-tor’s panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to thatfor measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinksat the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-piece reference position is completed.

4 Enter the tool length compensation value of the selected tool with the numeric keys and press theTL_INP soft key. (The following is the screen when the parameter is set so that the measurementis not made according to the reference hole.)

5 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. Thecursor can be on an offset value other than one along the Z axis.

6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the top of theworkpiece.

7 Enter the axis (Z), press the <MEASURE> soft key, and press the <INPUT> soft key. The offsetfrom the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is set according to the abo-vementioned formula. The cursor is located on the set offset value. When a parameter is set sothat the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured only along the Z axis, the axis(Z) need not be entered.

When the workpiece reference position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shiftedfrom the top by the cutting allowance), enter the shift amount (S in the following figure) with thenumeric keys and press the <MEASURE> soft key.

S��

��

��

8 To measure the offset for the next workpiece, move the tool away from the current workpiece andrepeat the operations from step 5.


– 242 –

(b) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis usinga reference surface

Procedures when the workpiece reference position for the X or Y axis is on a surface of the workpieceis basically the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Zaxis, excluding step 4. In step 4, enter the cutter compensation value of the selected tool on the screenfor measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. Enter the value with the numeric keysand press the <TL_INP> soft key. When entering the cutter compensation value, be careful of the signof the value.

Prefix the value with – when the measurement surface is located in the positive direction from the tool.Prefix the value with + when the measurement surface is located in the negative direction from the tool.

(c) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis usinga reference hole

1 Attach the measuring probe with a sensor to the spindle.


3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-tor’s panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to thatfor measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinksat the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-piece reference position is completed.

4 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. Thecursor can be on an offset value other than one along the X or Y axis.

5 Move the measuring probe by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches theinside wall of the hole. The probe can be moved only along one axis at a time.

6 When the sensor detects that the probe has touched the wall, the probe stops moving. The posi-tion where the probe stops is stored as the first measurement point. The machine coordinatesof the stored measurement point are displayed at the bottom right of the CRT screen as shownin the figure below.

7 Move the probe to the second measurement point. At this time, the control unit inhibits the probefrom moving in the direction it was moved immediately before. For example, when moving theprobe after moving it in the +X direction until it touches the current measurement point, move-ments in the –X, +Y, and –Y directions are allowed but movement in the +X direction is inhibiteduntil the probe moves away from the inside wall of the hole. This also applies after the probetouches the second measurement point.

8 After making the probe touch the third measurement point, press the MEASURE soft key then the<CENTER> soft key.

The coordinates of the center are calculated from the coordinates of the three measured points,and the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis is set. To stop themeasurement midway and restart the operation, reset the control unit. Resetting the control unitclears all stored coordinates of the measurement points.


– 243 –

10.11 Menu Switch

1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.

2 Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key.

One of the following screens is displayed.

� ��

��%+� ),"*�!� )�(��%�

� ��

� ��

� ��

There are two ways to display the menu switch screen.

1) Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key several times.

2) Press the <CHAPTER> key and then the <OP.PANEL> key.

3 Move the cursor to the item to be set using the cursor keys ( <→ > <←> ).

4 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

5 To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. The soft keys remain as the operationselection keys.

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�-)

� ��

�� !�'*�(� )�$��*"&%� #�-)

��

�� &'�(�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�-)

��


– 244 –

�� )#�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

��+��

��+��

��+��

��

��+��

��+��

��+��

� ��+��

↑ ↑�� %(�&� '�"��( $#� !�*'

��+��

��

��

��

�� $%�&�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

��

NOTE Ignoring the Z–axis means that the third axis is in the machine lock state even if the third axisis not the Z–axis.


– 245 –

10.12Tool Life Management Data

10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group

Tool group data registered in the area for storing and editing a part program can be displayed and modified inthe same way as ordinary part program editing. The modified program, however, must be executed as de-scribed in item 11.2.(1) in Programming. Otherwise, the program will not be stored in the tool life data area.

10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program

Tool life management data is displayed on the CRT as follows:

Press the <SETTING> key until tool life data is displayed in any mode. Alternatively, press the <CHAPTER>key and then the <TOOL LIFE> key on the setting screen. The previously displayed page is displayed. (How-ever, the first group is displayed immediately after the power is turned on.)

The number of groups that can be displayed on a page depends on the parameter settings and the CRT typeas shown in the following table (see Figure 10.12.5 for the display format):

Table 10.12.2 Number of groups that can be displayed on a page

Number ofl

Maximum number

Maximum number

Size of grouop

tool groups number of tools

number of groups 9–inch 14inch

2 6

2 128 5 groups/page 14 groups/page




12




32 64 1 group/page 2 groups/page

On the 9” screen, up to 7 numbers of the groups for which tool change signals are issued are displayed at thebottom of the screen. On the 14” screen, up to 15 numbers are displayed. If there are more than 7 groups onthe 9” screen or 15 groups on the 14” screen, an arrow appears.

If the option for 1024 tool life management groups is used, up to 6 numbers of the groups for which tool changesignals are issued are displayed along the bottom of the tool life screen (13 numbers when the 14” screen isbeing used).

For information on a specified group, enter the group number and press <INP–NO.>. The page on which thegroup starts is displayed. (When the specified group is already displayed, the cursor moves to the life counterfor the group.)

Press <↑> or <↓> for information on the previous or next group.

Pressing <←> or <→ >moves the cursor to the life counter for the previous or next group. When the cursoris on the first or last group on the screen, the page changes.

10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter

To change the value of a life counter, enter the MDI mode, set the value, and press <PRESET>. The life counterfor the group at cursor position is preset. Other data on the group does not change.

10.12.4 Clearing execution data

Specify the number of a group generating a tool change signal and press <CANCEL>. All execution data forthe group up to the point is cleared. This is equivalent to tool reset for a group(Note 1). (See 10.12.7.)

NOTE <CANCEL> is accepted only in the RESET status. (It is not, however, accepted during theRESET process.)


– 246 –

10.12.5 Display format of tool life data

The following figure shows the display format on a 9” CRT.

TOOL LIFE DATA 01234 N01234SELECTED GROUP

GROUP 001 : LIFE 4300 COUNT 0240 * 0100 * 0110 * 0120 * 0130 #0140 * 0150 @0160 0170GROUP 002 : LIFE 4300 COUNT 4300 * 0200 * 0210 #0220 * 0230 * 0240 #0250 * 0260 0270GROUP 003 : LIFE 3800 COUNT 1350 * 0300 * 0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370GROUP TO BE CHANGE 002 005 013 027 055 060 062 →

Fig. 10.12.5 Display format

(1) The first line is the title line.

(2) The second line displays the number of the group for which commands are currently executed. If thereis no such group, *** is displayed instead.

(3) The third to fifth lines display the tool life data for the group. (The number of displayed lines varies depend-ing on the maximum number of tools. In this example, the maximum number of tools is 8.)

The third line displays the group number, the set tool life, and the current tool use count. A parameter speci-fies whether the tool life is counted as duration of use or number of times used. (See II–11.2.)

The fourth and fifth lines display the tool numbers. In this example, the tools are selected in the order of0100, 0110, 0120, 0130, 0140, 0150, 0160, and 0170.

The special characters have the following meanings:

* : Indicates that the life of the tool has expired.

# : Indicates that a skip command is specified.

@ : Indicates that the tool is currently being used.

The value of the tool life counter corresponds to that for the tool marked @.

* is displayed the next time commands are executed for the group the tool belongs to.

(4) The sixth to eleventh lines display the life data for group 2 and group 3.

(5) The thirteenth line displays the numbers of the groups for which tool changes signals are issued.

The group numbers are displayed in ascending order. If all group numbers cannot be displayed on ascreen, an arrow is displayed at the end. Otherwise, *** is displayed at the end.


– 247 –

10.12.6 Tool change signal

Each time the life of a tool expires, the next tool in the group is selected. When the life of the last tool in a groupexpires, a tool change signal is output. When the tool life is in terms of the duration of use, the signal is outputwhen the time elapses even during machining. The machining, however, continues. When the tool life is interms of the number of times used, this signal is output when the CNC is reset by M02/M30 after the set valuehas been reached. When all tools in a group have expired, the group is displayed on the CRT and a tool changesignal is output. If the group is specified again without resetting the signal (see 10.12.7), the last tool is used.

10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal

A tool change signal can be reset and hence automatically terminated in either of the following ways:

(1) With a tool change reset signal

Replace the tools in the group and input a tool change reset signal by externally specifying the group.Then, the tool life counter, the * and @ marks, and other related data are cleared. Perform this operationfor all groups whose life expires. A tool change signal continues to be output while there is at least onegroup whose life has expired. Parameter No. 7400 (RAG) allows all groups to be cleared without externallyspecifying a group. When the all–clean signal is issued, the data for either all groups or only groups whoselife has expired is cleared, depends on a parameter setting.

(2) From the MDI panel

The MDI panel can be used to reset the data for all groups whose life has expired (see III–10.12.4).

NOTE The reset operation is valid only when the CNC is in the reset status (excluding during the resetprocess). When the group which has been reset is specified again, the first tool is selected.

10.12.8 New tool selection signal

When a new tool in a group is selected, a new tool selection signal is output together with the T code of the tool.

This signal can be used to automatically measure the compensation value for the new tool.

10.12.9 Tool skip signal

Tools whose life has not expired can be forcibly replaced in either of the following ways. Set the SNG bit ofparameter No. 7400 to specify whether the signal is valid only when tools subject to tool life management areused or also when tools not subject to tool life management are used.

(1) Externally specify the group to which the tool belongs and input a tool skip signal. The next T code selectsthe next tool in the specified group.

(2) Input a tool skip signal without specifying a group number. When tools subject to tool life management areused, it is assumed that the current group is specified. When tools not subject to tool life management areused but a parameter specifies that the signal is valid also for that case, it is assumed that the group lastused is specified. The next T code selects the next tool in the specified group.

When a tool skip signal is input for the last tool, a tool change signal is output irrespective of whether thetool life is in terms of duration of use or number of times used. A tool skip signal is not accepted duringthe reset process.


– 248 –

10.12.10 Expanded tool life management

It is possible to display details of tool management data, edit the data via the MDI, and override the tool life interms of the duration of use.

(1) Displaying the details of tool life management data

The details of tool life management data can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the group whosedata is to be displayed and pressing the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool life management screen.

(Expanded tool life management screen)

EDIT LIFE DATA GROUP: 005 01234 N01234 NEXT GRP:006 TYPE : 1(1:C 2:M) USE GRP :008 LIFE : 4300 SLCT GRP:008 COUNT: 2000 NO. STATE T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE 01 * 10001 1 2 02 * 10002 10 12 03 # 10003 11 13 04 @ 10004 20 25

NEXT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 commandis executed

USE GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored

SLCT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored or was monitored last

TYPE: 1 (when the tool life is in terms of the number of times the tool is used)

2 (when the tool life is in terms of the duration of use)

LIFE: The life of the tool

COUNT: The elapsed life of the tool

STATE: The state of the tool

Tool state Used Not used

Usable @ Blank

Skipped # #

The tool life has expired

@ / * (Note) *

NOTE The EMD bit of parameter No. 7401 determines whether the asterisks is displayed when thenext tool is used or when the tool life has expired.

T–CODE: Tool number

H–CODE: H code

D–CODE: D code

The following information is added also to the ordinary tool life management screen:

1 Displaying NEXT GRP and USE GRP

2 Displaying the type of tool life data (M: Duration of use, C: No. of times) for each tool group

3 Displaying the state of a tool as on the expanded tool life management screen

(2) Editing tool life management data

Tool life management data can be edited when the CNC is stopped, paused, or reset (excluding while theresetting signal is on) in the MDI mode.

Data cannot be edited while the program is setting data.

The following alterations can be made when editing data:

– The underscore indicates that the specialcharacter is displayed in reverse.


– 249 –

1 Setting a tool life

2 Setting an elapsed tool life

3 Adding, changing, or deleting a tool number (T code)

4 Setting an H code or D code

5 Setting the type of life data

6 Setting the state of a tool

NOTE 1 Do not edit a group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command isexecuted or a group whose tool life is currently being monitored.

An attempt to edit such a group forcibly terminates the tool management for the group.

NOTE 2 Editing tool life data may turn on or off a tool change signal.

1 A tool change signal is turned on in the following cases:

i) When the tool state is skipped for the last tool

ii) When deleting a tool number leaves only tools whose life has expired (including skippedtools) in the tool group

2 A tool change signal is turned off in the following cases:

i) When a tool whose life has not expired is added to the tool group

ii) When a tool state is cleared

A tool change signal is not turned off if there is another group whose tool life has expired.

(3) Editing tool life data

(a) Selecting the editing screen for expanded tool life management

Position the cursor on the group to be edited and press the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool lifemanagement screen to select the expanded tool life management screen.

(b) Selecting the ordinary tool life management screen

Press the <END> soft key to return to the ordinary tool life management screen.

(c) Setting the tool life, the elapsed tool life, the type of tool life data, the tool number, and the H and Dcodes

��

��

��

1 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, press the <INPUT> soft key, enter the value, andpress the <EXEC> soft key.

2 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, enter the value, and press the <INPUT> soft key.

NOTE 1 Changing the tool life or the elapsed tool life does not affect the state of the tool or tool changesignal.

NOTE 2 When the type of tool life data is changed, reset the tool life value and the elapsed tool life.


– 250 –

(d) Adding a tool group or tool number

� ��

��

��

1 Adding a tool group

To add data to a group where no data has been set yet:

Press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and press the <EXEC> soft key. The typeof tool life data is set according to the current parameter (the LTM bit of parameter No. 7400) andthe tool life and elapsed tool life are set to 0.

NOTE The cursor does not move until the tool number is set.

2 Adding a tool number

A tool number can be added in either of the following ways:

i. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position wherea tool number is to be added, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and pressthe <EXEC> soft key.

ii. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position wherea tool number is to be added, enter the tool number, and press the <INSERT> soft key.

Example Adding tool number 1500 between No. 01 and 02

Position the cursor on 20 in the D–CODE column, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter 1500,and press the <EXEC> soft key.

NO. CONDITION T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE01 * 1320 10 2002 # 1400 30 40

NO. CONDITION T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE01 * 1320 10 2002 1500 0 003 @ 1400 30 40

NOTE The H and D codes are set to 0.

(e) Deleting a tool group or tool number

��

� ��

�

��


– 251 –

1 Deleting a tool group

Press the <DELETE> soft key, the <GRP> soft key, then the <EXEC> soft key.

2 Deleting a tool number

Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be deleted, press the<DELETE> soft key, and press the <CRSR> soft key.

NOTE 1 Deleting all tools in a tool group is equivalent to deleting a group.

NOTE 2 When a tool being used (prefixed by @) is deleted, the previous tool whose life has expiredor which is skipped is indicated by @.

(f) Setting the state of a tool

��

��

1 Skipping a tool

Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be skipped, press the <STATE>soft key, then press the <SKIP> soft key.

2 Clearing tool life data (resetting the life)

Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be cleared, press the <STATE>soft key, then press the <CLEAR> soft key.

(4) Overriding the elapsed tool life

When the life of the tools in a group is in terms of duration of use, the elapsed tool life can be overridden.

The override factor is specified by a switch on the machine operator’s panel.

The override factor ranges from 0 to 99.9. When 0 is specified, the tool life is not monitored.

Set the LFV bit of parameter No. 7401 to enable the override switch.

Example When the override factor is 0.1 and it takes ten minutes to cut the workpiece, one minute isadded to the elapsed tool life.

NOTE The elapsed tool life is not updated when the actual cutting time is less than four seconds.

However, when the TRV bit of parameter No.7401 is set to 1, outting time loss than fourseconds is counted as four seconds (two or three seconds are counted as four seconds).


– 252 –

10.13Software Operator’s Panel

Many operations performed on the machine operator’s panel can also be performed on the software operator’spanel (the CRT/MDI panel).

The following operations are possible on the CRT/MDI panel:

(a) Group 1: Mode selection

(b) Group 2: Selection of the jog feed axis and jog rapid traverse

(c) Group 3: Selection of the feed axis for the manual pulse generator and selection of the manual pulse factor from X1, X10, and Xn (where n is set by a parameter)

(d) Group 4: Selection of the jog feedrate, feedrate override, and rapid traverse override

(e) Group 5: Optional block skip (block deletion), single block operation, machine lock, and dry run

(f) Group 6: Memory protection

(g) Group 7: Feed hold

(h) Group 8: General–purpose switches (Eight general–purpose switches are provided. A name consistingof up to eight characters can be assigned to each switch.)

Whether to use the CRT or machine operator’s panel is determined by parameter No. 7603 for each group.

(1) Settings such as mode selection

1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.

2 Press the <SETTING> soft or hard key several times to select the menu switch screen.

3 Press one of the page keys several times to display the software operator’s panel screen.

The screen for general–purpose switches is shown above. The user can allocate eight signals on thisscreen. A name consisting of up to eight characters can be assigned to each signal by a parameter.


– 253 –

4 Position the cursor (represented by a solid box) on the desired switch using the cursor keys (<↓> <↑>).

5 Position the cursor on the desired status using the cursor keys (<→> <←>). (The selected statusesare displayed in reverse.)

�

(2) Jog feed (available only for the small 9” CRT/MDI unit)

1 Display the software operator’s panel screen using the soft keys.

2 Select the JOG mode.

3 Perform jog feed by pressing one of the arrow keys.

Pressing the key together with an arrow key jogs the machine atthe rapid traverse feedrate.

� � �

�

� �

�t

⋅�

�

EOB ��

��

�

CAUTION When the CRT displays a screen other than the software operator’s panel screen, jog feedis disabled.

NOTE The axis and direction corresponding to each arrow key are set by parameters No. 2020 and2021.

(2) General–purpose switches

As an extension of the software operator’s panel, an additional eight switches can be arbitrarily specified.The eight switches are assigned a name consisting of up to eight characters by a parameter. Refer to themanual issued by the machine tool builder for the function of each switch.

(3) Displaying software operator’s panel by function

The unused switches can be deleted from the software operator panel by setting parameter OPND (bit 6of parameter No.7601).

NOTE 1 The “unused switches” refer to those which specified as “unused” by bits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6of parameter No.7603.

NOTE 2 General-purpose switches 1 to 8 are assumed to be “unused” when all corresponding bits ofparameter Nos. 2311 to 2318, 2321 to 2328, . . . , and 2381 to 2388 (parameters to nameswitches) are 0.

Example The screens when the parameters shown in Table 1 are set are shown on the following pages:


– 254 –

Table 1 Example of Setting of Parameters for Software Operator’s Panel

Parameter no. Value Meaning

7601#6 1 Unused switches are not displayed.

7603#0

7603#2

7603#3

7603#4

7603#5

7603#6

1

1

0

0

1

1

Mode selection is done.

Axis and multiplier selection of manual pulse generator is done.

Jog feed, override and rapid traverse override are not executed.

Optional block skip, Single block and Machine lockand Dry run are notexecuted.

Memory protect is done.

Feed hold is done.

231123122313231423152316231723182321 to 23282331 to 23382341 to 23482351 to 23582361 to 23682371 to 23782381 to 2388

83737178657632490000000

Name of G.P.switch 1, 1st character (S)Name of G.P.switch 1, 2nd character (I)Name of G.P.switch 1, 3rd character (G)Name of G.P.switch 1, 4th character (N)Name of G.P.switch 1, 5th character (A)Name of G.P.switch 1, 6th character (L)Name of G.P.switch 1, 7th character ( )Name of G.P.switch 1, 8th character (1)Name of G.P.switch 2Name of G.P.switch 3 G. P. switch=GeneralName of G.P.switch 4 Purpose switchName of G.P.switch 5Name of G.P.switch 6Name of G.P.switch 7Name of G.P.switch 8

By the above setting, the following switches are not displayed:Rapid traverse override switch Jog feedrate switch Feedrate override switch Optional block skip switch Single block switch Machine lock switch Dry run switch General purpose switches 2 to 8

OPERATOR’S PANEL O1234 N00000

MODE : EDT MEM TAP MDI JOG REF HND INCHANDLE AXIS : X Y ZHANDLE MULTI : * 1 * 10 * 100

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)X –10.000 Y –123.400Z –12.100

ACT F : 0 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (RPM)EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSKSETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Fig. 1 Software Operator’s Panel Display Example 1st page (9” CRT)


– 255 –


MEMORY PROTECT : PROTECTRELEASEFEED HOLD : OFF ON



Fig. 2 Software Operator’s Panel Display Example 2nd page (9” CRT)


SIGNAL 1 : OFF 0N



Fig. 3 Software Operator’s Panel Display Example 3rd page (9” CRT)


– 256 –

10.14Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers

10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen

1 Press the [function menu] key.

2 Press the <OFFSET> soft or hard key several times to display the following screen.

After pressing the <OFFSET> key, press the <CHAPTER> key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selectionkeys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool data screen.

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

↑ ↑

�� !�'*�(� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��-��

��-��

� -��

��

��-��

��-��

��-��

��-��

↑ ↑

�� !�'*�(� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

��


– 257 –

(a) The numbers displayed in the NO. column are called display numbers. The display numbers are usedfor editing or searching for tool data.

The display numbers, however, may change when tool data is deleted or inserted.

(b) The 3–digit number preceded by E: on the second line of the above example indicates the displaynumber of the tool data for which compensation is currently enabled (after an M06 command).

The 3–digit number preceded by S: indicates the display number of the selected tool data (before anM06 command).

When machining is executed or there is no selected tool, *** is displayed.

(c) * is displayed before a pot number when the same pot number is set.

(d) Data positions which are not set become blanks.

(e) When there is no registered data or before about 15 seconds elapse after the power is turned on, dis-play number 001 is *** and other data positions are blanks.

(f) On a 14” CRT, the above example is displayed on the left, the items related to (b) are in the center,and the current position (relative coordinates) is on the right.

10.14.2 Setting tool data

(1) Entering and changing data

1 Position the cursor at the data to be entered or changed using the page keys (<↓> <↑>) or cursor keys( <↑> <↓> <→> <←> ).

2 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the following:

�� !�#�� "��#�� $"

��

�� !�#�� "��#�� $"

�%��

�%��

�%��

��

��%��

��%��

3 Enter or change data as follows:

i) Press the [operation menu] key.

ii) Press the <INPUT> key.

iii) Enter the data to be set.

iv) Press the <EXEC> key.

NOTE Step i) can be omitted.

�� !�#�� "��#�� $"

��

↓

��

↓

��


– 258 –

�� "�� !��"�� #!

��$��

��$��

$ �

��

��$��

��$��

↓

�� $��

↓

��

(2) T codes

1 Press the [operation menu] key.

2 A new T code can be inserted under the current cursor position using the insert command.

Press the soft keys <INSERT>, <(T#)>, then <EXEC>.

V��WT1030V��W

3 After pressing <(T#)> (or entering T), enter the T code to be inserted. A warning is issued when 300data sets are already registered or the same T code exists.


– 259 –

4 When <EXEC> is pressed without entering a T code number (only T is entered), a T code is not setbut only the area is allocated.

Example T1234, <EXEC>: 1234 is inserted in the T_CODE column.

T, <EXEC>: Only the area is inserted leaving the T_CODE column blank.

�� !�#�� "��#��$"

��

↓

��

↓

��

�� !�#�� "��#�� $"

��%��

��%��

��%��

��

�� %��

↓

(T#)

↓

��


– 260 –

(3) Deleting registered data

(a) Method 1 for deleting a line


ii) Press the <DELETE> key.

iii) Enter the display number of the line to be deleted.


(b) Method 2 for deleting a line


ii) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted.

iii) Press the <DELETE> key.

iv) Press the <CRSR> key.

(c) Deleting consecutive lines


ii) Press the <DELETE> key.

iii) Enter the starting display number (M) and end display number (N).

iv) Press the <EXEC> key. The lines from display number M to N are deleted.

�� "#�$�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��'%

��

↓

��"��

↓

�� "��

↓

��

�� "#�$�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��'%

��(��

��(��

��(��

��

�� (��

��↓

��"��

��

↓

�� "��

↓

��


– 261 –

(4) Searching for data

(a) Searching for a display number


ii) Press the <SEARCH> key.

iii) Enter the display number to be searched for.


(b) Searching for a T code



iii) Enter T and the T code number to be searched for.


(c) Searching for a POT number



iii) Enter P and the POT number to be searched for.


To search for the same POT number which appears next:

v) Press the <SEARCH> key.

vi) Enter P.

vii) Press the <EXEC> key.

(d) Searching for the last registered data



iii) Press the <BOTTOM> key.

�� "#�$�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��'%

��

↓

��

↓ ↓ ↓

��

�� "#�$�&�"!� %� ��&�"!� ��'%

��(��

��(��

�(��

��

��(��

� ↓

�� (��

↓ ↓ ↓

��


– 262 –

10.15Setting the Floating Reference Position

The floating reference position is set as follows:

1 Select the current–position screen.

The current–position screen may be the overall position display, relative position display, or current posi-tion display in a work coordinate system.

2 Move the machine to the floating reference position by manual jog feed or a similar operation.

3 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

4 Press the [MEM–FRP] key. The soft keys are switched to the operation guide keys.

5

5–1 To store the coordinates on all axes as a floating reference position, press the [ALL–AXS] key.

5–2 To store the coordinate along a specified axis as a floating reference position, enter the name of theaxis (X, Y, etc.) and press the <EXEC> key. Multiple axis names can be specified at a time.

Example Enter XYZ and press the <EXEC> key.

6 Setting the FPC bit of parameter No. 1200 presets the relative position display to 0 and stores the floatingreference position.

�� !"�#�%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

��

�� !"�#�%�! � �&�� '$

��

�� !"�#�%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

��( ��

��(��

��

�� !"�#�%�! � �&�� '$

��

��

NOTE 1 The floating reference position is stored when the power is turned off.

NOTE 2 The stored floating reference position (machine coordinates) can be checked on the parameterscreen. (The data is stored in parameter No. 1244.)


– 263 –

10.16Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen

The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, andspindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key. The servo motor and spindle motor can thereby beeasily set or adjusted.

10.16.1 Servo screens

(1) Servo setting screen

This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the servo motor.

This setting screen is valid only for servo axes. It cannot be used for spindle positioning axes or Cs contourcontrol axes.

SERVO SETTING O1000 N0000

X AXIS Z AXISINITIAL SET BITS 00000011 00000011MOTOR ID NO. 12 12AMR 00011111 00011111CMR 2 2FEEDGEAR N 2 2

(N/M) M 3 3DIRECTION SET 111 111VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8000 8000POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 8000REF. COUNTER 8000 8000

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSKSERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

The correspondence between the items on the screen and the parameters are as follows:

INITIAL SET BITS : Parameter No. 1804

MOTOR ID NO. : Parameter No. 1874

AMR : Parameter No. 1806

CMR : Parameter No. 1820

FEEDGEAR N : Parameter No. 1977

(N/M) M : Parameter No. 1978

DIRECTION SET : Parameter No. 1879

VELOCITY PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1876

POSITION PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1891

REF. COUNTER : Parameter No. 1896

NOTE The servo setting screen is available only to the servo axes. It is not available to the spindlepositioning axis and Cs contouring control axis.


– 264 –

(2) Servo adjustment screen

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the servo mo-tor.

SERVO MOTOR TUNING O1000 N0000

X AXIS(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)

FUNC. BIT 00110100 ALARM 1 00110100LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00110100TUNING ST. 1 ALARM 3 00000000SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000INT. GAIN 251 LOOP GAIN 3000PROP. GAIN 2460 POS ERROR 100FILTER 2450 CURRENT % 5VELOC. GAIN % 150 SPEED(RPM) 50


The correspondence between the items on the screen and parameters are as follows:

FUNC. BIT : Parameter No. 1808

LOOP GAIN : Parameter No. 1825

SET PERIOD : Parameter No. 1972

INT. GAIN : Parameter No. 1855

PROP. GAIN : Parameter No. 1856

FILTER : Parameter No. 1895

VELOC.GAIN % : (LDINT256

� 1) × 100

(NOTE LDINT : Parameter No. 1875)

TUNING ST. : When 1 is set, the digital servo is automatically adjusted.

The following monitors are provided:

ALARM 1 : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm




LOOP GAIN : Displays the loop gain obtained from the output pulse and position deviation.

POS ERROR : Displays the magnitude of the error for each axis.

CURRENT % : Displays Actual currentParameter No.1979

× 100

SPEED (RPM): Displays the actual speed for each axis.


– 265 –

10.16.2 Spindle screens

(1) Spindle setting screen

This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the spindles.

SPINDLE SETTING O1000 N0000

GEAR SELECT :1 SPINDLE :S11

(PARAMETER) GEAR RATIO 50 MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000 MAX CS AXIS SPEED 100 MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000


GEAR SELECT : Displays one of the following modes depending on the states of control input signals CTH1 and CTH2.

CTH1 CTH2 Mode Display

0 0 HIGH GEAR 4

0 1 MIDIUM HIGH GEAR 3

1 0 MEDIUM LOW GEAR 2

1 1 LOW GEAR 1

SPINDLE : Displays which spindle is being adjusted.

S11 : Main spindle of the first spindle amplifier

S12 : Subspindle of the first spindle amplifier

S21 : Main spindle of the second spindle amplifier

S22 : Subspindle of the second spindle amplifier

PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection.

HIGH M.H M.L LOW

Gear ratio 3056 3057 3058 3059

Maximum rotation speed of the motor

3020 3020 3020 3020

Maximum rotation speed of C axis

3021 3021 3021 3021

MAX SPINDLE SPEED : Displays the value obtained from the gear ratio and maximum rotation speed of the motor. The cursor does not move to this item.


– 266 –

(2) Spindle adjustment screen

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the spindles.

SPINDLE TUNING O1000 N0000

OPERATION :SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL GEAR SELECT :1 SPINDLE :S11 (PARAMETER) PROP. GAIN 2460 MOTOR 100 INT. GAIN 251 SPINDLE 150 LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100 MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 50 ZRN GAIN % 300 SYN.ERROR 128 REF. SHIFT 300


OPERATION : Displays one of the following according to on the spindle setting.

1 Normal operation 3 Synchronous control 5 Orientation

2 CS control � Rigid tapping 6 (Blank)

PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection and operating mode.

<During normal operation>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW

Proportional gain 3040 3040 3041 3041

Integrated gain 3048 3048 3049 3049

Motor voltage 3083 3083 3083 3083

Generative power 3080 3080 3080 3080

<During CS control>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW



Loop gain 3069 3070 3071 3072

Motor voltage 3086 3086 3086 3086

ZRN gain (%) 3092 3092 3092 3092

Reference position shift 3135 3135 3135 3135


– 267 –

<During synchronous control>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW



Loop gain 3065 3066 3067 3068

Motor voltage 3085 3085 3085 3085

Acceleration/deceleration constant

3032 3032 3032 3032


<During rigid tapping>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW



Loop gain 3065 3066 3067 3068

Motor voltage 3085 3085 3085 3085

ZRN gain (%) 3091 3091 3091 3091


<During orientation>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW



Loop gain 3060 3061 3062 3063

Motor voltage 3084 3084 3084 3084

ORAR gain (%) 3064 3064 3064 3064

Stop position shift 3077 3077 3077 3077


MONITOR: Displays one of the following according to the operating mode:

Normal operation CS control Synchronous control Rigid tapping Orientation

Motor speed-Spindle speed

Motor speed-FeedratePosi-tion deviation S1

Motor speedSpindlespeedPosition devi-ation S1Position deviation S2Synchronous error

Motor speedSpindlespeedPosition devi-ation S1Position deviation ZSynchronous error

Motor speedSpindlespeedPosition devi-ation S1

Motor speed : Displays the speed of the spindle motor. (Unit: RPM)

Spindle speed : Displays the speed of the spindle. (Unit: RPM)

Feedrate : Displays the feedrate of the spindle. (Unit: DEG/MIN)

Position deviation S1 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the first unit.

Position deviation S2 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the second unit.

Synchronous error : Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-tween the spindle and Z axis during rigid tapping.

Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-tween the main spindle and subspindle during synchronous control. Peakhold values can be displayed by setting the PKHD bit of parameter No. 5820.

NOTE When the second spindle is displayed during orientation or CS control, position deviation S2is displayed.


– 268 –

(3) Spindle monitor screen

This screen displays various information on the spindles.

SPINDLE MONITOR O1000 N0000

ALARM :AL–27(PC DISCON. ) OPERATION :SP.CONTOURING CONTROL FEED.SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM

0 50 100 150 200(%) LOAD METER

=========== CONTROL INPUT :MRDY * ESP ORCM

CONTROL OUTPUT:ORAR SST


ALARM : Displays one of the following according to the spindle alarm number:

No. Display No. Display

01 MOTOR OVERHEAT 25 SERI.TRANS.STOP

02 SPEED ER.EXCESS 26 C–VEL.DISCON.

07 OVER SPEED 27 PC DISCON.

09 HEATSINK OVERHEAT 28 C–POS.DISCON.

10 LOW VOLTAGE 29 OVERLOAD

11 DC LINK OVER VOLT 30 INPUT OVER CUR.

12 DC LINK OVER CUR. 31 PG DISCON

13 MEMORY ABNOR. 32 SERI.RAM ABNOR.

18 SUM CHECK ER. 33 DC LINK LOW VOLT

19 U PHASE OFFSET 34 PARA. SET ABNOR.

20 V PHASE OFFSET 35 GEAR RATIO SET ER

24 SERI.DATA ABNOR. 36 ER.COUNT.OVERFLOW

LOAD METER: Displays the load (%) of the spindle motor.


– 269 –

CONTROL INPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.

Symbol Name Symbol Name

TLML Torque restrict command LOW *ESP External stop instruction

TLMH Torque restrict command HIGH SPSL Spindle select command

CTH1 Clutch/gear ratio MCFN Power line switching complete signal

CTH2 Clutch/gear ratio SOCN Soft start/stop cancel

SRV Reverse rotate command RSL Output switching request signal

SFR Forward rotate command RCH Power line status check signal

ORCM Orientation command INDX Orientation stop position change

MRDY Machine tool ready ROTA Orientation stop rotation direction

ARST Alarm reset signal NRRO Orientation short–pa

CONTROL OUTPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.

Symbol Name Symbol Name

ALM Alarm signal TLM5 Torque restricting signal

SST Speed zero signal ORAR Orientation completion signal

SDT Speed detected signal CHP Power line switching signal

SAR Speed reached signal CFIN Spindle switching complete signal

LDT1 Load detected signal 1 RCHP Output switching signal

LDT2 Load detected signal 2 RCFN Output switching complete signal


– 270 –

10.16.3 Operations

The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, andspindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key.

1 Press the [function menu] key.

2 Press the <SERVICE> soft or hard key.

�� $ �#�! � "��#�! � ��%"

��

��

↑

3 Pressing the <SERVO> key displays the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen.

Pressing the <SPINDLE> key displays the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindlemonitor screen.

�� "��#�! � ��%"

��

��

��

↑ ↑

Select screens in either of the following ways:

a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen

i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SERVO> key.

After the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed, the servo setting screenor servo adjustment screen for each axis can be displayed using the page keys.

b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen

i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindlemonitor screen is displayed.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SPINDLE> key.

After the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen is dis-played, pressing a page key changes the screen to either the spindle setting screen, spindle ad-justment screen, or spindle monitor screen.

4 Pressing the [operation menu] key or entering data changes the soft keys to the following keys:

Press the <CHAPTER> key to return to step 3.


– 271 –

a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen

�� !"�#�%�! � $��%�! � ��&$

��

��

Press the <SV_SET> key to select the servo setting screen. Press the <SV_TUN> key to select theservo adjustment screen.

b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen

�� !"�#�%�! � $��%�! � ��&$

��

��

Press the <SP_SET> key to select the spindle setting screen. Press the <SP_TUN> key to select thespindle adjustment screen. Press the <SP_MON> key to select the spindle monitor screen.


– 272 –

10.17Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens

At times, the operator may want to see the data of two or more CNC screens at a time. For example:

⋅When the operator wants to check the current position simultaneously on both the screen for cutter compensation and the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point

⋅When the operator wants to check the current program on the graphic screen

This function displays subscreens on the current screen (main screen).

The current position, current program, cutter compensation value, alarm, and other data can be displayed ona subscreen. (For details, see Subsecs 10.17.2 – 10.17.4) There are very few restrictions on the data itemsthat can be displayed on a subscreen and on the position and size of the subscreen. Simple input and editingare permitted for data on a subscreen. (On the position subscreen, for example, the origin/preset operationis permitted. On the cutter compensation subscreen, a compensation value can be input. Program editing andother complicated operations are not allowed.)

Multiple subscreens are displayed as shown below:

> MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK

SETTING

PRGRAMCHECK

OFFSETPROGRAM

POSI-TION

GRAPHIC

MESSAGE

SERVICE

TOOL OFFSET O0010 N00005

NO. DATA NO. DATA

001 1.500 017 1.500

003 0.000 019 0.000

004 0.000 020 0.000

005 2.000 021 0.000006 0.000 022 0.000

007 0.000 023 0.000

008 0.000 024 0.000

009 0.000 0010 0.000 0011 0.000 0012 0.000 0013 0.000 0014 0.000 0015 0.000 0016 0.000 0

002 0.000 018 0.000

2 : PROGRAM

O0010 ;

G90 G55 ;

G00 X0 Y0 ;

Z50. ;G43 H1 ;

G42 X50. Y10. D5 ;

Z20. ;G01 Y20. D1 F100 ;X10. ;

1 : POSITION

(ABSOLUTE)

X 0.000

Y 0.000

Z 50.000

(MACHINE)

X 10.000

Y 20.000

Z 50.000

NO.03 (G56)

X 0.000

Y 0.000

Z 0.000

NO.02 (G55)

Y 20.000

Z 0.000

3 ;WORK OFFSET

X 10.000

4 :MODLG90 G54G00G17G40D 5 H 1F 100S 200

Fig. 10.17 Multiple subscreens

On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed. Information describing a displayed sub-screen (data items, displayed position, and size) is stored. These items need not be specified each time thepower is turned on. (Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main screens can be stored.)

10.17.1 Subscreen states

There are three subscreen states:

1 No–subscreen state

No subscreens are displayed. Data can be edited (page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys can be used)only on the main screen.

2 Subscreen/display state

Subscreens are displayed, but only data on the main screen can be edited.

3 Subscreen/edit state

Subscreens are displayed and data on subscreens can be edited. The page keys, cursor keys, and softkeys can be used on subscreens.


– 273 –

>EDIT

Soft keys for the main screen


O100 ;N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ;N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ;N3 Y10. ;N4

>EDIT

Soft keys for the main screen



�!�� )�%�� "*�"*($�/�� "&� -!"+��

��

�

�&

�&��

��

�� '�*,�*�)��&� *+�+� �� ,�*�)��&� �"*($�/� *+�+�

�� ,�*�)��&� ��"+� *+�+�

/� ()�**"& � +!�� '$$'-"& � #�/*�� +!��*,�*�)��&� *+�+�� &� �� !�& �� ')��+�"$*�� *�� +!�� &�.+� *��+"'&�

�,�*�)��&�'(�)�+"'&� #�/*

�'�+� #�/*� �')�+!�� *,�*�)��&

3 :WORK OFFSETNO. 02 (G55)X 10.000Y 20.000Z 30.000

Soft keys for the subscreen


�!�� )�%�� "*�"*($�/�� "&� )��&�


3 :WORK OFF-SETNO. 02 (G55)X 10.000Y 20.000Z 30.000

”

”

>EDIT

� ��

�&

��

��

10.17.2 Subscreen operations

(1) Subscreen number

Up to five subscreens can be displayed on a single main screen. The five subscreens have numbers (sub-screens 1 to 5). This number is indicated in the top left corner of each subscreen.

Example Subscreen 3 is displayed as shown below.

�,�*�)��&� &,%��)

3 :WORK OFFSETNO. 02 (G55)X 10.000Y 20.000Z 30.000


– 274 –

(2) Subscreen operation keys (Sn)

⋅Subscreen selection keys

After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <1> to display subscreen 1.





Any subscreen from 1 to 5 can be displayed and data on the subscreen can be edited.

⋅Subscreen deletion key (<S8>)

After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 8 to delete all subscreens from the current main screen.

⋅Subscreen redisplay key (<S9>)

After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 9 to redisplay subscreens deleted with the subscreen deletionkey.

(3) Soft keys for the subscreen

In the subscreen–edit state, the soft keys for the subscreen are displayed as shown below:

INPUTNO.

+INPUT

INPUT SELECTSCREEN

RETURNMAIN

MOVE/ENLARG

DELETESCREEN

� � � �

��

The five soft keys on the left are displayed according to the data displayed on the subscreen (position, toolcompensation, etc.). (Shown above are the soft keys displayed for the subscreen for the offset from theworkpiece reference point.) The four soft keys on the right are used for subscreen operation. Use the sub-screen operation keys as described below:

1 <MOVE/ENLARG>

When this key is pressed, the subscreen can be moved, enlarged, or reduced. After this key ispressed, the following soft keys are displayed.

←↑↓→← ↑↓→ SETEND

��

��

��

<←> Moves the subscreen to <←> Reduces the subscreen by onethe left by one column. unit in the horizontal direction.

<→> Moves the subscreen to <→> Enlarges the subscreen by onethe right by one column. unit in the horizontal direction.

<↓> Moves the subscreen down <↓> Enlarges the subscreen by oneby one row. unit in the vertical direction.

<↑> Moves the subscreen up <↑> Reduces the subscreen by oneby one row. unit in the vertical direction.

<SET END> Terminates setting.

The unit by which the subscreen is enlarged or reduced depends on the data displayed on the sub-screen.


– 275 –

2 <RETURN MAIN>

After this key is pressed, subscreens are still displayed, but data in them cannot be edited. Only dataon the main screen can be edited. The soft keys for the subscreens are substituted by the soft keysfor the main screen.

3 <DELETE SCREEN>

When this key is pressed, the subscreen is erased. Subsequently, only data on the main screen canbe edited. The soft keys for the subscreen are substituted by the soft keys for the main screen. Thiskey erases only a subscreen in the edit status. To delete all subscreens, press the <SHIFT> key andenter 8 as described above.

4 <SELECT SCREEN>

When this key is pressed, the data to display on a subscreen can be selected. After this key is pressed,the subscreen menu is displayed as shown below.

MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK

INPUTNO.

SETEND

DELETESCREEN

RETURNMAIN

MOVE/ENLARG

GRAPHIC(GRAPH) O0100 N00005

5000.000

2500.0005:PROGRAM O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 C90. ; N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N4 Y20. ;> N5 X0 ; N6 G40 Y0 ; N7 M30 ; %

01: POSITION02:03: TOOL OFFSET04: WORK OFFSET

06: DI/DO07: SERVO ERROR

0:MENUY

05: MODAL

08: ALARM MESSAGE09: OPERATOR MESSAGE

PROGRAM

Select an option by using the cursor keys (<←> , <→>, <↑>,<↓> ) and pressing the <SET END> softkey. Selected data is displayed on the subscreen.


– 276 –

10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen

(1) POSITION subscreen

Indicates the current position. The following data can be displayed:

⋅(RELATIVE) : Relative coordinates

⋅(ABSOLUTE) : Absolute coordinates

⋅(MACHINE) : Machine coordinates

⋅(RESIDUAL) : Remaining travelling distance

⋅(MANUAL) : Degree of manual interrupt (only when the manual pulse interrupt and simultaneous manual/automatic operation functions are available)

By enlarging or reducing the subscreen, the number of data items for indicating the position on a screencan be changed.

Changing position data displayed on a subscreen

(R ELATIVE)*X

Y 5.678 21.000

(ABSOLUTE)*X

Y 15.678 31.000

ZC

100.000 90.000

ZC

110.000 9.000

1:POSITION

(RELATIVE)*X

Y 5.678 21.000

(ABSOLUTE)*X

Y 15.678 31.000

ZC

100.000 90.000

ZC

110.000 9.000

1:POSITION

(RELATIVE)

*XY

5.678 21.000

(MACHINE)

*XY

5.678 21.000

ZC

100.000 90.000

ZC

110.000 9.000

1:POSITION

To change the absolute coordinates shown in theright half of the left screen to machine coordinates, follow this procedure:

To select the right half of the screen, press the <→>cursor key.

(The title of the selected part is displayed in yellow reverse video.)

To change the type of position data, press the <�> page key.

<→> key

<�> key

To select the part to be changed, press the cursor keys (<←> , <→>, <↑> , <↓> ).

To select the type of position data, press the page keys ( <�>, <�> ).

If the subscreen is in the edit status, the origin/preset operation can be performed for position data to bechanged as well as for position data on the main screen.

(2) PROGRAM subscreen

Indicates the current program. The subscreen can be enlarged or reduced. The program cannot be editedon the subscreen.

1:PROGRAM O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 C90. ; N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N4 Y20. ;> N5 X0 ; N6 G40 Y0 ; N7 M30 ; %

(3) TOOL OFFSET subscreen

Indicates tool compensation data. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of tool compensation datacan be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys,cursor keys, and soft keys.


– 277 –

1 With tool compensation memory A

1:TOOL OFFSET001002003

1.234–5.678 0.000

2 With tool compensation memory B

1:TOOL OFFSETNO.001002

GEOMETRY 1.234–10.000

WEAR 5.678–20.000

3 With tool compensation memory C

1:TOOL OFFSET

001002

1.234–10.000

2.345–20.000

(LENGTH) (RADIUS)

3.456–30.000

4.567–40.000

NO. GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR

(4) WORK OFFSET subscreen

Displays the offset from the workpiece reference point. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of datacan be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys,cursor keys, and soft keys.

XY

0.0000.000

XY

–10.000–20.000

Z 0.000 Z 0.000

1:WORK OFFSETNO.00 (COMMON) NO.01 (G55)

XY

1.2345.678

XY

30.000 40.000

Z 0.000 Z 0.000

NO.01 (G54) NO.01 (G56)

(5) MODAL subscreen

Displays continuous–state information. Continuous–state information includes the G, H, D, F, and Scodes. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced.

G01G17

G80G64

G40 G43

1:MODALG90 G54

FS

10.100

D10 H20

(6) DI/DO subscreen

Lists DI/DO signals. When this subscreen is enlarged, more bytes can be displayed on a single screen.

001002

0000001100000000

000 00110011004005

0010100000000000

003 001000001:DI/DO

(7) SERVO ERROR subscreen

Displays servo position errors. This screen cannot be enlarged or reduced.

1:SERVO ERRORXYZ

–5500

C 0


– 278 –

(8) ALARM MESSAGE subscreen

Displays alarm messages. When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a singlescreen. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced horizontally.

PS010 IMPROPER G–CODE1:ALARM MESSAGE

(9) OPERATOR MESSAGE subscreen

Displays operator messages. This subscreen is used only when one of the following options is added:

⋅Custom macro

⋅NC window

⋅External data input/output

When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a single screen. This subscreen cannotbe enlarged nor reduced horizontally.

MC012 ALARM OCCURS1:OPERATOR MESSAGE

10.17.4 Subscreen operations

(1) To display multiple subscreens as shown in the first example in Fig. 10.17, follow the procedure below:

1) Display the TOOL OFFSET screen as the main screen.

2) Following the steps described below, display the current position on subscreen 1:

⋅Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>.

⋅Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key.

⋅Press the <← (yellow) and <↑ (yellow)> soft keys to change the size of the subscreen.

⋅Press the <→ (red)> soft key to move the subscreen to the right.

⋅Press the <SET END> soft key.

⋅Press the <�> page key, <↓> cursor key, and <�> page key in this order to display the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of the current position.

3) Following the steps described below, display the current program on subscreen 2:

⋅Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <2>. (The default for subscreen 2 is TOOL OFFSET. The TOOLOFF SET subscreen is displayed initially.)

⋅Press the <SELECT SCREEN> soft key. The subscreen menu is displayed.

⋅Press the cursor key to move the cursor to ”02: PROGRAM.” Then, press the <SET END> soft key.

⋅Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key.

⋅Press soft keys as many times as necessary to display the subscreen at the desired position with the desired size.

⋅Press the <SET END> soft key.

4) Following the procedures described above, display the offset from the workpiece reference point insubscreen 3 and modal information in subscreen 4.

5) Finally, press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.

(2) To delete subscreen 1, follow the procedure below:

1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>.

2) Press the <DELETE SCREEN> soft key.

(3) To redisplay subscreen 1, follow the procedure below:


2) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.


– 279 –

NOTE When a subscreen is deleted, the displayed data, position, and size of the subscreen arestored. The subscreen is redisplayed as it was before deletion.

(4) To change the value of G56 on the WORK OFFSET subscreen or subscreen 3, follow the procedure below:


2) Press the page keys and cursor keys to move the cursor to a desired position.

3) Enter a value and press the <INPUT> key.

4) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.

(5) To delete all subscreens, do the following:


(6) To redisplay subscreens, do the following:


Setting input

(1) This function can be used with a 14–inch or 10–inch CRT (it cannot be used with a 9–inch CRT).

(2) This function can be used with the M or T system (it cannot be used with the TT system).

(3) When the current program is displayed on the main screen, the program subscreen cannot be displayed.


– 280 –

10.18RS232C Parameter Setting Screen

The user is required to set parameters necessary for data communication via the RS232C, RS422, and remotebuffer interfaces. An improvement enable setting these parameters on one menu.

10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen

Either of the following two methods can be used for menu selection.

(a) Press the SETTING function selection key several times.

(b) Press the SETTING function selection key, then the RS232C chapter selection key.

10.18.2 Details of Screens

(1) 14” CRT Screen

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:00

SELECT–

SELECT+

CHAPTER

SETTING(RS232C) O0000 N00000

TV(COMMENT) = ONIN/OUT CODE = ASCII

F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 RS232C CHANL1 RS232C CHANL3DVC TYPS = 8 DVC TYPS = 8

OUTPUT DVC= 1 STOP BITS= 2 STOP BITS= 2 BAUD RATE= 9600 BAUD RATE= 4800

B.G. INPUT DVC = 2 RS232C CHANL2 RS422

OUTPUT DVC= 2 DVC TYPE = 8 DVC TYPE = 8 STOP BITS= 1 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE= 4800 BAUD RATE=19200

EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH

By “SELECT +”/“SELECT –” key please select OFF/ON

TV CHECK = OFF

↓ Press page key <↑> ⋅<↓> to change the screen.

SELECT–

SELECT+

CHAPTER

SETTING(RMT–BUF) O0000 N00000

RS422 RS232C

STOP BITS = 1 STOP BITS = 1BAUD RATE =86400 BAUD RATE =19200PROTOCOL = A PROTOCOL =EXT_B

5000 CNV REV CDC ETC TCC ECH 422 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 15070 86400

FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATE, HANDY FILE (Remote mode)

DVC TYPE = 1 DVC TYPE = 7

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:50 LSK

NOTE 1 The information related to the RS232C and RS422 channels is displayed only when the reader/punch interface B option has been specified.

NOTE 2 Page 2 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.


– 281 –

(2) 9” CRT Screen


TV CHECK =OFF TV(COMMENT)=ONI/O CODE =ISOEOB CODE =LF/CR/CR PUNCHF.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8 OUT DVC = 1 CHANL1 STOP BITS= 2B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= 9600 OUT DVC = 2 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8

CHANL2 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE=19200

By “SELECT +/–” Key, please selectOFF/ON.

MDI *** RSET **** IMG 13:30:32 ALMSELECT+ SELECT– CHAPTER

↓ Press page key <↑>⋅<↓> to change the screen.


TV CHECK =OFF TV(COMMENT)=ONI/O CODE =ISOEOB CODE =LF PUNCHF.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8 OUT DVC = 1 CHANL3 STOP BITS= 2B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= 4800 OUT DVC = 2 RS422 DVC TYPE = 8

STOP BITS= 2 BAUD RATE=19200

By “SELECT +/–” Key, please selectbaud rate.

MDI *** RSET **** IMG 13:33:08SELECT+ SELECT– CHAPTER

↓ Press page key <↑>⋅<↓> to change the screen.

SETTING(RMT–BUF) O0001 N00000

RS422 RS232CDVC TYPE = 8 DVC TYPE = 7STOP BITS= 1 STOP BITS= 1BAUD RATE=86400 BAUD RATE=19200PROTOCOL = A PROTOCOL =EXT_B

5000 CNV RSV CDC ETX TCC ECH 4220 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

5070 86400

FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATEHANDY FILE (Remote mode)


NOTE 1 Page 2 is displayed only when the reader/punch interface B option has been specified.

NOTE 2 Page 3 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.


– 282 –

(3) Specification method

Move the cursor to the desired item and select the value to be specified using the SELECT+ or SE-LECT key.

NOTE 1 Only the values that fall in the following valid setting range can be selected.

NOTE 2 The parameters can be specified regardless of what the current mode is.

(4) Valid setting range

(a) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV check on or off. (OFF: No TV check is made. ON: A TV check is made.)

(b) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV (comment) on or off. (ON: Characters are counted for a TV check during control out.)

(c) For the input/output code system, ISO, EIA, or ASCII can be selected.

(d) For the EOF code, an LF/CR/CR or LF output can be selected.

(e) For input/output devices, item 1, 2, 3, 10, or 13 can be selected.

Setting Channel used Interface used Connector

1

2

3

10

13

Channel–1

Channel–2

Channel–3

Channel–10

Channel–13

RS232C

RS232C

RS232C

Remote bufferRS232C or RS422

RS422

JD5A of main CPU board

JD5B of main CPU board

JD5J of main CPU board

JD5C or JD6A of option 1 board

(*Select by parameter 500#0)

JD6D of sub board

(f) The following number can be specified for device specification:

1 RS232C or RS422 except for remote buffer:

Number Device Specification

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used)

Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes are not used)

Personal computer (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used)

Personal computer (Control codes are not used)

Tape reader with rewinding function

FANUC PPR, Handy file (local mode)

FANUC cassette (bubble cassette)

FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode)FANUC Program File Mate

2 RS232C or RS422 for Remote Buffer

Number Device Specification

0

7

8

Personal computer

FANUC Cassette (bubble cassette)

FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode)FANUC Program File Mate

*Specification number 7 is used for RS232C only.

(g) Number of stop bits is 1 or 2.

(h) The following value can be selected for baud rate:


– 283 –

1 Other than remote buffer

RS232C RS422

120024004800960019200

120024004800960019200

2 Remote buffer

RS232C RS422

120024004800960019200

120024004800960019200384007680086400

(i) For the remote buffer, protocol B, extended protocol B, or protocol A can be select.

NOTE 1 Extended protocol A is included in protocol A.

NOTE 2 Switching between protocol A and extended protocol A is controlled according to the <SET>parameter.

* See the supplementary descriptions of the remote buffer for details.

(5) Parameters

Setting items Corresponding parameter/ bit no. Setting value

TV check Parameter 0000#0 (TVC) On: (0) Off: (1)

TV (comment) Parameter 0000#1 (CTV) On: (0) Off: (1)

Input/Output code Parameter 0000#2 (ISP)Parameter 0000#4 (EIA)

EIA : #4 =1ISO : #4/#2 =0,0ASCII : #4/#2 =0,1

EOB code Parameter 0000#3 (NCR) LF/CR/CR punch (0)LF punch (1)

Input device Parameter 0020 for forgroundParameter 0022 for background

* * * *1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16

Output device Parameter 0021 for forgroundParameter 0023 for background * : Set on parameter screen

Device specification Parameter no. 5110, 5120, 5130, 5140,5150, 5160

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Stop bits Parameter no. 5111, 5121, 5131, 5141,5151, 5161

1, 2

Baud rate Parameter no. 5112, 5122, 5132, 5142,5152, 5162

1, 12

Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.


– 284 –

Setting items Setting valueCorresponding parameter/ bit no.

R

Devicespecification

RS422 : Parameter no.5071RS232C : Parameter no.5081

RS422 : 0, 8RS232C : 0, 7, 8

Re

Stop bits RS422 : Parameter no.5072RS232C : Parameter no.5082

1, 2

emote

buf

Baud rate RS422 : Parameter no.5073RS232C : Parameter no.5083

RS422 : 1, 15

Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.

RS232C : 1, 12

Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.ffer

Protocol RS422 : Parameter no.5074RS232C : Parameter no.5084

B : (1)Extended B : (2)A : (3)*1*1 Extended protocol is also in-cluded.Set HDLC (5) on parameterscreen.

10.18.3 Notes

(1) The device specification, stop bit, and baud rate parameters for RS232 channels 1 to 3 are determinedaccording to parameter Nos. 5001 to 5003, and those for the RS422, according to parameter No.5013.

If a value other than 1 to 6 is specified for parameter No.5001, 5002, 5003, or 5013, the device specifica-tion, stop bit, and baud rate corresponding to the parameter is blanked. If the cursor is placed at the blank,the following message corresponding to each channel appears in the simplified help message frame belowthe menu.

Channel 1:

Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5001.

Channel 2:


Channel 3:


RS422:


1) 14” CRT

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 23:57:40

SELECT–

SELECT+

CHAPTER


TV(COMMENT) = ONIN/OUT CODE = ASCII

F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 RS232C CHANL1 RS232C CHANL3DVC TYPE = DVC TYPE =

OUTPUT DVC= 1 STOP BITE= STOP BITE= BAUD RATE= BAUD RATE=

B.G. INPUT DVC = 2 RS232C CHANL2 RS422

OUTPUT DVC= 2 DVC TYPE = DVC TYPE = STOP BITE= STOP BITE= BAUD RATE= BAUD RATE=

EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH

Please set the parameter 500 2 to 1–6

TV CHECK = OFF


– 285 –

2) 9” CRT


TV CHECK =OFF TV(COMMENT)=ONI/O CODE =ISOEOB CODE =LF/CR/CR PUNCHF.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = OUT DVC = 1 CHANL3 STOP BITS=B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= OUT DVC = 2 RS422 DVC TYPE =

STOP BITS= BAUD RATE=

Please set the parameter 5013 to 1–6.


(2) If protocol A is selected for the remote buffer, or if the protocol is switched from A to B or extended B, thepower must be switched off and on again.

Similarly, if the stop bit or baud rate for the RS232C or RS422 for the remote buffer, or parameter No.5070is changed with protocol A selected, the change becomes effective only after the power is switched off andon again.

10.18.4 Help Message

When the cursor is placed at a menu item, the corresponding help message appears below the menu, asshown below.

Example TV check: Select “off” or “on” using the SELECT+ or SELECT- soft key.


– 286 –

10.19Screen for Specifying High–Speed and High–Precision Machining

The parameters for high–speed and high–precision machining can be specified on this screen. Since data isentered in the parameter fields according to the units of measurement displayed on the screen, it is unneces-sary to specify the units used for each parameter.

These parameters can be easily specified using the automatic setting function and automatic tuning function.

10.19.1 Screen configuration

The screen for specifying high–speed and high–precision machining is accessed by pressing the <SERVICE>function key.

One way to display this screen is to press the <SERVICE> soft key several times. Otherwise, press the <SER-VICE> soft key followed by the <CHAPTER> soft key to display soft keys for each <SERVICE> screen, thenpress the <HPCC> soft key.

This screen consists of two pages: Tuning and setting

The parameters required to use high–speed and high–precision machining are displayed on the settingscreen.

The parameters for machining precision are displayed on the tuning screen. Data can be specified in theseparameters for each type of machining on this screen.

To display the operation soft keys, press the < ∆ > key to the right of the soft keys.

The above operations can also be used to display other screens.

The first page is used for tuning. HPCC (TUNING) is displayed on the top left of the tuning screen.

The second page is used for setting. To display the setting screen, press the <SETTING> operation soft keyon the tuning screen.

The parameters for high–precision contour control and RISC can be set on the tuning and setting screens.When the high–precision contour control and RISC options are not provided, asterisks (*) are displayed in theentry fields for these parameters. When the RISC option is supported by software but the RISC board is notinstalled, asterisks are also displayed in the entry fields to indicate the option is unavailable.

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

AUTOTUNE

SLCTACTIVE

INPUT CHAPTER

HPPCSET

HPCCTUNE

AUX

HPCC(TUNING) O0001 N00000

FINE LEVELACC/DEC LEVEL(–5..0..5)MAX FEED (MM/MIN)T–CONST FOR BIPL (MSEC)T–CONST FOR AIPL (MSEC)CORNER FEED (MM/MIN)CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC)

(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)RADIUS (MM)MAX FEED (MM/MIN)MIN FEED (MM/MIN)

FINE

1 0 4000 150 24 600****** (1)

10.000 3460 100

FEED FOWARD (%) 97.65

MEDIUM

6 0 4000 100 40 1000******

10.000 4000 100

95.65

ROUGH

20 0 4000 100 40 1200******

10.000 3460 100

94.00

� ��

�� !�� !� ��


– 287 –

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

AUTOTUNE

SLCTACTIVE

INPUT CHAPTER

HPPCSET

HPCCTUNE

AUX




FINE

1 0 4000 150 24 600****** (1)

10.000 3460 100

FEED FOWARD (%) 97.65

MEDIUM

6 0 4000 100 40 1000******

10.000 4000 100

95.65

ROUGH

20 0 4000 100 40 1200******

10.000 3460 100

94.00

AIPL IS MIN DATAFEEDFOWARD IS MAX DATA

��

��++�!�� .#'�(.� �#+)%�/�� ('� ,"�� ,-'#'!� +�*��'�

��*�&�,�*� !-#��'�� #+)%�/�� ('� ,"�� ,-'#'!� +�*��'��/� )*�++#'!� ,"�� $�/�

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

AUTOTUNE

SLCTACTIVE

INPUT CHAPTER

HPPCSET

HPCCTUNE

AUX




FINE

1520 1521 1520 1523 1522 1524******

1526 1527 1528

FEED FOWARD (%) 1529

MEDIUM

1540 1541 1540 1543 1542 1544******

1546 1547 1548

1549

ROUGH

1560 1561 1560 1563 1562 1564******

1566 1567 1568

1569

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

ON/OFFINPUT CHAPTER

HPPCSET

HPCCTUNE

AUTOSET

HPCC(SETTING) O0001 N00000

HPCC MODEG05.1 MODE AUTO ON/OFFOVERRIDE BY Z–AXIS DOWN(ZAG)IGNORE FEED AT PROGRAMFEED FOWARD

MAX FEED(HPCC)

OVERRIDE AT AREA2(ZAG)OVERRIDE AT AREA3(ZAG)OVERRIDE AT AREA4(ZAG)

ON OFF ON OFF ON

3000 (MM/MIN)

90 (%) 80 (%) 70 (%)

HPCC FUNCTION AVAILABLE OR NOT

��,,#'!� +�*��'� � (*� �� #'�"� ��

�� "�� #'�"� �� #+)%�/� �(�+� '(,� �(',�#'� +#&)%�� "�%)� &�++�!�+� �,�� ,"�� (,,(&� ( � ,"�� +�,,#'!� +�*��'�


– 288 –

10.19.2 Setting screen

The HPCC (SETTING) screen is called the setting screen.

The parameters required to use high–speed and high–precision machining can be set on the setting screen.

Some parameters cannot be set on this screen. These parameters do not usually need to be changed andare therefore specified by pressing the <AUTO SET> key.

(1) Operation

To move the cursor, press the cursor keys on the CNC operator’s panel.

To enable or disable parameters, move the cursor to the corresponding field where ENABLED/DISABLEDis displayed and press the <ON/OFF> soft key.

Whenever the <ON/OFF> soft key is pressed, the parameter is toggled between the enabled and disabledstates.

(2) Automatic Setting

To perform automatic setting, press the <AUTO SET> key, then press the <EXEC> key.

To set the parameters required for high–speed and high–precision machining, be sure to perform automat-ic setting once before machining.

During automatic setting, the following parameters are set. For details of the functions of the parametersbelow.

Parameter No. Setting Function Remarks

0000#5

1009#0

1601#0

7559#1

7565#0

7565#4

7567

7591

7592

7593

1808#3

1811#2

1883#1

1884#4

1962

1518

1

1

1

1

1

1

Same setting asparameter 1422

90

80

70

1

1

1

1

50

9400

Disables high–speed pulse distribution.

Specifies axis control by RISC.

Enables acceleration clamp during circular interpolation.

Enables deceleration at corners

Enables high–precision contour control.

Enables feedrate override according to the Z–axis descent angle.

Maximum feedrate under high–precision contour control.

Override in area 2 (ZAG)



PI control

Enables advance feed–forward.

Enables feed–forward.

Enables high speed reading of feedrate feedback.

Feed–forward feedrate factor (50%)

Lower limit of feed–forward for automatic calculation(94%)

A

B

B

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

C

The parameters corresponding to A in the remark fields are set only after the high–precision contour controlor RISC option has been specified.

The parameters corresponding to B in the remark fields are set only after the RISC option has been specified.

After the parameter corresponding to C in the remark field is changed, the power must be turned off then onagain. Otherwise, an alarm occurs.

The automatic setting function transfers the above settings to the relevant parameters. If the automatic settingfunction is performed after data is specified for parameters, the settings specified by the function are overwrittenby these settings.

The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.


– 289 –

10.19.3 Tuning screen

The HPCC (TUNING) screen is called the tuning screen.

(1) Operation

On the 14–inch CRT three sets of parameters corresponding to three machining types are displayed ona single screen. On the 9–inch CRT, these parameters are displayed separately for each machining type.

In this case, change the current machining type (finishing (FINE), semifinishing (MEDIUM), and roughing(ROUGH)) with the <PAGE> key.

(2) Transferring Parameters

The three types of parameters for finishing, semifinishing, and roughing are displayed on the tuningscreen.

When one of these parameter sets is selected, these settings are automatically used for the correspondingmachining.

The parameter settings vary according to the type of machining.

Of the three sets of parameters, the parameters of the currently enabled machining type are called activeparameters.

The title of the machining type (FINE, MEDIUM, or ROUGH) of the active parameters is displayed in re-verse video.

The settings of active parameters are transferred to the parameters which the CNC actually processes dur-ing machining. These parameters are called execution parameters.

When active parameters are input, the parameters modified on the setting screen and the execution pa-rameters are rewritten. For instance, the difference in feedrate at corners is specified in parameter 1478.This valve is also specified in parameter 1524 for FINE, parameter 1544 for MEDIUM, or parameter 1564for ROUGH. When parameters for FINE are active and the difference in feedrate at corners for FINE isinput, the value is specified in parameter 1524 and parameter 1478. When the difference in feedrate atcorners for MEDIUM or ROUGH is input, the value is only specified in parameter 1544 or 1564, becausethe parameters for MEDIUM and ROUGH are inactive.

Parameter 1524

Parameter 1544

Parameter 1564

FINE

MEDIUM

ROUGH

Execution parameter

Parameter 1478

� ��

� ��

Fig. 10.19.3 When the Difference in Feedrate at Corners Is Input in Each Mode (FINE Parameters are Active)

(3) [INPUT]

When parameters for each axis, including the parameter for the time constant after interpolation, are seton the screen, these values are converted so that they conform to the units of measurement for each axis,then they are input for each axis.

To set parameters separately for each axis, enter data in parameters on the parameter screen.

Press the <AUX> key to display parameter numbers. It is possible to change the screen page accordingto the displayed parameter number for the necessary parameter setting.

(4) [AUX]

When the <AUX> key is pressed, parameter numbers are displayed. To cancel this state, press the <AUX>key again. The previous screen is redisplayed.

When the automatic tuning function is used, a window may be opened to display a message for a calculationresult. While the window is open, all operations are disabled. Press the <AUX> key to close the window.

Changing the screen clears parameter numbers and closes any open message window.


– 290 –

(5) [AUTO TUNE]

When the <AUTO TUNE] key is pressed, parameters for a certain level of cutting (FINE LEVEL) can beautomatically calculated and set.

To make automatic adjustments, press the <AUTO TUNE> key then press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or<ROUGH> soft key.

Before automatic tuning, the following values must be specified in each mode.

FINE LEVEL

Maximum feedrate (Same setting regardless of the mode)

Time constant before interpolation

Loop gain for the servo (parameter 1825) (Same setting regardless of the mode)

All values except for the servo loop gain can be specified on the tuning screen. When the above parame-ters are not set, a message window is opened to indicate that calculation is not impossible.

Messages concerning the results of automatic calculation may also be displayed.

Press the <AUX> key to close the window.

The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.

CAUTION The automatic tuning function is only used to set standard values. Actual error is a slightlydifferent from the error calculated during setting due to servo system delay.

(6) FINE LEVEL

FINE LEVEL refers to the degree of finishing. The degree of finishing has no unit of measurement. WhenFINE LEVEL is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 10 microns. When FINE LEVELis specified as 10, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 100 microns.

(7) SLCT ACTIVE

To select active parameters, press the <SLCT ACTIVE> key and press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or<ROUGH> soft keys. The title of the selected mode is displayed in reverse video. The settings of all theparameters recorded in each mode are transferred to the execution parameters.

(8) Specifying Values in Parameters for Each axis

To specify values in parameters separately for each axis, press the <AUX> key to display parameter num-bers. Enter data in parameters on the parameter screen.

When different values are specified in parameters for each axis, asterisks (*) are displayed in the corre-sponding fields on the setting screen.

To transfer the values entered in active parameters to the execution parameters, specify the active param-eters as active although they are already active.

Active parameters need not be selected to only rewrite the settings of execution parameters. When thesettings of the execution parameters are rewritten in this way, the display of the settings on the settingscreen remains unchanged.

(9) Increment System Conversion

When setting parameters, one must be aware of the increment system being used. However, on the high–precision contour control (HPCC) screen, data is always specified in parameters using the increment sys-tem. For example, to specify a maximum speed of 4000 mm/min, 400 is specified when the incrementsystem is 0.001 mm (IS–B) and 4000 is specified when the increment system is 0.0001 mm (IS–C). How-ever, on the HPCC screen, 4000 is entered.

(10)Correspondence to Execution Parameters

The following table shows the correspondence between the parameter numbers for each mode on the tun-ing screen and the numbers of execution parameters. When active parameters are selected or entered,the contents of the active parameters are transferred to the execution parameters with the following num-bers. The execution parameters are the conventional parameters for each function.


– 291 –

FINE MEDIUM ROUGH Execution parameter No.

FINE LEVEL

ACC/DEC LEVEL

MAX FEED

T–CONST FOR BIPL

T–CONST FOR AIPL

CORNER FEED

CLAMP BY ACC(*4)

(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)

RADIUS

MAX FEED

MIN FEED

FEED FORWARD

1520

1521

1630

1523

1522

1524

1525

1526

1527

1528

1529

1540

1541

1640

1543

1542

1544

1545

1546

1547

1548

1549

1560

1561

1660

1563

1562

1564

1565

1566

1567

1568

1569

None

None

1630

1631

1635(*1)

1482(*2)

1622(*3)

1478

1643

1492

1490

1491

1985

*1 When feed–forward is enabled

*2 When feed–forward is disabled and HPCC is enabled

*3 When feed–forward and HPCC are disabled

*4 Displayed only when the high–precision contour control and RISC options are provided

(11)Settings on the Adjustment Screen

[FINE LEVEL] Enter the level of finishing.When the finishing level is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision

of approx. 10 microns.Valid data range: 1 to 100 (approx. 10 microns to 1 mm)

[ACC/DEC LEVEL] Specify the degree of acceleration/deceleration that corresponds to the following levels.The current acceleration can be changed according to the following ratio.

Level –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Coefficient 2.00 1.67 1.43 1.25 1.11 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50

[MAX FEED] This parameter determines the rate of the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.The acceleration/deceleration before interpolation depends on this parameter and the time constant.Acceleration is calculated by dividing [MAX FEED] by [T–CONST FOR BIPL].Because of this, it is not necessary to specify the maximum feedrate in this parameter.This parameter is common to all three machining modes.

[T–CONST FOR BIPL] This parameter determines the rate the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.The parameter specifies the time that elapses until [MAX FEED] is obtained. [MAX FEED] is common to the three machining modes (FINE, MEDIUM, and ROUGH). The degrees of acceleration in each mode can be checked with the settingof the [T–CONST FOR BIPL] parameter.

[CORNER FEED] When the difference in the feedrate between two blocks is greater than the feedratespecified in this parameter, the tool decelerates to this feedrate.The smaller the setting of this parameter, the higher the precision. Although this reduces potential damage to the machine, more time is required for machining.

[CLAMP BY ACC] This parameter is enabled only when the high–precision contour control and RISC options are provided. When an acceleration greater than the acceleration specifiedin this parameter is applied to blocks, the tool decelerates to the specified accelerationor slower.The greater the setting of the parameter, the smaller the allowable acceleration.


– 292 –

This enables high precision machining and reduces potential damage to the machine.This parameter has a default value of the same acceleration as for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation during automatic tuning.

[RADIUS] This parameter is used to clamp the feedrate according to the radius of an arc. The acceleration is calculated with [MAX FEED] according to the radius specified inthe parameter.

[MAX FEED] Specify the maximum allowable feedrate for the radius specified in the above parameter.The default value of the maximum feedrate is calculated during automatic tuning sothat the same acceleration as that for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isapplied to the tool.

[MIN FEED] Specify the minimum feedrate at which the feedrate is clamped.

[FEED FORWARD] Specify a feed–forward factor.Do not change this parameter in a state other than the emergency stop state.

The following shows notes on using the setting screen:

CAUTION 1 Specifying a feed–forward factor on the tuning screenThe feed–forward factor is transferred to the servo only when the power is turned on or whenthe system enters the emergency stop state. Be sure to specify the feed–forward factor inthe emergency stop state. Active parameters can be selected only in the emergency stopstate.

CAUTION 2 When the deceleration ratio for the rotation axis is too highAn overflow occurs in the servo software during calculation for feed–forward. An alarm mayalso occur for the rotation axis immediately after automatic tuning, indicating an incorrectdigital parameter. In this case, set the bit of the following parameter to 1 for the axis.

For the description of the parameter, refer to the servo maintenance manual.

CAUTION 3 When the machine vibrates after automatic settingWhen the machine is operated after automatic setting, it may vibrates along an axis. In thiscase, set the bit of the following parameter to 0. When this bit is 1, it is possible that themachine may vibrate.

Parameter number 1804 Bit number 4

Parameter number 1884 Bit number 4

NOTE 1 Conditions for enabling data to be entered on the setting screen

Data can be entered on the setting screen when the following conditions are met:

When bit 0 (PWE) of parameter 8000 = 1:

1. In the MDI mode: Data can be entered with keys.

2. In the emergency stop state

NOTE 2 This screen can be erased by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 15#2 to 1.

NOTE 3 If a lower limit for the feed–forward factor for automatic adjustment (parameter No. 1518) hasbeen set, this lower limit is always used for the feed–forward factor when a higher finish levelthan a predetermined level is specified. In this case, the time constant after interpolation andother items that are calculated from the feed–forward factor are all the same value for differentcases. As a result, the same result may be calculated automatically for different finish levels.If such a problem occurs, set parameter No. 1518 to 0, then retry automatic adjustment.


– 293 –

10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen

The following is a flowchart showing an example of how to use the tuning screen.

This flowchart starts in a state in which nothing is specified and ends in a state in which high–precision contourcontrol is enabled.

In this example the parameters for FINE are specified as active.

��1� 1'(0� 1(+$�� .-4$/�-%%� * /+� + 6� -""2/��

�(1*$� �� 1'$/� 1(1*$

�/$00� 1'$��0-%1�)$6� 0$3$/ *� 1(+$0� 1-�#(0.* 6� 1'$��0"/$$,�

�'$� �� 0"/$$,� (0� #(0.* 6$#�

�/$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6�1'$,� ./$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6�

�/$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6� 1-� /$#(0.* 6� 1'$� �� 0"/$$,�

�$1� 1'$� %-**-4(,&� . / +$1$/0� %-/� ��.$"(%6� �� (,� 1'$� �� %($*#�� '(0� 0$11(,&� (,#(" 1$0� 1'$� '(&'$01*$3$*� -%� %(,(0'(,&��.$"(%6� 1'$� + 5(+2+� %$$#/ 1$� (,� 1'$� �� %($*#��.$"(%6� 1'$� 1(+$� "-,01 ,1� (,� 1'$� �� %($*#�

�'$")� 4'$1'$/� 1'$� 1(1*$� �� -/� ,6� -1'$/� 1(1*$�� (0�!$(,&� #(0.* 6$#� (,� /$3$/0$� 3(#$-�

�(&'�./$"(0(-,� "-,1-2/� "-,1/-*� (0�$, !*$#�

�/$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6 ,#� ./$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6�

�/$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6� ,#� ./$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6�

�� +$00 &$� (,#(" 1(,&� 1' 1� " *"2* 1(-,�(0� ,-1� .-00(!*$� (0� #(0.* 6$#�

�$1� ,$"$00 /6� . / +$1$/0 & (,�

�/$00� 1'$� )$6� � � � � �� 1-� #(0.* 6� 1'$� -.$/ 1(-,� 0-%1� )$60�� 1'$,� ./$00� 1'$� �� 0-%1� )$6�∆

10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations

The high–speed & high–precision machining (adjustment) screen has been enhanced by the addition of a newentry method that supports the specification of accelerations in addition to conventional parameter entry. Spec-ifying accelerations enables the automatic calculation of the following parameters.

Specified acceleration Automatically calculated parameter

Acceleration/deceleration before interpola-tion

Time constant before interpolation (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563)

Clamp acceleration Acceleration clamp (Nos. 1525, 1545, and 1565)

Acceleration Maximum speed (Nos. 1527, 1547, and 1567)


– 294 –

Operating procedure

1 Press the function menu key so that the function selection soft key display appears.

2 Press the [SERVICE] key several times until the high–speed & high–precision machining screen appears.Alternatively, press the [CHAPTER] key so that the chapter selection soft key display appears, then pressthe [HPCC] key.

3 If the [ACC INPUT] key is displayed, press it to select acceleration input mode. If the [PARAM INPUT] keyis displayed, acceleration input mode has already been selected.When the input mode is switched from parameter input to acceleration input, some items will be changedfor acceleration input.

NOTE 1 To select acceleration input mode (or parameter input mode), the following conditions must besatisfied.

Bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8000 = 1, and

1. The current mode is MDI, and key entries are acceptable, or

2. The current state is emergency stop.

NOTE 2 When accelerations are specified, each parameter is calculated automatically according to thefollowing expression:

Time constant before interpolation : Parameter 2 for specifying acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563)

Maximum speed : Parameter 1 for specifying acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (No. 1630). If 0 is specified, the maximum cuttingfeedrate (No. 1422) for the reference axis is used.

Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation : Acceleration/deceleration applied before interpolation

Acceleration clamp : Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration used to determinea speed by acceleration, for high–speed contour control (Nos. 1525,1545, and 1565)

Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate: Maximum cutting feedrate along the reference axis (No. 1422)

Clamp acceleration : Acceleration applied in acceleration clamping

Maximum speed : Upper speed limit applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1527,1547, and 1567)

Radius : Arc radius applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1526, 1546,and 1566). If 0 is specified, the radius is assumed to be 5 [mm] (formillimeter machines) or 1 [inch] (for inch machines).

Acceleration : Acceleration applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius

Time constant before interpolation [msec]

Maximum speed [mm/min] � 1/60 [min/sec]

Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [mm/sec/sec] � 1/1000 [sec/msec]=

Acceleration clamp [msec]Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate [mm/min] � 1/60 [min/sec]

Clamp acceleration [mm/sec/sec] � 1/1000 [sec/msec]=

Maximum speed [msec] 60 � SQRT (Radius [mm] �� Acceleration [mm/sec/sec/] )=


– 295 –

10.20M Code Group Function

This function enables the display of M codes that are currently being executed, or those which have beenexecuted, by classifying them into several functional groups. The group number (up to 127 groups can be set)and function name of each M code can be specified from the M code group setting screen or by using a pro-gram. The user can thereby check, on the screen, the M functions executed on the machine.

For the program restart M/S/T/B code output function, the last M code can be output for each M code group.

This function can also be used to check whether the combination of multiple (up to five) M codes specified ina block is correct.

10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already BeenExecuted

Display the screen for displaying M codes currently being executed or which have already been executed (M-CODE DISPLAY screen), as follows:

(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.

(2) Press the [PRG _CHK] soft key.

(3) If the M-CODE DISPLAY screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the followingoperations:

a. Press the [PRG_CHK] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears.

b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-DISP] softkey.

[9” CRT Screen]

M–CODE DISPLAY O0111 N00001

MCG M–CODE NAME001 03 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD002 10 11 12 13 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO003 20 21 VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV004 30 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE005 40 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO010 100 101 102 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ011 110 111 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH012 120 QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ013 130 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA014 140 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK

>MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CHAPTER+

Underlined M codes: Already executed

Highlighted M code: Currently being executed

The MCG field displays the M code groups (1 to 127) that have been registered with the M-CODE GROUPSETTING screen. To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. M code groups that havenot been registered are not displayed.


– 296 –

The M-CODE field displays the five most recent M codes for each M code group, with the latest on the right.An M code which is currently being executed in the current block is highlighted. M codes which have al-ready been executed are displayed in green or by varying the intensity, according to whether a color ormonochrome CRT is being used, respectively.

The five M codes, however, can be displayed only when they are of two-digit format. If M codes using threeor more digits are included, as many of the five M codes as will fit on a line are displayed.

The NAME field displays the name of the last-specified M code for each group.

[14” CRT Screen]

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CHAPTER


MCG

001

002003004005

010011

013

014

020021022023

012

024

M–CODE

03

20 21 22 233040

100 101 102110 111

130

140

200 201 202210 211220230

120

240

NAME

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK

VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG

MCG

030

031032033034

M–CODE

300 301 302

310 311320330340

NAME

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIISSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

>

10 11 12



10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart

On the program restart screen, M codes, found during the search for the program restart position, as well asthose output with MDI or overstore, can be displayed for each M code group. The last M code can also be outputfor each M code group.

(1) Displaying M codes for each M code group after restarting the program

The program restart function supports the display of M codes for each M code group, as follows:

(a) Using the program restart function, search for the program restart position and display the program restartscreen.

[9” CRT Screen]

PROGRAM RESTART O0111 N00200

(DESTINATION) BC: 00000000X 200.000 M 03 10 11 12 13Y 0.000 20 21 30 40 100Z 500.000 101 102 110 111

120 130 140 **** ** ** ** **

(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **X 1000.000 ** ** ** ** **Y 0.000 ** ** ** ** **Z 2000.000 T 101 102

S 200B **

ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)

MEM*** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT MCG–DSP CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER


– 297 –

[14” CRT Screen]

MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

MCGDISP

INPUT CHAPTER

OVERSTORE

CLEAR

PROGRAM RESTART O1111 N00001

(DESTINATION)

X 200.000

>

Y 0.000Z 500.000BC: 00000000M 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30

40 100 101 102 110 111 120130 140 ** ** ** ** ** **** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

T 101 102S 200B **

(DIST TO GO)

X 1000.000Y 0.000Z 2000.000

(ACTUAL SPEED)

F 0(MM/MIN)

S 0(RPM)

(b) Press the [MCG-DSP] soft key to display the M codes, found during the search, for each M code group.Note that these M codes are not displayed on the M-CODE DISPLAY screen described.

[9” CRT Screen]

M–CODE DISP IN P.RESTART O0111 N00200

MCG M–CODE BC: 00000000001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100003 20 21 101 102 110 111004 30 120 130 140 **005 40 ** ** ** ** **010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **012 120013 130 T 101 102014 140 S 200

B **ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)

MEM*** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER


– 298 –

To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. The [OVERSTORE] soft key can be used tooutput M, S, T, and B codes.

[14” CRT Screen]

MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

PRGRAMRESTRT

INPUT CHAPTER

OVERSTORE

CLEAR

M–CODE DISPLAY IN P.RESTART O1111 N00001

>

BC: 00000000M 103 110 111 120 130 140

200 201 202 203 210 211220 230 240 300 301 302303 310 311 320 330 340

T 101 102S 200B **

(ACTUAL SPEED)

F 0(MM/MIN)

S 0(RPM)

MCG M–CODE001 03002 10 11 12 13 14

004 30005 40010 100 101 102 103011 110 111012 120013 130014 140

MCG M–CODE020 200 201 202 203021 210 211022 220023 230024 240030 300 301 302 303031 310 311032 320033 330

003 20 21

034 340

NOTE Pressing the [MCG-DSP] soft key displays the above screen, regardless of the number of axesunder the control of the CNC.

(c) When M codes have been output to the PMC with MDI or overstore, after the search for the program restartposition, the M code which is currently being executed is highlighted and those M codes that have alreadybeen executed are displayed in green or in a different intensity, according to whether a color or mono-chrome CRT is being used, respectively.For example, when M13 and M14 have been output after search for the program restart position and M14is being executed, the screen will appear as follows:

[9” CRT Screen]


MCG M–CODE BC: 00000000001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100003 20 21 101 102 110 111004 30 120 130 140 **005 40 ** ** ** ** **010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **012 120013 130 T 101 102014 140 S 200


MEM*** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER+




– 299 –

At this time, the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears as follows:


MCG M–CODE NAME001002 13 14 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO003004005010011012013014

MEM*** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKCHAPTER+



(d) Pressing the [P. RSTRT] soft key returns to the program restart screen (a).

(2) Output of the last M code

Bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 can be used to select whether the last M code is output for each Mcode group or not, when automatically output the last M code by means of the program restart M/S/T/Bcode output function.

1) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 0, only the last M code found during the search is output.

Example When the last M code is M140, the screen will appear as follows:


MCG M–CODE BC: 00000000001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100003 20 21 101 102 110 111004 30 120 130 140 **005 40 ** ** ** ** **010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **012 120014 140 140 S 200



2) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 1, the last M code for each M code group found duringthe search is output.

Example When the last M code for each group is M03, M14, M21, M30, M40, M102, M111, M120,M130, and M140 and the last M code (M40) of group 005 is being executed, the screen willappear as follows:


– 300 –


MCG M–CODE BC: 00000000001 03 03 M 03 10 11 12 13002 11 12 13 14 14 20 21 30 40 100003 20 21 21 101 102 110 111004 30 30 120 130 140 **005 40 40 ** ** ** ** **010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **012 120013 130 T 101 102014 140 S 200



CAUTION The last M code data for a group is lost, thus cannot be output, if five or more M codes ofa group have already been output with MDI or overstore.

10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function

The check, described below, can be performed for multiple M codes specified in a single block. Bit 3 (MGCK)of parameter No.7710 is used to select whether the check is performed.

(1) Check for M codes which must be specified alone

An alarm occurs if an M code, which must be specified alone, is specified with another M code in a singleblock.

(2) Check for M codes of the same group

An alarm occurs if M codes of the same group are specified in a single block.

Group numbers from 0 to 127 can be set. Group numbers 0 and 1, however, both have special meaning.A 0 indicates M codes for which no check is required, while 1 indicates M codes which must be specifiedalone.

10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes

(1) M-code Group Setting Screen

Display the M-CODE SETTING screen as follows:

(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.

(2) Press the [SERVICE] soft key.

(3) If the M-CODE SETTING screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the follow-ing operations:

a. Press the [SERVICE] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE SETTING screen appears.

b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-CODE]soft key.


– 301 –

[9” CRT SCREEN]

M–CODE GROUP SETTING O0111 N00001

CODE GROUP NAME0000 0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA0001 1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB0002 1 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC0003 1 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD0004 1 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE0005 1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0006 1 GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG0007 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH0008 1 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII0009 1 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ

>MEM*** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT PUNCH INP_NO +

The M code group number (GROUP) for each M code (CODE) can be set on this screen. The M codename (NAME) set by a program can also be checked for each M code on this screen. The aboveshows an example where M codes are represented using four digits. M codes can be representedusing up to eight digits, depending on the corresponding parameter setting.

M code groups can be set for M00 to M99, and up to 400 additional M codes, numbered starting fromM100, can be specified by the user (see Parameter Manual for an explanation of how to add M codes).

To set the M code group number for an M code, use the cursor keys or the [INP_NO] soft key to movethe cursor to the M code, then enter the group number. M code group numbers can be entered consec-utively by separating them with a semicolon (;) . M code groups can be numbered from 1 to 127. When0 is entered, the M code is not registered in an M code group. To display another sets of Mcodes, press a page key.

Only 0 can be set for those M codes which call a subprogram, such as M98 and M99. Data can beentered only when the PWE bit of parameter No.8000 is set to 1. This setting is made from the settingscreen.

A function name of up to 20 characters can be specified uniquely for each M code in the M code name(NAME) field. M code names, however, cannot be entered directly on the M-CODE GROUP SETTINGscreen. See Item, “Input/output of M code group numbers and M code names” for an explanation ofhow to set M code names.

[14” CRT SCREEN]

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUTNUMBER

PUNCHINPUT CHAPTER

M–CODE GROUP SETTING O0111 N00001

CODE

0000000100020003000400050006

000800090010001100120013

0007

0014

NAME

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

>

GRP

111111

112222

1

2

CODE

0015001600170018001900200021

002300240025002600270028

0022

0029

NAME

PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

GRP

2222233

333333

3

3

0

(2) Input/ output of M code group numbers and M code names

M code group numbers and M code names can be set by executing a program. The numbers and namescan be output to external devices.

2 pcs (One pair)


– 302 –

(a) Setting by G10

G10 L40 Pn Rg ( · · · · · · ) ;

Pn : Specify an M code in n.Rg : Specify an M code group number in g.

( · · · ) : Specify an M code name in parentheses.

Alphanumerics and special characters can be directly specified. When using Japnese characters, provided Japanese character input is enabled (bit 3(JPN)of parameter No.2205 is set to 1), specify the internal code for each character (four hexadecimal digits for Kanji and Hiragana characters, or two hexadecimaldigits for Katakana characters) prefixed and suffixed with @. The character @,therefore, cannot be used in an M code name.Up to 20 characters, excluding @, can be specified in parentheses. The two hexadecimal digits of an internal code are regarded as being one character. Upto ten @s (five pairs) can be specified.

NOTE M code names are not displayed on the program/program check screen even when blocks forspecifying M code names are executed.

Example When the following program is executed, M code group 1 and M code name “SPINDLE” areset for M03:

G10 L40 P03 R1 (SPINDLE@84647B5F@) ;

The number of characters in parentheses is as follows:

SPINDLE 7 characters @8464 ( ) 2 characters7B5F ( ) 2 characters@

(b) Output to external devices

M code group numbers and M code names can be output, via the RS 232C interface, to external de-vices such as a Floppy Cassette by pressing the [PUNCH] soft key on the M code group settingscreen.

Data is output in G10 format (described in (1) ), without a program number, with file name “M CODEGROUP.”

NOTE The options for the reader/punch interface and programmable data input (G10) mustbespecified.

(3) Notes

(a) Part program length reduces by 45 meters when this option is combined.


– 303 –

10.21Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function

This function can set the workpiece zero point offset value on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen so that thecurrent workpiece position becomes the new workpiece zero point or coincides with a specified position.

10.21.1 Screen Selection

(1) Display the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen according to the following procedure.

1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.

2) Press the OFFSET soft key.

3) If the workpiece zero point offset screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either ofthe following two steps.

a. Press the OFFSET soft key repeatedly until the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen appears.

b. Press the CHAPTER soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys, then press the WORKZERO soft key.

(2) The following data is newly displayed as shown in the example below.

1) Currently selected workpiece coordinate system G code on the second line from the top

2) Current machine coordinates in the lower right section

� 9” CRT Screen (when no. of controlled axes is 5)

WORK ZERO OFFSET O0000 N00000CURRENT G54NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000

NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE)X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000

>MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +

– Operation Selection key

INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL�INP INP�NO �

PUNCH CHG�DSP CURRENT �

– Guide key

EXEC (VALUE)

EXEC


– 304 –

� 14” CRT Screen (when the no. of controlled axes is 7)

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUTNEMBER

TL INPMEASURE

+INPUTINPUT CHAPTER

CURRNTPOS

PUNCH


CURRENT G54.1 P02

NO.00 (COMMON) NO.02 (G55) NO.04 (G57) NO.06 (G59)X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

NO.01 (G54) NO.03 (G56) NO.05 (G58) (MACHINE)

Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

>

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000

– Operation selection key

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

�

– Guide key

��

10.21.2 Operation method

(1) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position (machine coordinates) become the workpiececoordinate system origin:

Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen.

��

��

� � � � � � � � � �

(2) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position coincide with a certain point (δ) in the work-piece coordinate system:

Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis in the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen.

��

� � � � � � � � � �

3 Input the coordinate value δ from the MDI panel.

��

� � � � � � � � � �

NOTE 1 The CURRENT soft key becomes effective when parameter WZMS (bit 3 of parameter No.1200) is 1.

NOTE 2 When the cursor is at workpiece zero point offset No.00 (COMMON) , an attempt to manuallyspecify the workpiece zero point is rejected, and the warning message “EXTERNALWORKPIECE ZERO NOT INPUT ” will appear.

2

3

2

4


– 305 –

<Example of operation>

(1) When an external workpiece zero point (offset specified at COMMON in WORK ZERO OFFSETscreen) and workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) are specified

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates:X100. , Y200.) becomes the zero point of workpiece coordinate system 1

�

� �� )%�# �� (!#�"�� +�#!� "!� %� !��$�%� �� #�� (!#�"�� +�#!� "!� %� !��$�%�� (� �� (!#�"�� +�#!� "!� %� !��$�%�� !!#�� %�� '��&�� $"��* � �� $!�&%�� !!#�� %�� '��&�� !#�� $�%%� �� #�� (!#�"�� !!#�� %�� +�#!� "!� %�� (� (!#�"�� !!#�� %�� +�#!� "!� %

�

�

�&##� %"!$�%�!

� �

�

)%�# �� (!#�"�� +�#!� "!� %

��

��

��

��

� � ��

�� +�#!� "!� %

�

Before operation NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 50. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 50. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Y 200. 000

ABSOLUTE X –50. 000 Y 100. 000

After operation NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 50. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Y 200. 000

ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Y 0. 000


– 306 –

2) If an operation (: X-50. , Y-50. in operation (2) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machinecoordinates: X100. , Y200. ) coincides with position (X-50. , Y- 50.) in workpiece coordinate system1

�

� �� +'�%"�!� *#% $�� -�%#� $#�"'� #��&�'� �� %��"�!� �� *#% $�� -�%#� $#�"'� #��&�'�� *� �� *#% $�� -�%#� $#�"'� #��&�'�� "�� ##%��"�'�� )�!(�� &$!�, � �� &#!('�� ##%��"�'�� )�!(�� #%�� &�''�"�� %��"�!� *#% $�� ##%��"�'�� -�%#� $#�"'�� *� *#% $�� ##%��"�'�� -�%#� $#�"'�� "$('� value� (X-50.� ,� Y-50.)

�

�

�(%%�"'$#&�'�#"

�

�

�

+'�%"�!� *#% $�� -�%#� $#�"'

��

��

��

��

� � ��

�� "��-�%#� $#�"'

�

�


NO. 01 (G54) X –100. 000 Y 50. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X –50. 000 Y 50. 000


NO. 01 (G54) X –100. 000 Y 150. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X –50. 000 Y –50. 000


– 307 –

(2) When a local coordinate system (G52) is specified

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X50., Y150.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1, on the assumption that the externalworkpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Y0.)

�

�� ' � $�"� �� ,%'!& �� .�'%� &% $)� %��(�)�� ,� �� ,%'!& �� .�'%� &% $)� %��(�) � � �� $�� %%'� $�)�� +�"*�� (&"�-�� (%"*)�� %%'� $�)�� +�"*�� %'�� (�)) $�� %��"� �%%'� $�)�� (-()�#� %��(�)� �$%� ��$�� ' � $�"� ,%'!& �� %%'� $�)�� .�'%� &% $)�� ,� ,%'!& �� %%'� $�)�� .�'%� &% $)

�

� *''�$)&%( ) %$

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

� � �

� �� $��.�'%� &% $)

�

�

�


NO. 01 (G54) X 200. 000 Y 50. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X –100. 000 Y 50. 000


NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 100. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Y 0. 000


– 308 –

(3) When tool length and cutter compensation are specified

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates:X100. , Z100.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 when tool length and cutter com-pensation are functioning, on the assumption that the external workpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Z0.)

�

�� (!�!%�#� �� -&("'!�� /�(&� '&!%*� &��)�* � � ��-� �� -&("'!�� /�(&� '&!%*� &��)�*�� !%�� &&(�!%�*�� ,�#+�� !)'#�.D � :� Absolute� coordinate� value� before� setting�� (!�!%�#� -&("'!�� &&(�!%�*�� /�(&� '&!%*�� -� -&("'!�� &&(�!%�*�� /�(&� '&!%*�� +**�(� �&$'�%)�*!&%� ,��*&(� �� &&#� #�%�* � �&$'�%)�*!&%� ,��*&(� ��

�

� �

�

�

��

��

��

� � �

� �� !%��/�(&� '&!%*

�

�

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ

�

�

Before operation NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Z 0. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 200. 000 Z 50. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Z 100. 000

ABSOLUTE X –90. 000 Z 30. 000

After operation NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Z 0. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 110. 000 Z 80. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Z 100. 000

ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Z 0. 000

NOTE The absolute coordinates assume that bits 2 (DTL) and 3 (DCR) of parameter No.2202 areboth 1 (either set of coordinates does not include a distance traveled because of tool lengthor cutter compensation).


– 309 –

10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B

If there is the tool measurement value B option, the indications on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen vary de-pending on parameter WMH (bit 4 of parameter No.6003).

� 9” CRT

– Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = “0”

WORK ZERO OFFSET O0000 N00000CURRENT G54 (TL)NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000

NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE)X 100.000 X 150.000Y 100.000 Y 150.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000

>MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +


WORK ZERO OFFSET O0000 N00000CURRENT G54 (TL)NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 01 (G54)

X 0.000 X 100.000Y 0.000 Y 100.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000

(MACHINE) HOLE MEASUREDX 150.000 #1 0.000Y 150.000 0.000Z 0.000 #2 0.000A 0.000 0.000B 0.000 #3 0.000

> 0.000MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSKINPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +


– 310 –

� 14” CRT screen


MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUTNUMBER

TL_INPMEASURE

+INPUTINPUT CHAPTER

CURRNTPOS

PUNCH


CURRENT G54.1 P02 (TL) 0.000

NO.00 (COMMON) NO.02 (G55) NO.04 (G57) NO.06 (G59)X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000


Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

>

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000


MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUTNEMBER

TL_INPMEASURE

+INPUTINPUT CHAPTER

CURRNTPOS

PUNCH


CURRENT G54.1 P02 (TL) 0.000

NO.00 (COMMON) NO.02 (G55) NO.04 (G57) NO.06 (G59)X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000


Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

HOLE MEASURED

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000

#1X 0.000 #2X 0.000 #3X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000


– 311 –

10.22Transverse Inhibit Limit Function

When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds the transverse inhibit limit (setsetting parameterNo.5251) during automatic operation, movement along that axis is stopped but the automatic operation contin-ues, updating the absolute coordinate along axis. That is, operation continues as if the machine lock had beenapplied tothe axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within therange of the transverse inhibit limit.

The operation is identical during manual operation. When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds thetransverse inhibit limit during manual operation, movement along that axis is stopped. Any subsequent manualoperation results in the absolute coordinates still being updated, as if the machine lock had been applied tothe axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within the range of thetransverse inhibit limit.

The transverse inhibit limit is checked only along a single axis and in a single direction. This axis is specifiedwith setting parameter No.5250 and the direction is specified with the TILM bit of setting parameter No.5201.

The figure below outlines operation with the transverse inhibit limit.

(3)

← ←

(2)(2)�

(1)

+Y

→ →

+X

→→

G01 X+�� ;� � � � (1)Y+�� ;� � � � (2)X�� ;� � � � �3)

Commands (1), (2), and (3) and used to move the tool along the path indicated in the figure by (1), (2)’ , and(3) when parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction.

This function is enabled or disabled by setting the TILE bit of setting parameter No.5201.

CAUTION 1 This function is not available for rotary axis.

CAUTION 2 This function is not available during the following modes.

(1) Selection of machine coordinate system (G53)

(2) Automatic reference position return (G28/G30)(From the intermediate point to the reference point)

(3) Thread cutting mode (G33)

(4) Tapping mode (G63)

(5) Binary operation (Unit time 2msec)

(6) Manual reference point return

(7) Selection of machine coordinate system of axis control by PMC

CAUTION 3 This function is disabled for the following axes:

(1) The axis subject to three-dimensional coordinate conversion in three-dimensionalcoordinate conversion mode (G68)

(2) The axis subject to polar coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode(G12.1)

(3) The axis subject to cylindrical interpolation in cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1)

(4) The tapping axis in rigid tapping mode (G84.2/G84.3)

(5) The chopping axis in chopping mode (G81.1)

(6) The axis subject to hobbing in hobbing mode


– 312 –

CAUTION 4 When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during manual operation,the absolute coordinate along the axis is subjected to mirror image conversion relative tothe actual machine movement.The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the converted absolutecoordinate.

When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during automaticoperation, the absolute coordinate indicates the coordinate specified with the command,while the machine coordinate and actual machine movement are subject to mirror imageconversion. The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the absolutecoordinate that is not subjected to mirror image conversion.

CAUTION 5 The relationship between the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate for an axisis shifted when the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current positionexceeds the transverse inhibit limit for the axis or the workpiece coordinate system is setin an area that exceeds the transverse inhibit limit.

(1) When the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds thetransverse inhibit limit

(a) When parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction,the current position and inhibit limit will be as follows:

(b) The workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds thetransverse inhibit limit (G92 X25.).

(c) “G90 X5. 0” is commanded

(i) While the absolute coordinate exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for an axis, onlythe absolute coordinate is updated. The machine coordinate remains as is (the tool does not move).

⋅ Machine� coordinate

��

⋅ ⋅ Work� coordinate(Absolute� coordinate)

��

Active� position Ihibit � limit � position


��

⋅ Work� coordinate(Absolute� coordinate)

��

Active� positionIhibit � limit � position

Work� coordinate� offset� by� G92⋅


��


��

Active� position

Work� coordinate� offset� by� G92

Machine� sift� value


– 313 –

(ii) When the absolute coordinate falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit, thetool starts moving and the machine coordinate and absolute coordinate along theaxis are updated as follows:

As a result, absolute coordinate 0 in the actual workpiece coordinate system isshifted from the origin, as indicated by the workpiece coordinate system offsetspecified with G92, by the machine shift value shown in the figure above.

This shift value can be canceled only by performing the following operations:

– Manual reference position return

– Workpiece coordinate system preset with G92.1

– Workpiece coordinate system preset with the WORK operation selection softkey on the current position display screen

(2) The absolute coordinate is shifted in the same way when the workpiece coordinatesystem is set such that it exceeds the range of the transverse inhibit limit.

Machine� coordinate

��


��

Active� position

Work� coordinate� offset� by� G92

Machine� sift� value

⋅

⋅

Ihibit � limit � position

NOTE To change the transverse inhibit limit, perform either of the following:

(1) Change setting parameter No.5251 by an MDI operation.

(2) Change setting parameter No.5251 by programmable parameter input (G10).

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 314 –

11.DISPLAY

11.1 Program Display

11.1.1 Execution program and program directory


2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.

One of the following screens appears:

i) Program screen

ii) Program number screen

iii) Program number and program name screen

The display can be switched between these screens as shown below.

�

�� &�� &

&

��

�!��!��&"�!��

��

��

��% ��%

��%

��%

�"

��" ��%�� %� !�""�� #�� %

�� %

�!��!��&�$��!&"�!�� !��!��&�$��!&��& !��!��&��&"�!��

�!&#��&�� #��& ��

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 315 –

At the bottom of the program screen, the size of the remaining part program storage space and the numberof programs that can be registered are displayed as follows:

FREE PAGES: 6960 (1272M) FREE FILES: 100

The page is the minimum unit used to store a program in part program storage. One page corresponds to 77characters (or a part program length of about 0.2 m).

In the example above, the size of remaining space is 193 pages (about 38.6 m), and the number of programsthat can be registered is 39.

When the program number and program name screen displays a program name, up to 16 characters are dis-played. However, when the option for 48–character program name display is selected, up to 48 characters aredisplayed as shown below.

Example of display: 14” CRT (18 programs on one screen)

In the case of the 9” CRT, one screen displays the program numbers and names of up to five programs.

NOTE The term page used here is a unit of data in internal memory. It is not related to the size of apage on the CRT screen.

11.1.2 Program check screens

Three program check screens are used.

1) Screen to display the command values specified in the block to be executed next, and the continuous–state values in that block

The command values specified in the block that is four or more blocks after the current block and the contin-uous–state values in that block are displayed. (Whether these values are displayed depends on the pro-gram specified.)

2) Screen to display the command values specified in the block executed last, and the continuous–state val-ues in that block

3) Screen to display the command values specified in the current block, and the continuous–state values inthat block


2 Press the <PRG–CHK> soft key or <P–CHECK> key hard key.

One of the three screens above appears. The desired screen is selected in one of two ways:

i) Press the <PRG–CHK> soft key or <P–CHECK> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen ap-pears.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 316 –


ON M CHECK G E E R

��

��

�

�

��

��

�� !.(�-$)(� , & �-$)(� % 0,

�� *+)"+�'� �# �%$("� �#�*- +� , & �-$)(� % 0,

�� )* +�-$)(� , & �-$)(� % 0,� �!- +� �#�*- +� , & �-$)(�11� !)+� *+)"+�'� �# �%$("� ��' � �,� ��)/ � !)+� )-# +� �#�*- +,�

�� !.(�-$)(� , & �-$)(� % 0,

�� *+)"+�'� �# �%$("� �#�*- +� , & �-$)(� % 0,

�� )* +�-$)(� , & �-$)(� % 0,� �!- +� �#�*- +� , & �-$)(�111� !)+� *+)"+�'� �# �%$("� ��' � �,� ��)/ � !)+� )-# +� �#�*- +,�

��

��

��

iii) Whether absolute or relative isselected for the current positiondisplay on the screen after chap-ter selection for program check-ing depends on the setting of theDAP bit in parameter No. 2203.For the operation of the ORIGINand PRESET keys after thisscreen is selected, see Section11.3.2.

��

Command values specified in the block executed last (LAST)

Command values specified in the current block (ACTIVE)

Summarized display of the current program and position data (check). The remaining subprogram call count is

displayed in the L field.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 317 –

11.1.3 Group–by–group program directory display and punch–out

In addition to program directory display, which displays the program numbers and program names of all regis-tered programs, group–by–group directory display is possible. This display divides programs into groups ac-cording to units of machining.

The name of programs in the same group need to contain the same character string.

In group–by–group directory display, the programs whose names contain the specified character string aresearched for, then a directory of their program numbers and program names is displayed.

Furthermore, a group of program numbers and names can be punched out.

Suppose that the character string GEAR–1000 is included in the names of the main program and subprogramsfor machining a gear part with part number 1000. The programs whose names contain the character stringGEAR–1000 can be found from all the programs stored in memory, and a directory of their numbers and namescan be displayed. Thus, the programs stored in large memory can be managed easily.

Directory display listing the program numbers and program names of currently registered programs

Display of a directory of programs for a shaft

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 318 –

(1) Procedure for group–by–group directory display

Use the procedure below. (The soft keys indicated below are for the 9” CRT.)

1 Set the part program storage and edit mode.

2 Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.

3 Select chapter selection key display by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key re-peatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM> key to select the programnumber and program name screen.

4 Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

5 Press the <DIR.GRP> key.

� ��

6 Press the (NAME) key.

��

↑

7 Enter the character string identifying the desired program in the group.

The program names can be as long as desired. However, only the first 48 characters are effective inthe search.

When the programs whose names start with the character string GEAR–1000 are to be found, for ex-ample, enter GEAR–1000*. Be sure to append the asterisk, called a wild card, which indicates thatany character string meets the requirements of the search. If the asterisk is omitted, only the programswhose names consist of the character string GEAR–1000 are searched for. A question mark specifiesa single arbitrary character. For example, when ????–1000 is entered, the programs whose namesstart with four arbitrary characters are searched for.

8 Press the <EXEC> key.

��

↑

9 The screen changes to the group directory screen, which displays a directory of programs whosenames contain the specified character string.

When no program whose name contains the specified character string is found, the message DATANOT FOUND is displayed.

10 If a directory of programs occupies more than one page, use the page keys to scroll the pages.

11 Unless the power is turned off, a directory of programs in a group continues to be stored until a searchis done for another group. After switching from the group directory screen to another screen, the direc-tory of programs in the group previously searched can be displayed again. This operation is per-formed using the procedure below.

i) Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.

ii) Switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or<PROG> hard key repeatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM>key to select the program number and program name screen.

iii) Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

iv) Press the <DIR.GRP> key.

v) Press the <PRV–GRP> key.

��

↑

vi) The screen switches to the group directory screen and displays the directory of the programs inthe group previously searched.

Therefore, when the group directory screen is to be displayed again after switching to anotherscreen, the character string included in the programs of the group need not be reentered.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 319 –

(2) Group–by–group program output (punch–out)

1 Display the directory of programs in a group according to the procedure for group–by–group directorydisplay.

2 Press the <PUNCH> key.

��

↑

3 Press the <GRP.ALL> key.

� �� (PROG#)

↑

The programs searched for in the group are output.

When the group directory display screen is displayed, programs can be punched out using the follow-ing keys:

<THIS> : Punches out the currently selected main program.

<(PROG#)> : Punches out a searched for program numbered 0.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 320 –

11.2 Status Display

This function displays the status of the control unit, alarm status, editing status, whether the buffer contains thenext block, and so forth.

These statues are displayed on the second last line (soft key display line) of the CRT screen.

TAPE� JOG� � � STOP� � READ� � MTN � � FTN� 16:52:13� � � @� � ALM

1 40

�6�7

��$� ��&#�� $� �!#� %�� %�� $�#�� %�� $��$%�%&$� ��%�� $� ��$"��'�� #��%��&$%�(��(1) ��

The status display line contains nine fields, (1) to (9). On all CNC screens, the status items listed below aredisplayed.

(1) Automatic operation mode selection (MEM, MDI, TAPE, EDIT, or ****)

This field displays the automatic operation mode currently selected. When no automatic operation modeis selected, **** is displayed.

(2) Manual operation mode selection (JOG, HND, INC, AGJ, J+REF, or ***)

This field displays the manual operation mode currently selected. When no manual operation mode is se-lected, **** is displayed.

(3) Automatic operation status (RESET, STOP, HOLD, STRT, MSTR, or SRCH)

This field displays the status of automatic operation.

RSET : Reset is in progress.STOP : Automatic operation is stopped.HOLD : Automatic operation is suspended.STRT : Automatic operation is started.MSTR : Execution of a manual numeric command is started.NSRC : Sequence number search is in progress.

(4) Program editing status (READ, PNCH, VRFY, SRCH, COND, EDIT, or ****)

This field displays the status of program editing.

READ : Registration is in progress.PNCH : Punch–out is in progress.VRFY : Verification is in progress.SRCH : Search is in progress.COND : Memory arrangement is in progress.EDIT : An editing operation (such as insertion or alteration) is in progress.**** : No editing operation is in progress,

(5) Axis movement/dwell status (MTN, DWL, or ***)

This field displays MTN during movement along an axis, and displays DWL when the machine is dwelling.This field displays *** in other cases.

(6) M/S/T/B function status (FIN or ***)

This field displays FIN when a miscellaneous function such as M, S, T, and B is being performed (that is,when the system is waiting for a completion signal from the PMC). In other cases, this field displays ***.

(5)’ (6)’ Emergency stop status (EMG)

If an emergency stop occurs, the display of (5) and (6) disappears and the character string ––EMG– is dis-played in reverse, instead.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 321 –

(7) Current time display

This field displays the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.

Example 16:52:13 (Fifty–two minutes and thirteen seconds after four o’clock in the afternoon)

(8) Status of writing into nonvolatile memory (@ or space)

This field displays @ when data is being written into nonvolatile memory.

(9) Alarm status and label skip status (ALM, BAT, WRN, LSK, or ***)

ALM blinks in reverse when an alarm has occurred.

WRN blinks when a warning message appears on the CRT screen.

This field displays BAT when the voltage of the battery for the absolute–position detector or nonvolatilememory for storing parameters, tool compensation data, and part programs is low. This display disappearsafter the battery is replaced and the alarm is reset.

This field displays LSK when none of these statuses arepresent, and the tape reader is placed in the labelskip status. In other cases, this field displays ***.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 322 –

11.3 Current Position Display

Four current–position screens are used.

1) Overall position display screen

2) Current–position screen based onthe relative coordinate system

3) Current–position screen based onthe workpiece coordinate system

4) Current–position screen based onthe machine coordinate system

Current position in the relative coordinate system

Current position in the workpiece coordinate system

Current position in the machine coordinate syste

Remaining distance to travel

11.3.1 Current–position screens


2 Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key.


ON M CHECK G E E R

��

��

�

�� )#�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

�� %$' ( $#� ��%(�&� '�"��( $#� !�*'

�� )#�( $#� '�"��( $#� !�*'

�� %$' ( $#� ��%(�&� '�"��( $#� !�*'

��

��

Overall position display Relative position display

Current position display in the workpiece coordinatesystem

Current position display in the machine coordi-nate system

Select the desired screen using one of the procedures described below.

i) Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen appears.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key.

OVERALL: Displays overall position data.

RELATIV : Displays the current position in the relative coordinate system

ABSOLUT: Displays the current position in the workpiece coordinate system.

MACHINE: Displays the current position in the machine coordinate system.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 323 –

11.3.2 Presetting the current position display

The current position in the relative coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system can be preset.

1 Select the current–position screen based on the relative coordinate system or the current–position screenbased on the workpiece coordinate system. (See Section 11.3.1.)


3 ⋅To set the current position to 0

Press the <ORIGIN> key.

The soft keys are switched to the opera-tion guidance keys.

4

(4)–1 To set the coordinates on all axes to0, press the <ALL–AXS> key.

(4)–2 To set the coordinate on a particularaxis to 0, enter the axis name (X, Z, etc.),then press the <EXEC> key.

(4)–2’ To set the coordinates on multipleaxes to 0, enter the axis names in succes-sion, then press the <EXEC> key.

Example XYZ <EXEC> key

5

⋅This operation performed on the current–position screen based on the workpiececoordinate system is the same as specify-ing G92X0Y0....; in a program. The work-piece coordinate system is shifted so that the current position becomes the zero point.

⋅To set the current position to particular coordinates, press the <RESET> key. The soft keys are switched

to the operation guidance keys.

⋅Enter desired coordinates, then press the <EXEC> key.

Example X100.0Y2000.0 <EXEC> key

⋅This operation performed on the current–positionscreen based on the workpiece coordinate system isthe same as specifying G92X–Y–; in a program. Theworkpiece coordinate system is shifted so that the cur-rent position is set to the specified coordinates.

�� !�"�� "�� !��"�� $!

��

�� "�� #�� $!

��

�� !�"� �� "�� #�� $

��

�� !�"�� "�� !��"�� $!

�� %� �

��

�� "�� #�� $!

��

��

�� !�"� �� "�� #�� $

��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 324 –

11.3.3 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

(a) Manual intervention when the manual absolute signal is off

(b) Move command executed with the machine locked

(c) Handle interrupt, and movement by manual/automatic simultaneous operation

(d) Operations with a mirror image

(e) Setting the local coordinate system with G52 or shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92

(f) Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate system from the MDI panel

The operations above shift the workpiece coordinate system. When the MDI panel is used, however, theshifted coordinate system can be cancelled, and the workpiece coordinate system can be preset at theoriginal position offset from the machine zero point by the workpiece reference point offset. (For detailedinformation about presetting the workpiece coordinate system, see Section 8.2.6 in Part II.)

Use the procedure below.

1 Select the overall position display screen.


3 Set the reset state or automatic operation stop state, then press the <WRK–CRD> soft key or <WORKCOORD> hard key.

4

4–1 To preset all axes, press the <ALL–AXS> key.

4–2 To preset a particular axis, enter the axis name and immediately after the axis name, then press the <EXEC> key.

�� &%( ) %$� %&�'�) %$� #�$*� !�,(

��

↑

�� +%'!& �� %%'� $�)�� %&�'�) %$� �* ��$�� !�,(

��

↑ ↑

�� &%( ) %$� %&�'�) %$� (�"��) %$� !�,(

��-��

��-��

��

��

↑

�� +%'!& �� %%'� $�)�� %&�'�) %$� �* ��$�� !�,(

��

��

5 The cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset are cancelled, and the origin ofthe selected workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) is preset at the position offset from the originof the machine coordinate system by the workpiece reference point offset. As a result, the current posi-tion (in absolute coordinates) in the workpiece coordinate system are the values obtained by subtract-ing the workpiece reference point offset from the machine coordinates.

Whether to preset relative position display as with absolute coordinates is specified by the DSE bit ofparameter No. 2202.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 325 –

11.4 Operator Message Display

The operator messages are classified into two groups:

(i) External operator messages

(ii) Operator messages specified with custom macros

When an operator message is reported, the operator message screen is usually displayed automatically.


2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key.



ON M CHECK G E E R

� ��

� ��

�

�

�"�#�%!#��$$��

��#��$$��

�� & �%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

�� $$�� "%�#� $��%�! � ��'$

�� & �%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

�� !%�� "%�#� $��%�! � ��'$

��

� ��

The operator message screen can be selected in one of two ways:

i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft key or hard key) key repeatedly until the operator message screen ap-pears.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the OPERATOR key.

Clearing operator messages

External operator messages are cleared by external commands.

For detailed information about external operator messages including how to clear them, refer to the rele-vant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

When an operator message specified with a custom macro is displayed, a single–block halt occurs. Themessage disappears when the next cycle is started.

For the display of operator messages specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describ-ing the custom macros.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 326 –

11.5 Alarm Message Display

The alarm messages are classified into three groups:

(i) Alarm messages reported by CNC self–diagnosis

(ii) External alarm messages

(iii) Alarm messages specified with custom macros

When an alarm message is reported, the alarm message screen is displayed automatically.


2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key.



ON M CHECK G E E R

� ��

� ��

�

�

�"�#�%!#��$$��

��#��$$��

�� & �%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

�� $$�� "%�#� $��%�! � ��'$

��

� ��

�� & �%�! � $��%�! � ��'$

�� !%�� "%�#� $��%�! � ��'$

��

The alarm message screen can be selected in one of two ways:

i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft kye or hard key) key repeatedly until the alarm message screen ap-pears.

ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the ALARM key.

Clearing alarm messages

External alarm messages are cleared by external commands.

For detailed information about external alarm messages including how to clear them, refer to the relevantmanual supplied by the machine tool builder.

Alarms reported by CNC self–diagnosis and alarms specified with custom macros are cleared by resettingthe NC.

For detailed information about alarms reported by CNC self–diagnosis, see Appendix 11.

For detailed information about alarms specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describ-ing the custom macros.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 327 –

11.6 Graphic Display

To enable the user to check the progress of machining and current tool position on the CRT screen, the toolpath can be drawn during automatic or manual operation.

The functions listed below are available for this drawing function.

(i) Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.

NOTE Seven colors are available.

(ii) The O, N, F, S, and T values of the program being draw and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinatesystem are displayed.

(iii) Drawing can be performed in an arbitrary plane. Three–dimensional drawing is possible as well as bi–plane drawing.

Z

X Y

Y

Z X

X

X

Y

Z

��

(iv) Three–dimensional drawing allows a graphic to be rotated horizontally and vertically.

Z

X Y

��

��

(v) Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and Z.The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the axes onthe CRT screen.

(vi) A graphic on the screen can be shifted and enlarged.

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 328 –

11.6.1 Selecting the graphic screen


2 Press the <GRAPHIC> soft key or <OTHERS> hard key to display the graphic screen.

��

��!��

��!��

��!��

��

��!��

��!��

��!��

��!��

��!��

11.6.2 Setting the graphic parameters

(1) Operation

1 Select the graphic screen (see Section 11.6.1).

2 Press the <GRAPH PARAM> key to display the graphic parameter screen.

3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <↑> , <↓> , <←> , and <→> .

The cursor keys <←> and <→> move the cursor horizontally.

The cursor keys <↑> and <↓> move the cursor vertically.

4 To set a parameter, enter the desired data then press the <INPUT> key.

5 To return to the graphic screen after setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> key.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 329 –

(2) Graphic parameters

(a) Graphic plane

This parameter sets a graphic plane.

The following graphic planes are available:

Z

X Y

Y

X

XY

Z

Y

YZ

X

Z

ZX XYZ

X

Y

YX

Y

Z

ZY

Z

X

XZ

Y

Z X

XZY

Y

XXYZ2

Z

X

��

(b) Rotation angle (horizontal)

This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees.

Set a value from –360 to +360. An initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that180 is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotationangle is 210 degrees.

��

Y

Z

X Y

X

Y’

30,

180,

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 330 –

(c) Rotation angle (vertical)

When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation.

Z

X Y

��

��

��

Parameter No. 4832 can rotate the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameteris set to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 331 –

��$%�&�"'&� '�� %�&( '�"'� �� ##%��"�'�&�

��

�%�*�"�� $ �"��

�#'�'�#"� �"� �� #%�,#"'� ��

�#'�'�#"� �"� �� )�%'��

��%�!�'�%� �#��

YY’

Z

Z’ XX’

X’

20° 20°

10°

65°

10°��%'�� %#'�'�#"� �+�&

�"�'�� )�%'�� %#'�'�#"� �+�&

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 332 –

(d) Scale factor

A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When a scale factor is automatically determined fromthe maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within this range.

(e) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range

When the maximum and minimum values are set for each axis on specified planes, the scale factorand the center of the screen are automatically determined so that the screen can display the maximumand minimum values.

The maximum value must be greater than the minimum value.

When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not auto-matically determined. Instead the scale factor set and CRT center that have been manually set areused.

When a scale factor is automatically set, it includes an allowance of 10%. The scale factor of an axissubject to screen restriction is effective. Axes that are not restricted by the screen are positioned sothat the range determined by a maximum value and minimum value is positioned at the center of thescreen. (See the figures that follow.) This means that when a difference between a maximum valueand minimum value set for one axis varies too much from that for another axis, the actually displayedscreen does not match the maximum and minimum values set for one of the axes.

–100–100

100

0

1000

Y

X

10% 10%

��"��

"�� #�$� �)� ��(��%�� %�� &��%�#

�� !��%!! #�� $��$� $�� '�� #� #�$��(��%�� &��%�� %�� &��%�� $��#� ��#�� $�� $�"� �� $�� (�#� �#� ! #�*$� �� $� $�� $�"� �� $�� #�"�� # � $��$� $��#�"�� #!��)��$��#� $�� (�#� "��$ � �� #� ��#� $��$� $�� #�"�� #!��)� �#� � $� ��$�� $�� (��%�� %�&��%�#� #�$� � "� $�� (�#�� $�� %"�� $ � $��"��$��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 333 –

In the case of a bi–plane drawing on the XYZ2 graphic plane, when the ratio of the difference betweenthe maximum and minimum values set for the Y–axis to the difference between those set for the Z–axisexceeds 1:2 or 2:1, the screen allocation is clamped to 1:2 or 2:1.

Y

Z X

1

2

��

If the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum values set for the Z–axis to the differ-ence between those set for the Y–axis is greater than 2, the screen is divided as shown above.

In the case of the drawing plane XYZ or XZY, the scale factor is determined so that the rectangularparallelepiped determined by the set maximum and minimum values always fits in the screen whenrotated horizontally by any angle.

10% 10%

��

��

��

(f) CRT center

This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system ofa program used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the centers ofthose values are automatically set.

The drawing scale in the coordinate system on the graphic screen is calculated from the screen centercoordinates and the scale factor. The unit is mm or inches.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 334 –

(g) Notes

(i) Specify positional values in mm or inches.

(ii) The parameter scale factor, the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, and the CRTcenter are independent of data defining the graphic screen and data displayed on the screen formaking alterations. This is to make it easier to return to the original screen after a graphic enlarge-ment or shift operation. Usually, graphic data matches the settings. After a graphic enlargementor shift operation, however, the graphic data changes, resulting in a mismatch with the settings.In such a case, @ is prefixed to the setting.

When the <AFTER SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the graphic data is transferred to the settings (Ain the figure below). When the <BEFORE SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the settings are transferredto the graphic data (B in the figure below.)

A

B

��

��

��

NOTE When enlarging a graphic, the red and yellow cursors are used to change the maximum andminimum values. When shifting a graphic, the RELATIVE SCALE field is used to change thescale factor parameter, and the red cursor is used to change the center coordinate data.

(iii) The graphic parameters are not cleared even when the power is turned off.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 335 –

11.6.3 Drawing a tool path

The tool path in automatic or manual operation can be drawn so that the user can check the progress of machin-ing, the current tool position, and so forth on the CRT screen.

(1) Starting drawing

1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.)

2 Press the <START MACHIN> key to allow the movement of a tool in automatic or manual operationto be drawn. DRAWING is displayed in the lower–right corner of the screen.

3 Execute the desired program in the tape or memory operation mode. To draw the tool path withoutmoving the machine, lock the machine.

The cutting feed path and rapid traverse path can be drawn in different colors by setting parameterNos. 4821 and 4822.

The tool position from which a tool offset is subtracted in the workpiece coordinate system is drawnaccording to the CRT center and scale factor determined by the graphic parameters set.

If the tool position in the workpiece coordinate system changes discontinuously as in the case of originsetting or workpiece coordinate system switching, a tool movement is assumed.

The drawing function may not be able to follow a very low feedrate. In this case, only the tool path canbe drawn, but not the machining profile.

When DRAWING is displayed, the internal processing for drawing continues even if the screen isswitched. When the display returns to the graphic screen, the drawing during that period is displayedwith the tracking capability somewhat degraded.

(2) Terminating drawing

1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.)

2 Press the <STOP> key to terminate drawing. The movement of the tool in the automatic or manualoperation stops.

(3) Clearing the graphic screen

To clear the tool path, press the <ERASE> key after terminating drawing.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 336 –

(4) Shifting the screen

Press the <SHIFT> key to display the shift screen. Move the cursor (a red box) up and down and to rightand left with the cursor keys <↑> , <↓> , <←> , and <→> to specify the center of the new screen. Entera value from 0.01 to 99.99 in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lower–right corner of the screen, then pressthe <INPUT> key. The value displayed in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lower–right corner of thescreen multiplied by the entered scale factor then becomes the new relative scale factor.

After pressing the <SET END> key, press the <ERASE> key and the <START MACHIN> key. Then thetool path is drawn on the new screen.

When the graphic parameters, and the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range are set, thescale factor automatically determined by the maximum and minimum values is multiplied by the value setin the RELATIVE SCALE field. For drawing at the center according to a specified scale factor, the parame-ters specifying the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range to 0.

� SCALE� FACTOR��

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 337 –

(5) Enlarging a graphic

Press the ENLARGE key to display the graphic enlargement screen. Specify the diagonal points of thenew screen by moving the red and yellow cursors (�) displayed in the central part of the screen up anddown and to right and left with the cursor keys <↑> , <↓> , <←> , and <→> . The next drawing operationis performed so that the rectangle with the set diagonal points fits in the screen.

Press the <SET END> key, the <ERASE> key then the <START MACHIN> key. The tool path is then drawnon the new screen.

��

NOTE 1 Reduction is not allowed. For reduction, use the RELATIVE SCALE field for the graphic shiftoperation.

NOTE 2 After graphic shift or enlargement, the graphic parameter screen may display an at sign (@).This means that graphic data set for shifting or enlarging a graphic does not match the settingon the graphic parameter screen.

NOTE 3 When two planes are selected, the plane containing the red cursor (�) is subject toenlargement.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 338 –

11.7 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed

The actual spindle speed is displayed on several screens including the position display screen.

On each screen, the spindle speed in rpm is displayed in decimal after the character S or the characters ACT.S.

The display mode and position slightly vary, depending on the size of the CRT screen and screen type.

The NOS bit (bit 0) of parameter No. 2204 enables the spindle speed display function to exclude the header(such as S and ACT.S) and unit (rpm) from the display.

11.8 Directory of Floppy Disk Files

It is possible to display a directory of files in a floppy disk that contains execution programs, parameters, andoffset data.


2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.

3 Press the <DIR.FLP> key.

The floppy cassette file directory screen appears. However, the file names are not displayed at this stage.

4 Press the operation menu key, then switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.

5 Press the <SRH_FIL> key.

6

6–1 To display a directory of files starting at the first file, press the <TOP> key

6–2 To display a directory of files starting at a particular file, press the <(FILE#)> key, enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key.

7 The files listed on the preceding and following pages can be displayed by scrolling the page up and down.

(1) Select the DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) screen.

(a) Press the function selection key <PROGRAM> several times to display the DIRECTORY screen.

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 339 –

(b) The DIRECTORY screen can also be selected by pressing the function selection key <PRO-GRAM>, then pressing the chapter selection key <DIR.FLP>.

��

��

NOTE The directory is not displayed at this stage.

(2) Press the operation selection key <SRH_FIL>.

�

��

��

(3) Display a directory.

(a) Press the operation guidance key <TOP> to display a directory starting with the first file.

��

(b) To display a directory starting with a particular file, press the operation guidance key <(FILE#)>,enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key.

��

File number input

��

(4) The files listed on the previous pages can be displayed by scrolling the pages.

NOTE The directory display is cleared when the mode or screen is changed. To return to the directorydisplay, perform the above operation again.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 340 –

11.9 Load Meter Display

The load (torque) on the spindle motor and servo motor are displayed as a bar graph on the CRT screen. The14” CRT screen displays waveforms indicating the fluctuation in the load as well.

In bar graph display, the latest sampling values are displayed. In waveform display, the fluctuations over oneminute are displayed. The rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter must be set in a parameter.When the load reaches the rated value the load meter indicates 100%.

The load meter screen also displays load meters, the absolute position, specified speed, actual speed, overridevalue, number of machining parts, and operation data.

Up to three axes can be displayed on the load meter screen for the servo motor. The user can select the axeswhose load is displayed by setting parameters.

To display the load on the spindle motor, the load signal needs to be connected to the A/D converter of the CNC.

The load meter screen is selected as follows:

1 Press the function selection key.

2 Press the <PRG–CHK> soft key or <P–CHECK> hard key.

The load meter screen can be selected in either of the following ways:

(i) Press the <PRG–CHK> soft key or <P–CHECK> hard key repeatedly until the load meter screen ap-pears.

(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the <OPE.MNTR> or <OPE.MONITR> key.


��

↑ ↑

9” CRT program checking chapter selection keys

��

↑


��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

↑

14” CRT program checking chapter selection keys

��

��

↑

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 341 –

NOTE 1 Set the numbers of the axes whose load is to be displayed in parameter Nos. 2231 to 2333.Set the rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter in parameter Nos. 2234 to2237. When the applied load reaches the rated load, the load meter indicates 100%.

NOTE 2 Load meter data is displayed using a bar graph and percentages. The range of the bar graphis 0% to 200%. 100% is indicated by a change in color on the 14” screen or a change inbrightness on the 9” CRT screen.

NOTE 3 The 14” CRT screen displays a graph indicating the fluctuations in load over one minute. Onescreen displays the fluctuations for one load meter. The cursor keys <↑> and <↓> can beused to select the load meter for which this type of graph is to be displayed.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 342 –

11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts

The CRT screen can display the cumulative power–on time, the cumulative automatic operation time, the cu-mulative cutting time, and the cumulative time recorded with an arbitrary timer for each machine. Except forthe cumulative power–on time, the operator can alter and preset any of the cumulative times via the MDI panel.

The CRT screen can also display the number of parts required and cumulative parts counts. Two types ofcumulative parts counts are displayed. One is a cumulative parts count that can be changed only by parameteralteration. This is used to count the total number of parts machined, and is referred to as the total cumulativeparts count. The other is the cumulative parts count that can be be altered or preset by the operator via theMDI panel. In general, before a new type of workpiece is machined, this count is preset to 0 to count the numberof parts machined. Unless otherwise noted, this count is referred to as the cumulative parts count. Each timeM02, M30 or an M code with a parameter set is executed, these counts are incremented by one. This meansthat the number of machined parts can be counted using a program that executes M02, M30, or an M codewith a set parameter when each workpiece has been machined.

When the cumulative parts count reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to the machine. Theoperator can alter the number of parts required via the MDI panel.

Use the procedure below to select the run time and parts count display screen, and alter or change cumulativevalues.


2 Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key.

The run time and parts count display screen can be selected in one of two ways:

(i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the run time and parts count display screen ap-pears.

(ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key, then press the [TIMER] key.

3 Select the MDI mode, then move the cursor to the cumulative parts count field with the cursor keys. Enterthe desired preset value with the numeric keys, then press the [INPUT] key.

Similarly, the number of parts required can be preset. When 0 is set as the number of parts required, thenumber of parts required is assumed to be infinite. The total cumulative parts count cannot be preset onthis screen. Use the parameter screen to preset the total cumulative parts count.

4 To alter the cumulative automatic operation time, cumulative cutting time, and cumulative time recordedwith an arbitrary timer for each machine, move the cursor to the corresponding hours (H), minutes (M), andseconds (S) fields with the cursor keys, then enter the desired values.

NOTE 1 Custom macro system variables can be used to write to or read from the cumulative parts countfield and the field for the number of parts required.]

Cumulative parts count: #3901

Number of parts required: #3902

NOTE 2 Specifying DTIM, bit 5 of parameter No. 7620, appropriately enables the accumulated valuesof power–on time, automatic operation time, cutting time, and time recorded on the timer whichcan be used for any purposes, to be displayed in units of days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 343 –

11.11 Clock

The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on each CRT screen. The clock display screendisplays the current date and time in year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds. The clock display screenenables the current time to be set.

The current date and time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/seconds) can also be read using custom macrosor the PMC window.

(1) Display

The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on the status display line of each CRT screen.

The current time is displayed on thestatus display line on all CNCscreens as shown in the figure at theright.

The clock display screen displays the current date and time as the year, month, day, hours, minutes, andseconds.

1 Press the function menu key toswitch the soft keys to the func-tion selection keys.

2 Press the [SETTING] soft orhard key.

When the current screen is not the clock display screen, the clock display screen can be displayedin one of two ways:

i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the clock display screen appears.

ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the[TIMER] key.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 344 –

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

↑

�� )�**"% � �!�'*�(� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

↑

�� $&�#� &'�(�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��

�� +%�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

��-��

��- ��

��-��

��

��-��

��-��

��-��

��-��

↑

�� )�**"% � �!�'*�(� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

�� -��

��-��

��

��

��-��

��-��

�� -��

↑

�� &'�(�*"&%� )�$��*"&%� #�,)

INPUT +INPUT

(2) Setting

The clock display screen is used to set the time.

1 Display the clock display screen. (See Item (1) above.)

2 Move the cursor to the desired field.

3 Enter the desired value, then press the [INPUT] key.

Item Maximum value

Year 99

Month 12

Day 31

Hours 23

Minutes 59

Seconds 59

NOTE When specifying the year, enter only the last two digits. Negative values and values greaterthan the maximum value above cannot be specified.

(3) Custom macros and clock

Reading system variables #3011 and #3012 enables the current date and time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/seconds) to be checked.

Data System variable

Year/month/day #3011

Hours/minutes/seconds #3012

Example When the current date and time is 17 minutes 5 seconds past 4 p.m. on May 20, 1987

#3011: 19870520

#3012: 161705

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 345 –

11.12 Background Graphic Display

11.12.1 Overview

The background graphic display has the function described below.

Tool path drawing: This function draws the path of the tool center specified by a part program.

��

The tool path drawing function represents the path of the tool as lines to allow the part program to be closelychecked.

(1) Notes

(a) For a program stored in memory, the tool path is drawn in the background (background drawing).

(b) The tool path can be drawn along the X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and axes parallel to these axes. Thetool path cannot be drawn along a rotary axis, PMC axis, or so forth.

(c) The tool path can be drawn for the functions listed below.

G00: PositioningG01: Linear interpolationG02/G03: Circular interpolationG17/G18/G19: Plane selectionG90/G91: Absolute/incremental data inputG40/G41/G42: Cutter compensation/cancelG43/G44/G49: Tool length compensation/cancelG50/G51: Scaling/cancelG50.1/G51.1: Programmable mirror image/cancelG68/G69: Coordinate system rotation/cancelG72.1/G72.1: Figure copyG52: Local coordinate system settingG92: Workpiece coordinate system changeG92.1: Workpiece coordinate system presettingG73/G74/G76/G80/G81/G82/G83/G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G98/G99: Canned cycle/cancelG65: Macro callM98: Subprogram call

Optional–angle chamfering/corner rounding

Custom macros (with some restrictions)

(d) When the ordinary graphic display option is also installed, you can enable background graphics bysetting bit 2 of parameter No. 10 to 1.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 346 –

(2) Features

The tool path drawing function draws the path of the center of a tool. The function has the features listedbelow.

(a) High–speed drawingCompared with graphic display A, a tool path is drawn at higher speed, thus allowing a faster NC pro-gram check.

(b) Partially enlarged drawingWhile viewing a drawn tool path, the user can specify a partial enlargement center and relative scalefactor (graphic shift) or diagonal points (graphic enlargement). So, a required portion can be enlargedusing simple operations.

(c) Three–dimensional drawingIn addition to two–dimensional graphics, three–dimensional graphics can be drawn. A graphic canbe rotated horizontally and vertically.

(d) Bi–plane drawingTwo planes, the XY plane and XZ plane, can be drawn at the same time.

(e) Scale display (plane drawing and bi–plane drawing), or coordinate axis and reference dimension dis-play (three–dimensional drawing)Each screen displays a ruler for plane drawing and bi–plane drawing, or coordinate axis and dimen-sions for three–dimensional drawing, so that the dimensions of each graphic can be determined cor-rectly.

(f) Colors for rapid traverse and cutting feed pathsDifferent colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.

(g) Position displayThe O, N, and T values of the program being drawn and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinatesystem are displayed.

(h) Graphic display axisParameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, andZ. The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of theaxes on the CRT screen.

11.12.2 Setting of graphic parameters

Before a tool path can be drawn, necessary data must be set on the graphic (parameter) screen. This screenincludes the parameters described below.

(1) Graphic plane

Specify the desired plane for drawing.

The following types of drawings are available.

Z

X Y

Y

X

XY

Z

Y

YZ

X

Z

ZX XYZ

X

Y

YX

Y

Z

ZY

Z

X

XZ

Y

Z X

XZY

Y

XXYZ2

Z

X

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 347 –

(2) Rotation angle (horizontal)

This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees.

Set a value from –360 to +360. The initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that 180is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotation angle is 210degrees.

Y

Z

X Y

X

Y’X’

30°

180°

��

(3) Rotation angle (vertical)

When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation.

Z

X Y

��

� ��

� ��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 348 –

Parameter No. 4832 rotates the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter is setto 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.

��$%�&�"'&� '�� %�&( '�"'� �� ##%��"�'�&�

�� %�$�� $ �"�� #'�'�#"� �"� �� #%�+#"'� �� #'�'�#"� �"� �� )�%'�� %�!�'�%� �#��

YY’

Z

Z’ XX’

X’

20� 20�

10�

65�

10��%'�� %#'�'�#"� �*�&

�"�'�� )�%'�� %#'�'�#"� �*�&

(4) Scale factor

A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When the scale factor is automatically determined from themaximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within range.

(5) CRT center

This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system of a pro-gram used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the midpoint of thosevalues are automatically set.

From the screen center coordinates and scale factor, the drawing scale in the coordinate system on thegraphic screen is calculated and displayed.

The units are millimeters or inches.

(6) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range

When a maximum value and minimum value are set for each axis on specified planes, a scale factor andCRT center are automatically determined so that the screen displays the maximum and minimum values.

When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not automatical-ly determined, but the set scale factor and CRT center are used.

(7) Use of color

Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.

Seven colors are available.

(8) Graphic program number specification

This parameter specifies a program number subject to tool path drawing. When the [REWIND] soft keyis pressed, the graphic program pointer returns to the start of the specified program. When [START MA-CHIN] is pressed, the tool path is drawn from the beginning of the program.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 349 –

(9) Graphic offset numbers

In general, a part program subject to background drawing does not allow offset values to be altered usingG10 or system variables during drawing. (Any attempt to do so is ignored.) However, an offset value canbe modified during drawing for three offset numbers specified here. (This has no effect on the offset valuesused for machining.)

(10)Program numbers and sequence numbers defining the start and end of a program fragment

When only a part of program is to be drawn, these parameters specify the start block and end block withfour–digit program numbers and five–digit sequence numbers. When 0 is set in all the parameters, theparameters are ignored and the entire program is drawn. Usually, set these parameters to 0.

0001� � ;

N10

M98� � P2� � ;

M02� � ;

0002� � ;

N20

M99

��

�� 0001�� 00010

�� 0002�� 00020

In this example, only the portions indicated by the solid lines are drawn.

NOTE The 0xxxx and Nxxxx blocks corresponding to program numbers and sequence numbersspecified in these parameters must be single blocks or blocks containing an NC statement.Blocks containing an instruction for calling a macro program or subprogram and blockscontaining a macro program are ignored.Example

Specifiable Not specifiable01234; 01234 M1 ; –––Macro call by an M codeN234 ; N234 M98 P4500 ; –––Subprogram callN235 G92 X0 Y0; N345 #10 = #20 ; –––Macro program

(11)Graphic tool numbers (maximum, minimum)

Instead of the procedure in Item (10) above, the tool path of a program fragment can also be drawn by spec-ifying the maximum graphic tool number and minimum graphic tool number. These parameters specifya tool number range so that a tool path can be drawn during machining using the tools with the specifiedrange of tool numbers.

When both of these parameters are set to 0, the settings are ignored. When only the minimum graphictool number is set to 0, the paths of all tools whose numbers are not larger than the set maximum graphictool number are drawn. When only the maximum graphic tool number is set to 0, the paths of all toolswhose numbers are not smaller than the set minimum graphic tool number are drawn.

These parameters can be used in combination with the program numbers and sequence numbers definingthe start and end of a program fragment.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 350 –

11.12.3 Procedure for setting graphic parameters

Use the procedure below to set the graphic parameters.

GRAPHIC PLANE = XYZ CRT CENTER X = –40,000�1:XY2:YZ3:ZX4:XYZ Y = –10,000�5:YX6:ZY7:XZ8:XZY Z = 20,000�9:XYZ2 �

GRAPHIC RANGE MAX X = 70,000SCALE FACTOR = 1.00 Y = 15,000

Z = 70,000

ROTATION ANGLE (H) = 210 (V) = 0 GRAPHIC RANGE MIN X =–150,000

GRAPHIC START PROGRAM 0=#### Y = –35,000 SEQENCE N=##### Z = –30,000GRAPHIC END PROGRAM 0=#### SEQUENCEN N=##### GRAPHIC PROGRAM 0 = ####

GRAPHIC TOOL MAX T=#### MIN T=#### COLOR CUTTING= #OFFSET NO. 01 D=#### RAPID = # NO. 02 D=#### NO. 03 D=####

GRAPHIC (PARAMETER)

(1) Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.

(2) Press the [GRAPHIC] soft key or [OTHERS] hard key repeatedly until the graphic screen appears.

(3) Press the [GRAPH PARAM] key to display the graphic parameter screen.

(4) Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <↑> , <↓> , <←> , and <→> .

(5) Enter the desired values, then press the <INPUT> or <+INPUT> key.

(6) After setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> or <GRAPHIC> key to return to the graphic screen.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 351 –

11.12.4 Drawing procedure

The GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen is used for drawing.

–100,000 0,000 100,000X

Y

100,000

0,000

–100,000

X –400,000Y –100,000Z 200,000

F 0S 0T 0

GRAPHIC (GRAPH)

The soft keys on the GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen have the functions indicated below.

Soft key Function

<STOP> Stops drawing the tool path.

<ERASE> Clears the drawn tool paths. When a parameter is changed, thegraphic data remains valid until the <ERASE> key is pressed. The<ERASE> key is valid when drawing is not in progress.

<SHIFT> Sets the graphic shift screen.

[ENLARGE] Sets the graphic enlargement screen.

[START MACHIN] Starts drawing. If [START MACHIN] is pressed when STOPPED isnot displayed at the lower–right corner of the screen, drawing startsat the beginning of the program. If [START MACHIN] is pressedwhen STOPPED is displayed at the lower–right corner of the screen,drawing resumes from where it stopped.

<GRAPH> Ignored.

[GRAPH PARAM] Displays the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen.

<REWIND> Pressed to start drawing at the beginning of the program.

[SINGLE] Draws the tool path for one block then stops.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 352 –

The center path of a tool specified in a part program can be drawn according to the procedure below.

(1) To start a new drawing, set the necessary parameters according to Chapter 11.12.2.

(2) Select the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen, then set the necessary data.

(3) When the part program to be drawn is not stored in memory, load it into memory. M02 or M30 must bespecified at the end of the part program.

(4) Press the [REWIND] soft key to call the part program to be drawn.

(5) Press the [START MACHIN] soft key to start drawing. If STOPPED is not displayed in the lower–right cor-ner of the screen, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. When drawing is in progress, DRWINGis displayed in the lower–right corner of the CRT screen. If the screen is switched, drawing stops. To re-sume drawing, return to the graphic screen, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.

(6) To stop drawing temporarily, specify M00 in the middle of the part program beforehand, or press the STOPsoft key. STOPPED is then displayed in the lower–right corner of the CRT screen. To resume drawing,press the [START MACHIN] soft key. To resume drawing from the beginning of the program, press the[REWIND] soft key, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.

(7) When the last part (M02 or M30) of the part program is executed, drawing stops, and DRWING is no longerdisplayed. The drawn tool path is retained until the [ERASE] key is pressed, the graphic is used by anotherfunction, another tool path is drawn, or the power is turned off.

11.12.5 Figure to be drawn

In the case of rapid traverse, a tool path is drawn at a speed proportional to the rapid traverse speed set in aparameter for machining. Note that a straight line is drawn for the rapid traverse of linear interpolation.

A tool path for helical cutting can also be drawn.

11.12.6 Start coordinates and position

The system determines the start point of the tool path in a program according to two cases.

(1) When G92, G52, or G92.1 is specified

If G92, G52, or G92,1 is followed by an initial movement command, the point specified in G92, G52, orG92.1 defines the start point.

(2) When G92, G52, and G92.1 are not specified

If an initial movement command is specified without specifying G92, G52, and G92.1, the coordinates ofthe end point of the initial movement command in the workpiece coordinate system define the start point.

11.12.7 Drawing position after the start of drawing

The tool path is drawn according to a specified amount of movement.

(1) Ignored functions

Blocks that include G04 (dwell), G10 (offset setting), G20 and G21 (inch/metric switching), ATC M06, andG22 and G23 (stored stroke limit on/off) are ignored.

For G28 and G30, the tool path is drawn to an intermediate point. For G29, the tool path is drawn from anintermediate point.

The secondary miscellaneous functions M, S, T, and B are ignored.

When G27 is specified, the system does not check if the tool is returned to the reference point.

The system does not check the tool position according to the stored stroke limit.

(2) Block for which a cycle is not performed

For a block that includes G31 (skip function) or G60 (unidirectional positioning), the cycle is not performed.Instead, drawing proceeds to the end point.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 353 –

(3) Custom macros

(a) I/O commands to DI/DO using #1000 to #1035 and #1100 to 1135 (interface signals) are ignored.

#1000 to #1035 are assumed to be set to 0.

The contents of #1100 to #1135 are not output. #1100 to #1135, when referenced, are assumed tobe set to 0.

(b) #2000 to #2799 (tool offset value) cannot be used to change the offset.

(c) #5201 to #5335 (workpiece reference point offset) and #2500 to #2806 (workpiece reference pointoffset of FS6 type) cannot be used to change the offset of the workpiece reference point.

(d) No message is displayed by #3000 (alarm message), but the warning NC STATEMENT ERROR (B.G)is displayed, and drawing does not proceed any further.

(e) #3001 and #3002 (clock) are ignored.

Therefore, note that drawing does not proceed any further when, for example, the following is speci-fied:

#3001 = 0 :

WHILE [#3001 LE 100] D01 ;

END1 ;

(f) The values of #5001 to #5104 (position information) are undefined.

(g) The variables #1 to #33, #100 to #199, and #500 to #699 set in a program being drawn are notassociated with the machining program, and have no effect on machining.

(h) The values of the common variables (#500 to #699), which are not cleared when the power is turnedoff, can be changed in the program to be drawn, but the new values are cleared when the power isturned off.

(i) #700 to #999 can be referenced in the program being drawn, but no data can be written to #700 to#999.

(j) The macro–based print command, punch command, and SETVN command are not executed.

11.12.8 Graphic shift

See the description of graphic shift in Subsec. 11.6.3.

11.12.9 Graphic enlargement

See the description of graphic enlargement in Subsec. 11.6.5.

11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing

(1) Local variables: Null

(2) Macro variables: Foreground values are set in #100 to #199 and #500 to #599.

(3) Workpiece coordinate offsets: Foreground values are set in COMMON and G54 to G59.

(4) Tool offsets: Foreground values are set only for three offsets set by the parameters.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 354 –

11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function

Waveform diagnosis functions are classified into the following two types:

(1) Single–shot type

This type of waveform diagnosis function enables graphic display of waveforms that represent variationsin the following data items.

This function can generate triggers for sampling data when a machine control signal rises or falls. Thisfacilitates the adjustment of servo and spindle motors.

[Data items for servos]

Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, andcomposite speed for all axes

[Data items for spindles]

The speed of each spindle and the value of the load meter for each spindle

[Data items for signals]

On or off states of machine control signals specified by signal addresses

NOTE Up to two data items and up to four signals can be sampled simultaneously.

(2) Servo–alarm type

This type of waveform diagnosis function triggers terminating data sampling when a servo alarm occursor when the specified machine signal rises or falls. The termination of data sampling can be delayed bya specified time since the trigger is generated, thus facilitating detection of faults.

Recorded data items can be input or output to or from an external device using the reader/punch interface.

[Data items for servos]

Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, andcomposite velocity for all axes

[Data items for spindles]

None

[Data items for signals]

None

NOTE Up to four data items can be sampled simultaneously. The maximum number of data itemssampled cannot be specified on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. See the laterdescription of parameters.

11.13.1 Screens

Three display screens are provided for the waveform diagnosis function. This section describes how to displayeach screen.

(1) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then pressthe operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in (1) are displayed.

Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-played. On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in (2) are displayed.

1

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 355 –

STOP

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK

WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH)000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

WAVE1.X2.Y

0 500 1000 1500 TIME(MS)

00

SHIFT CHAPTER

PARAME-TER

PUNCHREADERASETRACE

(2) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen and WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen

��

��

� � � �

While these soft keys are displayed, press the [PARAMETER] or [SHIFT] key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS(PARAMETER) screen or WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. In this case, the operationselection soft keys in 3 or 4 are displayed.

� ��

��

� �

��↑

��↓

��↑

��↓

��

��

� �

Pressing the [SET END] key redisplays the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK

CHAPTER

WAVE DIAGNOSIS(PARAMETER) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

CONDITION = 0 DI/DO = X001.1TRIGGER = X010.1 X001.2DELAY TIME = 1000 X001.3

X001.4TIME RANGE = 0(25,50,100,200,400,800MS)ZERO SIFT = 0

(WAVE 1) (WAVE 2)DATA KIND = 0 DATA KIND = 1DATA RANGE = 1 DATA RANGE = 2DATA COLOR = 1000 DATA COLOR = 1000

INPUT SETEND

WAVE COLOR = 1 WAVE COLOR = 2

2

3

4

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 356 –

0 500 1000 1500 TIME(MS)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK

WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

WAVE1.X2.Y

CHAPTER

WAVE 2↓

WAVE2↑

WAVE1↓

WAVE1↑

SETEND

X001.1

X001.2

X001.3

X001.4

00

11.13.2 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling

As described above, waveform diagnosis functions are classified into two types: the single–shot type and ser-vo–alarm type. Items to be set for these types are different. See the description in item (i) for how to use thesingle–shot waveform diagnosis function. See the description in item (ii) for how to use the servo–alarm wave-form diagnosis function.

(i) Single–shot waveform diagnosis

(1) CONDITION

Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen.

0 : Starts sampling data the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed.

1 : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal rises after the [TRACE] key is pressed.

2 : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal falls after the [TRACE] key is pressed.

NOTE When no trigger signal is specified, 1 and 2 are assumed to be 0.

(2) TRIGGER

Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to a trigger signal in the TRIGGER field on theWAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7, Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

(3) TIME RANGE

Enter 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, or 800 in the TIME RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-TER) screen. The sampling time is specified as 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, or 16.0 s.

The sampling time determines not only sampling conditions, but also graph display conditions.

(4) DATA KIND

Select the type of waveform to be traced and enter your choice in the DATA TYPE field on the WAVEDIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)

1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulses, command units)

2 : Servo torque (%)

5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)

6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)

7 : Data during heat simulation (%)

9 : Composite speed for all axes (mm/min or rpm)

10 : Spindle speed (rpm)

11 : Load meter for a spindle (%)

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 357 –

NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented aspercentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979. Spindle speed refers to thespeed of a digital spindle only.

�� –

�� !�� !��

��

��

+

��

(5) AXIS ASSIGN

Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen.

[When 1 to 7 is specified as the waveform type]

1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number

[When 9 is specified as the waveform type]

1 or 2: For Series 15–MB, specify 1.

[When 10 or 11 is specified as the waveform type]

1 or 2: Spindle amplifier number

(6) DI/DO

Enter the PMC address and bit number of the external input/output signal to be traced in the DI/DOfield on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7,Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

(7) DATA RANGE

Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE fieldon the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

(8) ZERO SHIFT

Enter the value for the zero point (–10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNO-SIS (PARAMETER) screen.

(9) WAVE COLOR

Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-TER) screen.

1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White

(ii) Waveform diagnosis of servo–alarm type

1 CONDITION

Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen.

100 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressedand terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs.

101 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressedand terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal rises.

102 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressedand terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal falls.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 358 –

2 TRIGGER

Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to the trigger signal specified in the TRIGGERfield on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7, Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

3 DELAY TIME

Enter the time (0 to 32000 ms) in the DELAY TIME field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen. This setting specifies how long actual termination of tracing is delayed since the tracing ter-mination condition is satisfied.

4 DATA KIND

Select the types of waveforms to be traced from the following and enter the settings in parameters4640, 4641, 4645, and 4646 on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

For details, see the later description of parameters.

0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)

1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulse, command units)

2 : Servo torque (%)

5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)

6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)

7 : Data during heat simulation (%)

NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented aspercentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979.

5 AXIS ASSIGN

Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen.

1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number

6 DATA RANGE

Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE fieldon the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

7 ZERO SHIFT

Enter the value for the zero point (–10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNO-SIS (PARAMETER) screen.

8 WAVE COLOR

Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-TER) screen.

1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White

11.13.3 Starting or terminating data sampling

(1) Starting data sampling

Press the [TRACE] key. The system enters the sampling–enabled state (trace mode).

(2) Terminating data sampling

Press the [STOP] key. When data is being sampled, data sampling is terminated.

11.13.4 Waveform display

As soon as data is sampled, it is displayed in the form of a graph on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen.For servo–alarm types, the date and time at the end of data sampling are displayed at the top of the screen.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 359 –

11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform

The waveform representing the sampled data can be edited using the following operations to make it easierto view.

(1) Specifying the waveform type (only for the servo–alarm type)

To display data items sampled with the servo–alarm waveform diagnosis function, specify the waveformtype specified in parameters 4640 and 4641 as the type of the 1st waveform and the waveform type speci-fied in parameters 4645 and 4646 as the type of the 2nd waveform.

(2) Specifying the display range of the vertical axis

To enlarge or reduce the display range of the vertical axis, enter a value per graduation in the DATA RANGEfield on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

(3) Specifying the display range of the horizontal axis

To enlarge or reduce the display range of the horizontal axis, enter a time per graduation in the TIMERANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

(4) Specifying the value of the zero point

To move the display range for the vertical axis up or down, enter the desired value of the zero point in theZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.

(5) Moving the zero point

press the [SHIFT] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH) screen is displayed. To move the position of the zero point in the graph up and down, press the[WAVE 1 ↑ ], [WAVE 1 ↓ ], [WAVE 2 ↑ ], and [WAVE 2 ↓ ] keys on the screen.

11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveformTo erase the waveform being displayed, press the [ERASE] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)screen. Once a waveform is erased, it cannot be displayed again.

11.13.7 Waveform data input/outputThe servo–alarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to an output device via the reader/punch inter-face controlled in the foreground. Also servo–alarm type waveform diagnosis data that was output can be inputfrom an input device.

(1) Type of waveform diagnosis data to input or output

Servo–alarm type diagnosis data items are classified into the following six types. Diagnostic data itemsare recorded for four waveforms (two waveform types for any two axes).

1. Positional deviation2. Move command3. Actual electric current4. Actual speed5. Electric current command6. Heat simulation

(2) Outputting waveform diagnosis data

When the [PUNCH] operation key is pressed, servo–alarm diagnostic data recorded by the CNC controlleris output. Diagnostic data consists of all the data on four waveforms.

Even when a single–shot waveform is displayed after servo–alarm type data is traced, the CNC controllerstill stores the previous servo–alarm waveform diagnosis data.

In this case, pressing the [PUNCH] key outputs the waveform diagnosis data currently recorded, namely,the latest servo–alarm waveform diagnosis data.

Waveform diagnosis data cannot be output under the following conditions:

⋅During automatic operation

⋅While servo–alarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled

⋅While the input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used

⋅When servo–alarm type data has not been traced since the power was turned on

(3) Inputting waveform diagnosis data

When waveform diagnosis data that was output is input to the CNC controller, the servo–alarm waveformdiagnosis data recorded by the CNC controller is replaced with the input waveform diagnosis data.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 360 –

When the waveform diagnosis data has been input and the waveform diagnosis graph screen is displayed,graphs are displayed automatically according to the graph display parameter for waveform diagnosis usedwhen waveform diagnosis data was output.

Graphs are also displayed when the waveform diagnosis graph screen chapter is selected on a screenother than the graph screen.

Waveform diagnosis data cannot be input under the following conditions:

⋅During automatic operation

⋅ While servo–alarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled

⋅While an input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used

(4) Input/output format of waveform diagnosis data

This item shows the input/output format of waveform diagnosis data for reference.

When data output from the CNC controller is used as input, there is no need to care about the input/outputformat.

NOTE The input/output format is subject to change without notice.

⋅ T (identifier word) ⋅A (axis–number word)

T0: Header

T69: Date and time of the start or end of tracing ⋅D (waveform–data word)

T60: Positional deviation

T61: Move command ⋅C (character–data word)

T62: Actual electric current

T63: Actual speed

T64: Electric current command

T65: Heat simulation

1 T0: Header

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

C: Character–data word

2 T60: Date and time of the start or end of tracing

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

D*...*: Date and time of the start or end of tracing

Example D19921031,230859; indicates 23:08:59 on October 31, 1992.

3 Identifier word and axis–number word

� � � � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Pairs of identifier and axis–number words specify the order to input waveform data blocks in 4.

The above example shows that waveform data blocks are input in the following order: Positional devi-ation waveform data for the 1st axis, actual electric current waveform data for the 1st axis, positionaldeviation waveform data for the 3rd axis, electric current command waveform data for the 3rd axis

4 Waveform data block

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

D: Indicates the beginning of a waveform data block. Each data item is separated by a comma(,). Each block has data for every 8 ms. These blocks continue to be generated for 16 seconds.

→� � ��

��→

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 361 –

(5) Inputting and outputting waveform diagnosis data

� � ��8��

��8��

�� 8��

�� !��!

�!��

� ��

��

�

�

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then pressthe operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in 1 are displayed.

Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-played.

On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in 2 are displayed.

��

��

�

� �� 0� 40� �� 0� 40� �

When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed, operation guidance key is displayed.

When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed after a file name or file number is input using the key–inbuffer, processing starts immediately.

� ��"� ��

��

� � ��0� 40� �� +(� �� 0� 40� �� 0� 40� �*#3� $''/� 12'33'&

�0� 40� �� +(� ��

� *#3� $''/� 12'33'&�

� ��

��0� 40� �� +(� �� *#3� $''/� 12'33'&� �(� 4*'� ��"� �� 02� �� 30(4� ,'7�

�0� 40� �� +(� �� *#3� $''/� 12'33'&� *#3� $''/� 12'33'&�� '/4'2� #� (+-'� /#.'� 02� (+-'

� /5.$'2� 6+4*� 4*'� �� ,'73�� 4*'/� 12'33� 4*'�

� �� ,'7�

��

��4013� 2'#&+/)� #/&� &+31-#73� 30(4� ,'73� +/� ��

��

�� 4013� (''&+/)� 1#1'2� 4#1'�� +(� +4� +3� $'+/)� ('&�� #/&� 34#243� 15/%*+/)�

�4013� 15/%*+/)� #/&� &+31-#73� 30(4� ,'73� +/� ��

NOTE 1 When the start condition and axis number are specified again to edit the displayed waveformsafter waveform data is sampled, the original waveforms are not displayed again.

NOTE 2 The single–shot type and servo–alarm waveform diagnosis functions have different settingfields on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. For instance, the DI/DO field isprovided only for the single–shot waveform diagnosis function, and the DELAY TIME field isprovided only for the servo–alarm waveform diagnosis function.

For the single–shot waveform diagnosis function, the smaller the setting of the TIME RANGEfield, the shorter the sampling time. This allows a large numbers of short cycles to be specifiedfor sampling. For the servo–alarm waveform diagnosis function, each sampling cycle isalways 8 ms regardless of the setting of the TIME RANGE field.

1

2

3

4

5

6

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 362 –

11.14 Help Function

The help function displays detailed information about the alarm state of the CNC unit and soft key operationsin a window on the CRT screen. This function can display the following:

(1) Alarm help

Alarms are issued when the operator makes an error in operating the CNC unit or a failure occurs in theCNC unit. The help function explains the cause and location of the error in detail. It also explains actionto be taken to cancel the alarm condition.

(2) Soft key help

The soft keys displayed on the CRT screen depend on the operating state of the CNC unit. The help func-tion explains in detail the function of each soft key that is currently displayed. It describes when a soft keyneeds to be pressed and what happens to the CNC unit when the key is pressed.

While operating the CNC unit, the operator can obtain necessary information from the window on the CRTscreen without referring to the operator’s manual.

11.14.1 Operation

(1) Displaying and erasing the help window

To use the help function, press the [HELP] key (<SHIFT>+<EOB>) on the MDI panel. On a 9–inch CRTscreen, the help window is displayed at the center. On a 14–inch CRT screen, the help window is displayedin the top–right corner. To erase the help window from a CRT screen, press the [HELP] key again or select”9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW” from the initial help menu. The previous screen is redisplayed.

��

��

(2) Selecting an option from the menu

Unless the CNC is in the alarm state, the initial help menu is displayed when the [HELP] key is pressedin the initial state (usual screen display). One of the following three options can be selected from the initialhelp menu: ”1. ALARM,” ”2. SOFT KEY,” and ”9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW.” Move the cursor to an optionand press the [INPUT] key.

1.ALARM2.SOFT KEY

9.CLOSE HELP WINDOW

HELP INITIAL MENU

HELP ROM SER.:AH00 EDT.:01

(SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)

Fig. 11.14.1(a) Initial Help Menu (14–Inch CRT)

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 363 –

(3) Alarm help

If ”1. Alarm” is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists alarm types (alarm selection display).Move the cursor to PS, GB, SR, or any other alarm type, enter an alarm number using the key–in buffer,and press the [INPUT] key. The window shows detailed information on the selected alarm (detailed alarmdisplay). When the [INPUT] key is pressed again, the window returns to the alarm selection display.

For detailed alarm display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. By pressing these keys, the pre-vious or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used to see thenext part of a help message.

ALARM SELECTION

:FOREGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM.BG :BACKGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM.SR :SERIOUS PROGRAM/SETTING ALARMOH :OVER HEAT ALARMSB :SUB CPU ALARMSW :PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON ALM.OT :OVERTRAVEL ALARM

1.ALARM

PC :PMC ALARMSV :SERVO ALARMIO :I/O ALARMPW :POWER OFF PARAMETER SET ALARM

(SELECT BY CURSOR & INPUT NUMBER)

ALARM NO. :PS010DIVISION :GENERAL

AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED INA NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSOOCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,EVEN IF A G CODE IS PROPER.

1.ALARM

(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

PS

Fig. 11.14.1(b) Sample Alarm Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(c) Sample Detailed Alarm Display(14–Inch CRT) (14–Inch CRT)

NOTE Arrows ( on the 14–inch CRT screen) or minus and plus signs ( on the 9–inch CRT

screen) at the top–right corner of the window indicate that the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN]keys can be used.

↑↓

–+

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 364 –

(4) Soft key help

When ”2. SOFT KEY” is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists the soft keys (soft key selec-tion display). Move the cursor to a soft key displayed in the window and press the [INPUT] key. The windowshows detailed information on the soft key (detailed soft key display). When the [INPUT] key is pressedagain, the window returns to the soft key selection display.

For detailed soft key display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. When these keys are pressed,the previous or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used tosee the next part of a help message.

SOFTKEY SELECTION

NO.1POSITION

NO.6SERVICE

2.SOFT KEY

KEY STATUS : FUNCTION SELECTION


NO.1KEY STATUS

:FUNCTION SELECTION

2.SOFTKEY

*OVERALL POSITION SCREEN*RELATIVE POSITION SCREEN(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

NO.2PROGRAM

NO.7MESSAGE

NO.3OFFSET

NO.8GRAPHIC

NO.4PRGRAMCHECK

NO.9

NO.5SETTING

NO.10CHAPTER

DISPLAYED KEY ISCURRENTLY SELECTED FUNCTION.

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THESCREEN RELATIVE TO THE POSITIONDISPLAY.YOU CAN SELECT THE DETAILEDSCREENS, WHEN YOU PRESS THIS KEYFOR SEVERAL TIMES OR PRESS“CHAPTER” KEY SO AS TO CHANGE SOFTKEY STATE TO CHAPTER SELECTION.

��

↑↓

↓REVERSE

Fig. 11.14.1(d) Sample Soft Key Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(e) Sample Detailed Soft Key Display (14–Inch CRT) (14–Inch CRT)

NOTE An arrow ( on the 14–inch CRT screen) or a plus sign ( on the 9–inch CRT screen) at the bottom–right corner of the window indicates that the message continues beyond thewindow.

↓ +

(5) Returning to the initial help menu

To return to the initial help menu from a help window, press the [SHIFT] key and enter 9. Even in the alarmstate described in (7) below, soft key help can be selected from the initial help menu.

(6) Deleting a window from the initial help menu

When ”9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW” is selected, the help window is erased.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 365 –

(7) Using the help function in the alarm state

When the [HELP] key is pressed when an alarm occurs in the initial state (usual screen display), the initialhelp menu is not displayed. Instead, the detailed help window for the current alarm is displayed. Whentwo or more alarms occurred, information on the state of the alarm not currently displayed can be displayedby pressing the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key. At the top–right corner of the window, the total numberof current alarms (m) and the number of the current message (n) are indicated in the format n/m. In Fig.11.14.1(f), the message regarding the first of two alarms (PS010, OT008) is displayed. When the [INPUT]key is pressed in the detailed alarm display state, the window lists current alarms (alarm list display). Toreturn to detailed alarm display, move the cursor to an alarm and press the [INPUT] key.

ALARM NO.:PS010 01/02DIVISION :GENERAL

AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED INA NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSOOCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,EVEN IF A CODE IS PROPER.

1.ALARM

(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

↑↓ CURRENT ALARM LIST

1.ALARM


PS010 OT008

Fig. 11.14.1(f) Sample Detailed Alarm Display Fig. 11.14.1(g) Sample Alarm List Display (14–Inch CRT) in the Alarm State (14–Inch CRT) in the Alarm State

(8) Enabling or disabling the cursor (only for a 14–inch CRT)

The frame of a help window is first displayed in green. In this state, the cursor can be moved only withinthe help window. The cursor displayed on the original screen is erased.

If the [SHIFT] key is then pressed twice, the cursor is erased from the window and restored on the originalscreen. In this state, the frame of the window is displayed in white. By pressing the [SHIFT] key twice, thecursor can be moved to the help window or to the original screen. When the cursor is in the right half ofthe original screen, the help window is shifted to the left. The operator can edit the program and specifyparameters while the help window is open.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 366 –

11.14.2 Help window states

By pressing keys, the help window state is changed as shown below:

�)%.%�'� -.�.!�

�/-/�'� -�,!!)� %-+'�0�

�)%.%�'� $!'+(!)/

'�,(-!'!�.%*)

�*".� &!0-!'!�.%*)

�!.�%'! �'�,(

�!.�%'! -*".� &!0

'�,(� '%-.

�� &!0

� '�,(� -.�.!�

��

��

&!0

��

&!0

�� &!0

�)��'%)#� *,� %-��'%)#� .$!��/,-*,�� *)'0� "*,� �� %)�$��

�� &!0

��&!0

��&!0

�/,-*,� �) �� &!0

�� &!0

�↓��&!0�

�↑��&!0�

�↓��&!0�

�↑��&!0�

�/,-*,� �) �� &!0

�/,-*,� �) �� &!0

�/,-*,� �) �� &!0

Fig. 8 Help Window States

The dotted box indicates the area in which the help window is displayed. When the <HELP> key is

pressed in this state, the help window is closed and the initial state is restored.

⋅The help window is not displayed on the PMC, MMC, or conversational macro screen. If the screen isswitched to one of these three screens while the help window is displayed, the help window is erased.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 367 –

11.15 Operation History

This function always collects history data for keys pressed by the NC operator, the states of signals set by theNC operator, and alarms that occurred. In addition, this function enables the operator to monitor history datawhen necessary.

The main features of this function are:

(1) Collecting the following history data items:

(a) Procedures in which the NC operator presses MDI keys

(b) Changes in the states (on or off) of the input/output signals

(c) Alarm data

(d) Time stamp (time and date)

(2) Searching for the following data items:

(a) Input/output signals

(b) Alarm data

(c) Time and date

(3) Outputting the following data items (punch–out):

(a) All history data items

(b) A selected range of history data items

(4) Selecting signals

Up to 20 input/output signals can be selected for history data collection.

(5) Alarm history data check

Details of alarm history data, including the time and date of alarm occurrence, can be checked.

11.15.1 Operation history

(1) Soft keys

(a) Soft keys for the 9–inch CRT

(i) Function selection keys

��

��

��

(ii) Chapter selection keys

��

(iii) Operation selection keys

When the OPE_HIS soft key is pressed

��

��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 368 –

(iv) Operation guidance key

When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed

��

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed

��

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed

��

When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed

��

When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed

��

(b) Soft keys for the 14–inch CRT


POSITION

PROGRAM

OFFSET PROGRAMCHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

CHAPTER �

HISTRY CHAPTER �


OPERATHISTRY

DIDOSELECT

ALARMHISTRY �


TOP LAST SERACH PUNCH ERASE

(iv) Operation instruction key

When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed

��

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed

FRWRDSERACH

BKWRDSERACH �

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 369 –

When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed

��

When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed

EXEC CANCEL

(2) Display procedure

(a) Press the [HISTRY] soft key during function selection.

(b) The OPERATION HISTORY screen is displayed.

History data items are displayed in order from oldest to newest.

On the 9–inch CRT, one page contains forty history data items, and on the 14–inch CRT, one pagecontains ninety.

NOTE The number of display lines varies according to the history data type. For details, see item(4).

(c) The following soft keys are used as operation selection keys.

(i) TOP

Displays the first page of history data, which starts with oldest history data item.

(ii) LAST

Displays the last page of history data, which ends with the newest history data item.

(iii) SEARCH

Searches for a particular type of history data item. For details, see item(5).

(iv) PUNCH

Outputs history data. For details, see item(6).

(v) ERASE

Erases history data. For details, see item(7).

(d) Press the [SEARCH] soft key (one of the above operation selection keys). Any of the following dataitems can be searched for. For details, see item(5).

(i) DIDO

Searches for signal history data.

(ii) ALARM

Searches for alarm history data.

(iii) TIME

Searches for time history data.

(iv) FW_SRCH

Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data issearched for forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer history data).

(v) BW_SRCH

Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data issearched for backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older history data).

(e) Press the [PUNCH] soft key selected (one of the operation selection keys). The following operationinstruction keys are displayed. For details, see item(6).

(i) ALL

Outputs all history data items.

(ii) PART

Outputs some history data items.

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 370 –

(iii) EXEC

Starts punch–out.

(f) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation instructionkeys are displayed. For details, see item(7).

(i) EXEC

Executes erasing.

(ii) CANCEL

Cancels erasing.

(3) OPERATION HISTORY screen

The smaller the number of a history data item, the older it is.

9–inch CRT

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 00:00:00 ***

PUNCHSEARCHLASTTOP CHAP-TER

OPERATION HISTORY O0001 N00001

NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA01 PW 000 11 5 21 G003.3 ↓ 31 G02 92/08/25 12 [SOFT 5] 22 G003.4 ↑ 32 903 08:40:00 13 1 23 [SOFT 2] 33 004 <RESET> 14 0 24 O 34 X05 G003.5 ↓ 15 0 25 0 35 406 G003.3 ↑ 16 0 26 0 36 507 [SOFT 6] 17 [SOFT 1] 27 0 37 608 2 18 <RESET> 28 1 38 .09 2 19 92/08/25 29 [SOFT 2] 39 F10 0 20 08:41:36 30 ; 40 1

(4) Data displayed

(a) MDI key data

(i) Address keys and numeric keys: A to Z, 0 to 9, semicolon (;), plus (+), minus (–), etc.

(ii) Page keys and cursor keys: <PAGE↑>, <CUR↑>, <CUR←>, etc.

(iii) Operation menu keys and soft keys: [LEFT.F], [SOFT 1], [RIGH.F], etc.

(iv) Other keys: <RESET> <CAN>, etc.

(v) Keys used when the power is turned on: <RESET>, etc.

Items in (i) are displayed after a space.

Items in (ii), (iv), and displayed (v) are displayed enclosed in symbols. (< >)

Items in (iii) are displayed enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).

Data items in (v) are displayed in reverse video.

MDI–key data items are each displayed on one line.

(b) Input/output signal data

Input/output signal data is displayed in the following format:

G 0 0 0 . 7 ↑An up arrow (↑ ) indicates that the state of the signal changed from off to on.A down arrow (↓ ) indicates that the state of the signal changed from on to off.

Bit number

Address

Input/output signal data items are each displayed on one line.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 371 –

(c) Alarm data

Alarm data items are displayed in reverse video.

Only the type and number of an alarm are displayed on the OPERATION HISTORY screen.

P S 0 0 3

Alarm number

Alarm type

Alarm data items are displayed over three lines. The number and type of the alarm are displayed on thefirst line, and the date and time when the alarm occurred are displayed on the next two lines.

(d) Time and date

The following times and dates are collected and displayed as history data.

i) Time and date when the power was turned on

92/08/3011:30:32

ii) Time and date when the power was turned off

92/08/3011:55:16

iii) Time and date when an NC alarm occurred

92/08/3011:33:48

iv) Time and date when the time and/or date was changed

92/08/3100:00:00

5 Time and date at constant intervals

92/08/3011:45:32

Specify this interval in parameter 7765.

NOTE Even when the above parameter is set, the time and date are not collected if no other historydata (keys, signals, etc.) is collected within the specified interval.

The time and date are displayed over two lines.

The data items in ii) to (v) are displayed in reverse video.

(5) Searching for a history data item

Pressing the [SEARCH] key (one of the operation selection keys) enables the following data items to besearched for.

(i) Signal data item

(a) Press the [DIDO] key.

(b) Use one of the following search methods:

1 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F), address, decimal point (.), and bit number.

Example G3.5

When the entered signal type, address, and bit number agree with those of a history data item,that history data item is found.

2 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address.

Example G3

When the entered signal type and address agree with those of a history data item, that historydata item is found.

3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F).

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 372 –

Example G

When the entered signal type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data itemis found.

(ii) Alarm data item

(a) Press the [ALARM] key.

(b) Use one of the following search methods:

1 Enter an alarm type and alarm number with keys.

Example OT7

When the entered alarm type and alarm number agree with those of a history data item, thathistory data item is found.

2 Enter an alarm type with keys.

Example OT

When the entered alarm type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item isfound.

(iii) Time data

(a) Press the [TIME] key.

(b) Use the following search method.

Enter month/date/hour/minute with keys. Less significant data can be omitted as shown in theexample below.

Example Month/date/hour/minute: 08/26/13/24Month/date/hour: 08/26/13Month/date: 08/26Month: 08

NOTE Enter the month, date, hour, and minute with two digits each.

After the above operations do the following:

To search for a history data item forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer histo-ry data), press the [FW_SRCH] soft key.

To search for a history data item backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older his-tory data), press the [BW_SRCH] soft key.

NOTE Searching forward for a history data item terminates at the most recent history data item (lastdata item). Searching backward for a history data item terminates at the oldest history dataitem (first data item). If the specified history data item is not found, a warning is issued.

When the specified history data item is found during searching, the page of history data items that con-tains the specified history data item is displayed. The line number of the specified history data itemis displayed in reverse video. Subsequently, this history data item is used as the (search pointer) dur-ing searching. When searching has not yet been performed, the oldest history data item (first data)is used as the search pointer. The search pointer is also used during partial punching–out.

Once history data has been searched for, the search pointer is kept until the power is turned off. Whenthe memory for history data items becomes full, the first data in the history is automatically used asthe search pointer.

(6) Outputting history data

History data can be output to the host computer via the RS–232–C interface.

(a) Press the [PUNCH] soft key (one of the operation selection keys) on the OPERATION HISTORYscreen.

(b) The following punching–out can be performed:

(i) Complete punch–out

Press the [ALL] soft key, then press the [EXEC] soft key. All history data items are output.

(ii) Partial punch–out

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 373 –

1 Before starting partial punch–out, use the search function to determine the reference points forstarting and ending partial punch–out. The search pointer is used as (reference history data item)for partial punch–out.

For details on searching, see item(5).

2 Specify the number of display lines of history data items to output.

For details on display lines, see item(4).

Example 1 To output 100 history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the[PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key.

Example 2 To output 100 history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the[PART] soft key, enter –100, then press the [EXEC] soft key.

Example 3 To output all history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the [PART]soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key.

Example 4 To output all history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the[PART] soft key, enter –9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key.

NOTE 1 History data items are always output in the foreground.

NOTE 2 The valid data range for partial punching is –9999 to 9999 excluding 0. 9999 and –9999 havethe meanings described in the above examples.When the number of history data items is less than the absolute value of the value entered, theentered numeric value is handled as if it were 9999 or –9999.

(c) History data items are output in ASCII code in the following format.

(i) MDI key

Example When the [A] key is pressed

[MDI] key pushed A LF

(ii) DI/DO

Example 1 When the state of G003.5 changes from off to on

DI/DO changed G3.5_ON LF

Example 2 When different signals with the same address are changed at the same time

DI/DO changed F0.6_ONF0.1_OFF LF

(iii) Alarm

Example When the alarm, ”PW000 TURN OFF THE POWER” occurs

Alarm! PW0 at ’92/8/30 23:17:56 LF

(iv) Time

Example 1 At 23:17:56 on August 30, 1992

’92/8/30 23:17:56 LF

Example 2 When the power is turned on

’92/8/30 23:17:56 Power On LF

(d) Communication protocol

Refer to the case where the NC sends data in ”Transmission Method for the RS–232–C Interface” inthe FANUC Series 15–B Operator’s Manual (Appendixies).

(7) Erasing history data

(a) Press the [OPE_HIS] soft key (one of the chapter selection keys).

(b) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys).

(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key (one of the operation instruction keys).

When the [EXEC] soft key is pressed by mistake during selection, press the [CANCEL] soft key.

When operation history data is erased, the date and time it was erased is recorded at the beginningof new history data.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 374 –

11.15.2 Selecting signals

(1) Soft keys



��

��

��


��


When the [DIOSLCT] soft key is pressed

��

��

(iv) Operation guidance keys

When the [CLEAR] or [ALL_CLR] is pressed

��



POSITION

PROGRAM

OFFSET PROGRAMCHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

CHAPTER �

HISTRY CHAPTER �


OPERATHISTRY

DIDOSELECT

ALARMHISTRY �


When the [DIDO SELECT] soft key is pressed

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 375 –

(iv) Operation guidance keys

When the [CLEAR] or [ALL CLEAR] soft key is pressed

EXEC CANCEL

(2) SELECT DI/DO screen

Up to 20 addresses can be used to select signals. Signals need not always be specified in sequence fromdata number 1.

MDI * * * STOP * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00 * * *

CLEAR ALL_CLR ON:1 OFF:0 CHAPTER +

DI/DO SELECT O0001 N0001

NO. ADDRESS SIGNAL NO. ADDRESS SIGNAL01 X000 00001000 11 G000 0000000102 X004 10000000 12 G004 0000001003 X008 00001100 13 G008 0000001104 X009 00111000 14 G003 0101110005 X012 00001111 15 G043 0010000106 Y000 01000000 16 F000 0110001007 Y004 00110000 17 ********08 Y007 00011100 18 ********09 Y008 00011100 19 ********10 Y010 00011100 20 F020 10101010

(3) Specifying data

1 Press the [HISTRY] soft key several times, or press the [CHAPTER] soft key followed by the [DIDOSELECT] soft key. The [SELECT DI/DO] screen is displayed.

2 Press the cursor keys [↑ ] or [↓ ] to move the cursor to the position to enter data.

3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address, then press the [INPUT] soft key.

Example Y4([INPUT] key)

Valid data range: G0 to G511, F0 to F319, X0 to X127, or Y0 to Y127

4 Specify signal address Y004 in the ADDRESS column, then set the SIGNAL column to the initial value(00000000).

5 The operation selection keys have the following functions:

(i) CLEAR

When the [CLEAR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, the signal data at the cursor isdeleted. The contents of the signal field is changed to ********, and the address field is cleared.When the [CLEAR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key.

(ii) ALL_CLR

When the [ALL_CLR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, all specified data items aredeleted. When the [ALL_CLR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key.

(iii) ON:1

Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 1.

(iv) OFF:0

Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 0.

(v) INPUT

This soft key is used to enter a signal address. It is also used to enter the value of the signal aftera signal address is entered.

NOTE Changes in signals cannot be deleted unless they continue for longer than 16ms.

��

��

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 376 –

11.15.3 Alarm history

(1) Soft keys



��

��

��


��


(iii) Function selection keys

POSITION

PROGRAM

OFFSET PROGRAMCHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

CHAPTER �

HISTRY CHAPTER �

(iv) Chapter selection keys

OPERATHISTRY

DIDOSELECT

ALARMHISTRY �

(2) Alarm history screen

9–inch CRT

MDI * * * STOP * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00 * * *

CHAPTER

ALARM HISTORY O0001 N00001

SW000 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON92/08/26 12:35:26OT007 X + OVERTRAVEL(HARD )92/08/27 08:40:180T008 X – OVERTRAVEL(HARD)92/08/27 08:40:18PW000 POWER MUST BE OFF92/08/27 08:45:32MC00192/08/28 09:20:50

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 377 –

(3) Display format of history data

History data items are displayed as follows:

OT 0 0 7 X + overtravel (hard limit)

Message text

Axis for which the alarm occurred

Alarm number

Alarm type

On the 14–inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence and alarm history data are displayed inthis order on a line. On the 9–inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence is displayed over twolines under the alarm history data.

NOTE 1 No message text is displayed for EX and MC alarms.

NOTE 2 When the values of parameter 1020 and 1021 are different from those when an alarm occurred,no correct axis data is not displayed.

11.15.4 Restrictions

(1) The operation history function does not collect history data items while the OPERATION HISTORY screenis being displayed.

(2) While the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed, the operation history function does not collecthistory data items even when the OPERATION HISTORY screen is changed to the PMC screen. This isbecause it is still assumed that the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed.

(3) Approx. 2040 <MDI> key history data items can be recorded in memory as history data. When memoryis full, older data items are deleted first.

(4) Specify the correct date and time on the setting screen.

(5) The number of signal addresses specified on the SELECT DI/DO screen affects the processing speed dur-ing automatic operation. Specify only the required signal addresses.

1

2

3

1

2

3

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 378 –

11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function

The function for displaying internal position compensation data displays the data used in the CNC for eachfunction while the following functions are executed:

Cutter compensation

Tool length compensation

Drilling canned cycle

Coordinate rotation

Three-dimensional coordinate conversion

Programmable mirror image

Scaling

Three-dimensional tool compensation

Operations

This function provides a screen for each of the above functions. How to display each screen is described below:

(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys 1.

(2) Press the function selection soft key [PRG_CHK] (9” CRT) or [COMMAND] (14” CRT) or the MDI panelkey [P- CHECK] and the operation menu key to display the chapter selection soft keys 2.

Pressing the chapter selection soft key [POS_DAT] (9” CRT) or [POS. DATA] (14” CRT) displays the POSI-TION DATA screen shown below. Then pressing the operation menu key displays the operation selectionsoft keys 3.

(3) Press the operation selection soft key corresponding to the screen you want to display. Subsequent pagesbriefly describe each screen.

Function selection keys on 9” CRT

��

↑

Chapter selection keys for program check on 9” CRT

��

↑Operation selection keys for positional compensation data on 9” CRT

��

Function selection keys on 14” CRT

��

PROGRAM OFFSET COMMAN

D SETTING SERVICE

MESSAGE ��

CHAPTER

↑

Chapter selection keys for program check on 14” CRT

�� ACTIVE ��

��

↑

Operation selection keys for position compensation data on 14” CRT

CUTTERCMPENS

TL LENOFFSET

CANNEDCYCLE

ROTATION

3 DIMCNVSON

PRGMBLMIRRORG

SCALING

3 DIMOFFSET

CHAPTER

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 379 –

[Cutter compensation screen]

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

POSITION DATA O0100 N0000

CUTTER COMPENSATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

OFFSET VECTOR Z 0.000 Z 0.000U 0.000 U 0.000

X 100.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

(G/D/H) (M) (T)

G91 G54 M02G01 G80G17 G64G41 G49 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

� [ON / OFF]

Displays ON in the cutter com-pensation mode and OFF inother modes.

[OFFSET VECTOR]

Displays the cutter com-pensation vector created foreach block.

[Tool length compensation screen]

[ON / OFF]Displays ON in the tool lengthcompensation mode andOFF in other modes.

[OFFSET VECTOR]Displays the tool length com-pensation vector created foreach block.

Remark)Tool length compensationcan be applied for any axisaccording to parameter set-ting and therefore data forall axes are displayed.

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


CUTTER COMPENSATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000


X 100.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000Z 300.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)U 0.000V 0.000 G91 G54 M02W 0.000 G01 G80

G17 G64G40 G43 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 380 –

[Canned cycle screen]

� � [ON / OFF]Displays ON in the drillingcanned cycle mode and OFFin other modes.

[INITIAL POINT]Displays the absolute positionof the initial point.

[POINT R]Displays the absolute positionof point R.

[POIN Z]Displays the absolute positionof point Z.

[NUMBER OF REPETITIONS]Displays the specified valueand current value of the num-ber of repetitions.

[CUT IN VALUE]Displays the depth of cut forG73 and G83.

[SHIFT VALUE]Displays the shift for G76 andG87.

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


CANNED CYCLE (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

INTIAL POINT N UMBER OF REPETITIONS Z 0.000 Z 0.000U 0.000 U 0.000

Z 0.000 L(CMD) 20 V 0.000 V 0.000L(ACT) 1 W 0.000 W 0.000

POINT R (G/D/H) (M) (T)CUT–IN VALUE

Z –200.000 G91 G54 M02G01 G76

POINT Z G17 G64SHIFT VALUE G40 G49 (L): 0

Z –200.000 D 0 H 0X 10.000Y 20.000 (F) 0 (ACT.F) 0

(S) (ACT.S) 0

[Coordinate rotation screen]

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

ROTATION CENTER Z 0.000 Z 0.000U 0.000 U 0.000

X 100.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

(G/D/H) (M) (T)ANGLE OF ROTATION

G91 G54 M02 90.00000 G01 G80

G17 G64G40 G49 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

� � [ON / OFF]

Displays ON in the coordinaterotation mod and OFF in othermodes.

[ROTATION CENTER]

Displays the absolute positionof the center of coordinaterotation.

[ANGLE OF ROTATION]

Displays the angle of coordi-nate rotation.

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 381 –

[Three-dimensional coordinate conversion screen]

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


3–DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

ROTATION CENTER Z 0.000 Z 0.000(FIRST) (SECOND) U 0.000 U 0.000X 1.000 X –1.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 2.000 Y –2.000 W 0.000 W 0.000Z 3.000 Z –3.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)

DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS OF POTATION G91 G54 M02(FIRST) (SECOND) G01 G80X 1.000 X –1.000 G17 G64Y 2.000 Y –2.000 G40 G49 (L): 0Z 3.000 Z –3.000 D 0 H 0

ROTATION ANGLE (F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(FIRST) (SECOND) (S) (ACT.S) 0 30.00000 –30.00000

� � [ON / OFF]Displays ON in the three-di-mensional coordinate conver-sion mode and OFF in othermodes.

[ROTATION CENTER]Displays the absolute positionof the rotation center for three-dimensional coordinate con-version.

[DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS OF ROTATION]

Displays the direction of therotation center axis for three-dimensional coordinate con-version

[ROTATION ANGLE]Displays the rotation angle forthree-dimensional coordinateconversion.

[Programmable mirror image screen]

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

MIRROR CENTER Z 0.000 Z 0.000U 0.000 U 0.000

X 100.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000Z 300.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)UV G91 G54 M02W G01 G80

G17 G64G40 G49 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

� � [ON / OFF]Displays ON in the program-mable mirror image mode andOFF in other modes.

[MIRROR CENTER]Displays the absolute posi-tion of the mirror axis.

� Remark)Nothing is displayed for axesalong which no mirror axis ex-ists. When 0 is displayed, itmeans that the mirror axis ex-ists at coordinate 0.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 382 –

[Scaling screen]

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


SCALING (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000

SCALING CENTER SCALING FACTOR Z 0.000 Z 0.000U 0.000 U 0.000

X 0.000 X 2.00000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 0.000 Y 2.00000 W 0.000 W 0.000Z 0.000 Z 2.00000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)U 0.000 U 1.00000V 0.000 V 1.00000 G91 G54 M02W 0.000 W 1.00000 G01 G80

G17 G64G40 G49 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

� � [ON / OFF]

Displays ON in the scalingmode and OFF in othermodes.

[SCALING CENTER]

Displays the absolute posi-tion of the scaling center.

[SCALE FACTOR]

Displays the scale factor foreach axis.

[Three- dimensional tool compensation screen]

3–DIMCNVSON

ROTATION

CANNEDCYCLE

TL LENOFFSET

CUTTERCMPENS

CHAPTER

3–DIMOFFSET

SCALING

PRGMBLMIRROR

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK


THREE–DIMENSIONAL TOOL OFFSET (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)ON/OFF

X 0.000 X 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000


X 1.000 V 0.000 V 0.000Y 2.000 W 0.000 W 0.000Z 3.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)

G91 G54 M02G01 G80G17 G64G41 G49 (L): 0D 0 H 0

(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0(S) (ACT.S) 0

� � [ON / OFF ]

Displays ON in the three-di-mensional tool compensationmode and OFF in othermodes.

� [OFFSET VECTOR]

Displays the three–dimen-sional tool compensaion vec-tor created for each block.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 383 –

11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function

The FANUC Series 15-B provides the following diagnostic displays for coordinate data:

(i) Display of the shift (*) of the coordinate system when manual intervention is applied with the manual abso-lute signal turned off during manual operation

(ii) Display of the shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manualsimultaneous function or other function

(iii) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is setwith a G92 command or MDI operation

(iv) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate systems set with a G52 command

(v) Display of the shift of the coordinate system due to a move command issued when the machine is in thelock state

Position� after� manual� in-tervention

S

S

Pn

Amount� of � manualintervention

PoPosition� before� � manual�intervention

Workpiece� � coordinate� � system� (G54)before� � manual� intervention

WZo� Origin� � of � � the� � workpiece� � � � � � � � � � � coordinate� � system� � before� manual� � � � � � � � � � � � intervention

WZn� Origin� � of � � the� � workpiece� � coordinate� �� system� after� � manual� � intervention

Workpiece� � coordinate� � sys-tem� (G54)� after� manual� in-tervention

Machine� � zero� point

Offset� of � the� � origin� of � theworkpiece� � coordinate� �system� for � � G54

Fig. 11.17 Coordinate System before and after Manual Intervention when the Manual Absolute Signal is Off

NOTE The shift is the distance the coordinate system moves along each axis (in the case of (i) forexample). Vector S in Fig. 11.17 in dicates the total shift along the axes.

Explanation

The workpiece coordinate system used for automatic operation is defined with several offsets.

The controlled axes, the machine coordinates, absolute coordinates, and offsets are related as fol lows:

[Machine coordinate]=[Absolute coordinate] + External workpiece zero point offset + Currently valid offset among those caused by G54 to G59+ Offset caused by G92 (1)+ Offset caused by G52 (2)+ Other data related to coordinates (3)

This function can display values (1), (2), and (3) above on the diagnosis screen.

B–62564E–1/0211. DISPLAY

– 384 –

The table below lists the diagnosis number of each data item related to the coordinates for each control axis.

Diagnosis No. Description

4100 Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation

4101 Shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic /manual simultaneous function or other function

4102 Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with aG92 command

4103 Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52command

4104 Shift of the coordinate system in the machine lock state

(1) Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation

Displays the shift in the coordinate system along each axis in manual operation with the manual absolutesignal turned off.

Diagnosis No. Indication Description

4100 MANUAL SHIFT

⋅⋅

Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operationalong the X-axis.

Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operationalong the Y-axis.

Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operationalong the Z-axis.

(2) Shift of the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual simultaneousfunction or other function.

Displays the amount of intervention caused by a manual interrupt along each axis.


4101 MANUAL SHIFT

⋅⋅

Displays the manual interrupt amount along the X-axis caused bythe automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.

Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Y-axis caused bythe automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.

Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Z-axis caused bythe automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.

(3) Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command.

Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G92 command.


4102 G92 OFFSET

⋅⋅

Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the X-axis ininput increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Y-axis ininput increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Z-axis ininput increments.

B–62564E–1/02 11. DISPLAY

– 385 –

(4) Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52 command.

Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G52 command.


4103 G92 OFFSET

⋅⋅

Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the X-axis ininput increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Y-axis ininput increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Z-axis ininput increments.

(5) Shift in the coordinate system in the machine lock state.

Displays the shift in the coordinate system due to a move command issued in the machine lock state.


4104 MCN LOCK SHIFT

⋅⋅

Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the X-axis in inputincrements.

Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Y-axis in inputincrements.

Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Z-axis in inputincrements.

B–62564E–1/0212. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

– 386 –

12.CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

The CRT screen saving function clears all data items on the CRT screen when the power is on and the CRThas not used within a certain period of time. This function is effective for extending the life of the screen.

12.1 Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press the SHIFT and cancel (CAN) keys simultaneously. To subse-quently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key.

12.2 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press any function key and the cancel (CAN) key simultaneously.To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key.

The following function keys can be used.

��

��

This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.

12.3 Screen Saver Function

When the operator does not operate the keyboard for a predetermined period, the screen being displayed isautomatically cleared and an animated screen (called a saver screen) is displayed instead.

When one of the following conditions occurs, the original screen is redisplayed.

– The operator presses a key (including a key from the PMC)

– A new alarm is issued

– A new operator message is output

– The operation mode changes

– The saver restoration signal goes high

Saver screen

��"� '�� &�%��"� &�)�%� �&� ��'�)�'�� '�� &�%��"��&�)�%� &�%��"�� &�#*"� #"� '�� '� �&� ��&$ �+��

�� (%%�"'-'�!�� "��'�#"� !#)�&� ��%#&&� '��&�%��"� �%#!� ��'� '#� %��'�� %��(� +� !#)�"�� #*"� '��&�%��"� �&� �'� �� '�&� '�� #%��"� � &�%��"�� #%��"� � &�%��"� �&� "#'� ($��'�� *�� '�� &�%��"�&�)�%� �&� ��'�)�'��

<< 11 : 20 : 33 >>

��

B–62564E–1/02 12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

– 387 –

– Notes

(1) When operator input causes the original screen to be redisplayed, the input is also reflected on thescreen.

(2) For screens other than the CNC screen, such as the PMC, conversational, or TC screen, the screensaver function is disabled.

(3) When a newly issued alarm is of the same type (PS, OT, or SV) as that of an alarm which was issuedpreviously, the original screen is not redisplayed.

Example While OT100 is being issued, if OT001 is issued, the original screen is not redisplayed. WhenSV001 is issued, the original screen is redisplayed.

(4) Even while an alarm is being displayed on the screen, if the operator does not operate the keyboardfor a predetermined period, the screen saver is automatically activated, and the saver screen is dis-played.

(5) While a graphic screen is being created (for example, with the graphic display function), the screensaver may not be activated.

(6) This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.

(7) This function is also enabled while the screen is displayed using a conversational macro.

(8) When the screen clear function is used, it takes priority over this function. (The saver screen is alscleared.)

– Parameter Description

0016 Screen saver start time

Setting entry

Data type : Byte

Data unit : MinuteData range : 0 to 127

When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the period specified in this parameter, the saver screenis displayed. When 0 is specified, the screen saver function is disabled.

B–62564E–1/0213. DATA OUTPUT

– 388 –

13.DATA OUTPUT

13.1 Tool Offsets

The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the sameas the offset data input (programmable data input : G10) format specified by the tape command.

INPU +IN MEAS PUNC INPUTA ALL

T PUT URE H NUMBER CLEAR

��/ ��

��

⋅�� -'#,

�-'�,#('�& '-� $ .

�(!,� $ .+ �) *�,#('�& '-� � $ .

�� !-'�,#('� + % �,#('� $ .+

�� () *�,#('� + % �,#('� $ .+

�� () *�,#('� "-#� � $ .+� ��

⋅�� -'#,

�� () *�,#('� + % �,#('� $ .+

�� () *�,#('� "-#��'� � $ .+

�� !-'�,#('� + % �,#('� $ .+

�-'�,#('�& '-� $ .

�(!,� $ .+ �) *�,#('�& '-� � $ .

��

1 Setting the data output interface

Set what interface is used as the dataoutput interface in the foregroundoutput device. (See Section 10.3.)

The reader/punch interface orASR33 interface can output data.

2 Setting the output code

Set whether to output data in the EIAor ISO code in the punch code. (SeeSection 10.3.)

3 Set the operation mode to the EDITmode.

4 Press the function menu key to en-able the soft keys to function as thefunction selection keys.

5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hardkey) several times.Display the screen of the tool offset.

6 Press the operation menu key to en-able the soft keys to function as theoperation selection keys.

7 Press the PUNCH key to enable thesoft keys to function as the operationguidance keys.

8 Press the TOOL key.

9 Output of the offset values is startedand the STOP soft key is displayed.

10 To cancel offset value output, pressthe STOP key. Once this key ispressed, however, output of the re-maining offset values cannot be re-started.

11 After the offset values have been out-put, the soft keys return to operatingas the operation selection keys. POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE

ON M CHECK G E E R

TOOL (FILE_ (FILE

NAME) #)

B–62564E–1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT

– 389 –

13.2 Parameters

The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same asthe parameter tape format.

��

�� t�

⋅�� $/)!.&*)� -#(#!.&*)� '#0-

�� *+#, .&*)� -#(#!.&*)� '#0-

�� *+#, .&*)� %/&"#� '#0-

⋅�� $/)!.&*)� -#(#!.&*)� '#0-

�� *+#, .&*)� -#(#!.&*)� '#0-

�� *+#, .&*)� %/&" )!#� '#0-

��

�� 1��

��1��

��

��1 ��


Set what interface is used as the dataoutput interface in the foregroundoutput device. (See Section 10.3.)

The reader/punch interface orASR33 interface can output data.


Set whether to output data in the EIAor ISO code in the punch code. (SeeSection 10.3.)

3 Set the operation mode to the EDITmode.

4 Press the function menu key to en-able the soft keys to function as thefunction selection keys.

5 Press the SERVICE key (soft or hardkey) several times.Display the screen of the parameter

6 Press the operation menu key to en-able the soft keys to function as theoperation selection keys.

7 Press the PUNCH key to enable thesoft keys to function as the operationguide keys.

8

⋅ To output parameters otherthan the pitch error com-pensationPress the PARM key.

⋅ To output only the pitch errorcompensationPress the PITCH key.

⋅ To output all the parameters ata timePress the ALL key.

9 Parameter output is started and theSTOP soft key is displayed.

10 To cancel parameter output, pressthe STOP key. Once this key ispressed, however, output of the re-maining parameters cannot be re-started.

11 After the parameters have been out-put, the soft keys return to operatingas the operation selection keys.

��

��

��

��


ON M CHECK G E E R

B–62564E–1/0213. DATA OUTPUT

– 390 –

13.3 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

The offset from the workpiece reference point set in the offset memory can be output to the output device. Theoutput data format is the same as the format of offset data input (programmable data input –G10–) specifiedby the tape command.


Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.)

The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data.


Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.)

3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode.

4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys.

5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times.

Display the screen of the work origin compensation.

6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys.

7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guide keys.

8 Press the WRK.ZER key.

9 The output of offset values is started and the STOP soft key is displayed.

10 To cancel output of the offset values, press the STOP key. Once this key is pressed, however, output ofthe remaining offset values cannot be restarted.

11 After the offset values have been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.

NOTE The offset from the workpiece reference point can be output only when the addition ofworkpiece coordinate set count (option) is available.

�� %0*"/'+*� .$)$"/'+*� ($1.

��

�� +,$-!/'+*� .$)$"/'+*� ($1.

��

�� +,$-!/'+*� &0'#!*"$� ($1.� ��

��

�� %0*"/'+*� .$)$"/'+*� ($1.

POSITION

PROGRAM

OFFSET PROGRAMCHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

MESSAGE

CHAPTER

�� +,$-!/'+*� .$)$"/'+*� ($1.

��

��

��2��

��

��

CHAPTER

�� +,$-!/'+*� &0'#!*"$� ($1.

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT

– 391 –

13.4 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number

Tool offset data corresponding to the specified tool number

can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the format of offset data input speci-fied by the tape command.

G10 L70 ;T�� P�� R�� K�� ; : : :G11 ;M2 ;


Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.)

The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data.


Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.)


4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys.

5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times. The screen which contains the tool offset datacorresponding to the specified tool number is displayed .

6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys.

7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guidance keys.

8 Press the TL.DATA key.

9 Output of tool offset data is started.

10 After the tool offset data has been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.

�� #.( -%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

��

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

��

�� )*"+�-%)(� $.%!�( "� &"/,� ��

��

�� #.( -%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

POSITION

PROGRAM

OFFSET PROGRAMCHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

MESSAGE

CHAPTER

�� )*"+�-%)(� ,"'" -%)(� &"/,

INPUT INSERT DELETE SERACH PUNCH MEASURE

�� )*"+�-%)(� $.%!�( "� &"/,

TOOLDATA

��

��

B–62564E–1/0214. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

– 392 –

14.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTEAND FANUC FA CARD

In this chapter, the FANUC Floppy cassette and FANUC FA Card are reffered to as the cassette and card, re-spectively.

14.1 What is a File

The unit of data, which is input/output between the cassette or card and the CNC by one input/output operation(pressing the [READ] or [PUNCH] key), is called a “file”. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting themto the cassette or card for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file.

Files are assigned file numbers 1,2,3,4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.

��

One file can also be written over two cassettes as follows:

��

Cassette 1 or Card 1

��

Cassette 2 or Card 2

Once written in the cassette or card, data can subsequently be read out by correspondence between the datacontents and file numbers. This correspondence cannot be verified, unless the data contents and file numbersare output to the CNC and displayed.

Therefore, when writing data in the cassette or card, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo col-umn.

Entry example on MEMO

File 1 NC parameters

File 2 Offset data

File 3 NC programO0100

. .

. .

File (n–1) NC programO0500

File n NC program O0600

B–62564E–1/0214. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC

14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

– 393 –

14.2 File Search–Out

To enable data input/output between a cassette or a card and the CNC, the data in the cassette or the card tobe input or output must be specified. This operation is called “file search–out.” File search–out is performedas follows:

Be sure to perform file search–out in conjunction with data input/output operation. File search–out alone cannotbe performed.

1 Select the mode in which the desired input/output operation is to be performed (see each item).

2 Press one of the soft keys to select the screen on which the desired input/output operation is to be per-formed (see each item).

3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft keys for input/output operation.

4 Press soft key [READ] or [PUNCH] to select the desired input/output operation.

5 Press soft key [(FILE#)] and enter a file number.

6 Perform the desired data input/output operation.

When the above operation is completed, the following file search–out is performed according to the filenumber entered in step 5 before data input/output:

File number Contents of file search–out

0 (zero) The beginning of the cassette is searched out.

1 to 9999 The file with the specified file number ( 1 to 9999 ) is searched out.

NOTE 1 Note that when file number N0 or N1 is specified, the results of file search–out depend onwhether the cassette or card contains any files.

File search–out

When the cassette contains or thecard a files

When the cassette or the card dosenot contain any files

N0 Cassette or card search–out (File 1 is searched out.)

The beginning of the cassette or thecard is searched out.

N1 File 1 is searched out. If an input/output operation isperformed , a P/S alarm occursbecause on file has benn written inthe cassette or the card.

When writing data in a new cassette or card for the first time, specify N0 to search out the cassette or thecard. Also specify N0 when writing data from the beginning of the cassette or the card after deleting allthe written data.

NOTE 2 Even if file search–out is not performed correctly (the file is not found, etc.), no alarm occursin the CNC. Whether P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs depends on what I/O channel isbeing used when data input/output is performed after file search–out.


– 394 –

Examples of data input/output performed after file search–out are given below. For details of data input/output, see Sections 14.3 and 14.4.

Example 1 When program number 1234 in NC memory is output as file 5 in the cassette or the card


2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen.

3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].

4 Press the soft key PUNCH.

5 Enter [(FILE#)], [5], [(PROG#)], [1], [2], [3], and [4] in that order.

6 Press the soft key [EXEC].

When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the file corresponding to number 5 is searched out and a programwith program number 1234 is output to the file as a new file. File number 5 follows N and program number1234 follows 0.

Example 2 When file 3 in the cassette is loaded into CNC memory



3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ].

4 Press the soft key [READ].

5 Enter [(FILE#)] and [3] in this order.

6 Press the soft key [ALL].

When the soft key [ALL] is pressed, the file corresponding to the file number following N is searched outand the CNC program in that file is loaded into CNC memory.



– 395 –

14.3 Data Output Operation

To output data from the CNC to the cassette or the card, use the following procedure:

Slide the write–protect top on the cassette or the card to RECORD (which means write–enable) before output-ting data.

If data is output with the cassette or the card in the write–disable status, P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs.Which P/S alarm occurs, however, depends on what input/output channel is being used.

14.3.1 CNC program output

The following operation enables an NC program to be output to the cassette or the card. To output the NC pro-gram to a specific file, however, perform file search–out in advance (see Section 14.2). Note that the files beforethe searched out file remain unchanged but that the subsequent files are deleted. When outputting the NCprogram is attempted without file search–out specified, the program is added to the end of the last file in thecassette or the card.



3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].

4 Press the soft key [PUNCH].

5 Specify file search–out when necessary.

6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key [EXEC] or [ALL]. When [EXEC] is pressed, oneNC program in the CNC memory is output. When [ALL] is pressed, all the NC programs in CNC memoryare output.

Example 1 When [A] is output

(a) When file search–out is not specified

��

��

� ��

(b) When file search–out is specified

��

��

� ��

��


– 396 –

CAUTION The cassette and card are provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the writeenable state. Then, start output operation.

� ��

��

� ��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

NOTE 1 If P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output to the cassetteor the card, the contents of the cassette or the card are restored to the pre–output status. IfP/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output after filesearch–out has been performed, however, only the files before the searched out file arerestored.

NOTE 2 When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searching, the new file is outputas the designated n–th position. In this case, 1 to n–1 files are effective, but the files after theold n–th one are deleted. If an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n–1 files are restored.

NOTE 3 Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the cassetteor card is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory.Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to the cassette or card, record thefile No. on the memo.



– 397 –

14.3.2 Offset data output

The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette or the card.

1) Select the EDIT mode.

2) Press the OFFSET soft or hard key to select the tool offset data display screen.

3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].

4) Press the soft key [PUNCH].

5) Specify file search–out when necessary.

6) Press the soft key [TOOL].

For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 14.3.1.

14.3.3 CNC parameter output

The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette or the card.

1) Select the EDIT mode.

2) Press the SERVICE soft or hard key to select the parameter display screen.

3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].

4) Press the soft key [PUNCH].

5) Specify file search–out when necessary.

6) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are output.When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are output.

For which file the CNC parameter is output to, refer to 14.3.1.


– 398 –

14.4 Data Input Operation

Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette or the card to the CNC.

14.4.1 CNC program input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be output from the cassette or the card to the CNC:





5 Specify file search–out for the file containing the program to be input. (For details of file search–out, seeSection 14.2.)

6 Press the soft key [ALL] (ordinary operation) or enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key[EXEC] (valid when the number of the program to be input is changed).

14.4.2 Offset data input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be input from the cassette or the card to the CNC:





5 Specify file search–out for the file containing the offset data to be input.

6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press [EXEC].

Since offset data in the file is first input as one CNC program as a result of this operation, be sure to specifythe program number. Otherwise, a warning is output.

7 When the input operation is completed, the input offset data is displayed on the screen in the format of datainput by the offset value program (G10).

G10L____P____R____ ;

8 Switch the EDIT mode to the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button to execute the program.When the program is executed, offset data is loaded into the CNC offset memory.

9 Select the offset data display screen and check whether the offset data is set correctly.

14.4.3 CNC parameter input

The following operation enables CNC parameters input from the cassette or the card to the CNC.

1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.

2) Press the corresponding soft key to select the service setting screen.

3) Set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 1. Alarm SW000 is displayed.

4) Operate the SERVICE soft or hard key to display the program screen.

5) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ].

6) Press the soft key [READ].

7) Specify file search–out.

8) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are input.When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are input.

9) As a result of step 8, CNC parameters are loaded into the memory for CNC parameters. Usually, alarmPW000 occurs after all the CNC parameters have been read.

10)Select the service setting screen and set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 0.

11) If alarm PW000 is issued, turn the CNC power off then on again.

12)Release the emergency stop button on the machine.



– 399 –

14.5 File Deletion

Data written in the cassette or the card can be deleted in units of files.



3 Release the program protect switch ( ).

4 Slide the write–protect key of the cassette to RECORD and insert the cassette or the card into the adapter.The red lamp goes on to indicate the adapter status.

5 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [DELETE FILE].

6 Press the soft key [DELETE FILE].

7 Enter [(FILE#)] [file number] and press [EXEC].

The specified file is deleted and the file numbers after the deleted file are moved up one.

CAUTION If steps 5 to 7 are executed without the write–protect key in the RECORD position in step4, no alarm occurs. Also note that the specified file is not deleted.

Example 1 When [(FILE#)] [2] is entered and [EXEC] is pressed (when file 2 is deleted)

��

��


– 400 –

14.6 Precautions

14.6.1 Request for cassette replacement

When one file has been entered over two cassettes red and green lamps on the adaptor flash alternately oncompletion of data input/output between the first cassette and the CNC, prompting cassette replacement. Inthis case, take the first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/out-put will continue automatically.

Cassette replacement is prompted when the second cassette is required during file search–out, data input/out-put between the CNC and the cassette, or file deletion.

NOTE 1 Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptor, no special operation is required. TheCNC will interrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserted into the adaptor.

NOTE 2 When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request for cassette replacement, theCNC is not reset at once, but reset after the cassette has been replaced.

14.6.2 Adaptor lamp conditions

The yellow and green lamps of the cassette or card adaptor indicate operating conditions.For details, refer to the Operator’s Manual of the FLOPPY CASSETTE or FANUC FA Card.

CAUTION All alarms occurred in the adapter are displayed as P/S alarm No.86. Find out the cause ofthe error using the statuses of the cassette or card and looking back each operation, thenrelease the alarm.



– 401 –

14.7 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card

Using a Floppy Cassette enables a name to be assigned to the file when the file is output.

File names are assigned according to the following rules:

(1) CNC program = Oxxxx

Oxxxx: Selected program number

(2) CNC parameter = PARAMETER

(3) Pitch error data = PITCH. ERROR

(4) Parameter and pitch error = PARAM. AND. PITCH

(5) Tool offset data = OFFSET

(6) All program (at PUNCH ALL operation) = ALL. PROGRAM


– 402 –

14.8 Expanded File Control Function

The expanded file control function enables a file directory display function designed for use with the FANUCFloppy Cassette adapter to input, output, delete, and search for a desired file simply by specifying its file name.

When the FANUC 2–drive Floppy Cassette adapter is used, the display of a directory, file input/output, and re-naming of a file can also be performed.

14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name

Searching for a file by specifying its file name

A file that has been stored to a cassette can be searched for by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:

Example Searching for file ABC

1. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen.

2. Press the [SRH_FIL] operation selection key.

3. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.(”SRH _FIL > ”” is displayed in the key–in field.)

4. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”SRH _FIL > ”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5. Press [EXEC].

Inputting a file by specifying its file name

A CNC program can be input from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:

Example Inputting a file named ABC


2. Select EDIT mode.

3. Press the [READ] operation selection key.

4. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.(”READ > ”” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”READ> ”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

6. Press [ALL] (for normal operation).

Alternatively, enter [(PROG#)], (program number), then [EXEC] (to change the program num-ber of the program to be input).

Outputting a file by specifying its file name

A CNC program can be output from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:

Example Outputting a program with its file name set to ABC


2. Select the EDIT mode.

3. Press the [PUNCH] operation selection key.

– When outputting one program stored in CNC memory

1. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.

2. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”PUNCH > ”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

3. Enter [(PROG#)], then (program number).(”PUNCH > ”ABC” Oxxxx” is displayed in the key–in field.)

xxxx: Selected program number

4. Press the [EXEC] soft key.

– When outputting all programs stored in CNC memory

4’. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.(”PUNCH > ”” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5’. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”PUNCH > ”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

6’. Press the [ALL] soft key.



– 403 –

Deleting a file by specifying its file name

A file stored on a cassette can be deleted by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:

Example Deleting a file named ABC



3. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key.

4. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.(”DELFILE > ”” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”DELFILE > ”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

6. Press [EXEC].

14.8.2 Two–drive floppy cassette control

To use the 2–drive Floppy Cassette adapter, set bit 2 (DRV) of parameter No. 7620 to 1.

Selecting a drive, displaying the directory, and inputting/outputting a file

Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select a drive. Pressing the soft key toggles the selection between drive 0 anddrive 1. The selected drive number is displayed at the top of the screen. After a drive has been selected, displayof the directory and file input/output can be performed as normal. Use the following procedure:


2. Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select the drive. Pressing this soft key toggles the selection between drive0 and drive 1.

3. For the selected drive, display of the directory and input/output of a file can be performed as normal.

Renaming a file by specifying its file number

A file can be renamed by specifying its file number. Use the following procedure:

Example Assigning file name ABC to a file having file No. 3



3. Press the [RENAME] operation selection key.

4. Press the [(FILE#)] soft key.

5. Key in 3 as the file number.

6. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.(”RENAME > N3”” is displayed in the key–in field.)

7. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.(”RENAME > N3”ABC” is displayed in the key–in field.)

8. Press [EXEC].

Volume transfer

A file stored on the currently selected drive can be transferred to the other drive by specifying the file numberor file name. This operation is called volume transfer. In volume transfer, all files or a single file can be trans-ferred. Use the following procedure:



3. Press the [VOLCOPY] operation selection key.

4. Press [ALL] (to transfer all files).(”VOLCPOY > ALL” is displayed in the key–in field.)

Alternatively, enter [(FILE#)], then (file number) (to transfer one file by specifying its file number).(”VOLCPOY > Nxxxx” is displayed in the key–in field.)

xxxx: Selected file number

Alternatively, enter [(F_NAM)], then (file name) (to transfer one file by specifying its file name).(”VOLCPOY > ”file–name” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5. Press [EXEC].


– 404 –

Deleting all files

All files in the selected drive can be deleted at one time. Use the following procedure:



3. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key.

4. Press the [ALL] soft key.(”DELFILE > ALL” is displayed in the key–in field.)

5. Press [EXEC].

14.8.3 Soft key operations

The following lists the soft key operations that can be performed from the floppy directory screen:

Operation 1st guide 2nd guide 3rd guide

SRH_FIL (FILE#) EXEC

(F_NAM)

READ (FILE#) (PROG#) * EXEC

(F_NAM) ALL

PUNCH (F_NAM) * (PROG#) * EXEC

ALL, THIS

DELFILE (FILE#) EXEC

(F_NAM)

ALL

RENAME (FILE#) (F_NAM) EXEC

VOLCOPY (FILE#) EXEC

(F_NAM)

ALL

NOTE 1 Those soft keys marked with * can be omitted.

NOTE 2 A dotted line separating soft keys indicates that one of those soft keys should be selected.

14.8.4 Notes

NOTE 1 Parameters can be input and output, using the parameter screen, as normal. Note, however,that the output file name is PARAMETER.

NOTE 2 Offset data can be input and output, using the offset screen, as normal. Note, however, thatthe output file name is OFFSET.

NOTE 3 Up to 17 alphanumeric characters can be entered as a file name. If more than 17 charactersare entered, only the first 17 are used as the file name. The first character of the file name mustnot be a space.

NOTE 4 Drive selection, renaming of a file, volume transfer, and deletion of all files can be performedonly when the 2–drive Floppy Cassette adapter is being used. If these operations areattempted while using the one–drive Floppy Cassette adapter, the ”ILLEGAL INTERFACE”warning message appears.

NOTE 5 If a file name, specified for search, input, or deletion, is not found on the cassette, alarm ”DROFF” is issued.

NOTE 6 If the name specified for an output file duplicates one that already exists, alarm ”DR OFF” isissued.

B–62564E–1/02 15. ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION

– 405 –

15.ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION

On an axis equipped with an absolute pulse coder, the machine position is monitored even when the CNC pow-er is turned off, so return to the reference position is unnecessary when the power is turned on again.

An absolute pulse coder consists of an ordinary incremental pulse coder equipped with an absolute counter.Based on the counter value, an absolute position can be detected.

The absolute pulse coder uses the backup battery so that the pulse coder monitors the machine position bythe counter if the CNC is turned off.

If an absolute pulse coder is installed on an axis, the current position on that axis is read from the absolutecounter when the CNC is turned on, and the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system areautomatically set based on the read value. Automatic operation can thus start immediately.

The requirements for reference position return after power–on operation, described in this manual, do not applyto axes equipped with an absolute pulse coder.

CAUTION If a servo motor is to be detached from a control axis, the absolute pulse coder cannot beused for that axis.

NOTE The time from the power–on operation until the servo ready signal (SA) is output variesdepending on the distance between the machine position detected at power–on and thereference position. If the distance is 1 m, the time required until the servo ready signal (SA)is output is extended by approximately 1 s.

15.1 Initial Setting at Power–On

(1) The machine coordinate system and a workpiece coordinate system are set automatically. The G54 coor-dinate system is selected as the workpiece coordinate system.

(2) The offsets from the workpiece reference point which are specified with G92 and G52 are cleared.

(3) Relative coordinates (RELATIVE) for indicating a position are set with the DSE bit, bit 1, of parameter No.2202.

(4) The other initial settings at power–on are the same as when the absolute position detection function is notprovided.

15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation

In the following cases, be sure to manually return to the reference position to associate the reference positionwith the counter value of the absolute pulse coder:

(a) First field adjustment (after the reference position is defined)

(b) When the reference position is changed

(c) When the absolute pulse coder is replaced.

(d) When alarm OT32 occurs

(e) When the CMOS memory is replaced

(f) When the CMOS memory is cleared

Manually return to the reference position as follows:

(1) Set APLC–ZRN, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, to 0.

(2) Turn the power off then on again. Alarm OT32 is then displayed.

(3) Return to the reference position manually. When tool reaches the reference position, parameter APLC–ZRN is automatically set to 1.

(4) Press the reset button. Alarm OT32 is then released.

B–62564E–1/0215. ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION

– 406 –

15.3 Alarm

When the power is turned on, one of the following alarms may occur:

(1) Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS SCDR)

⋅ The reference position is not associated with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder. That is, parameter APLC–ZRN is 0.

⋅ Before the CNC power is turned on, the battery voltage for the absolute pulse coder dropped to 0 V, and the counter value of the absolute pulse coder is lost.

⋅ An error was detected in the counter value of the absolute pulse coder.

If alarm OT32 occurs, it is necessary to manually return the tool to the reference position. See Section15.2.

(2) Alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR)

⋅ An error occurred while data was being read from the absolute pulse coder. (The absolute pulse codermay be faulty.)

⋅ If the machine moves a considerable amount when the power is turned on, the motor excess deviationalarm occurs.

If this alarm occurs, turn the power off then on again.

(3) Battery voltage alarm

The battery voltage alarm, BAT, is indicated on the CRT screen.

For how to replace the battery, see Part IV, ”Maintenance.”

CAUTION If BAT is indicated on the CRT screen, display the signal output status on the service screento check whether the alarm applies to the system or the absolute pulse coder.

To display the service screen, use the following procedure:

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys.

��

2 Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key. The service screen appears.

3 If the service screen being displayed does not show diagnostic data, perform the following:

– Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

��

– Press the [DIAGNOS] key.

Alternatively:

– Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key several times until diagnostic data is displayed.

4 If desired diagnostic data is still not displayed, perform the following:

Using the page keys

(4)–1 Press a page key to change pages.

(4)–2 Using soft keys

B–62564E–1/02 15. ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION

– 407 –

(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.

��

(ii) Press the [INP–NO.] key. Then, the operation guidance keys are displayed.

��

(iii) Enter the number of the target diagnostic data.

As the data number is entered, the following soft key display appears:

��

Display diagnostic data No. 240 using the above procedure. If the 7th bit (leftmost data) is 1, the batteryvoltage alarm applies to the system. If the 6th bit of diagnostic data No. 240 is 1, the battery voltage alarmapplies to the absolute pulse coder.

CAUTION The voltage level of the backup battery for the absolute pulse coder is normally 6 V. Overtime, however, the voltage level drops.

DO.PBATL : Battery alarmThis alarm occurs when the voltage drops to 4.5 V. If it occurs, BAT isindicated on the CRT/MDI.

DO.PBATZ : Battery zero alarmThis alarm occurs if the power to the NC unit is turned off when the voltageis approximately 1.5 V or less.In this case, alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) or OT34 BATTERYZERO (ABS PCDR) is indicated, and the absolute pulse coder storagecompletion bit, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is automatically set to 0. Whenthis alarm occurs, the battery alarm also occurs.

�

��

�

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/0215. ABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION

– 408 –

15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation

When the absolute pulse coder or servo motor is replaced, the zero point of the absolute pulse coder must beset by storing the counter value of the absolute pulse coder with the machine set at the reference position.

There are two methods to set the zero point of the absolute pulse coder. One method uses manual referenceposition return. The other method uses MDI operation for setting the zero point, which is done after the machineis moved to the reference position manually.

When the zero point of the absolute pulse coder is set through MDI operation, the dog which is used for decel-eration in manual reference position return and the switches for selecting the manual reference position returnmode are unnecessary. The MDI operation for setting the zero point of the absolute pulse coder, however, re-quires some means to confirm that the machine is at the reference position.

When the machine has been moved to the reference position by manual jog feed, manual handle feed, oranother operation, the zero point can be set by setting parameters through MDI.

Use the following procedure:

1 Set APLC–ZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 0.

Alarm message POWER–MUST BE OFF appears.

2 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.

Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) appears.

3 Move the machine to the reference position through manual jog feed, manual handle feed, manual incre-mental feed, or suchlike.

4 Set APLC–ZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.

Alarm message POWER–MUST BE OFF appears.

5 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.

The zero point is then set.

B–62564E–1/02 16. AXIS CONTROL

– 409 –

16.AXIS CONTROL

16.1 Axis Control by the PMC

Any axes can be isolated from control of the CNC and controlled directly by the PMC. The PMC can issue com-mands specifying a traveled distance, feedrate, and so forth to move the tool along these axes independentlyof the other axes operating under the CNC. Therefore, peripheral equipment such as a turret, pallet, or indextable can be controlled by using an axis of the CNC.

Whether to place each axis under control of the CNC or PMC can be selected with a relevant input signal.

The following operations can be controlled by the PMC directly:

(i) Rapid traverse with a traveled distance specified

(ii) Cutting feed with a traveled distance specified

⋅ Feedrate and override can also be specified.

⋅ Cutting feed can be started simultaneously with another PMC–controlled axis.

(iii) Reference position return

(iv) Positioning at the machine coordinates

(v) Dwell

PMC

BMI

CNC

::

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.

B–62564E–1/0216. AXIS CONTROL

– 410 –

16.2 Mirror Image Function

The mirror image function can be enabled or disabled for each axis by setting MIRx of parameter No. 12 or byusing an external signal.

When the function is enabled and a move command is specified for an axis in the positive direction, the machinemoves and the coordinates change in the direction shown in the table below.

Machine movement Machine coordinate Relative coordinate Absolute coordinate

Automaticoperation

Negative direction Negative direction Negative direction Positive direction

Manual operation

Positive direction Positive direction Positive direction Negative direction

CAUTION The machine coordinate and absolute coordinate are updated in different directions alongthe specified axis. The workpiece coordinate system shifts as the machine moves. Whenthe mirror image function is enabled for the X–axis, the coordinate system shifts as shownbelow.

After a desired machining has been finished, move the machine to the position where themirror image function was applied and disable the function. This cancels the shift of theworkpiece coordinate system to zero.

Alternatively, perform one of the following to set the shift of the workpiece coordinate systemto zero.

⋅ Manual reference position return

⋅ Presetting the workpiece coordinate system (by using the G92.1 command or by specifying the preset operation on the MDI)

��

�

�

��

��

��

�� n)

��

��

��

NOTE 1 The mirror image cannot be switched during axis movement. Always switch the mirror imageduring stopped state.

NOTE 2 For mirror image during manual operation, either on or off of mirror image that was valid bysetting operation or by external mirror image signal when the mode was switched to the manualoperation is effective. Switching of mirror image state either by setting operation or by externalmirror image signal is not effective in the manual operation.

II. MAINTENANCE

B–62564E–1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

– 413 –

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader

(a) Tape reader without reels

No. Part to be cleaned Reference drawing Interval Cleaning procedure

1 Surface of the read head(light–detection part) Fig. 1.1 (a) (1) Every day

Cl i h hi b h

2 Surface of the read head(light–emitting part) Fig. 1.1 (a) (2) Every day

Cl i h hi b h3 Tape retainer Fig. 1.1 (a) (3) Every day Clean with gauze or a thin brushmoistened with pure alcohol4 Tape path Fig. 1.1 (a) (4) Every day moistened with pure alcohol.

5 Capstan Fig. 1.1 (a) (5) Every week

6 Guide roller Fig. 1.1 (a) (6) Every week

7 Pinch roller Fig. 1.1 (a) (7) Every week

8 Machine assembly underthe tape path plate Fig. 1.1 (a) (8) Every month

Clean with a cloth or blush.9 Inside of the tape reader

cover Fig. 1.1 (b) (9) Every monthClean with a cloth or blush.

��

��

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(11)

A860–0060–V009

��

��

Fig. 1.1 (a) Front view of the tape reader without reels (with the cover removed)

(9)

Fig. 1.1 (b) Side view of the tape reader without reels

B–62564E–1/021. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

– 414 –

(b) Tape reader with reels

No. Part to be cleaned Reference drawing Interval Cleaning procedure

1 Surface of the read head(light–detection part) Fig. 1.1 (c) (1) Every day

Cl i h hi b h

2 Surface of the read head(light–emitting part) Fig. 1.1 (c) (2) Every day

Cl i h hi b h3 Tape retainer Fig. 1.1 (c) (3) Every day Clean with gauze or a thin brushmoistened with pure alcohol4 Tape path Fig. 1.1 (c) (4) Every day moistened with pure alcohol.

5 Capstan Fig. 1.1 (c) (5) Every week

6 Guide roller Fig. 1.1 (c) (6) Every week

7 Pinch roller Fig. 1.1 (c) (7) Every week

8 Machine assembly underthe tape path plate Fig. 1.1 (c) (8) Every month

Clean with a cloth or blush9 Inside of the tape reader

cover Fig. 1.1 (d) (9) Every monthClean with a cloth or blush.

(1) (2)(3) (4)(5)

(6)

(6)

(6)

(6)

(7) (8)

Fig. 1.1 (c) Front view of the tape reader with reels (with the cover removed)

(9)

Fig. 1.1 (d) Side view of the tape reader with reels


– 415 –

1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication

(a) Tape reader without reels

The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows:

No. Lubrication point Interval Lubricant (*1) Amount

1 Magnet section See Fig.1.1 (a) (7) . Every 3months

Luna oil 1 drop

��

��

Every year

Rocol paste Apply a thinfilm of paste.


– 416 –

(b) Tape reader with reels

The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows:

No. Lubrication point Interval Lubricant (*1) Amount

1 Magnet section See Fig.1.2 (e) � ��.

��

��

Every 3months

Every year

Luna oil

Rocol paste

1 drop

Apply a thinfilm of paste.

2 Guide roller section See Fig.1.2 (e) � ��.

��

Every 6months

Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops

3 Tension arm guide roller See Fig.1.2 (f)� ��.

��

Every 6months

Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops


– 417 –

(1)

2

(3)

(2)

(3)

Fig. 1.2 (e) Front view of the tape reader with reels

*1 Types of lubricants

No. Name Trade name Manufacturer

1 Rocol oilRocol oil Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd.

1 Rocol oilROCOL ASO ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K)

2 Rocol pasteRocol paste Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd.

2 Rocol pasteROCOL APS ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K)

3 Luna oil Luna oil Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.


– 418 –

1.3 Adjusting the Photo–Amplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels

1 Punch about 40 cm of test tape consisting of alternating patterns of punched and unpunched positions asshown below (*1 and *2), then splice both ends to make an endless tape.

*U*U*U*U ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ DELETE

CR

��

�

��

For adjustment, use the adjustment program included in the tape reader with reels.

2 Start the adjustment program.

a) Set RELEASE, then press theFORWARD and REWIND but-tons simultaneously.

b) The AUTO and ALARM LEDsblink.

c) The adjustment program modeis then entered.

d) Set the test tape(*3).

e) Set REEL OFF.

f) Press the FORWARD button.

g) The tape starts running.


– 419 –

3 Adjustment

a) The adjustment points are lo-cated at the right side, viewedfrom the rear of the tape readerwith reels. (If they are not at thelocation indicated in the figure,they are located in sectionA(*4).)

b) Turn SP until LD5 lights.

c) Turn DATA until LD1 blinks(*5).

If LD5 does not light, adjustmentis impossible.

4 End of adjustment

a) Press STOP.

b) Set RELEASE.

c) Press FORWARD and STOP atthe same time.

d) The normal mode then returns.

e) Before starting adjustment,make sure that the signal cablesare connected properly.

*1 The paper tape used must conform to the following:

Unpunched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6243Dimensions for punched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6246

*2 If the tape reader is adjusted with black paper tape, then it is used with paper tape other than black, a readerror may occur.

When adjusting the output waveform of the photo–amplifier, use blue, white, pink, yellow, or orange papertape. Do not use black or gray. If the tape reader is adjusted with black or gray paper tape then used withblue, white, or pink, etc. paper tape, a read error occurs. Do not use black or gray paper tape for adjustmentunless it is used in regular operation.

*3 If the version of the program in the tape reader is version B or later, EIA test tape can also be used.

*4 Loosen the four screws shown in the following figure to open the printed circuit board. The board swingsopen in the direction of the arrow with the lower side attached. After adjustment is completed, close theboard and tighten the screws.


– 420 –

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Be careful not touch the power supply unit whichproduces 5 V and 24 from 200 V VAC.

��

*5 If LD0 and LD3 blink when the DATA dial is turned, the following adjustment is needed:

��

��

��

��

1) Cause LD3 to blink.

2) Turn the DATA dial toward the center until LD1 starts blinking, then set DATA at that point.


– 421 –

1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the Self–Standing Cabinet Only)

If the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit is clogged by dust, the efficiency of dust collection drops,and the temperature inside the equipment may rise. Therefore the air filter needs to be cleaned. Clean thefilter every week as follows:

(1) Remove the filter retainer, then remove the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit.

(2) Blow dust away from the internal side of the filter while shaking the filter lightly.

(3) If the filter is still dirty, clean it with neutral cleanser, then dry it in the shade.

��

B–62564E–1/022. REPLACING A FUSE

– 422 –

2. REPLACING A FUSE

If a fuse in the CNC system blows, find the cause, take appropriate action, then replace the fuse.

2.1 Fuse Specifications

The specifications of the fuses used in the CNC system are as follows:

Table Units containing fuses and fuse specifications

Unit name Parts symbol Capacity Specifications Use

Power unitAI

F1,F2F3F4

7.5A3.2A5A

A60L–0001–0245#GP75A60L–0001–0075#3.2A60L–0001–0046#5.0

For 200 VAC input power supplyFor 9”CRT (monochrome)For I/O

Power unitBI

F1,F2F3F4

10A5A5A

A60L–0001–0245#GP100A60L–0001–0075#5.0A60L–0001–0046#5.0

For 200 VAC input power supplyFor 9”CRT (monochrome)For I/O

Connectionunit

F51 1.6A A60L–0001–0046#1.6 Protection from an external defectof machine side 24VDC line

2.2 Fuse Mounting Position

2.2.1 Power unit

��

��

��

��

�

2.2.2 Connection unit

��

��

B–62564E–1/02 3. REPLACING BATTERIES

– 423 –

3. REPLACING BATTERIES

3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit

(1) Obtain a lithium battery (A98L–0031–0007).

(2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (The battery can be replaced when the NC is either on or off. Notethat if the battery is replaced with the NC turned off, replacing the buttery must be completed within 30 min-utes. Otherwise the NC memory contents may be lost.

(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power unit. Hold the upper and lower sides of the case,and pull it out toward you.

��A98L–0031–0007

��

��

(4) Disconnect the connector from the battery.

(5) Replace the battery, then attach the connector to a new battery.

(6) Mount the battery case.

(7) Turn off the machine (NC).

B–62564E–1/023. REPLACING BATTERIES

– 424 –

3.2 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder

(1) Prepare four commercially available alkaline dry cells, size D.

(2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (Be sure to turn on the NC unit before replacing the batteries. Ifbatteries are replaced when the power is off, the stored absolute position is lost.)

(3) Loosen the screws of the battery case. For the location of the battery case, refer to the manual issued bythe machine tool builder.

(4) Replace the batteries in the case. Be careful to install the new batteries with correct polarity. (Insert twobatteries in one direction, and the other two in the opposite direction as shown below.)

ÉÉ

É

��

��

(5) After replacement, install the cover.

(6) Turn off the machine (NC).

B–62564E–1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING

– 425 –

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Symptom and Investigation

(1) Type of failure

Check the mode.

Check the display on the CRT/MDI.

Check the CNC status indication.

Check whether a positioning error occurred. If so, check on which axis the error occurred, and also checkthe magnitude of the error.

Check whether a tool path error occurred. If so, check the magnitude of the error.

Check whether the speed is normal.

Check whether a miscellaneous function failed.

Check the alarm number.

(2) Frequency of failure

Check when the failure occurred, and check the frequency of the failure. (Check whether the failure oc-curred while another machine was operating.)

Check the frequency of the failure with the same workpiece.

Find the program in which the failure occurred. Then, check the sequence number.

Check whether the failure occurred in a specific mode.

Check whether the failure is related to the operation of changing tools.

Check whether the failure is related to the feedrate.

(3) Repetition of failure

Run the program tape several times in which the failure occurred.

Check the values in the CNC, then compare them with the programmed values.

Check to see whether the failure is due to an external factor.

Check the stored offsets and the remaining distribution.

Check the response to override (while changing the amount of override).

Ask the operator to explain the symptoms of the failure.

B–62564E–1/024. TROUBLESHOOTING

– 426 –

4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming,Operation, Machine, and Interface

(1) Checking the input voltage

Check whether the input voltage fluctuates.

Check whether the input voltage drops.

Check whether the front or rear door is open (door interlock).

Check whether there is equipment in the factory using a large amount of current.

Check whether there is an electrical discharge machine or welding machine operating in the factory.

(2) Ambient conditions

Check the temperature.

Check for temperature changes. Check for a sudden temperature change.

Check whether the filter is cleaned.

Check whether the tape reader is dirty.

Check whether there is oil or coolant splashed about.

Check for vibration.

Check whether the unit is exposed to direct sunlight.

(3) External factors

Check whether the machine has been repaired or adjusted recently.

Check whether the power magnetics cabinet has been repaired or adjusted recently.

Check whether the CNC unit has been repaired or adjusted recently.

Check whether there is any source of noise nearby, such as a crane, high frequency sewing machine, orelectrical discharge machine.

Check whether a new machine has been installed nearby.

Check whether there is any other CNC unit experiencing the same failure within the factory.

Check whether the user has adjusted the inside of the CNC unit.

Check whether the same failure occurred before.

(4) Handling

Check whether the operator has been trained properly.

Check whether the operator has been replaced.

Check whether the operator is familiar with the program.

Check whether the program was completed too early or interrupted.

Check whether the program includes incremental commands.

Check whether the tool compensation is set correctly.

Check whether modification to the tool compensation is made correctly.

Check whether transition to another operation mode is made.

Check whether the optional block skip function is used properly.

Check whether the tape is set properly.

Check if the part program code contains any errors.

Check whether an erroneous operation was performed.


– 427 –

(5) Punched tape

Check whether the tape is dirty.

Check the tape for any folds or creases.

Check whether the splice is normal.

Check whether the program operated normally before.

Check whether the tape is a copy of the master tape.

Check whether the tape has been punched.

Check whether the tape is punched correctly.

Check whether the tape punch unit operates normally.

Check whether a wrong tape is being used.

Check whether the puncher operates properly.

(6) Programming

Check whether the used program is a new one.

Check whether the program was created according to the instructions explained in the operator’s manual.

Check whether the order of addresses is valid.

Check whether a failure occurs in a specific block.

Check whether an error occurs in a subprogram.

Check whether a listing of the tape is created for inspection.

(7) Operation

Check whether any change or adjustment was made in operation.

Check if any fuses have blown.

Check whether the emergency stop is still effective.

Check whether the machine is ready for operation.

Check whether an alarm has occurred.

Check whether the MODE switch is set correctly.

Check whether the tape reader switch is set correctly.

Check whether the override is set to 0.

Check whether a machine lock is applied.

Check whether the system is in the feed hold status.

(8) Machine

Check whether the machine is prepared properly.

Check whether the machine vibrates during operation.

Check whether the tool tip is normal.

Check the offset due to the change of tools.

Check whether the backlash compensation is appropriate.

Check whether changes in temperature result in any distortion in the machine parts.

Check whether the workpiece is measured correctly.

Check whether the measurement was made at a constant temperature. (For 1,C change in temperature,the length of a 1–m piece of steel changes by 10µ.)

Check whether the cables are in the normal state. (Check the radius of each curve in the cables, and alsocheck for any flaws, twists, and abnormally pressed cables.)

Check whether the signal lines are separated from the power lines.

(9) Interface

Check whether the power lines are installed separately from the CNC cables.

Check whether the shielding is normal.

Check whether parts such as relays, solenoids, and motors are provided with a noise suppressor.


– 428 –

4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System

(1) Checking the appearance of the control unit

Check if the cabinet is broken anywhere.

Check whether the CRT/MDI unit is normal.

Check whether the filter is clean.

Check whether the reader is clean.

Check whether the reader door is closed.

Check whether the unit was operated with the door left open.

Check that the chips accumulated on the cabinet do not fall into the cabinet when the door is opened.

(2) Tape reader

Check whether the tape reader is dirty.

Check whether the brake magnet works normally.

(3) Inside of the control unit

Check whether the control unit is dirty.

Check whether the fan motor operates normally.

Check whether the unit is damaged by corrosive gas.

(4) Power supply unit

Check whether the power supply unit is connected correctly.

Check the fuses.

Check the circuit breaker.

Check whether the voltage level is within the allowable range.

Check whether the shielding and cable duct are grounded correctly.

Check whether the wiring path is correct.

Check whether the terminals are tightened securely.

(5) Grounding

Check whether grounding is normal.

Check whether the shielding is grounded normally.

(6) Cables

Check whether the cable connectors are connected securely.

Check whether the internal cables are normal.

Check whether the external cables are normal.

Check the cables for flaws and twists.

(7) Printed circuit board

Check whether the printed circuit boards are installed securely.

Check whether the plug connectors are connected normally.

Check the mechanical conditions. (Check whether the printed circuit boards are distorted.)

Check the version number.

Check whether the printed circuit boards are connected to one another properly.

(8) CRT/MDI unit

Check whether the push buttons are normal.

Check whether the tape cable is normal.


– 429 –

4.4 CNC Status Indication

The internal status of the CNC can be displayed.

4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys.

��

2 Press the [SERVICE] key. Then, the service screen appears.

3 If the service screen displayed does not contain diagnostic data, perform the following:

– Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

��

Press the [DIAGNSIS] key.

Alternatively:

– Press the [SERVICE] key repeatedly until diagnostic data appears on the screen.

4 If the desired diagnostic data is not displayed on the screen:

Using the page keys

4–1 Change pages by using page keys.

4–2 Using soft keys

(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.

��

(ii) Press the [INP–NO]. key. Then, the soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys.

��

(iii) Enter the data number of the target diagnostic data. As the data number is entered, the soft keysare displayed as follows:

��

5 Press the [EXEC] key. Then the diagnostic data with the entered data number is displayed on the screen.The soft keys are returned to the operation selection keys.


– 430 –

4.4.2 Description of internal selection

(1) Indication of status in which no command is apparently executed

No. Bit Indication Internal status when 1 is indicated

1000

012345

6

7

INPOSITION CHECKFEED RATE OVERRIDEJOG FEED OVERRIDEINT/START LOCK ONSPEED ARRIVAL CHECKWAIT REVOLUTION

STOP POSITION CODER

FOREGROUND READING

Position check is in progress.The feedrate override is set to 0%.The jog feedrate override is set to 0%.Start lock/interlock is set on.The system waits for the speed arrival signal to go on.The system waits for the spindle 1–revolution signalduring threading.The system waits for the revolution of the position coder during feed per spindle revolution.A part program is being read in the foreground.

1001 0 BACKGROUND READING A part program is being read in background editing.

(2) Indication of the reset status

The status of the input signals related to the reset and feed hold operations is indicated.

No. Bit

1010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RST ERS RRW ESP

When 1 is indicated

ESP : Emergency stopRRW : The reset & rewind signal is on.ERS : The external reset signal is on.RST : The reset key is pressed.

A bit set to 1 means that the associated error explained above occurred.

(3) TH alarm status indication

The TH alarm status is indicated.

No. Indication Meaning

1100

1101

1100

1101

POSITION (CHARACTER)

BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) F

POSITION (CHARACTER) B

BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) B

If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character thatcaused this alarm is indicated as the number of characters counted from the top of the block. (Foreground TH alarm)The read code of the character that caused a TH alarmis indicated with a bit pattern. (Foreground TH alarm)If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character thatcaused this alarm is indicated as the number of characters counted from the top of the block. (Background TH alarm)The read code of the character that caused a TH alarmis indicated with a bit pattern. (Background TH alarm)

(4) Indication of positional deviation

The positional deviation on each axis is indicated.

No. Indication Meaning

3000

X SERVO ERRORY SERVO ERRORZ SERVO ERROR

::

Positional deviation on the X–axis in detection unitsPositional deviation on the Y–axis in detection unitsPositional deviation on the Z–axis in detection units


– 431 –

(5) Indication of servo control information

Servo control information is indicated.

3010 to 3023 Servo control information for the 1st axis3030 to 3043 Servo control information for the 2nd axis3050 to 3063 Servo control information for the 3rd axis3070 to 3083 Servo control information for the 4th axis3090 to 3103 Servo control information for the 5th axis3110 to 3123 Servo control information for the 6th axis3130 to 3143 Servo control information for the 7th axis3150 to 3163 Servo control information for the 8th axis3170 to 3183 Servo control information for the 9th axis3190 to 3203 Servo control information for the 10th axis3210 to 3223 Servo control information for the 11th axis3230 to 3243 Servo control information for the 12th axis3250 to 3263 Servo control information for the 13th axis3270 to 3283 Servo control information for the 14th axis3290 to 3303 Servo control information for the 15th axis

– Investigation of disconnection alarm and overload alarm

If an overload alarm (SV 023) or disconnection alarm (SV 015) message appears on the CRT, checkthe diagnostic data (No. 3014 (1st axis), No. 3034 (2nd axis), No. 3054 (3rd axis), or the starting diag-nostic number for the target axis plus 4). Then, confirm whether the display indicates the disconnec-tion alarm or overload alarm.

� ��

��

Overload alarm : #7 = 1

Disconnection alarm : #1 = 1

Then check the diagnostic data (No. 3015 (1st axis), No. 3035 (2nd axis), No. 3055 (3rd axis), or the start-ing diagnostic number for the target axis plus 5). Confirm the meaning of the alarm.

From bits 7 and 4 at each address, the alarm can be determined in detail. See the following table:

� ��

� � ��

Alarm type 7bitALDF

4bitEXPC

Overheated motor 1 0

Overheated amplifier 0 0

Disconnection in the internal pulse coder (hardware) 1 0

Disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware) 1 1

Pulse coder disconnection (software) 0 0

Example If the SV 015 disconnection alarm occurs on the first axis, diagnostic data Nos. 3014 and3015 contain the following:

No. 3014 : 00000010No. 3015 : 10110100

As shown above, bit 1 (FBAL) of diagnostic data No. 3014 is set to 1.

At the same time, bit 7 (ALDF) and bit 4 (EXPC) of diagnostic data No. 3015 are both set to1. Thus, the alarm indicates disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware).


– 432 –

Digital servo alarms

� ��

��

Symbol Description

OFAL LSI OVERFLOWAn overflow alarm has occurred in the digital servo.

FBAL PULCO DISCONNECTIONA pulse coder disconnection alarm has occurred.

DCAL EXCESS I FORM MOTORA regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier.(The DC LED on the servo amplifier is on.)

HVAL EXCESS V TO MOTORAn overvoltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HV LEDon the servo amplifier is on.)

HCAL ABNORMAL CURRENT IN SERVOAn abnormal current alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HCLED on the servo amplifier is on.)

OVC EXCESS CURRENT IN SERVOAn overcurrent (overload) alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier.

LV POWER V TOO LOWAn insufficient voltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The LVLED on the servo amplifier is on.)

OVL SV OVERLOADAn overload alarm has occurred in the servo motor or servo amplifier. Ifthe alarm is activated from the servo amplifier, either the servo amplifier,separate discharge unit, or power transformer has overheated. (The OHLED on the servo amplifier is on.)


– 433 –

⋅ Investigation of absolute–position detection alarm

When optional absolute position detection is performed, an alarm may be detected at power–on. Inthis case, SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) or OT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated. Thecause of the alarm is indicated in the diagnostic data. If alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) orOT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated on the CRT, the diagnostic data (No. 3018 (1st axis), No.3038 (2nd axis), No. 3058 (3rd axis), or the starting number of the target axis plus 8) contains detailedinformation.

� ��

��

Symbol Meaning (action)

APNZRN The reference position is not associated with absolute position detection.(Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position

detection.)

APPLSM A pulse error alarm has been raised.(Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position

detection.)

APBATZ The battery voltage of the AB pulse coder is zero.(Action : Replace the battery, then associate the reference position with

absolute position detection.)

APCER A communication error occurred during data transmission.(Action : Replace the pulse coder.)

APTER A time–out occurred during data transmission.(Action : Replace the pulse coder.)

APFER A framing occurred during data transmission.(Action : Replace the pulse coder.)

APPER A parity error occurred during data transmission.(Action : Replace the pulse coder.)

APMVAL A motor excess deviation alarm has occurred.This alarm is raised when the machine movement at power–on is detected as exceeding 24000 pulses.(Action : Make sure that the machine does not move when the power is

turned on.)

B–62564E–1/025. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

– 434 –

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

As a knowledge base, the know–how of experts who are familiar with troubleshooting and corrective actionsagainst various possible machine failures can be stored in memory of the Series 15. Using the knowledgebase, the inference engine included in the Series 15 traces the cause of a failure in the machine according tothe same process used by experts.

The operator only needs to perform simple conversational operations with the CRT/MDI unit, such as selectinga symptom, and answering questions as needed. Then, the Series 15 diagnoses the failure in the same wayas an expert.

The failure diagnosis expert system varies according to the contents of the knowledge base. Refer to themanual provided by the machine tool builder for detailed operations.

An example of operation is shown below.

1 Suppose that automatic operation cannot be started. Press the MESSAGE soft key several times to selectthe diagnosis screen.

� ��

��

� ��

� � �

In the example at the left, four diagnosis items are provided.

Select an item to be diagnosed. To diagnose an automatic operation failure, for example, select item 1.

2

��

� ��

� ��

Then, detailed diagnosis items for automatic operation are displayed. When item 1 is selected, the failure isdiagnosed based on the knowledge base.

B–62564E–1/02 5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

– 435 –

3 Generally, the states of input/output signals are checked automatically. Only items that require the opera-tor’s confirmation appear as shown below:

��%"�� #�#

�� $ � #�� $� �� $%"�� "� �� '� #&�$�� $�� $�"$� �� $�� (�� !�"�$ "�#� !��

�� $� $%"�#� ��

� �$� � �#� � $� $%"�#� ��

�4 When the inference about the cause of the failure has been made, the cause and action to be taken are

displayed.

��%"�� #�#

%$ ��$�� !�"�$� �� #� � $� #$�"$�� %�� $ � !��(�� $�� #!��#�� %�"��

�� $� #&�$�� &�� #� $�� #!��#�� %�"�

�#� !�� #�� '� �� (��"�� $�

�

APPENDIX

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,

WHEN RESET

– 439 –

APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

�: The status is not changed or the movement is continued.

× : The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.

Item When turning power on When reset

ata

Offset value � �

Set

ting

dat

Data set by the MDIsetting operation � �

Se

parameter � �

Programs in memory � �

Contents in thebuffer storage

× ×

Display of sequencenumber

× �( Note 1 )

ta

One shot G code × ×

Oth

er d

ata

Modal G code

Initial G codes ( For G20and G21, the one effectivebefore cutting off the pow-er remains effective. )

Initial G codes.G20/G21 and G22/G23,not change.

F, E Zero Zero

S, T, M × �

L × ×

Work coordinate value Zero �

Movement × ×

Dwell × ×

xecu

tion

Issurance of M, Sand T codes

× ×

n du

ring

exe

Tool offset ×Depends on system pa-rameter LVK( Data NO. 6000 )

pera

tion

Tool nose radiuscompensation

× ×

Op

Storing calledsubprogram number

× ×( Note 2 )

Rewind × ×

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,

WHEN RESET

– 440 –

Item When resetWhen turning power on

ALM Extinguishes if there is nocause for the alarm

Extinguishes if there is nocause for the alarm

NOT READY × ×( lights in emergency stop )

LSK Lights Lights

BUF Extinguishes ExtinguishesE

Ds

REFERENCE POINTRETURN COMPLE-TION LED

× �

for

LE S and T codes × �

nals

fo

M code × �

utpu

t sig

n

M, S and T strobesignals

× ×

Out

Spindle speed signal( S12 bits/S agano-gue signal )

� �

NC ready signal( MA, MB )

ON �

Servo ready signal ON ( When other than servo alarm )

ON ( When other than servo alarm )

CYCLES START LED × ×

FEED HOLD LED × ×

NOTE 1 When a program is returned to its head, the start program number is displayed.

NOTE 2 When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to the headof the main program by the rewind operation. Execution cannot be started from the middle ofthe subprogram.

B–62564E–1/02 APPENDIX B. RS–232–C AND RS–422 INTERFACES

– 441 –

APPENDIX B. RS–232–C AND RS–422 INTERFACES

1. GENERAL

The following two interfaces are used for data input/output between the Series 15 and input/output units.

(i) RS–232–C interface

(ii) RS–422 interface

Table Name and specification of Interfaces

RS–232–C RS–422

Interface Serial voltageinterface( Start–stop system )

Balanced transmission,serial interface( Start–stop system )

Baud rate 50 to 19200 baud 50 to 86400 baud

Tape punch Possible Possible

Tape reading Possible Possible

Cable length( Max. )

100m ( When 4800 baudor less )

50m ( When 9600 baudor less )( depending on I/Oequipment )

Approx. 800m ( When4800 baud or less )( depending on I/Oequipment )

Remarks RS–232–C is not nameof I/O equipment.It’s EIA standard.

RS–422 is not nameof I/O equipment.It’s EIA standard.

Specifying reader/punch interface A, which is a Series 15 option, enables the following two channels to beused:

(a) Connector JD5A on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)

RS–232–C

(b) Connector JD5B on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)

RS–232–C

This interface, however, cannot be used if a tape reader incorporated into an NC cabinet is used.

Specifying reader/punch interface B and serial port A or B also enables the following two channels to beused:

(c) Connector JD6D on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)

RS–422

(d) Connector JD5J on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)

RS–232–C

For the parameters related to the RS–232–C and RS–422 interfaces, see Appendix 7.4.15.

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX B. RS–232–C AND RS–422 INTERFACES

– 442 –

2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT

(1) Main CPU board

………

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


– 443 –

(2) Sub board

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

………

………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


– 444 –

(3) Pin assignment

JD6D … RS – 422

JD5AJD5BJD5J

… RS – 232 – C

1 RD 11 SD

2 *RD 12 *SD

3 RT 13 TT

4 *RT 14 *TT

5 CS 15 RS

6 *CS 16 *RS

7 DM 17 TR

8 0V 18 *TR

9 *DM 19 ( + 24V )

10 ( + 24V ) 20

1 RD 11 SD

2 0V 12 0V

3 DR 13 ER

4 0V 14 0V

5 CS 15 RS

6 0V 16 0V

7 CD 17

8 0V 18

9 19 + 24V

10 + 24V 20


– 445 –

3. RS–232–C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 Names of RS–232–C Interface Signals

The RS–232–C interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 3.1 (a).

� �

�� !��

�� "��

�� "��

�� #�� !��

�� "� !� !��

�� !��

�� "��!� ��$�

�� !�� !� ��$�

�� !��!�

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

�� !� " �� !� ��

�� !� " �� !��

�� "�� !�� !� ��

�"!�"!

��"!

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Fig. 3.1 (a) RS–232–C Interface


– 446 –

3.2 Signal Description of RS–232–C Interface

Signal nameRS–232–C

circuit numberI/O Description

SD 103 Output Send Data

� � � � � ��

� ��

RD 104 Input Receive Data��

�� H�I � ��

RS 105 Input Request to Send Sending request:This signal is set to on when NC starts sending dataand is turned off when transmission ends.

CS 106 Input Clear to Send When this signal and the DR signal are on, the NCunit can send data. For this reason, if the input/out-put unit cannot keep up with processing due topunch–out, etc., this signal is turned off to stop datatransmission from the NC unit. Data transmissionstops after two characters, including the data cur-rently being sent, have been sent. When not usingthis signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal ofthe NC.

DR 107 Input Data Set Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/output unit is ready for operation. This signal usual-ly connects to the signal (ER signal of the input/out-put unit) indicating that the power of the input/outputunit is on (see Note below). The NC unit sends datawhen this signal is on. If this signal is turned off dur-ing data transmission, alarm SR820 DR OFF,SR830 DR OFF, or SR840 DR OFF occurs. Whennot using this signal, be sure to connect it to the ERsignal of the NC.

ER 108.2 Output Equipment Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the NC unit isready for operation. Also, when this signal is on, theinput/output unit must regard the SD signal as sig-nificant information.

CD 109 Input Carrier Detect Be sure to connect this signal to the ER signal ofthe NC in the connecting cable because this signalis not used to connect the input/output unit.

SG 102 Signal grounding

FG 101 Frame grounding

NOTE Signal on/off state is defined as follow.

–3 V or lower +3 V or higher

Function OFF ON

Signal condition Marking Spacing


– 447 –

3.3 RS–232–C Interface Transmission Methods

(a) Start–stop transmission

Usually, synchronous and start–stop transmission are provided for serial interfaces. The Series 15/150uses start–stop transmission.

Start–stop transmission: In this transmission, each transmitted character consists of eight bits precededby a start bit and followed by two stop bits.

��

��

��

(b) Codes

(i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4

(ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4

Input/output units must be able to identify the following control codes output from the NC unit:

Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DC 1 Tape reader start � � �

DC 2 Tape punch designation � � �

DC 3 Tape reader stop � � � � �

DC 4 Tape punch release � � �

NOTE The above control codes are always used irrespective of EIA and ISO.

The RS–232–C interface uses control codes DC1 to DC4.

(a) The NC unit can send control codes DC1 to DC4 to control input/output units.

(b) When an input/output unit cannot keep up with processing (when the NC sends data)

(i) The CS signal of the NC can be used to temporarily stop data transmission from the NC. Data trans-mission is stopped within two characters, including the data currently being sent, after the off CS signalhas been input to the NC. When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission is restarted.

(ii) The NC unit stops data transmission within ten characters after the input/output unit has sent controlcode DC3 to the NC. When the input/output unit sends control code DC1, the NC restarts data trans-mission. If the input/output unit is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, it must satisfy the specificationslisted in Table 3.3 (a).


– 448 –

Table 3.3 (a) Tape code

ISO code EIA codeMeaning

Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Meaning

0 � � � 0 � � Numeral 0

1 � � � � � 1 � � ” 1

2 � � � � � 2 � � ” 2

3 � � � � � 3 � � � � ” 3

4 � � � � � 4 � � ” 4

5 � � � � � 5 � � � � ” 5

6 � � � � � 6 � � � � ” 6

7 � � � � � � � 7 � � � � ” 7

8 � � � � � 8 � � ” 8

9 � � � � � 9 � � � � ” 9

A � � � a � � � � Address A

B � � � b � � � � ” B

C � � � � � c � � � � � � ” C

D � � � d � � � � ” D

E � � � � � e � � � � � � ? ” E

F � � � � � f � � � � � � ” F

G � � � � � g � � � � � � ” G

H � � � h � � � � ” H

I � � � � � i � � � � � � ” I

J � � � � � j � � � � ” J

K � � � � � k � � � � ” K

L � � � � � l � � � � ” L

M � � � � � m � � � � ” M

N � � � � � n � � � � ” N

O � � � � � � � o � � � �

Not used at significant data zone inISO code.Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.

P � � � p � � � � � � Address P

Q � � � � � q � � � � ” Q

R � � � � � r � � � � ” R

S � � � � � s � � � � ” S

T � � � � � t � � � � ” T

U � � � � � u � � � � ” U

V � � � � � v � � � � ” V

W � � � � � � � w � � � � ” W

X � � � � � x � � � � � � ” X

Y � � � � � y � � � � ” Y

Z � � � � � z � � � � ” Z

DEL � � � � � � � � � Del � � � � � � � � * Delete( cancel erroneous hole )

NUL � Blank � *No holes. Not used at significant datazone is EIA code.

BS � � � BS � � � � * Back space

HT � � � Tab � � � � � � * Tabulator

LF or NL � � � CR or EOB � � End of block

CR � � � � � * Carriage return

SP � � � SP � � * Space

% � � � � � ER � � � � Absolute rewind stop

( � � � ( 2–4–5 ) � � � � Control out( start of comment )

) � � � � � ( 2–4–7 ) � � � � Control in( end of comment )

+ � � � � � + � � � � * Plus sign

– � � � � � – � � Minus sign

: � � � � �Assumed as program number inISO code.

/ � � � � � � � / � � � � Optional block skip

. � � � � � . � � � � � � Decimal point

# � � � � � Sharp

$ � � � * Dollar symbol

& � � � � � & � � � � * Ampersand

’ � � � � � * Apostrophe

* � � � � � * Asterisk

, � � � � � , � � � � � � * Comma

; � � � � � � � * Semicolon

< � � � � � * Left angle bracket

= � � � � � � � * Equal mark

> � � � � � � � * Right angle bracket

? � � � � � � � * Question mark

@ � � � * Commerical at mark

” � � � * Quotation mark


– 449 –

CAUTION When the input/output unit is equipped with the ISO/EIA converter, pay special attention tothe following items listed in Table 3.3 (a):

Condition 1 :To represent left parenthesis “(” of the ISO code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and5 of the EIA code are punched out. To represent right parenthesis “)” of the ISOcode in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and 7 of the EIA code are punched out.

Condition 2: Character O of the EIA code corresponds to colon “:” of the ISO code.

Condition 3: of the EIA code corresponds to of the ISO code.

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

� �

� �

�

�

��

��

� ��

NOTE Control codes DC1 to DC4 are the transmission codes output from NC. These codes need notbe punched out on an NC tape.

(iii) Transmission rate (baud rate)

The transmission rate (baud rate) indicates how many bits are transmitted per second.

In the Series 15, the following baud rates can be selected:

50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2800, and 9600

Example When the baud rate is 110

When one character consists of one start bit, eight data bits, and two stop bits (11 bits in total), the num-ber of characters transmitted per second is calculated from the

following formula:

Number of characters/second = 11011

characters/second (max.)

(iv) Cable length

The cable length depends on each input/output unit. For the actual cable length, consult with themanufactures of the input/output units.

When cable A (A66L–0001–0041) is used, the NC assumes the following cable length according tothe baud rate and interface to be used:

RS–232–C 4800 bauds or less: 100 m or less

9600 bauds: 50 m or less

RS–422 4800 bauds or less: 800 m or less


– 450 –

Timing chart when the NC receives data (loading data into memory)

(1) The NC unit sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit.

(2) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit starts sending data to the NC.

(3) When the NC cannot keep up with processing, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.

(4) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission to the NC.

Data transmission stops within 10 characters after control code DC3 has been sent. (If more than ten char-acters are sent, alarm SR82, SR83, or SR84 occurs.)

(5) The NC sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit after processing has terminated.

(6) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit restarts data transmission to NC. (Data transmission, however,must be restarted beginning with data immediately following the previously sent data.)

(7) When data read is completed, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.

(8) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission.

��

��

��

��

� � ��

��

��

� � ��

��ÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

��

��

��

ÏÏÏÏ

Timing chart when the NC sends data (punch out)

(1) The NC unit sends control code DC2 to the input/output unit.

(2) The NC sends punched out information to the input/output unit.

(3) When the input/output unit cannot keep up with data processing

(a) When the CS signal of the NC is turned off, the NC stops data transmission within two characters, in-cluding the data currently being sent.

When the CS signal is turned on again, the NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. A).

(b) The input/output unit sends control code DC3 to the NC. NC stops data transmission within ten char-acters after DC3 has been sent. The input/output unit sends control code DC1 to the NC. When itreceives DC1, NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. B.)

(4) If the CS signal of the NC is turned on when the input/output unit side terminates data processing, the NCrestarts data transmission beginning with the data immediately following the previously sent data.

(5) The NC sends control code DC4 to the input/output unit when data transmission is completed.


– 451 –

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ


��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

Fig. A

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ


��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

ÏÏ Ï� �

��

Fig. B


– 452 –

3.4 Connection between RS–232–C Interface and I/O Device

�

��

��

��

��ÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ ��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��ÎÎÎÎ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Î

Î

ÎÎÎÎ

Î

ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎ

Î

ÎÎÎÎ

Î

Î

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ


– 453 –

In the cable connecting the input/output unit and RS–232–C interface, the SG signal and each signal must bepaired as shown in the figure below.

�

�

��

�

��

��

�

�� # �� !��

�

�

�

��

��

�

��

�� ×� �� "� ��

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


– 454 –

4. RS–422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 Names of RS–422 Interface Signals

The RS–422 interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 4.1 (a).

��

&(

��

� ��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

� ��ÎÎ

��%�� *�

��",�� *�

��'+�)*� *&� )�%�

�#��(� *&� )�%�

��",�(� (��.

��*�� $&��

��($"%�#� �� &(� �� (��.

�" %�#� (&+%�

��+("*.� (&+%�

�!&(*� -"*!� �� "�� ")� %&*� +)��

�!&(*� -"*!� ��

"�� ")� %&*� +)��

�!&(*� -"*!� ��

"�� ")� %&*� +)��

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ


ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ


Fig. 4.1(a) RS–422 interface


– 455 –

4.2 Explanation of RS–422 Interface Signals

NameRS–422

circuit No.Input/output

Description

SD 103 Output Send Data

� � � � � ��

�%�#%� ��% �%!"� ��%

RD 104 Input Receive Data��

�� !�� H�I � �$� %#� $��%%��

RS 105 Output Request to Send This signal is turned on when data transmissionfrom the NC starts. It is turned off when data trans-mission terminates.

CS 106 Input Clear to Send When both this signal and the DM signal are on, theNC can send data. For this reason, if the input/out-put unit cannot keep up with processing due topunch–out, etc., this signal is turned off to stop datatransmission from NC. Data transmission stopsafter two characters, including the data currentlybeing sent, have been sent. When not using thissignal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal.

DM(DR)

107 Input Data Mode When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-put unit is ready for operation. This signal is usuallyconnected to the signal (TR signal of the input/out-put unit) indicating that the power of the input/outputunit is on (see Note below). The NC sends datawhen this signal is on. If this signal is turned off dur-ing data transmission, alarm SR870 DR OFF oc-curs. When not using this signal, be sure to con-nect it to the TR signal of the NC.

TR(ER)

108.2 Output Terminal Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that NC is readyfor operation. Also, when this signal is on, the input/output unit must regard the SD signal as significantinformation.

RR 109 Input Receiver Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-put unit can send data to NC. When not using thissignal, be sure to connect it to the TR signal of theNC.

TT 113 Output Transmission tim-ing

This signal is not used.

SG 102 Signal ground

FG 101 Security ground

NOTE Signal ON and OFF are as follows:

A < B A > B

Function OFF ON

Signal condition Marking Spacing

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎ

�#�&�#

��&�#

�

�

�

�


– 456 –

4.3 RS–422 Interface Transmission Methods

See Section 3.3 “RS–232–C Interface Transmission Methods.”

4.4 Connection between RS–422–C Interface and Input/Output Unit

��

��

� � �

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

� � �

��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



Î

ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



– 457 –

��

�*'�%"� � ��(�� &��

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

FG

Cabling to I/O devices is done as follows, and pair each signals.

�� *'�%"� � ��(��

�� $��%&� ×� ��!!�� )�'�� '#'� � &��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

– 458 –

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

Message Meaning

PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACROVARIABLE CAN’T REWRITE (MDI EXECUTING)

Because MDI operation is being performed, neither parameters, settingdata, nor macro variables can be rewritten.

PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACROVARIABLE CAN’T REWRITE (RESETTING)

Because reset operation is being performed, neither parameters, settingdata, nor macro variables can be rewritten.

PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACROVARIABLE CAN’T REWRITE (MODE CHANGING)

Because mode switching is being performed, neither parameters, settingdata, nor macro variables can be rewritten.

KEY IN DATA Enter data with keys.

FORMAT ERROR The format is illegal.

WRITE PROTECT (MEMORY PROTECTION KEY IN EFECT)

Input is disabled because the memory protection key (workpiece coordi-nates, offset values, and programs) is on.

WRITE PROTECT (DATA NUMBER8000#0/PWE IS 0)

Parameter input is disabled because PWE (bit 0) of parameter No. 8000(enable/disable parameter write) is set to 0.

CHANGE TO MDI MODE An attempt was made to input parameters in mode other than the MDImode. Place the system in the MDI mode.

DATA IS OUT OF RANGE An attempt was made to input a value, but the value exceeded the allowablerange.

TOO MANY DIGITS An attempt was made to input a value, but it was longer than the maximumallowable number of digits.

START REJECT The start of automatic operation is not accepted.(1)Automatic operation pause signal *SP is low.(2)An alarm exists.(3)The SRN signal has been sent.(4)The program the operator wants to execute is now being edited in the

background.(5)PTR is not ready in the tape mode.

LOCKED PARAMETER An attempt was made to enter data for a parameter, but input for that param-eter was not allowed.

DATA NOT FOUND Data is missing.

DEVICE IS ALREADY IN USE The external input/output device channels are being used, so a device can-not be used unless the operation is terminated. To release this state, resetthe system.

NO PROGRAM SELECTED Although no program was selected, an attempt was made to perform editing.Before editing, select a program by searching for its program number or reg-istering the program.

ORIGIN IMPOSSIBLE (IN RESET ORFEED HOLD)

ORIGIN operation is disabled because the system is in the reset or feedhold state.

EDIT REJECT (IN RESET OR FEEDHOLD)

Editing is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed hold state.Release the reset or feed hold state.

EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN OPERATING)

Editing of a program is disabled because that program is currently running.

ALREADY EXISTS An attempt was made to register a new program with an existing programnumber.

NO MORE PROGRAM CAN’T BE ENTERED

Because the program memory area is full, no more programs can be regis-tered.

NOT EMERGENCY STOP An attempt was made to register parameters in a state other than the emer-gency stop state. Place the system in the emergency stop state.

THE NUMBER OF PROGRAMS IS OUTOF RANGE

Because the number of registered programs has reached the maximumallowable number, no more programs can be registered.

B–62564E–1/02 APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

– 459 –

Message Meaning

GUARDED WORD An attempt was made to edit a word that cannot be edited. For example,this message appears when an attempt is made to alter or delete a programnumber.

NO PROGRAM NUMBER An attempt was made to write a program to tape, but no program numberwas found at the beginning of the program.

COMMAND ILLEGAL USE The command cannot be used in the current CNC status. (This messageappears when HERE is specified at the beginning in program verification orwhen a program restart is specified during program restart operation.)

BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN OPERATING)

Although a program was running in the background, an attempt was madeto edit that program.

BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (SAMEPROGRAM ON THE FOREGROUND)

An attempt was made to edit a program in the background, but the programwas being used in the foreground. (The program, however, can be edited inthe background when the program is being reset and rewound in the fore-ground.)

INVISIBLE PROGRAM The cursor was used to select a program, or an attempt was made to edit aprogram, but the program could not be displayed (when a parameter is setto suppress the display of that program during operation or when the pro-gram is encrypted).

NO OPTION No option is given to a specified command.

GRAPHIC AXIS NUMBER NOT SET The parameter for selecting the graphic display axis (parameter No. 7703) isnot set.

FAIL TO OCCUPY GRAPHIC CPU Another user (such as the PC) tried to use the graphic CPU.

EXTERNAL WORKPIECE ZERO NOTINPUT

Workpiece zero point manual setting was performed on the external work-piece zero point offset.

+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored strokelimit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction. Backing out thetool in the negative direction automatically clears this warning message.

–OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored strokelimit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction. Backing out thetool in the positive direction automatically clears this warning message.

CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER ISEMPTY)

An attempt was made to use the repeat search function when neither theforward nor backward search function had been executed.Before using the repeat search function, execute either the forward or back-ward function.

CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT)

The previous forward or backward search operation was invalid for the NCmode screen on which you attempted to use the repeat search function. Retry the forward or backward search function by starting from scratch.

ALREADY EXISTS On the signal selection screen, an attempt was made to newly register apreviously registered address.

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

– 460 –

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONSClassifica-

tion FunctionData

protectionkey

PWE = 1DATA

No. 8000

Modeselection

Functionkey

Clear Tool offset Value KEY 1 Power ON OFFSETOperation menu key → ALL–CLR →

ALL WEAR GEOMETRY, , or

D I

One Program Input(program numbernot changed)

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → READ →

1–PRGRM → NEW

Data Input

One Program Input(program numberchanged or added)

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → READ

(PROG #)

EXEC

→ → Program number →

Data InputFrom Tape

Add Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → READ →

1–PRGRM → ADD

Registration of allprograms KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key → READ ALL→

Pitch Error Com-pensation amount �

EmergencySW. ON. SERVICE →PITCH READ

D I

Parameter �MDI orEmergencyswitch ON.

SERVICEPARAM INP–No.

ON: 1

OFF: 0

INPUT

+INPUT

EXEC

→ →

→Data No. →

Data InputFrom MDI

Offset Value KEY 1 OFFSET

Operation menu key →INPUT

+INPUT

EXEC

(Absolute input)(Incremental input)

→ Offset value →

Setting Data KEY 2 MDI SETTING

Operation menu key →HANDY

GENERAL

1: ON

0: OFF EXEC

(VALUE)

(Setting relating to I/O)(Settable parameter)

→ Data →

→

O

Parameter, Pitcherror compensationdata

EDIT SERVICE

Operation menu key → PUNCH

ALL

PARAM

PITCH

→

OutputOffset Value EDIT OFFSET


ALL

TOOL

WRK.ZER

→

All Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → PUNCH

ALL

→

One Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM


THIS (PROG #)

EXEC

→PUNCHor → →

Program number →

S h

Program No.Search (Programsin memory)

KEY 3EDIT orMEMORY PRGRM

Operation menu key → FW–SRCH

(PROG #)

EXEC

→→ Program number →

SearchSequence No.Search (SequenceNo. in memory)

KEY 3EDIT orMEMORY PRGRM

Operation menu key → FW–SRCH

(SEQ #)

EXEC

→→ Sequence number →

Sequence No.Search (SequenceNos. on tape)

TAPE PRGRMOperation menu key → FW–SRCH

(SEQ #)

EXEC

→→ Sequence number →

B–62564E–1/02 APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

– 461 –

Classifica-tion Function

Dataprotection

key

PWE = 1DATA

No. 8000

Modeselection

Functionkey

Search

Word Search(Words in memory) KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

CHAPTER TEXT

FW–SRCH BW–SRCH

(WORD)

EXEC

→ → Operation

menu key → or→ Word to be searched →

Search

Address Search (Addresses inmemory)

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

CHAPTER TEXT

FW–SRCH BW–SRCH

(WORD)

EXEC

→ → Operation

menu key → or→ Address to be searched →

P

Deletion of all Programs KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

PROGRAM

DELETE

ALL EXEC

Operation menu key → →→ →

P

Deletionof a Pro-

Current-ly dis-playedprogram

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

PROGRAM

DELETE

THIS

Operation menu key →→

→

P

of a Pro-gram Disig-

natedprogram

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

PROGRAM

DELETE

(PROG #)

Operation menu key →→

→→ Program

number → EXEC

P

Deletion of words,from cursor posi-tioned to desig-nated word

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → DELETE →

A(WORD) → Word�→ EXEC

P

Deletion of wordsfrom cursor positionto EOB

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → DELETE →

AEOB

ProgramEditing

Deletion of oneword KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

Operation menu key → DLT�WRD

or DELETE WORD→

Alternation of aword KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

Operation menu key → →ALTER

(WORD)

EXEC

→ Word to be changed →

Insertion of a word KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → →INSERT

(WORD)

EXEC

→ Word to be inserted →

All ProgramMemory Arrange-ment

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → CONDENS

ALL

→

Currently SelectedProgram MemoryArrangement


THIS

→

Designated Pro-gram Memory Ar-rangement


(PROG #)

→→ Program number�→

EXEC

C i

Comparison all Pro-grams in Memorywith those on tape

EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → VERIFY

ALL

→

ComparisonComparison oneProgram in Memorywith that on tape

EDIT PRGRMOperation menu key → VERIFY

1–PRGRM

→

Comparison fromCurrent Position EDIT PRGRM

Operation menu key → VERIFY

HERE

→

B–62564E–1/02APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH

KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15)

– 462 –

APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY ANDSYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15)

Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key (Series 15)

Name English key Symbolic key Name English key Symbolic key

RESET key CANCEL key CAN

POSITION key POS DELETE key DELETE

PROGRAM key PROG

ALTER/CALCULATIONkey

ALTER

CALC

OFFSET key OFFSET MMC key MMC

P–CHECK key P–CHECK PMC/CNC key PMC

CNC

SETTING key SETTINGINPUT/INSERTkey

INPUT

INSERT

SERVICE key SERVICE SHIFT key SHIFT

MESSAGE key MESSAGE PAGE UP keyPAGE

OTHERS key OTHERSPAGE DOWNkey

PAGE

EOB/HELP key EOB

HELP

i–1

INDEX

AABSOLUTE–POSITION DETECTION, 405

ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS, 152

Adaptor lamp conditions, 400

Adjusting the Photo–Amplifier of the Tape Readerwith Reels, 418

Alarm, 406

Alarm history, 376

Alarm Message Display, 326

All Axes Machine Lock, 136

Arithmetic key (SHIFT or ALTER key), 39

AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 93

Automatically inserting sequence numbers, 177

Auxiliary Function Lock, 136

AXIS CONTROL, 409

Axis Control by the PMC, 409

BBackground Editing, 166

Background Graphic Display, 345

Block restart, 108

CChanging language of the display, 38

Changing soft keys, 31

Changing the contents of the key input buffer, 29

Changing tool length compensation in the longitudi-nal direction of the tool, 86

Changing words and addresses (CHANGE), 175

Chapter selection keys, 34

Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions,Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, andInterface, 426

Class B measurement of the tool length, 231

Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Work-piece Reference Position, 231

Class B measurement of the workpiece referencepoint, 237

Cleaning the Air Filter (For the Self–Standing Cabi-net Only), 421

Cleaning the Tape Reader, 413

Clearing all tool offset values, 212

Clearing execution data, 245

Clock, 343

CNC parameter input, 398

CNC parameter output, 397

CNC program input, 398

CNC program output, 395

CNC Status Indication, 429

Collating Programs, 164

Connection between RS–232–C Interface and I/ODevice, 452

Connection between RS–422–C Interface and In-put/Output Unit, 456

Connection unit, 422

Contents to be displayed and operations when theMMC is installed, 29

Coordinate System Related Data Display Function,383

Copying and moving a program, 169

CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEYAND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15), 462

CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION, 386

Current Position Display, 322

Current–position screens, 322

Custom Macro Variables, 218

DData displayed on the subscreen, 276

Data Input Operation, 398

DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUCFLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD,392

DATA OUTPUT, 388

Data Output Operation, 395

Data Protection Key, 227

Deleting Part Programs, 156

Description of internal selection, 430

Details of Grouping M codes, 300

Details of Screens, 280

Directory of Floppy Disk Files, 338

DISPLAY, 314

Display, 144

Display and setting, 210

Display format of tool life data, 246

Display of Run Times and Parts Counts, 342

Displaying and modifying a tool group, 245

Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed, 338

Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip, 88

Displaying the number of pulses for manual interruptand the traveled distance, 89

Displaying tool life data while executing a machiningprogram, 245

Drawing a tool path, 335

Drawing position after the start of drawing, 352

Drawing procedure, 351

Dry Run, 137

i–2

EEditing a displayed waveform, 359

Editing Part Programs, 157

Editing part programs, 159

Effect of Manual Intervention, 74

Emergency Stop, 148

Erasing a displayed waveform, 359

Example of the procedure for using the tuningscreen, 293

Executing Automatic Operation, 98

Execution program and program directory, 314

Expanded File Control Function, 402

Expanded tool life management, 248

Explanation of RS–422 Interface Signals, 455

Extended Part Program Editing, 168

FFAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE, 434

FANUC PPR, 58

Feed hold, 99

Figure to be drawn, 352

File Deletion, 399

File Head Searching, 393

File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card, 401

Format Guidance, 182

Format guidance with figure, 186

Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens, 272

Function selection keys, 33

Fuse Mounting Position, 422

Fuse Specifications, 422

GGENERAL, 441

Graphic Display, 327

Graphic enlargement, 353

Graphic shift, 353

Group–by–group program directory display andpunch–out, 317

HHandle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool,

75

Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool,79

Help Function, 362

Help Message, 285

Help window states, 366

How to display the CNC internal status, 429

IIncremental Feed, 64

Initial Setting at Power–On, 405

Initial values at the start of drawing, 353

INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PINASSIGNMENT, 442

Internal Position Compensation Data Display Func-tion, 378

Interruption, 91

INTRODUCTION, 3

KKey input and input buffer, 29

LLength of Part Program Storage, 167

LIST OF OPERATIONS, 460

Load Meter Display, 340

MM Code Group Check Function, 300

M Code Group Function, 295

M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart, 296

Machine Lock on Each Axis, 136

Machine Operator’s Panel, 42

Manual Absolute ON and OFF, 70

Manual Continuous Feed, 62

Manual Feed in a Specified Direction, 67

Manual Handle Feed, 65

Manual handle interrupt, 129

Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation, 129

Manual interruption and the coordinate system, 92

Manual Interruption Function for Three–DimensionalCoordinate Conversion, 91

Manual Numeric Command, 68

MANUAL OPERATION, 60

Manual Reference Position Return, 60

Manual Reference Position Return at MachineInstallation, 405

MDI keyboard, 25

MDI operation, 94

Measuring the Tool Length, 228

Menu Switch, 243

Merging programs (MERGE), 173

Mirror Image Function, 410

Modes, 140

Moving the cursor to the position to be edited, 157

MULTI–EDIT FUNCTION, 161

NNames of RS–232–C Interface Signals, 445

i–3

Names of RS–422 Interface Signals, 454

NC format guidance, 182

New tool selection signal, 247

Note, 145

Note for handling tape reader, 57

Notes, 284, 404

Notes on three–dimensional handle feed, 87

Number of Programs that can be Registered, 167

OOffset data input, 398

Offset data output, 397

Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point, 213,390

Offset Values, 210

Operation, 140, 362

Operation and Display Transition, 161

Operation guidance keys, 37

Operation History, 367

Operation history, 367

Operation in the MEMORY mode, 93

Operation in the tape mode, 93

Operation method, 304

Operation Mode, 93

Operation selection keys, 36

OPERATIONAL DEVICES, 19

Operations, 270

Operator Message Display, 325

Optional stop (M01), 99

Outline of operations, 33

Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool,391

Override Playback, 133

Overtravel, 148

Overview, 345

PPanels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386

Parameters, 223, 389

Part Program Output, 165

Pitch Error Compensation Data, 225

Playback, 180

Portable tape reader, 55

POWER ON/OFF, 59

Power unit, 422

Pre–Travel Stroke Limit Check Function, 149

Precautions, 400

Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs,153

Presetting a tool life counter, 245

Presetting the current position display, 323

Presetting the workpiece coordinate system, 324

Procedure for setting graphic parameters, 350

Program check screens, 315

Program Display, 314

Program Encryption, 187

Program end (M02, M30), 99

Program re–start, 102

Program restart function and output of M, S, T, andB, codes, 106

Program stop (M00), 99

RRead/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common

Variables, 220

Registering a part program from the tape, 154

Registering Part Programs, 154

Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel, 155

Remarks, 163

Repeat search, 158

REPLACING A FUSE, 422

REPLACING BATTERIES, 423

Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Cod-er, 424

Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory inthe Control Unit, 423

Request for cassette replacement, 400

Reset, 100

Resetting a tool change signal, 247

Restarting Automatic Operation, 101

Restrictions, 377

Retrace, 126

RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION, 139

Rewinding a program, 97

Rotational handle feed around the center of the tooltip, 83

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE, 413

RS–232–C AND RS–422 INTERFACES, 441

RS–232–C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 445

RS–232–C Interface Transmission Methods, 447

RS–422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 454

RS–422 Interface Transmission Methods, 456

RS232C Parameter Setting Screen, 280

SSAFETY FUNCTIONS, 148

Screen configuration, 286

Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently BeingExecuted or Which Have Already Been Executed,295

Screen for Specifying High–Speed and High–Preci-sion Machining, 286

i–4

Screen Saver Function, 386

Screen Selection, 303

Screens, 354

Searching for a program by name, 96

Searching for a program number or sequence num-ber, 95

Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting afile by specifying its file name, 402

Selecting a Program to be Executed, 95

Selecting RS232C Screen, 280

Selecting signals, 374

Selecting the graphic screen, 328

Selecting the tool data screen, 256

Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screensand Spindle Monitor Screen, 263

Servo screens, 263

Setting and Display Unit, 19

SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA, 210

Setting by specifying accelerations, 293

Setting of graphic parameters, 346

Setting screen, 288

Setting the Floating Reference Position, 262

Setting the graphic parameters, 328

Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coderthrough MDI Operation, 408

Setting tool data, 257

Settings, 216

Signal Description of RS–232–C Interface, 446

Simple Conversational Programming, 196

Simultaneous automatic and manual operation, 131

Single Block, 137

Single–block stop according to the comparison be-tween sequence numbers, 100

Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386

Soft key display, 30

Soft key operations, 404

Software Operator’s Panel, 252

Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length com-pensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool,86

Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling,356

Spindle screens, 265

Start coordinates and position, 352

Starting Automatic Operation, 98

Starting or terminating data sampling, 358

Status Display, 320

STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,WHEN RESET, 439

Stopping Automatic Operation, 99

Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation,151

STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (IN-CLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION), 153

Subscreen operations, 273, 278

Subscreen states, 272

Symptom and Investigation, 425

TTape Reader, 44

Tape Reader Lubrication, 415

Tape reader with reels, 46

Tape reader without reels, 44

TEST OPERATION, 136

Three–Dimensional Handle Feed, 75

Time Stamp Function, 191

Tool change signal, 247

Tool Life Management Data, 245

Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers, 256

Tool Offsets, 388

Tool retraction and recovery, 115

Tool skip signal, 247

Transverse Inhibit Limit Function, 311

TROUBLESHOOTING, 425

Tuning screen, 289

Two–drive floppy cassette control, 403

VVisually Checking the CNC System, 428

WWarning message, 30

WARNING MESSAGE LIST, 458

Waveform data input/output, 359

Waveform Diagnosis Function, 354

Waveform display, 358

What is a File, 392

When the soft keys are insufficient, 30

Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function, 303

Workpiece zero point measurement B, 309

Rev

isio

n R

ecor

d

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

15/1

50-M

OD

EL

B F

or M

achi

ning

Cen

ter

OP

ER

ATIO

N O

PE

RAT

OR

’S M

AN

UA

L (B

–625

64E

–1)

02D

ec.,

1996

�A

dditi

on o

f new

func

tions

�C

orre

ctio

n of

err

ors

01A

ug.,

1994

Rev

isio

nD

ate

Con

tent

sR

evis

ion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

· No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

Date post:	28-Mar-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	phunghuong
View:	224 times
Download:	1 times

GE Fanuc Automationstar-circuit.com/article/pdf/F15_OPERATION_Manual.pdf · GE Fanuc Automation ......

Documents